Home
Korg PA50 User's Manual
Contents
1. 072 Lim Phaser L Attack 1 100 2 Sets the attack time ts Fx 003 This effect combines a mono type limiter and a phaser You emm LA can change the order of the effect connection Sets the release time 6 Fx 003 L Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out c Sets the limiter output gain t Fx 003 Left o Routing Wet D Tap1 Time msec 0 680msec Limiter Sets the Tap1 delay time imiter Lf Tap1 Level 0 100 T Limiter Phaser oral Sets the Tap1 output level us Fx 045 i Gain Adjust i Output Mode Resonance Wet Invert D Tap2 Time msec 0 680msec Phaser Wet Dry Sets the Tap2 delay time Right i o e Envelope Control GEO Tr Sine Wet Dry Feedback Tap2 100 100 Sets the Tap2 feedback amount D Mt Delay Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet i Sets the multitap delay effect balance L Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 i i i i y High Damp 0 100 v a Sets tha signal compression ratio ees Sets the damping amount in the high range V Fx 043 Threshold dB 40 0dB i A Routing LMT DLY DLY LMT E Sets ts levela HUNG whieh Mie compressoris applica pens
2. modes Major Major 6th 3 note 2 note 4 note 2 note rug png Pe gp gu n i elm e mie ejmje m e m e loo e Major 7th 4 note 3 note 2 note einje ej ole le elm Sus 4 Sus 2 3 note 2 note 3 note eim e e el jo olo Dominant 7th 4 note 3 note 2 note eme je m ejmje m eim Im Dominant 7th Sus 4 Dominant 7th 5 4 note 3 note 4 note NTE ngu jr lm jeje eim lol e m e m Major 7th 5 Major 7th Sus 4 4 note 4 note IE 30 ein e ejm OO constituent notes of the chord T can be used as tension 234 Recognized chords
3. Main page Menu Edit pages EXIT NO C Edit environment See diagram at the bottom of this page When you press GLOBAL or SD CARD an edit envi ronment overlaps the current operating mode Press EXIT to go back to the current operating mode An edit environment is made up of a menu and a series of edit pages Use the MENU and PAGE buttons to browse across the various edit pages Selecting windows When you press one of the STYLE or PROGRAM PERFORMANCE buttons you open a selecting window This window closes after selecting one of the items in it or after pressing EXIT If the DISPLAY HOLD LED is light up the window doesn t close after selecting an item Press EXIT to close the window and go back to the underlying page MESSAGE WINDOWS Sometimes a message appears in the display warning about an error or a wrong operation Hot a Stare MIDI File Press ENTER or EXIT to exit one of these windows Other messages ask for an answer as in the Are you sure window below Aree cux supe EHTER UE EXIT Cancel Press ENTER YES for Yes or EXIT NO for No Edit environment Calend ig LES EE T Card Hernu Format Hew Dir Rename Ubilities Menu Display and User Interface 2 Message windows SYMBOLS AND
4. chord Cempa measure transposes jc jaye BEB LH jeu oooo ceu Track i Hode Es a Fols Fols 8 Fola Fola Fols Pols fal Pola Fols Cempa measure transpose Je pge Be C BR ICU oooo Track Mode eae Fols Hore Right fia Crum Polo ag Drum Pols i Fols Fols R8 Parameters Drum This is a Drum Percussion track No Master or Octave Transpose applies to this track Poly Tracks of this kind are polyphonic i e they can play more than one note at the same time Mono Tracks of this kind are monophonic i e each new note stops the previous note Mono Right A Mono track but with priority assigned to the rightmost highest note PAGE 8 TRACK INTERNAL EXTERNAL This page lets you set the Internal or External status for each track It is very useful to let a Song track drive an external expander Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 Chord Ctemps 3 cpd gj maseurs 888 oooo Gremsposs xao Track Inbe Ext 1 Internal Internal B Internal Internal s Internal External 8 Internal Internal tempo meseurs iremsposs Gm aye E88 xao Tracks Inbe Est Irternal Irternal Irternal Irternal Irterral Internal External Internal e eJ
5. Gras noes CES can B5B fo Cink aoe SR em sea 2 OoOOooo RECORD MENU PAGE GR VOLUME VALUE VOLUME VALUE A DRUM PERC DRUM F Al UPPER1 ACC2 Lark Ga Ge BASS PERC UPPER2 ACC3 B Daitant ea C ACC BASS ZirepeEnZ UPPER3 ACC4 ACC Hic Pi LOWER ACCS D MUTE int O O F 3 TRK SELECT SHIFT s SINGLE TOUCH SETTING O Style accompaniment backing tracks Realtime Keyboard tracks DISPLAY CONTROLS In the Card Edit environment the F1 F4 buttons can be used VOLUME VALUE A H buttons and display parame ters These buttons are used to select the corresponding parameter or command in the display to change the parame ter s value or to change the volume of the corresponding track While you are in the main page these buttons can select a track change the track s volume or mute unmute a track See VOLUME VALUE MUTE A H buttons on page 16 for more information F1 F4 buttons When in an Edit page these buttons may be used when there are four parameters in a row as in the fol lowing example Cehord Campa meeaura Gr BHgmr ES amapas BH ag C MixeriFAX Send First select the line using a VOLUME VALUE A H button Then select a column using the F1 F4 function key also t
6. 4 Press START STOP to listen to the selected Chord Varia tion If you like play some chords on the keyboard to test the pattern Press START STOP to stop it 5 Press PAGE to go to the Event Filter page and turn Off the filters for the event types you wish to see in the 10 11 display see Page 5 Event Filter on page 64 for more information Camps M Cink Gad EL esa D Bes Editi Ev Filter HE Hohe OFF measure transpose Press PAGE to go back to the Event Edit page Press the A VOLUME VALUE button Trk to select the track to edit The Go To Track window appears Go to Track DHH Exit Zercel Eriter Ok Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a track and press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort The list of events contained in the selected track in the Style Element and Chord Variation selected on step 2 will appear in the display The first step or Measure Start is currently shown Since it contains an initializa tion event it is not editable and appears in grey i e written with a n ond e E Ciel Press one of the H VOLUME VALUE buttons Scroll Down arrow to go to the next step This is usually a note that you can edit oherd_ tempo massurs ramepces Dj Den Me mo Bugs 88 BUS
7. tecaletEsal Met Lol 118 Kea SPkrsiDh Vel Curve Velocity Curve gt GBL This parameter sets the sensitivity of the keyboard to your touch 1 No dynamic control available Dynamic values are fixed as in a classic organ 209 Curves from the lightest one to the hardest one M Tune Master Tune gt GBL This is the master tuning of the instrument Use it to adapt your keyboard tuning to an acoustic instrument for example an acoustic piano 50 Lowest pitch 00 Standard pitch A4 440Hz 50 Highest pitch Scale gt GBL This parameter sets the main scale or temperament for the whole instrument apart for tracks where a different scale is selected by a Performance or STS see Scale on page 44 See Scales on page 227 for a list of available scales Note You cannot select a User scale in Global mode Key gt GBL This parameter is needed by some scales to set the preferred key see Scale on page 44 Speakers This parameter turns the internal speakers on or off Note Speakers are always turned on again each time you turn the instrument on Met Vol Metronome Volume gt GBL Volume of the metronome 40 127 Relative volume from minimum to maximum 126 Global edit environment Page 2 Master Transpose PAGE 2 MASTER TRANSPOSE This page is where you can turn the Master Transpose on or off chord Cmpa mea
8. Minor Minor 6th 3 note 2 note 4 note m m l m m e o Minor 7th Minor Major 7th 4 note 3 note 4 note 3 note e m m e 1 e m it 1 I Diminished Diminished Major 7th 3 note 4 note lo LI I e m m lo Minor 7th 5 4 note e m E k Augmented Augmented 7th Augmented Major 7th 3 note 4 note 4 note eimie el ie ejmje No 3rd No 3rd no 5th 2 note 1 note e d constituent notes of the chord T can be used as tension 1 235 Error messages amp Troubleshooting Error messages 23 ERROR MESSAGES amp TROUBLESHOOTING ERROR MESSAGES Your Pa50SD can communicate with you using various mes sages Here is the list of these messages Messages can be of two different types Waiting for your confirmation Yes No Press ENTER YES to go on EXIT NO to stop Revealing an error or failure Press any button on the front panel General Another Command Is Running Press Exit You can t execute a command until the one that is running is completed Are you sure Enter Exit This is a confirmation request before many operations Press ENTER YES to confirm EXIT NO to abort Generic error Some undefined error has happened Record Aborted There is not enough memory to enter the Style Record Song Record or Backing Sequencer Record
9. Here is the edit procedure 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F1 F4 buttons to select a Program parameter or its value For the Drum and Percussion tracks see below the Drum tracks section 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the Pro gram parameter or its value Parameters gt PERF gt STYLE STS Attack Attack time This is the time during which the sound goes from zero at the moment when you strike a key to it s maximum level Decay Decay time Time to go from the final Attack level to the beginning of the Release Release Release time This is the time during which the sound goes from the sustaining or Decay phase to zero The Release is triggered by releasing a key Cutoff Filter cutoff This sets the sound brightness Resonance Use the Filter Resonance to define the width of the frequency range affected by the Filter Vibrato Rate Speed of the Vibrato Vibrato Depth Intensity of the Vibrato Vibrato Delay Delay time before the Vibrato begins after the sound starts Drum tracks When a track is set in Drum Mode like the Drum and Per cussion tracks you can adjust the volume for each of the Drum and Percussion categories Kick V Kick drums volume Snare V Snare drums volume Tom V Toms volume HiHat V Hi Hat volume CymbalV Ride Crash and other cymbals volume 46 Style Play operating mode Page 14 Track Mod
10. Freq parameter uses a random LFO cycle Stereo Exciter Enhancer Random Filter LFO A n HEO Frequency _ This effect is a combination of the Exciter which adds a BC punch to the sound and the Enhancer which adds spread and ae d oi presence LFO Step Freq X f Er i LFO Step Freq Step Tri Random Stereo In Stereo Out Leite fum b LFO Phase degree i Glee Offsetting the left and right phases alters how modula ea Tm 1 betsy gt _ tion is applied to the left and right channels creating a nae Dei P swelling affect REP Exciter f p Enhancer z LFO Phase i Right o i o 0 degree H Wet Dry Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Ww Dose Src Off tempo a Selects the modulation source of the Exciter intensity Amt 100 100 e BPM f Step Base Note f Times Sets the modulation amount of the Exciter intensity The width of an LFO step or a cycle of random LFO is Emphatic Point 0 70 obtained by multiplying the length of a note Sets the frequency to be emphasized Duc selected for Step Base Note in relation to the tempo b m er ios n Qir Tempo a ou n 7 s ti t t i specified in BPM or the MIDI Clock tempo if BPM is Selects ee eee ee be emphasize ME T n Amt 70 70 set to MIDI by the number specified in the Times Sets the amount of modulation of the frequency to be emphasized parameter T E
11. 062 P4Eq TapDly 063 Cmp AutoWah Parametric 4 Band EQ Multitap Delay Compressor Wah Auto Wah This effect combines a mono type four band parametric This effect combines a mono type compressor and a wah equalizer and a multitap delay You can change the order of the connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out S Wet Dry Routing Wet Dry Compressor fW Wah Auto Wah EQ Trim LEQ HEQ gt H Heomp iz t Wah Output Level i Mt Dly Wet Dry i H Right o o Righto i o i eros L Envelspe Contra L Eae prote m D i fe Dae LFO a E Trim 0 100 Sets the parametric EQ input level E Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz C Sensitivity 1 100 Sets the center frequency of Band 1 a Sets the sensitivity Fx 002 b Q 0 5 10 0 C Attack 1 100 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 V3 Fx 006 Table Sets the attack level on page 176 t Fx 002 b Gain dB 18 18dB Output Level 0 100 Sets the gain of Band 1 Sets the compressor output level 6 Fx 002 E Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 5 00kHz C EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 c 2 0 5 10 0 C Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 t Fx 006 Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 d Gain dB 18 18dB Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Sets the gain of B
12. Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alter natively you can select oscillators using the F1 F4 buttons Filter envelope Note off Sustain Level Break PointLl Level Attack Decay Slope Time Time Time Attack Level Note on ReleaseO Level The specifiedl cutoff L1 frequency Release Time Start Attack Break Sustain Release Level These are the envelope segment levels The result will depend on the filter that was selected in Filter Type For example with the Low Pass Resonance filter positive values of EG Intensity will cause the tone to be brightened by positive levels and darkened by negative levels 99 99 Level value Start Level This parameter specifies the change in cutoff frequency at the time of note on Attack Level This parameter specifies the change in cutoff frequency after the attack time has elapsed Break Point Level This parameter specifies the change in cutoff frequency after the decay time has elapsed Sustain Level This parameter specifies the change in cutoff frequency that will be maintained from after the slope time has elapsed until note off occurs Release Level This parameter specifies the change in cutoff frequency that will occur when the release time has elapsed Attack Decay Slope Release Time These parameters specify the time over which the filter change will occur 0 9
13. Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alter natively you can select oscillators using the F1 F4 buttons Intensity to A Specifies the depth and direction of the modulation that LFOI set on Page 17 LFO1 will have on the cutoff fre quency of filter A Negative settings will invert the phase 99 99 Parameter value Intensity to B Specify the depth and direction of the modulation that LFO1 will have on the cutoff frequency of filter B see Intensity to A Change in cutoff Low setting High setting 99 99 Parameter value Joystick Y toA By moving the joystick in the Y direction toward yourself you can control the depth at which LFO1 modulates the cut off frequency of filter A This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the control Higher settings of this parameter will produce greater increases in the effect of LFO1 on the filter when the joystick is moved toward yourself 99 99 Joystick Y to B By moving the joystick in the Y direction toward yourself you can control the depth at which LFO1 modulates the cut off frequency of filter B This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the control see Joystick Y to A Parameter value Filter LFO1 modulation AMS Alternate Modulation Source Select a source that will control the depth and direction of cutoff frequency change for both filters A and B See
14. 3 Select a Program You should know how to do If not what about going back for a little to the Basic opera tions chapter Selecting a Program section page 26 It will be of a great help in the future Which Programs to choose With gt 660 Programs you will for sure find your preferred sound Just browse any Program bank and listen to them Turn on the DIS PLAY HOLD LED to stay in the Selecting Window until you have found the right Program Then press EXIT or DISPLAY HOLD to exit the window 4 Execute as many changes as you like to the other tracks Change the volume Yes this is another obvious change Press MENU to open the edit menu Gussears ransp cm pr 881 g mD oooo eo Song Edit MEHI Mixers Tur Trarere te Campo Effects Del Tut Ire Track Edit Cory QuerLine Evert Edit Press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Mixer Tuning item Suddenly a Volume edit page appears Campo J 2G 8858 Cm oooo e Pixer tlolume aaeure a DEE e HH aso s 2 HI asa HIL as S HIL gea HIL 65 a HL asa IH 112 ja in 888 C E Lj saos ea Haon E3 e Skringsi LocsEr a DkStreinds Bassi li Ledato Strrig rez fis Brace sHorn Strings fi
15. Select a track and use the DIAL or the UP and DOWN but tons or the VOLUME VALUE buttons to change the track s If you press TRACK SELECT again you are back to the main page Press TRACK SELECT AGAIN to go to tracks 1 8 volume Modify all tracks you think need to be modified 34 Tutorial 6 The Arabic Scale Q Save the Song Your changes will be lost when you load a new Song switch to the Song Play mode or turn the instrument off So press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Song mode Campo measure Wranepoes s pg S4 eo Pusona Press one of the C VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Save Song command Save your Song with a new name How to accomplish this simple operation is described in great details on page 90 Save Song page Note When saving a Song the Song Performance events initial Program Volume Pan Effect Send settings are saved at the beginning of the Standard MIDI File Effect settings are saved as Pa50SD SysEx events ignored by other musical instruments Other editings The Volume is not the only parameter you can edit You can edit a lot more things like the Pan the Effects the Tuning you can even use up to 4 effects A D Internal FX Proces sors but this will be useful only when reading the Song back on the Pa50SD only since other Gener
16. 158 Factory Data Programs Program Change order ccoo CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2 ccoo CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2 121 0 82 Calliope Synth 2 v 121 0 92 BowedGlass Synth 1 v 121 0 83 Chiff Synth 2 v 121 0 93 MetallicPad Synth 1 v 121 0 84 Charang Synth 2 v 121 1 93 Cosmic Synth 1 121 1 84 Wire Lead Synth 2 v 121 0 94 Halo Pad Synth 1 v 121 2 84 Synchro City Synth 2 121 0 95 Sweep Pad Synth 1 v 121 3 84 Sync Kron Synth 2 121 1 95 AstralDream Synth 1 121 4 84 MetallicRez Synth 2 121 2 95 Meditate Synth 1 121 5 84 Brian Sync Synth 2 121 3 95 DarkElement Synth 1 121 6 84 Arp Twins Synth 2 121 4 95 Mellow Pad Synth 1 121 0 85 Voice Lead Strings amp Vocals v 121 5 95 Cinema Pad Synth 1 121 1 85 EtherVoices Strings amp Vocals 121 0 96 Ice Rain Synth 1 v 121 2 85 Cyber Choir Strings amp Vocals 121 1 96 MotionOcean Synth 1 121 0 86 Fifths Lead Synth 2 v 121 2 96 Caribbean Synth 1 121 1 86 Crimson5ths Synth 2 121 0 97 Soundtrack Synth 1 v 121 0 87 Bass amp Lead Synth 2 v 121 1 97 Air Clouds Synth 1 121 1 87 Soft Wr
17. Channel gt GBL You can assign to each channel one of the following tracks Off No track assigned Lower Lower track 129 Global edit environment Page 9 MIDI IN Filters Upperl 3 One of the Upper tracks Drum Drum track Perc Percussion track Bass Bass track Accl 5 One of the Auto accompaniment tracks S1 T1 16 One of Sequencer 1 tracks S2 T1 16 One of Sequencer 2 tracks SQ Tr01 16 Use these channels to send data generated by a track with the same name on either or both onboard sequencers at the same time Use this channel to send notes recognized by the Chord Recognition engine to the MIDI OUT This is useful for example to control an external Harmonizer from the Pa50SD using the Lower track to play chords even if the track is in mute Chord PAGE 11 MIDI OUT FILTERS Use this page to set up to 8 filters for the MIDI data sent by the Pa50SD chord Cmpa measurs amp rsmaposs 7 M s Gua EE EZ Coa od GbliMidiQut FIL SEs PitchBerd PenecTouch OPF B Bark Sel Off 1 Modi Ouen OFF Filters gt GBL Selected MIDI OUT filters Off No filter Pitch Bend Pitch Bend MonoTouch Mono or Channel After Touch PolyTouch Poly After Touch PrgChange Program Change SysExcl System Exclusive All CC All Control Change messages 0 127 Control Change message 0 127 See
18. Control Target None Out FB Selects from no control output and feedback ws a Polarity Reverses level control var Threshold 0 100 Sets the level to which the effect is applied v Offset 0 100 Sets the offset of level control ws c Attack 1 100 Sets the attack time of level control Us d Release 1 100 Sets the release time of level control os L Delay Time msec 0 0 680 0msec Sets the delay time for the left channel f R Delay Time msec 0 0 680 0msec Sets the delay time for the right channel Feedback 100 100 9 Sets the feedback amount ance on page 175 a Control Target This parameter selects no level control delay output con trol effect balance or feedback amount control a Polarity b Threshold b Offset c Attack d Release The Offset parameter specifies the value for the Con trol Target parameter that is set to None expressed as the ratio relative to the parameter value the Wet Dry value with Control Target Out or the Feedback value with Control Target FB When Polarity is positive the Control Target value is obtained by multiplying the parameter value by the Off set value if the input level is below the threshold or equals the parameter value if the input level exceeds the threshold When Polarity is negative Control Target value equals the parameter value if the input level is below the thresh
19. Load Sore Meteo Orr Seve ton Medved 4d Sel Tero Teneo Auto Backing Sequence icon When on this icon indicates that the instrument is in Back ing Sequence mode Page header This header shows the name of the selected Song B Load Song Use these buttons to select a Song i e a Standard MIDI File The Song Select page opens and you can select a Song see below Load Song page 84 Backing Sequence operating mode Load Song page C Save Song This command saves the recorded Song as a Standard MIDI File The file is automatically added the MID extension After pressing this command the Save Song page appears see Save Song page on page 84 D Select Tempo Select this parameter to use the TEMPO VALUE section to select the Tempo When you select this parameter the VALUE LED turns off F Metro Use these buttons to turn the metronome on off during play back G Meter This non editable parameter shows the starting meter or time signature of the selected Song H Tempo mode This sets the Tempo change mode Man ual When the cursor is on the D Select Tempo parameter you can change the Tempo using the TEMPO VALUE section controls The Song will be played back using the manually selected tempo Auto The Tempo recorded into the Song will be used instead LOAD SONG PAGE This page appears when you press
20. General parameters Separate tracks General parameters n lt 1 lt lt lt lt lt lt 4 lt lt Global Protect v Not saved to card Factory Styles Protect B Set to On at startup 232 Parameters Style and Song parameters The following table is a list of data saved to memory or card when editing a Style or a Song Note When saving a Song to card as a Standard MIDI File SMF all parameters are converted to ordinary track parameters Pa80 exclusive data are converted to SysEx or Meta Events that will be ignored when reading the SMF on a different keyboard or sequencer Parameter Header Tracks Master Track Header Tracks Master Track Volume GM Master Volume e zi 3 Y Tempo Meter Time Signature I I i sys Programs Note On Off Pitch Bend After Touch Control Change Quarter Tone F Quarter Tone Reset i Chord Variation Length Original Key Chord NTT Expression Keyboard Range Chord Variation Table Retrigger Mode Tension Play Mute status lt U i sys Sy lt lt 1 1 I lt y ss lt SS SS Master Transpose Volume Pan FX Block FX Send Detune Scale Key Note Detune Scale Yes No Pitch Bend Range E FX Select A B C D Modulation Track
21. 105 MENU sori sert E AEE edhe gant dede Eod on edes 105 Edit page Structure isis evosce pista EYE EXE ER 105 The Compare function arean eee eee eee 106 How to select oscillators 0 0 0 0 c eee 106 Erase Program Oscillator esses eee eee 106 The Write window 0 00 cece cece eee eee eee 106 Page Basic ssi Siew tds overture nese pa ke eon aeu aoe a 106 Page 2 Sample Sound Programs 107 Page 2 DK Samples Drum Programs 108 Page Ss Pitch ayy E EEE eet aces 109 Page 4 Pitch LEOL isses RR chee ERE ER 110 Page d Pitch LEO2 usos re Res 110 Page 6 Pitch EG iso ipe eR rUEER DH Re 110 Page7 Filler 25eeseseseo sere ER RERO EY SES 112 Page 8 Filter Modulation ssssseeess 113 Page 9 Filter LFO1 0 eee eee eee eee 114 Page 10 Filter LFO2 1 0 eee eee eee eee eee 115 Page 11 Filter EG ics cep eased robe 115 Page 12 AMP iile x rk cence ag eas 117 Page 13 Amp Modulation 22 cece ee 117 Page 14 Amp LFOL iciis cei eer cere esas ees 118 Page 15 Amp LEO siccescragcrce tee RIDERE nas 118 Page l6 AMPEG i IR nr e ER E eax 118 Page 17 LFO D ceste ch Rx 120 Page 18 LEO iilui t ed rm sends gag ees 121 Page 19 Effects ode oe vereor E cae 121 Page 20 FXL editing eee eee eee eee 122 Page 21 FX2 editing eee e eee eee eee ee 122 AMS Alternate Modulation Source li
22. 7 Event Edit Tre DAM ESM QUEL Positions G81 61 6 It Bs Hote Fitz T2 Lienz Ee er BEE He For more information on the event types and their val ues see Page 4 Event Edit on page 63 Use the B VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Posi tion line Use these buttons or the TEMPO VALUE con trols to change the event s position Positions GEL AL Bel we EN Measure Beat Tick Use the C VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Event line You may use the C VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the event type Use the G VOLUME VALUE buttons and the F3 and F4 function keys to respectively select the first and second value of the parameter Use the G VOLUME VALUE 12 13 14 15 16 Style Record mode 65 Event Edit procedure buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to modify the selected value Eus Note Event Type Fae 72 First value Second value If a Note event is selected use the D VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Length line and use the same but tons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the event s length Lent EX Er bb DS Ge Beat Tick After having modified the shown event you may scroll to the next event with the H VOLUME VALUE buttons Scroll to next or to the previous event with the E F VOLUME VALUE buttons Scroll to previous You may use the SHIFT lt lt or gt gt shortcut to go
23. chord Cape Ceasar Wramspcss m ae pg E Editi Eu Filter Hotes OFF Micke OFF From OFF Picks OFF Ctrl OFF Berd OFF Tehetert OFF Pactl OFF Press PAGE to go back to the Event Edit page Press the A VOLUME VALUE button Trk to select the track to edit The Go To Track window appears fo to Tr k d Briers Exit Tercel Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a track and press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort The list of events contained in the selected track will appear in the display Compo measure igi BBB quo E Sgad Evert Edit Trk 1 Positions bal aleen It Eu Hote Gi 4 Lenght cea ga 118 Le 10 11 12 13 For more information on the event types and their val ues see Page 24 Event Edit below Use the B VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Posi tion line Use these buttons or the TEMPO VALUE con trols to change the event s position Fositions GEL Gl Bel Z l Measure Beat Tick Use the C VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Event line You may use the C VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the event type Use the G VOLUME VALUE buttons and the F3 and F4 function keys to respectively select the first and second value of the parameter Use the G VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to modify the s
24. Use the A D VOLUME VALUE button pairs to select a parameter Note These settings are stored in the Global file After changing these settings press WRITE to save them into the Global The Write Global window will appear see The Write window on page 72 Note You can always start both sequencers simultaneously Start both sequencers simultaneously by keeping SHIFT held down while pressing one of the PLAY STOP controls Link Mode gt GBL The two onboard Sequencers can work each with a different Tempo Off or use the same Tempo Link modes Off The sequencers Tempo are not linked Each sequencer uses its own Tempo Link Measure The two sequencers Tempo are linked together The Tempo data written into the Songs are ignored Adjust the Tempo using the TEMPO VALUE controls Start one of the sequencers by pressing its own PLAY STOP control Then start the other sequencer by pressing the other PLAY STOP control the second sequencer starts at the next measure 80 Song Play operating mode Saving a list of Songs Link Beat The two sequencers Tempo are linked together The Tempo data written into the Songs are ignored Adjust the Tempo using the TEMPO VALUE controls Start one of the sequencers by pressing its own PLAY STOP control Then start the other sequencer by pressing the other PLAY STOP control the second sequencer starts at the next beat quarter or octave depending on the Song s Time Signa
25. Chord Cmpa measure wanapoze Cent Gea Ws See SH Ges E ELE TN ME Card Cory ta p Ecurrent dirt C LIUE SET C ETHICA SET 4 SD COY OPEN CLOSE 5 Move the target folder to the first line in the display To copy into an existing generic folder not a SET folder select that folder To copy into the current folder select the current dir item 6 Once the target is selected press F2 Copy The Over write message appears Doer unite on Dora Enter ez Exito Press ENTER to confirm overwriting EXIT to avoid it When you decide to overwrite the data you are copying will replace the existing data on the target For example if the same midifile exists on the target folder it will be overwritten If a USER bank exists it will be overwrit ten Data that doesn t exist on the source folder is left unchanged For example if the USERO3 Style bank exists on the target folder but not in the source folder it is left untouched after copying the other banks When you decide not to overwrite data existing on the target folder is left unchanged therefore are not copied 7 The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort the copy Copying a single file You can copy a single file from a generic folder to a different folder The file must reside on the root the main
26. Envelope Control _ t Select Delay L_ Gate Righto i Wet Dry GatesSlf Envelope Select D mod L R Mix L Only R Only Selects from Control via the modulation source mixing the left and right sig nals Only left and Only right Uy prez a Src Off Gate2 Dmpr Selects the modulation source that controls the gate when Envelope Select D mod b Polarity Switches between non reversed and reversed Gate on off v c Threshold 0 100 Sets the level to which the Gate is applied iS Attack 1 100 d Sets the attack time D Release 1 100 Sets the release time i e Delay Time msec 0 100msec Sets the delay time of the gate input is Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Diz n Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a Envelope Select a Src The Envelope Select parameter selects whether the gate on off is triggered by the level of the input signal or controlled directly by the modulation source The Src parameter specifies the modulation source selected from Off to Gate2 Dpmr With Envelope Select L R Mix the left and right chan nel signal mixture will trigger the gate
27. Event First value Second value Note Note name Velocity Prog Program Change number Ctrl Control Change number Control Change value Bend Bending value Aftt Mono Channel After touch value PAft Note to which the After touch is applied Poly Aftertouch value And here are the events contained in the Master track Event First value Second value Tempo Tempo change Volume Master Volume value Meter Meter change Scale One of the available pre Root note for set Scales the selected Scale UScale User One of the available Root note for Scale User Scales the selected Scale QT Quarter Altered note Note alter Tone ation QT Clear Quar Reset of all Scale ter Tone Clear changes ing FXType One of the four avail Effect number able FX processors FXSend Feedback Send B gt A or Feedback send D gt C level a Meter changes can t be edited or inserted To insert a Meter change use the Insert function in the Edit section and insert a series of measures with the new meter Existing data can then be copied or entered to these measures b To edit the Quarter Tone settings select the first value then select the scale s degree to edit Edit the second value to change the tuning of the selected note of the scale c When selecting a different effect number during this edit default settings will be assigned to this event
28. Pa 5O sD professional arranger USER S MANUAL ENGLISH Ver 1 0 Instructions pertaining to a risk of fire electric shock or injury to persons IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WARNING When using electrical products basic pre cautions should be followed including the following Location Using the unit in the following locations can result in a malfunction ndirect sunlight Locations of extreme temperature or humidity Excessively dusty or dirty locations Locations of excessive vibration Power supply Please connect the designated AC adapter to an AC outlet of the correct voltage Do not connect it to an AC outlet of voltage other than that for which your unit is intended Interference with other electrical devices This prod uct contains a microcomputer Radios and televisions placed nearby may experience reception interference Operate this unit at a suitable distance from radios and televisions Handling To avoid breakage do not apply excessive force to the switches or controls Care If the exterior becomes dirty wipe it with a clean dry cloth Do not use liquid cleaners such as benzene or thinner or cleaning compounds or flammable polishes Keep this manual After reading this manual please keep it for later reference Keeping foreign matter out of your equipment Never set any container with liquid in it near this equipment if liquid gets into the equipment it could cause
29. Campo mensura transpose F Ma DRE S8 Bos Cad Load Chore p GEEL ST it C USERS STY C MEERES STY He tb LOAD OPEM CLOSE Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the desired bank to the first line of the display Press F2 Load to confirm the file selection The list of User banks in memory appears Cmpa w 508 7 DardiLoad rsmsposs BH sg m Leer al pct Herit Leer as Fa SD LORD OPEN OE In the page above the previously selected Style bank will be loaded into the bank 1 USERI button in memory The existing Styles in memory will be deleted and over written Scroll the available locations in memory using the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls When the target bank is selected i e it is in the first line of the display press F2 Load to load the bank The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Warning After confirming all User data contained in the bank in memory is deleted When the operation is completed the Wait indicator disappears the source page comes back in the display and you may perform further loading operations Loading a single item You can load a single User item i e a single User Program a single User Style or a
30. SD CREATE OPEM CLOSE New folder procedure 1 Inserta card into the card drive 2 Press Fl to scan the card 3 Press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons You are prompted to assign a name to the new folder I MAME Move the cursor using the DOWN and UP buttons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the DELETE button 4 Press F2 Create to confirm The Are you sure mes sage appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort 140 Card Edit environment Page 7 Rename PAGE 7 RENAME Use the Rename function to change the name of a folder or a file To preserve data structure consistence you can t rename single files inside a SET folder or the SET folder name extension Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to reach this page tempo measure transpose LIE BBB BY 2B K Ga oooo Card Rename sty play gt BJSET SET it LIVE SET ETHICA SET L4 Rename procedure 1 Insert the card that contains the file to be renamed into the card drive 2 Press F1 to scan the card 3 Move the item to rename to the first line Then press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons You are prompted to change the name St nic set M
31. Harpsichord 121 Harpsi Oct 121 Harpsi Wide 121 HarpsiK Off 121 Harpsi Korg 121 Clav 121 Pulse Clav 121 Clav Wah 121 Clav Snap 121 Sticky Clav 121 A w N OF BB WEN CO FD GD NB Ww NI A OF UT BN WwW AlN A CO OG ojl A UT A Ww NI N NENT NE DD DD OF N ojl A gt wl W NINI NI N OF Ni N CO o GO CO o Bank E Piano ClubElPiano 121 DynoTine EP 121 o Vintage EP 121 Pro Dyno EP 121 ProStage EP 121 Studio EP 121 StereoDigEP 121 ClassDigiEP 121 EP Phase 121 Hybrid EP 121 Class Tines 121 PhantomTine 121 Sweeping EP 121 WhitePad EP 121 ThinElPiano 121 Ol mo wo ALN oN oo A A my oy of my oy of oy uo BY 55 HB HB 5 Name ccoo CC32 PC DW8000 EP 121 11 5 E Piano 1 121 0 4 E Piano 2 121 0 5 DetunedEP 1 121 1 4 EP1Veloc sw 121 2 4 60 sEIPiano 121 3 4 DetunedEP 2 121 1 5 EP2Veloc sw 121 2 5 EP Legend 121 3 5 R amp B E Piano 121 8 4 SynPiano X 121 5 5 Bank Mallet amp Bell Vibraphone 121 0 11 Vibraphone2 121 2 11 Vibrap Wide 121 1 11 Marimba 121 0 12 MarimbaWide 121 1 12 RimbaKeyOff 121 2 12 MonkeySkuls 121 3 12 Xylophone 121 0 13 Balaphon 121 6 12 Celesta 121 0 8 G
32. Page commands Card content Operating mode icon When in the Card Edit environment one of the operating modes is still active in the background The operating mode icon shows which mode is currently active Press EXIT to go back to the current operating mode from any of the Card pages Page header This line shows the Card page you are in Card content These lines show the content of the current folder Move the item to select to the first line using the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Use the Page commands F1 F4 on the last line to execute an operation on the selected file or folder The i RR symbol before a name identifies a folder i e a folder containing other files Page commands You can use these commands to browse through files and folders and to execute data transfer commands load save Commands may be different in any Card page Use the F1 F4 buttons to select the corresponding command NAVIGATION TOOLS When in a Card page you can use any of the following com mands to browse through the files and folders or through the list of commands E F Scroll Up Scroll the list up Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of these buttons to jump to the previous alphabetical section G H Scroll Down Scroll the list down Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of these buttons to jump to the next alphabetical section TEMPO VALUE section These controls scr
33. 156 Factory Data Programs Program Change order ccoo CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2 ccoo CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2 121 1 38 SynBassWarm Bass v 121 4 50 Odissey Strings amp Vocals 121 2 38 SynBassReso Bass v 121 0 51 SynStrings2 Strings amp Vocals v 121 3 38 Clav Bass Bass v 121 0 52 Choir Aahs Strings amp Vocals v 121 4 38 Hammer Bass v 121 1 52 Choir Aahs2 Strings amp Vocals v 121 5 38 30303 Bass Bass 121 2 52 Oooh Voices Strings amp Vocals 121 6 38 30303Square Bass 121 3 52 OhSlowVoice Strings amp Vocals 121 7 38 Bass Square Bass 121 4 52 Take Voices Strings amp Vocals 121 8 38 SynBass Res Bass 121 5 52 TakeVoices2 Strings amp Vocals 121 9 38 Digi Bass 1 Bass 121 6 52 Oooh Choir Strings amp Vocals 121 10 38 Digi Bass 2 Bass 121 7 52 Aaah Choir Strings amp Vocals 121 11 38 Digi Bass 3 Bass 121 8 52 Mmmh Choir Strings amp Vocals 121 12 38 BlindAsABat Bass 121 9 52 Oh AhVoices Strings amp Vocals 121 13 38 Jungle Bass Bass 121 10 52 Slow Choir Strings amp Vocals 121 14 38 Auto Pilot Synth 2 1
34. Dist Slide1 Off 201 Woodblock2 Off 116 BD Orch 1 38 D2 12 BD Tight Off 291 Dist Slide2 Off 225 CowbelT Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 39 D 2 1 BD Dry 2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 40 E2 2 BD Dry 3 Off 258 GunShot 1 Off 179 CastDouble Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 4 F2 7 BD Woofer Off 144 DJ Scratch1 7 184 Baya Open Off 159 CongaLoMtSlp Off 42 F 2 3 BD Normal Off 145 DJ Scratch2 7 217 Shaker1 Off 164 CongaHi Slap1 Off 43 G2 0 BD Dry 1 Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 186 Baya Mute1 Off 165 CongaHi Slap2 Off 44 G 2 10 BD Tubby Off 143 Zap2 Off 182 MaracasPush Off 137 88 Maraca Off 45 A2 3 BD Normal Off 249 Click Off 184 Baya Open Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 46 A 2 0 BD Dry 1 Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 214 Triangle Mute 2 4 B2 3 BD Normal Off 289 FretNoise Off 190 labla Open Off 213 Triangle Open 2 48 C3 6 BD Pillow Off 286 GtCutNois1 Off 192 Tabla Mute1 Off 159 CongaLoMtslp Off 49 C 3 116 BD Orch Off 287 GtCutNois2 Off 198 Vibraslap Off 162 CongaHiMute Off 50 D3 11 BD Gated Off 286 GtCutNois1 Off 189 Tabla Na Off 165 CongaHi Slap2 Off 51 D 3 10 BD Tubby Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 214 Triangle Mute 3 211 Tambourin Acc1 Off 52 E3 8 BD MondoRKill Off 246 Laughing Off 116 BD Orch Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 53 F3 10 BD Tubby Off 245 Scream Off 213 Triangle Open 3 170 BongoLo Stk Off 54 F 3 9 BD Terminator Off 256 Punch Off 181 Guiro Short Off 170
35. MIDIFILES Midifiles or Standard MIDI Files SMF are a practical way of exchanging songs between different instruments and com puters Pa50SD has the SMF format as its default song for mat so reading a song from a computer or saving a song that a computer software can read is not a problem at all Pa50SD sequencers are compatible with the SMF in format 0 all data in one track it is the most common format and 1 multitrack It can read the SMF in Song Play mode and modify save them in Song mode It can save a Song in SMF 0 format in the Backing Sequence or Song mode When in Song Play mode the Pa50SD can also display SMF lyrics in Solton M Live Midisoft Tune1000 and compati ble Edirol GMX HitBit XF formats and the chord abbre viations of SMF in Solton M live Midisoft GMX and XF format THE GENERAL MIDI STANDARD Some years ago the musical instruments world felt a need for some further standardization Then the General MIDI Stan dard GM was born This extension of the basic MIDI sets new rules for compatibility between instruments A minimum of 16 MIDI channels was required A basic set of 128 Programs correctly ordered was mandatory The Drum Kit had a standard order Channel 10 had to be devoted to the Drum Kit A most recent extension is the GM2 that further expands the Programs database The Pa50SD is soundwise compatible with the GM2 standard THE GLOBAL CHANNEL Any channe
36. No function assigned Program Up Selects the next Program Start stop Play Stop Seq1 Play Stop Seq2 Synchro Tap tempo Rst Tempo lock Intro 1 Ending 1 Intro 2 Ending 2 Fill 1 Fill 2 C In Break Variation 1 Variation 2 Variation 3 Variation 4 Variation up Variation down Fade in out Memory Bass inversion Manual Bass Same functions of the control panel buttons with the same name Program Down Selects the previous Program STS Up Selects the next STS STS Down Selects the previous STS STS1 Selects the STS 1 STS2 Selects the STS 2 STS3 Selects the STS 3 STS4 Selects the STS 4 Punch In Out Turns the Punch Recording on off FX CC12 Sw EXER Standard FX controllers Fx A mute Mute of the Internal FX A Fx B mute Mute of the Internal FX B Fx C mute Mute of the Internal FX C Fx D mute Mute of the Internal FX D All Fx mute Mute of all Internal FXs Drum mute Mute of the Drum track Perc mute Mute of the Percussion track Bass mute Mute of the Bass track Acci mute Mute of the Acc1 track Acc2 mute Mute of the Acc2 track Acc3 mute Mute of the Acc3 track Acc4 mute Mute of the Acc4 track Acc5 mute Mute of the Acc5 track Upper 1 Mute Mute of the Upper 1 track Acc 1 5 mute Mute of all Acc tracks Upper 2 Mute Mute of t
37. Pura Dry Envelope Select L R Mix L Only R Only L R Individually Selects from linking both channels controlling only from left channel only from the right channel or controlling each channel individually we b Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio ws Threshold dB 40 0dB Sets the level above which the compressor is applied iS Attack 1 100 F Sets the attack time v Release 1 100 Sets the release time S Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB Sets the output gain S pae Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the output gain Amt 63 463 Sets the modulation amount of the output gain Side PEQ Insert Off On Toggles between on off of the trigger signal s EQ v f Trigger Monitor Off On Switches between effect output monitor and trigger signal monitor w Side PEQ Cutoff Hz 20 12 00kHz Sets the EQ center frequency for the trigger signal 1S Q 0 5 10 0 9 Sets the EQ bandwidth for the trigger signal Gain dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the EQ gain for the trigger signal Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dg h Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a Envelope Select When L R Mix is selected for this parameter the left and right channels ar
38. Scale Mode parameter see page 51 8 MIDI WHAT IS MIDI Here is a brief overview of MIDI as related to the Pa50SD If interested you may find more information on the general use of MIDI in the various specialized magazines and books In general MIDI stands for Musical Instruments Digital Interface This interface lets you connect two musical instruments or a computer and various musical instruments Physically MIDI is composed of three different connectors The MIDI IN receives data from another device the MIDI OUT sends data to another device the MIDI THRU sends to another device exactly what was received on the MIDI IN this is useful to daisy chain more instruments Channels and messages Basically a MIDI cable transmits 16 channels of data Think to each MIDI channel as a TV channel the receiver must be set on the same channel of the transmitter The same happens with MIDI messages when you send a Note On message on channel 1 it will be received on channel 1 only This allows for multitimbricity you can have more than one sound play ing on the same MIDI instrument There are various messages but here are the most commonly used Note On This message instructs an instrument to play a note on a specific channel Notes have both a name C4 standing for the center C and a number 60 being the equiv alent for C4 A Note Off message is often used to say the note has been released In some case a Note On with
39. Wait indicator disappears the source page comes back in the display and you may perform further saving operations Creating a new SET folder When saving data Save operations you can save onto exist ing folders or you can create a new SET folder Here is how to do it 1 When the file list of the target card is in the display use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE con trols to move the NEW NAME SET item to the first line of the display Note A NEW NAME SET item is always the first item in any directory When the NEW_NAME SET item is selected press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons You are prompted to assign a name to the new folder RELLHFE SET Move the cursor using the DOWN and UP buttons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the DELETE button When you have finished writing a name for the new folder press F2 Save to confirm The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort 138 Card Edit environment Page 3 Copy PAGE 3 COPY In this page you can copy single files i e midifiles of Jukebox files whole folders generic or SET folders or a generic folder s content Note that you can copy data only inside the same card To preserve the data structure integrity during Copy opera tions
40. i LEQHEO d Phaser lt h Chorus Flanger ra LEQHE T Papin B 4 i peser utput Mode Righto i Wet D E Resonance Wet Dry Feedback Wet Invert PEPA AAEE uc H f Cho Fing Input Reverb Mix Right i i Away A MEE put CFom CFom nc M RC MT ate P LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz R Reverb Time sec 0 1 10 0sec Sets the LFO speed Sets the reverberation time 7 A a LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Hi o o gh Damp 0 100 Selects LFO Waveform Sets the damping amount in the high range P Manual 0 100 R Pre Delay msec 0 200msec Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied b Sets the delay time of the reverb sound and gate control signal p Depth l 0100 R EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation C Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 Resonance 100 100 R Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Sets the resonance amount se Fx 023 d Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 P Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Sets the phaser effect balance ts Fx 010 023 Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 F LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz R Reverb Balance Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet d Sets the LFO speed 9 Sets the reverb effect balance LFO Waveform Triangle Sine G Envelope Select D mod Input Selects LFO Waveform Switches between modulation source control and input signal control F Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec f ud Sets the delay time S
41. oooo octava ECL L Program Ul EE Stand Jazz GT Ferckit 1 Brass FirgerBass Wibes Ac Piano Moral 8 t E amp 8 EE When in this page press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element VARIATIONI ENDING2 To copy the settings of this page to another Style Element keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the button of the target Style Element Program Use the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section to assign a Program to the selected track 68 Style Record mode Page 10 Style Element Controls Expression PAGE 10 EXPRESSION In this page you can modify the Expression CC 11 value for each of the Style tracks This lets you reduce the relative level of a track in a single Style Element without reducing the overall Volume of the Style This is a very useful control when you have different Pro grams assigned to the same track in different Style Elements and the internal level of these Programs is different STYLE ELEMENT CONTROLS chord Camp Gusesurs fremeposs Gao BEG ce RR g 3 SECOLI Epress Ui E E Value 164 Value 166 Zj o Ualuer ipe Uslue 168 Value 168 Uslue 1668 gei Uslue i68 Uslue 166 Z When in this page press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element
42. 15 15dB E Bands Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 Sets the center frequency for Band 3 F Cho FIng Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger t Fx 010 020 Q 0 5 10 0 h 9 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 ts Fx 006 Output Mode Normal Wet Invert p Fy Gain dB 18 18dB Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger Fx 067 Sets the gain of Band 3 Routing LMT FLNG FLNG LMT E Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz i Switches the order of the limiter and chorus flanger Pu zu Sets the center frequency for Band 4 ij a 0 5 10 0 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet h Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 1 Ex 006 pea the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Gain dB 18 418dB Tere Of Tempo Sets the gain of Band 4 l Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Routing LMT gt PEQ PEQ LMT i M OS i EREN Amt 100 100 Switches the order of the limiter and parametric EQ connection Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet ance on page 175 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 D i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 Effects Mono Mono Chain 217
43. 99 would lower the pitch one octave 99 99 Parameter value Start Level Specifies the amount of pitch change at note on Attack Level Specifies the amount of pitch change when the attack time has elapsed Release Level Specifies the amount of pitch change when the release time has elapsed Attack Decay Release Time These parameters specify the time over which the pitch change will occur 0 99 Parameter value Attack Time Specifies the time over which the pitch will change from note on until it reaches the pitch specified as the attack level Decay Time Specifies the time over which the pitch will change after reaching the attack level until it reaches the normal pitch Release Time Specifies the time over which the pitch will change from note off until it reaches the pitch specified as the release level 111 Program operating mode Page 6 Pitch EG Pitch EG Level modulation Pitch EG change level AMS JS Y Velocity Intensity positive value Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off AX IAT p A note played softly with A note played strongly with A note played strongly with Start Level Swing set at 0 Start Level Swing set to 0 Start Level Swing set to 0 Attack Level Swing set to Attack Level Swing setto Attack Level Swing set to the Joystick pulled on the Joystick pulled on the Joystick pulled on AMS1 2 L Alternate Modulation Source 1 2 These parameters s
44. Basic operations 27 Selecting a Single Touch Setting STS 5 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls or the VOLUME VALUE E H buttons to scroll the list The E F buttons are the Scroll Up while the G H buttons are the Scroll Down 4 Move the file you are looking for to the first line of the display 6 If the file you are looking for is in a folder a file whose name begins with D move the folder to the first line in the display then select the F3 OPEN command Select the F4 CLOSE command to close a folder and go back to the upper level 7 When the file you are looking for is in the first line of the display press the F2 SELECT button 8 When the Song appears in the S1 line on the main page of the Song Play mode press the left SEQ 1 PLAY STOP button to start the play back Note If the BALANCE slider is all the way to the right Sequencer 1 is at the minimum volume and can t be heard 9 If you wish to play a different Song on the Sequencer 2 at the same time press the B S2 VOLUME VALUE button press it twice if a Song is already selected for Sequencer 2 and repeat the above procedure to select a Song for Sequencer 2 Use the right SEQ 2 PLAY STOP button to start stop the second Song Use the BALANCE cursor to mix between Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 10 Stop the Song s using the PLAY STOP button for the corresponding Sequencer ERE PY SOMG MI SLi PRG SHORTCUT TO SEE THE ORIGIN
45. CC 32 PC Bank Latin 2 1 0 9 0 Hora 0 10 0 UnplugBossa 0 11 0 EnglishTango 2 1 Sevillana 1 1 Basic Bossa 1 Orch Tango 3 2 Sevillana 2 2 L A Bossa 2 Tango it 4 3 Jota 3 New Bossa 3 Habanera 1 5 4 Copla 4 Miss Bossa 4 Habanera 2 6 5 Classic 3 4 5 Lite Bossa 5 Mambo 1 7 6 Bolero 6 GrooveBossa 6 Mambo 2 8 7 Minuetto 7 DiscoChaCha 7 Salsa 1 9 8 Baroque 8 Cha Cha Cha 8 Salsa 2 10 9 New Age 9 Sabor 9 Mariachi 11 10 Tarantella 10 ChaCha Funk 10 Reggae 1 12 11 Raspa 11 Latin Rock 11 Reggae 2 13 12 Vahde 12 UnplugLatin 12 Reggae 3 14 13 Oriental 13 Beguine 1 13 Pasodoble 1 15 14 Roman 14 Beguine 2 14 PasDobBanda 16 15 Ciftetelli 15 Slow Bolero 15 Pasodoble 2 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank Latin Dance CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank Jazz 1 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank Jazz 2 1 0 12 0 Samba 0 13 O Jazz Brush 0 14 0 Big Band 3 2 1 Sambalegre 1 Med Swing 1 Sw Shuffle 3 2 Disco Samba 2 Slow Swing 2 FastBigBand 4 3 Samba Funk 3 SwingBallad 3 Latin Big Band 5 4 Merengue 1 4 JazzWaltz 1 4 BigBnd Fox4 6 5 Merengue 2 5 JazzWaltz 2 5 Dixieland 7 6 Cumbia 6 5 4 Swing 6 Hollywood 8 7 Latin Dance 7 Mood Swing 7 Broadway 9 8 Batucada 8 Be Bop 8 Acid Jazz 10 9 Rumba 9 Unpl Swing1 9 New Jazz 11 10 Gipsy 10 Unpl Swing2 10 Latin Jazz 12 11 Rumba Pop 11 B BndBallad 11 Fusion 13 12 Calypso 12 BigBandMed 12 Ragtime Pno 14 13 Lambada 13 Big Band 1 13 Shuffle Pno 15 14 Meneito 14 B
46. EET ER C 2 Use the leftmost button of the PROGRAM PERFOR MANCE section to select the first row of ten banks 1 Basic operations 25 Selecting a Performance 10 upper LED turned on or the second row of ten banks 11 20 lower LED turned on 3 Press one of the 1 0 buttons to select the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE bank containing the Performance you are looking for PROGRAM PERFORMANCE f PIANO E PIANO MALLET amp ACCORDION ORGAN1 ORGAN2 GUITAR STRINGS amp TRUMPET amp BRASS o BELL VOCALS TROMBONE C ICJ EMAA AIEEE JbE Jb ub ot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o V SAX WOODWIND SYNTH1 SYNTH2 BASS DRUM amp PERC SFX USER 1 USER2 USER DK The Performance Select window appears There are 8 Performances for each bank Last selected Performance chord Cmpa meaeurs irsmsposs 1 Hs monum EE Ceyiepky ansa SLereorand SterecGrand Blue ClupPiano Lezend Forestier Feu RezsorPako CbecErazz 4 Selecta Performance using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons 5 Ifthe DISPLAY HOLD LED is on press EXIT to exit this window The STYLE CHANGE button When you select a Performance the Style may or may not change depending on the status of the STYLE CHANGE button When you save a Performance the current Style number is always memorized Ifthe ST
47. First of the inserted measures Length Number of measures to be inserted 102 Song operating mode Page 23 Edit Copy PAGE 23 EDIT COPY Here you can copy tracks or phrases chord Compe measure transpose am Jn 8B C B Gu CL coco Cewa es Edit Cor Moet Hera FrontrkiAll Totrks All Sil El Sti Ti After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort Note If you copy too many events on the same tick the Too many events message appears and the copy operation is aborted Mode Use this parameter to select the Copy mode Merge Copied data are merged with the data at the target position Overwrite Copied data replace all data at the target posi tion Warning Deleted data cannot be recovered FromTrk From Track ToTrk To Track Use these parameters to select the source and target track to copy All All tracks The target track cannot be selected 1 16 Selected source and target tracks S E The left S E parameters are the starting and ending mea sure to copy For example if S 1 and E 4 the first four mea sures are copied S The right S parameter is the first of the target measures T Number of times the copy must be executed PAGE 24 EVENT EDIT Enter this page from the Menu of the Song mode The Event Edit page al
48. Je ig B88 E B eu oooo ese i Tunira FE Scale PE Sct Pee Seth PERG SoH o PESE SoH Pee SoH PEG miM PErgz SoH PEG SoH a je e amp a 9 chord Compe mess mnn B8 Tunira FE4 Scale PEraz SoH OPERE SoH Pee SoH PEG SoH PERG SoH Pera m H Pee SoH o PERIERE SoH i e Jas zw iS PB end This parameters shows the Pitch Bend range for each track in semitones 01 12 Maximum positive negative pitchbend range in semitones 12 1 octave Off No pitchbend allowed Song operating mode 97 Page 6 Tuning Scale Sc ale This parameter lets you activate deactivate the alternative scale for each track See Page 6 Tuning Scale on page 97 for more information on selecting an alternative scale Yes The track is tuned according to the alternative scale No The track is tuned according to the Global scale see Scale on page 125 PAGE 8 FX A B SELECT This page lets you select the A and B effects Usually the A effect is a reverb while the B effect is a modulating effect Standard MIDI Files usually require two effects only You can however assign all four effects to a Song see Page 3 Mixer FX Block on page 96 Campa measure trsmepoes Je ig 858 C HG 05 LJ coco Comme l FADE Selec
49. MIDI Controllers on page 228 for a list of available Control Change messages 130 Card Edit environment The WRITE CARD IN USE LED 16 CARD EDIT ENVIRONMENT The Card Edit environment is the place where you can man age files This edit environment overlaps the current operat ing mode Style Play Song Play Backing Sequence Song Program THE WRITE CARD IN USE LED When the drive is reading or writing data on a card the WRITE CARD IN USE indicator lights up While in a Card page the Wait message appears in the display in this situa tion you can t select a different Card page you can however select a different operative mode Cahord Cmpa measure nice Ge T cD epa UM SB Ll i Cardi Saue b AL 4 SD SAVE OEH CLOSE Warning Never remove a card when the WRITE CARD IN USE LED is turned on SUPPORTED CARDS You can use the following types of cards to save or load data to and from the Pa50SD s internal memory SD High Speed Ultra II SDHC MMC MicroSD with an SD adapter MiniSD with an SD adapter Note Before you can use the SD MMC card you must format it on the Pa50SD Don t use your computer or digital camera to format initialize a card you plan to use with the Pa50SD If the card was formatted on a different device it may not work correctly with the Pa50SD
50. Note off Note off Softly played note with Attack Strongly played note with Strongly played note with Decay Slope and Release Attack Decay Slope and Attack Decay Slope and Level Swings set to Release Level Swings setto Release Level Swings set to O AMS1 2 T Use this parameter to select the source that will control the Time parameters of the filter EG See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS1 2 T will have For example if AMS1 2 T is set to FItKTr the EG Time parameters will be controlled by the Keyboard Track ing settings With positive values of this parameter posi tive values of Ramp will lengthen the EG times and negative values of Ramp will shorten the EG times The direction of change is specified by Attack Time Swing Decay Time Swing Slope Time Swing and Release Time Swing With a setting of 0 the times specified by Frequency A Cut off Frequency A will be used If AMS1 2 T is set to Velocity positive values of this parameter will cause EG times to lengthen as you play more strongly and negative values will cause EG times to shorten as you play more strongly 99 99 Attack Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS1 2 T will affect the attack time With positive
51. Shortcut to see all pages of the selected bank To cycle all pages for a selected bank repeatedly press the bank s button These buttons double as a numeric keypad on certain pages see Selecting a Song composing its progressive num ber on page 70 B FADE IN OUT When the Style is in stop press this button to start it with a volume fade in the volume goes from zero to the maxi mum When the Style is in play press this button to stop it with a volume fade out the volume gradually decreases You don t need to press START STOP to start or stop the Style D VARIATION 1 4 NOTE LENGTH buttons gt PERF STYLE Each of these buttons select one of the four variations of the current Style Each variation can vary in patterns and sounds These buttons double as a NOTE LENGTH function for the Song mode see chapter 13 FILL 1 2 NOTE LENGTH buttons PERF gt STYLE These two buttons trigger a fill in Press them twice LED blinking to let them play in loop and select any other Style element Fill Intro Variation to exit the loop They also double as a NOTE LENGTH function for the Song mode see chapter 13 B COUNT iN BREAK PERF gt STYLE While the Style is not running press this button then press START STOP This combination triggers a one bar initial count then the Style starts playing While the Style is already in play this button triggers a break an empty measure beginning with a kick crash
52. Style Tracks page Onl Metronome on with a one bar precount before starting recording On2 Metronome on with a two bar precount before starting recording Resol Resolution This parameter sets the quantization during recording J 1 32 1 8 Grid resolution in musical values For exam ple when you select 1 16 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 16 division When you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 divi sion No quanti 1 16 D 3 D y gt 1 8 Meter This is the meter time signature of the Style You can edit this parameter only when the Style is empty i e before you begin recording anything Original Key Chord This is the track s original key and chord Use the D VOL UME VALUE buttons to select the line and the F1 and F2 buttons to switch from the key chord name and the key chord type Maj min When in Style Play mode this chord will be played back exactly as it was recorded without any NTT processing see below To record just one Chord Variation for a Style Ele ment the suggested original key chord is maj7 Be very careful to play the 7th note i e with a Cmaj7th key chord the B to avoid the lack of notes or a bad NTT con version when playing different chords Note To conform to Korg specifications it is advisable to record both the Major and minor Chord Variations for the Intro 1 and Ending 1 Style Elements When y
53. Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 You can change the order of the effect connection Nil Mond 1n Sieido Guk 7 Dry Sieres In Sineo Ou Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal is 5 ance on page 175 Routing Wet Dry Compressor Phaser 069 Cmp MTapDly gt H lt Hcomp ay Phaser eet Compressor Multitap Delay Output Level H Output Mode amic celia This effect combines a mono type compressor and a multi Right i i LT tap delay You can change the order of the effect connection Envelope Control LFO Tri Sine Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out tee Routing Wet Dry a C Sensitivity 1 100 _ Compressor f Multitap Delay _ Sets the sensitivity 0s Fx 002 be Tin ikai Hee a im C Attack 1 100 Hcy icomp b Table Sets the attack level on page 176 ts Fx 002 output ms MEDIy Wet Dry Output Level 0 100 Sets the compressor output level t Fx 002 Righte 4 i f i Wet Dry s C EQ Trim 0 100 Envelo Control Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 C Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 C Sensitivity 1 100
54. Tempo Hir edig frequency ranae mE C Selects the modulation source for the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode d p 3 y Tang is set to Fixed Resonance 100 100 Amt 12 00 12 00kHz Sets the phaser resonance amount Sets the modulation amount of the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode is Phaser Depth 0 100 set to Fixed Sets the phaser modulation depth Dez Note Offset 48 48 Src Off Tempo Sets the pitch difference from the original note when OSC Mode is set to Selects the modulation source for the phaser modulation depth d Note Key Follow ed Amt 100 100 Note Fine 100 100 Sets the modulation amount for the phaser modulation depth Fine adjusts the oscillator frequency y Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 99 Dry 2 99 Wet LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the balance between the phaser effect and dry sounds us Sets the LFO speed of the oscillator frequency jecur x mod Tremolo Shape 100 100 px 9 Sets the degree of the tremolo LFO shaping Fx 020 e Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Tremolo Depth 0 100 Sets the tremolo modulation depth Das Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed h Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the tremolo modulation depth BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the Amt 100 100 tempo and notes s Fx 009 exer Sets the modulation amount of the tremolo modul
55. When the operation is completed the Wait indicator disappears you are kept on the Erase page and you may perform further erase operations Card Edit environment Page 4 Erase 139 PAGE 5 FORMAT The Format function lets you initialize a card Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to reach this page Camere Cape T ce gt Jgagp 88 tardi Format Oooo p Sb Card l FORMAT Warning When formatting a card all data it contains is lost SD Card This is a very fast format command This command rewrites just the FAT File Allocation Table of the card without actual reformatting of all sectors 1 Inserta card into the card drive 2 Press F2 Format to select the formatting command 3 The Delete all data message appears in the display press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort 4 The Press F4 to continue message appears in the dis play press F4 to confirm formatting or EXIT to abort PAGE 6 NEW DIR The New Dir function lets you create a new folder in any of the cards or inside any generic folder You can t create or open SET folders since these are reserved folders to be created with a Save operation Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to reach this page Cehord Compo mansura E mum e ELE Cardi Hew Dir b e C spt ly
56. confirm a command DISPLAY HOLD This button turns the Display Hold function on or off ON When you open a temporary windows like the Program Select window it remains in the dis play until you press EXIT NO or an operating mode button OFF Any temporary window closes after a certain time or after selecting an item in the window B CHORD SCANNING section PERF STS In Style Play and Backing Sequence mode use these buttons to define the way chords are recognized by the arranger LOWER Chords are detected below the split point The number of notes you should play to form a chord is defined by the Chord Scanning Mode parameter see Chord Recognition Mode on page 50 Chords are detected above the split point You must always play three or more notes to let the arranger recognize a chord FULL both LEDs on Chords are detected on the full keyboard range You must always play three or more notes to let the arranger recognize a chord UPPER Front panel 17 OFF No chords detected After pressing START STOP only the Drum and Percussion accom paniment tracks can play KEYBOARD MODE section PERF STS These buttons define how the four Keyboard or Realtime tracks are positioned on the keyboard SPLIT The Lower track plays below the split point while the Upper 1 Upper 2 and Upper 3 tracks play above it By default selecting this key board mode automatically selects the Lower chord scanning mode
57. old or is obtained by multiplying the parameter value by the Offset value if the level exceeds the threshold The Attack and Release parameters specify attack time and release time of delay level control Dynamic Delay Level 4 Dry l Threshold Envelope Wet Ducking Delay Control Target Out Polarity Delay Time Wet Lun Control Target Out Polarity BE Time 206 Effects ER Delay 048 AutoPan Dly L Delay Time msec 0 0 680 0msec Stereo Auto Panning Delay Sets the delay time for the left channel L Feedback 100 100 This stereo delay effect pans the delay sound left and right Sets the feedback amount for the left channel using the LFO R Delay Time msec 0 0 680 0msec Sets the delay time for the right channel Stereo In Stereo Out b Left o R Feedback 100 100 High Damp Low Damp Sets the feedback amount for the right channel n Delay AL SAA High Damp 26 0 100 g Pid A Sets the damping amount in the high range os Fx 043 zt Low Damp 96 0 100 gt Delay HH _ Sets the damping amount in the low range ts Fx 043 Righto D MO ems LFO Waveform Triangle Sine d Selects LFO Waveform STHITSIN EA a A A oie LFO Shape 100 100 LFO Tri Sin
58. 1 Enter the Song mode You must be in the Main page of the mode If you are in Record mode go back to the Playback mode 2 Press SHIFT DELETE 3 The Delete Song message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort MAIN PAGE Press SONG to access this page from another operating mode Note When switching from Style Play to Song the Song Setup is automatically selected and various track parameters may change Press EXIT NO to access this page from the Menu or any of the Song Play edit pages To see the Song s tracks use the TRK SELECT button to switch from the Main page to the Tracks pages Pressed a first time you will see tracks 1 8 enlightened TRK SELECT LED a second press will show tracks 9 16 flashing TRK SELECT LED pressed again you will go back to the Main page TRK SELECT LED switched off Song icon Page header Bar number chord impa mossurs f trensposs n D ig a8 L uw Tite ocooo eo ew Sona Lomd Song Meheo OPP Ease Sore Medved 4 Sel Teneo Tenece Abo Song icon When on this icon shows that the instrument is in Song mode Page header This line shows the selected Song name Bar number This counter shows the current bar number position of the selected Song B Load Song Use these buttons to select a Song i e a Standard MIDI File The Song Select page opens and you can select a So
59. 35 B1 3 BD Normal Off 2 BD Dry 3 BD Pop 99 36 C2 0 6 BD Dry 1 gt BD Pillow Off 12 BD Tight BD Hip 3 37 CH2 73 SideStickAmb Off 73 SideStickAmb 88 Rimshot 38 D2 35 36 SD Ghost f gt SD Ghost p Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo SD Ringy 39 D 2 122 Hand Claps Off 127 88 Claps 88 Claps 40 E2 3536 SD Ghost f gt SD Ghost p Off 37 SD Full Room SD Full Room SD Vintage6 41 F2 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Tom 2 Floor Tom 1 Hi 42 F 2 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 HH1 Closed1 HH OldClose1 43 G2 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Tom 2 Floor Tom 1 Hi 44 G 2 94 HH2 Foot 1 94 HH2 Foot HH2 Foot HH OldClose2 45 A2 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Tom 1 Hi 46 A 2 89 HH1 Open 1 1 89 HHT Open 1 HH Old Open1 47 B2 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Tom 1 Hi 48 c3 77 Tom 2 HI Off 77 Tom 2 HI Tom 1 Ht 49 C 3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 50 D3 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 77 Tom 2 Hi Tom 1 Hi 51 Di3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Ride Edge 2 Ride Edge 2 52 E3 106 China Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal China Cymbal CymbalReverse 53 F3 115 Ride Cup Off 114 Ride Jazz Ride Jazz Ride Jazz 54 F 3 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Tambourin Acc2 Tambourin Acc2 55 G3 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal 56 G 3 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Cowbell 88 Cowbell 57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 58 A 3 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Vibraslap 59 B3 114 Ride Jazz Off 113
60. 7 The content of the target card appears Cempa snsuro ree Gn Begs Be Coa zr Card Daue ED i HELLHHTE SET C LIVE SET C ETHICA SET E SD SAVE OPEN CLOSE At this point you can Create a new SET folder see Creating a new SET folder on page 137 Save onto an existing SET folder 8 If you are saving into an existing folder move the desired SET folder to the first line of the display using the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE con trols 9 Press F2 Save to confirm A list of banks on the target card appears Only banks of the selected type are shown 10 Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the target bank to the first line of the display 11 Once the target bank is selected press F2 Save to save the files The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Warning If you confirm any data in the target bank will be deleted When the operation is completed the Wait indicator disappears the source page comes back in the display and you may perform further saving operations Saving a single item You can save a single User item with a single operation 1 Insert the target card into the card drive 2 The whole content All of the internal memory is already selected Press F3 Open to open th
61. 74 M Master Transpose 18 126 Master Tune 125 Master Volume 10 13 Menu 15 Message window 21 MIDI Chord channels 128 Clock 70 127 General MIDI 35 Global channel 35 IN channels 127 Interface 22 37 OUT channels 129 Setting a track for MIDI 78 99 Setup 36 126 Standard MIDI File 70 88 MIDI interface 22 37 MIDI Setup 36 126 Midifile 35 70 88 Mode Backing Sequence 82 87 Program 105 124 Song Play 70 81 Style Play 40 51 Mute 16 24 O Octave Transpose 18 Offset Offset LFO 120 Operating Modes 13 20 OS Operating System Backup 8 140 Update 9 Outputs 10 22 P Pads 18 49 Lock 49 Page 15 19 Pedal 126 Performance 40 Selecting 17 25 Pitch Bend 44 97 Portamento AMS 123 Program Editing 45 98 Selecting 17 26 Program Change 37 Program mode 105 124 R Resonance 112 Alphabetical Index S Scale Lock 50 Main scale 125 Selecting in realtime 34 Select MFX Effect Select 121 Selecting Windows 21 Sequencer Link mode 79 Selecting and switching 73 Sequencer 1 73 Sequencer 2 73 Sequencer 2 effects mode 80 Transport controls 18 Shift 16 Single Touch 14 16 26 Single Touch Settings STS 16 Selecting 27 Song Editing 32 Playback from disk 27 28 73 84 89 Recording 31 82 Selecting 73 84 89 Standard MIDI File 35 Song Play mode 70 81 Speakers On Off 125 Split Point 14 36 Standard MIDI File 35 70 88 Style Ending 14 Fill 14 Intro 15 Recording 52 69 Selecting 14 26 Style Perf
62. AMS Alternate Modulation Source list Intensity to A Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have on filter A For example if AMS is Joystick Y higher settings of this parameter will allow greater change to be applied to LFO1 when you push the joystick 99 99 Intensity to B Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have on filter B see Intensity to A Parameter value PAGE 10 FILTER LFO2 Adjusts the depth of the cyclic modulation applied by LFO2 set on Page 18 LFO2 to the cutoff frequency of filters A and B For more information on the parameters see Page 9 Filter LFO1 on page 114 measure ireneposs sen Eo m Selected Decl Intersite to Br Ha Intercity to B Ta Josstick to Ai 54 Program operating mode 115 Page 10 Filter LFO2 PAGE 11 FILTER EG Here you can make settings for the EG that will produce time varying changes in the cutoff frequency of filters A and B for the selected oscillator The depth of the effect that these settings will have on the filter cutoff frequency is determined by the Velocity and Intensity parameters Cetond Campa measure fremsposs teu FilterEG Isc Selected Qecl Stant Level 35 Attack Time T Attack Level TX
63. Accompaniment Volume Accompaniment Mute Drum Mapping Snare amp Kick Designation Single Touch General controls Master Volume Ensemble Octave Transpose Master Transpose Split Point Style Change Tracks Vol ume Quarter of Tone Assignable Slider Joystick Dial Pads 4 Assignable Pads Stop button Song Play XDS Crossfade Dual Sequencer player 2 Sequencers with separate Start Stop Pause lt lt Rewind and gt gt Fast Forward controls Balance control Lyrics data are displayed on screen Jukebox function SMF Direct Player formats 0 and 1 Song Backing Sequence Easy Record function Full featured sequencer 16 tracks SMF native format Pedals Damper Assignable continuous footswitch Realtime controllers Joystick pitch modulation Assignable slider Pads MIDI IN OUT THRU Individual track assignement Auto setup functions MIDI Setup Audio Inputs 2 x In Line impedance Audio Outputs 2 Main Left Mono Right Main Amplifier 2 x 15 Watt Amplifier Speakers 2 x 10 double cone speakers bass reflex box Power Consumption 26 Watt Dimensions W 41 5 1054mm D 15 5 393mm H 5 9 150mm without music stand Weight 24 8 Ibs 11 25 kg Accessories User s Manual AC Power Adapter Music Stand Options EXP 2 Foot Controller XVP 10 Exp Volume Pedal PS 1 Footswitch DS 1H Damper Ped
64. CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle CastSingle CastSingle 86 D6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 87 D 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 88 E6 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 stadium Off 243 Stadium Off Factory Data Drum Kit instruments 163 120 0 10 Jungle Kit 120 0 11 Techno Kit1 120 0 12 Room Kit2 120 0 13 HipHop Kit2 Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl 9 A 1 13 BD Squash Off 21 BD Hip 3 Off 13 BD Squash Off 13 BD Squash Off 10 A 1 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 Off 11 B 1 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD Off 12 co 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD Off 13 C 0 56 SD Hip 3 Off 56 SD Hip 3 Off 56 SD Hip 3 Off 56 SD Hip 3 Off 14 DO 58 SD Hip 5 Off 58 SD Hip 5 Off 58 SD Hip 5 Off 58 SD Hip 5 Off 15 D 0 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 16 EO 11 BD Gated Off 11 BD Gated Off 11 BD Gated Off 11 BD Gated Off 17 FO 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 18 F 0 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 H
65. FMixersbFAs Send Song Play operating mode 75 Edit page structure Selected Sequencer These indicators show if the currently selected sequencer is Seq1 or Seq2 Go to the Main page and use the A and B VOL UME VALUE buttons to select a sequencer Page This area shows the current page number A H Each pair of VOLUME VALUE buttons select a different parameter of command depending on the edit page PAGE 1 MIXER VOLUME Here you can adjust the volume for each of the 16 sequencer tracks Press both VOLUME VALUE button to mute unmute the corresponding track A muted track remains muted even when selecting a different Song Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again Cohen Compo measure srsmsposs Gm gpg 888 C B oooo Cosmvs Mixer Uo ne g HH asa IIL gea 5 B HI asa HIL ag g 8 TIE asa TTT ges iu TITLE asa Hp 112 8 chord Campo measure Wenepose D prem 888 C B aqm ICU oooo Mixertlnlume 3 TEE asa III gea sj w HIL asa HIL gx fri pp asa LIL gos ia HIL asa TITEL 112 76 Song Play operating mode Page 2 Mixer Pan PAGE 2 MIXER PAN Here you can adjust the pan for each Song track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between
66. Fani LESI Hi Hobe Humber 4 Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alter natively you can select oscillators using the F1 F4 buttons Level Volume of the selected oscillator Note The volume of a Program can be controlled by CC 7 vol ume and 11 expression The resulting level is determined by multiplying the values of CC 7 and 11 The Global MIDI channel is used for control 0 127 Volume level Pan Pan stereo position of the selected oscillator pun This parameter is not available when editing a Drum Pro gram Use the individual Pan control for each key see Pan on page 109 Random The sound will be heard from a different loca tion at each note on L001 Places the sound at far left C064 Places the sound in the center R127 Places the sound to far right Note This can be controlled by CC 10 panpot A CC 10 value of 0 or 1 will place the sound at the far left a value of 64 will place the sound at the location specified by the Pan setting for each oscillator and a value of 127 will place the sound at the far right This is controlled on the global MIDI channel Pan modulation AMS Alternate Modulation Source Selects the source that will modify pan see AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 This change will be relative to the Pan setting Intensity Specifies the depth of the effect produced
67. Filter Type is Low Pass Frequency Resonance the cutoff will have a steeper slope 00 99 Resonance A The resonance emphasizes the overtone components that lie in the region of the cutoff frequency specified by Frequency producing a more distinctive sound Increasing this value will produce a stronger effect 00 99 Resonance value Cutoff frequency value Resonance modulation The effect of resonance Low Pass Low resonance value p High resonance value AMS Alternate Modulation Source Selects the source that will control the Resonance level See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 Intensity AMS Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS Alternate Modulation Source will have on the resonance level specified by Resonance A For example if Velocity has been selected changes in key board velocity will affect the resonance With positive values the resonance will increase as you play more strongly and as you play more softly the resonance will approach the level specified by the Resonance setting With negative values the resonance will decrease as you play more strongly and as you play more softly the resonance will approach the level specified by the Resonance setting The resonance level is determined by adding the Resonance and Intensity AMS Intensity values 99 499 Parame
68. FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps FingerSnaps FingerSnaps 27 D 1 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Zap2 Zap2 28 E1 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Noise White Noise White 29 F1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 DJ Scratch2 DJ Scratch2 30 FHI 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 DJ Scratch2 31 G1 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit DrumStickHit 32 Git1 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Zap1 33 A1 249 Click Off 249 Click Click 34 A 1 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Triangle Open 35 B1 23 BD Pop Kick Off 23 BD Pop Kick BD Pop Kick 36 C2 17 BD House 1 Off 17 BD House 1 BD Terminator BD Gated 37 CH2 126 88 Rimshot Off 140 PR House05 SideStickAmb SideStickDry 38 D2 52 SD Noise Off 70 SD Chili SD Dance SD Processed 39 D 2 127 188 Claps Off 127 88 Claps Hand Claps Hand Claps 40 E2 143 Zap2 Off 124 88 SD SD CrackerRoom SD Ringy 41 F2 133 1 88 Tom Off 257 Tribe Tom Processed Tom Processed 42 F 2 99 HH Old TiteClos 1 130 99 HH Close HH2 Closed1 HH2 Closed2 43 G2 133 188 Tom Off 273 Wind Tom Processed Tom Processed 44 G 2 103 HH AlpoClose Off 100 HH OldClose2 HH1 Foot HH2 Foot 45 A2 133 1 88 Tom Off 296 Amp Noise Tom Processed Tom Processed 46 A 2 101 HH Old Open2 1 131 99 HH Open HH2 Open HH2 Open 47 B2 133 88 Tom Off 139 Real El Tom Tom Processed Tom Processed 48 C3 133 88 Tom Off 139 Real El Tom Tom Processed Tom Processed 49 CH3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 50 D3 133 188 Tom Off 139 Rea
69. For example if you set AMS to Joystick Y and push the joystick the pitch will rise if this parameter is set to a positive value or fall if this parameter is set to a negative value The range is a maximum of one octave 12 00 12 00 Parameter value Pitch EG modulation EG Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the mod ulation that the pitch EG specified on Page 6 Pitch EG will apply to the pitch With a setting of 12 00 the pitch will change a maximum of 1 octave 12 00 12 00 Parameter value 110 Program operating mode Page 4 Pitch LFOT1 EG AMS EG Alternate Modulation Source This parameter selects the source that will modulate the pitch EG of the selected oscillator See AMS Alternate Modula tion Source list on page 123 Intensity AMS Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have For example if you set AMS to Veloc ity and set this value to 12 00 the velocity will control the range of pitch change produced by the pitch EG in a range of 1 octave As you play more softly the pitch change will draw closer to the pitch EG levels Pitch change level Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off Softly playedO Strongly played withO Strongly played with aL1 Intensity Pitch EG setting a positive value negative value Note Intensity Pitch EG and AMS will be
70. Garos Stereo In Stereo Out Left o ii o Wet Dry gk petite Frequency Bottom 0 100 Trim Bandi Band2 Band3 Band4 Bands Band6 Band7 Sets the lower limit of the wah center frequency var a Frequency Top 0 100 m pem EE Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency T Bandi LED Band3 Band4 Band5 Band6 Band7 Sweep Mode Auto D mod LFO Righto o Selects the control from auto wah modulation source and LFO Wet Dry Dae b Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the wah when Sweep Mode D mod Type1 Wide 1 2 Wide 2 3 Wide 3 4 Half Wide 1 5 Half Wide 2 6 Half a Wide 3 7 Low 8 Wide Low 9 Mid 10 Wide Mid 11 High 12 Wide High e T 5 M Selects a combination of center frequencies for each band Sets the response speed when Sweep Mode Auto or D mo Envelope Sens Envelope Sensitivity 0 100 Trim 0 100 PAR b Sets the input level Sets the sensitivity of auto wah we Envelope Shape 100 100 Band1 dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the s of Band 1 Sets the sweep curve of auto wah ws LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Band2 dB 18 0 18 0dB d Sets the gain of Band 2 Sets the LFO speed gt Dm Src Off Tempo 18 0 418 0dB e p bue of Band 3 Sorte d Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz 18 0 18 0dB f prem of Band 4 8 0 1800 Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed 7 BPM MIDI Sync Off On g RAN of Band 5 Te G08 Switches between using the frequency of the LFO spe
71. If the Song number is just 1 2 or 3 digit long dial the number then press ENTER to confirm for example if the Song is number 52 dial 5 2 ENTER Note If no Song corresponds to the dialed number the Song not available message appears Press any button to make it disappear Selecting a Song in the Main page While the S1 or S2 field is selected compose the number corresponding to the Song you wish to select The current folder is the one selected in the Song Select page Selecting a Song in the Lyrics page Compose the number corresponding to the Song you wish to select The current folder is the one selected in the Song Select page REALTIME AND SEQUENCER TRACKS The Pa50SD is equipped with a double sequencer Each Song can play a maximum of 16 tracks for a total of 32 sequencer tracks In addition you can play on the keyboard with four addi tional Realtime tracks Upper 1 3 and Lower You can edit the Volume Mute status and Program selection for these tracks on the main page of the Song Play mode When you enter Song Play mode from the Style Play mode the Realtime tracks are the same as the Style Play mode A quick way to select Programs and Effects for the Realtime tracks is choosing a different Performance MASTER VOLUME BALANCE While the MASTER VOLUME slider controls the general vol ume of the instrument you can use the ACC SEQ VOLUME slider to control only the Sequencer s tracks volume Thi
72. KB Expression option to the pedal or Assignable Slider then press WRITE to save the setting into the Global PAGE 17 R T CONTROLS JOYSTICK This page lets you enable disable the Joystick for each of the Realtime Keyboard tracks Compe measure transpose cun EE E B38 B sp ae E seu2 oooo octave RT Ctl Jouztick B Hin Vid CIN j SUR Won w Bg S sin Wain w mn WO m Here is the edit procedure 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE E H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F3 F4 buttons to select the X or Y parameter for that track 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the status x PPERF gt STS This enables disables the left right movement of the Joystick Pitch Bend and sometimes the sound parameter s control Style Play operating mode 47 Page 16 R T controls Damper Y PERF gt STS This enables disables the front rear movement of the Joystick Y Modulation and sometimes the sound parameter s con trol Y Various controls or non active PAGE 18 R T CONTROLS DYNAMIC RANGE This page lets you program a dynamic range for each of the Realtime Keyboard tracks This is useful to create a sound made of up to three dynamic layers assigning each of the Upper tracks to a different dynamic range As an example you may assign the El Piano 1 Program to the Upper
73. Program Change messages on the Control channel see page 127 cco con2 Pc Bank 1 CCHO PC Bank 2 cc 0 cc 32 PC Bank 3 cc o cc 32 PC Bank 4 11 1 9 8 1 0 7 2 1 0 T a a o0 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 4 3 3 3 3 5 4 4 4 4 6 5 5 5 5 7 6 6 6 6 8 7 7 7 7 cc o cc 32 PC Bank 5 cco PC Bank 6 CCWO CCH32 PC Bank 7 cc o cc 32 PC Bank 8 1 1 T 1 0 7 6 0 7 7 9 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 ra 3 3 3 3 5 4 4 4 4 6 5 5 5 5 7 6 6 6 6 8 7 7 7 7 CCHO CCH32 PC Bank 9 cco PC Bank 10 cCCWO CCH32 PC Bank 11 cc o cc 32 PC Bank 12 7 7 81 0 1 0 7 10 0 7 11 9 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 4 3 3 3 3 5 4 4 4 4 6 5 5 5 5 7 6 6 6 6 8 7 7 7 7 cc o cc 32 PC Bank 13 CCKO PC Bank 14 CCWO CCH32 PC Bank 15 Cc40 CCH32 PC Bank 16 1 47 718 1 0 1 14 0 7 15 0 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 4 3 3 3 3 5 4 4 4 4 6 5 5 5 5 7 6 6 6 6 8 7 7 7 7 cc o CCH32 PC Bank 17 Cc O PC Bank 18 CCWO CCH32 PC Bank
74. Ride Edge 2 Ride Edge 2 60 C4 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open BongoHi Open BongoHi Open 61 C 4 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open BongoLo Open BongoLo Open 62 D4 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap CongaHiMtSlap 63 D 4 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open CongaHi Open 64 E4 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open CongaLo Open 65 F4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 TimbaleHi Rim2 66 F 4 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open TimbaleLo Open 67 G4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Agogo Bell 68 G 4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Agogo Bell 69 A4 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Cabasa Up 70 Ata 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush MaracasPush HH Old Open2 71 B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle SambaWhistle SambaWhistle 72 C5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 73 C 5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short Guiro Short 74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long Guiro Long 75 D 5 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Claves 76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Woodblock1 77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Woodblock1 78 F 5 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi Cuica Hi 79 G5 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo Cuica Lo 80 G 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 J Triangle Mute Triangle Mute 81 A5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open Triangle Open 82 A 5 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Cabasa Down 83 B5 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Sleigh Bell 84 C6 231 Marc Iree Off 231 Marc Tree Marc Tree Marc Tree 85 C 6 178
75. SMF format The application is freely downloadable from www korgpa com Please read the included instructions ENTERING THE RECORD MODE While in the Style Play operating mode press RECORD The following page will appear in the display Cmpa masaurs en Gn pum 5 2258 Em Penod Current Skale Hew Stale iS J Select Current Style to edit the current Style If it is a Factory Style you will not be able to save it on the origi nal location you will select a User Style instead When editing an existing Style the original Style Perfor mance is recalled but the following parameters are reset to their default values Drum Mapping 0 Snare amp Kick Designation Off Program Original Keyboard Range Original This means that you can hear some differences between the Style in play and the same Style being edited for example resetting the Drum Mapping may lead to some instrument s replacement Style Record mode 53 Style Import Export After editing the Style please save it see Exit and Save Abort Style below Then edit the Style Performance to adjust the track s settings Tempo Volume Pan FX Send see page 43 and following in the Style Play operating mode chapter and save it by pressing the WRITE button Select New Style to start from a new empty Style A default Style Performance will b
76. Sets the center frequency of Band 1 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 t Fx 006 b Q 0 5 10 0 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 t Fx 006 Sets the gain of Band 1 Gain dB 18 418dB E Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 5 00kHz Sets the gain of Band 1 Sets the center frequency of Band 2 E Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 5 00kHz c lQ 0 5 10 0 Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 t Fx 006 Q 0 5 10 0 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 t Fx 006 Sets the gain of Band 2 Gain dB 18 418dB E Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Sets the gain of Band 2 Sets the center frequency for Band 3 E Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz a 0 5 10 0 Sets the center frequency for Band 3 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 us Fx 006 a 0 5 10 0 Gain dB 18 418dB Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 t Fx 006 Sets the gain of Band 3 Gain dB 18 418dB E Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Sets the gain of Band 3 Sets the center frequency for Band 4 E Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz e Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the center frequency for Band 4 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 us Fx 006 Q 0 5 10 0 Gain dB 18 418dB Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 t Fx 006 Sets the gain of Band 4 Gain dB 18 418dB W Frequency Bottom 0 100 Sets the gain of Band 4 i Sets the lower limit of the wah center frequency ts Fx 009 t X Exciter Blend 100 100 Frequency Top 0 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter
77. Tap1 Delay Levai Tapa Delay Fs SO i Tap3 Delay I fa SS 4 tape Delay Level Pan IES om Paro hegre pesce i LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 13 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Tap1 000 msec 0 570msec Sets the Tap1 LFO phase 0 degrees delay time Depth 0 30 b Sets the Tap1 chorus depth Level 0 30 Sets the Tap1 output level Pan L6 L1 C R1 R6 Sets the Tap1 stereo image Tap2 180 msec 0 570msec Sets the Tap2 LFO phase 180 degrees delay time Depth 0 30 Sets the Tap2 chorus depth c Level 0 30 Sets the Tap2 output level Pan L6 L1 C R1 R6 Sets the Tap2 stereo image Tap3 090 msec 0 570msec Sets the Tap3 LFO phase 90 degrees delay time Depth 0 30 j Sets the Tap3 chorus depth Level 0 30 Sets the Tap3 output level Pan L6 L1 C R1 R6 Sets the Tap3 stereo image Tap4 270 msec 0 570msec Sets the Tap4 LFO phase 270 degrees delay time Depth 0 30 Sets the Tap4 chorus depth e Level 0 30 Sets the Tap4 output level Pan L6 L1 C R1 R6 Sets the Tap4 stereo image Tap1 Feedback 100 100 Sets the Tap1 feedback amount Dz z f Src Off tempo Selects the modulation source of Tap1 feedback amount and effect balance Amt 100 100 Sets the Tap1 feedback amount and modulation amount Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 D g Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance o
78. and play it back while in Backing Sequence mode Note When in the Main page Backing Sequence Play the key board doesn t play 1 Enter the Backing Sequence mode The Backing Sequence Playback page appears see page 83 Compe mossurs transpose E GD J fips UD B 2B n mD oooo Cesme me Ba Menu Sona Lomd Sore Meteo OP Seve mon Medved 4d Sel Teneo Tenece Aubo 2 Press one of the B Load Song VOLUME VALUE but tons to load a Song see Load Song page on page 84 You can load any Standard Midi File files with the MID or KAR extension 3 Press PLAY STOP to start the playback Press PLAY STOP again to stop the playback The play back is automatically stopped at the end of the Song REALTIME RECORDING MODE While in Backing Sequence mode you can record a new Song in realtime mode i e recording exactly what you play Realtime Keyboard tracks will be Song tracks 1 4 Pads will be Song tracks 5 8 while Style tracks will be Song tracks 9 16 1 Enter the Backing Sequence mode 2 Press RECORD You will be prompted to select the Real time Recording mode or the Chord Acc Step Mode z chon Campo measure fremsposs BB C B eo ats play Feo Realtime Recording ChoncdFiec Shee Mode amp 3 Press one
79. but not the original note 48 Style Play operating mode Page 20 Style controls Drum Fill E nsemble PERF STS Harmonization type Duet Adds a single note to the melody Close Adds a closed position chord to the melody Open 1 Adds an open position chord to the melody Open 2 As the above but with a different algorhythm Block Block harmonization very typical of jazz music Power Ensemble Adds a fifth and an octave to the melody as heard in hard rock Typical of jazz this option adds a perfect fourth and a minor seventh under the melody Fourths UP As the above but with notes added over the melody Fifths This adds a series of Fifths below the original note Octave Adds one or more octaves to the melody Dual This option adds to the melody line a second note at a fixed interval set with the Note parameter When selecting this option a trans position value appears 24 24 semitones to the original note Brass Typical Brass section harmonization Reed Typical Reed section harmonization Trill This option trills the melody note You can set the trill speed by using the Tempo parameter see below Note You must play at least two notes with this option The played note is repeated in sync with the Tempo parameter see below When playing a chord only the first note is repeated Echo As the Repeat option but with the repeated notes fading away after the time set with the Fe
80. f GS amp Parameters Internal External Both The track plays the sounds generated by the internal sound engine It does not play an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT The track plays an external instrument con nected to the MIDI OUT It does not play the internal sounds therefore saving polyphony When a track is set to External a strings of transmitted Control Change and Program Change data is shown instead of the Program name assigned to the track In the following example CC 0 is the Control Change 0 Bank Select MSB CC 32 is the Control Change 32 Bank Select LSB PC is the Program Change izi 3 8 cc O CCH32 PC The track plays both the internal sounds and an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT PAGE 9 JUKEBOX The Jukebox function lets you play a list of Songs 127 max at the simple touch of a button You can play a Jukebox file by selecting it in the Song Select page see Playing a Jukebox file on page 74 just as if it was a normal Song Chod tempe meaeura transpose L mem B88 quo EL Sage ew JE Lizt sHEM HABE DBL Sure mid pt BEP Likema mid 4 HE HD IE DEL In this page you can create edit and save a Jukebox file If a Jukebox file is already selected into a Sequencer you will enter this page with that file ready to be edit
81. obtained by adding the Depth value to the Envelope Amount value multiplied by the input signal level The following example indicates that the Depth is 0 with an LFO Frequency of 1 0Hz and the maximum input and that the Depth is 100 with a Frequency of 8 0Hz with zero input LFO Frequency Hz 8 0 Envelope Amount Hz 7 0 196 Effects Mod P Shift Depth z100 Envelope Amount 100 Depth GOD Shimmer Sets the depth of LFO modulation Dz Level nr Envelope Fo Frequency Hz 8 0 Src Off Tempo S Dentro monet tH e Selects the modulation source of the depth of modulation Envelope Amount 100 Louder Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the depth of modula tion Time Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 ji mod pd 034 Auto Pan D t Src Off Tempo Stereo Auto Pan Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 This Auto Pan effect pans sound between left and right It is Tabla Sate the modulation amunt of the efiact bal stereo and shifting the left and right LFO phases from each ance on page 175 other will simulate the sound of the left and right channels crossing over each other by turns or chasing each other a LFO Shape You can change the panning curve by modifying the LFO nis In Stereo
82. od ErntaerccE Exit Zencel Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a measure and press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort SHIFT PAUSE While the sequencer is running keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the PAUSE button to display the event that is currently playing This is called the Catch Locator function INSERT Press the INSERT button to insert a new event at the current shown Position The default values are Type Note Pitch C4 Velocity 100 Length 192 Note You can t insert new events in an empty non recorded Song To insert an event you must first insert some empty mea sures To use the Insert function press MENU and one of the F VOLUME VALUE buttons then press the PAGE button twice DELETE Press the DELETE button to delete the event shown in the display PAGE 25 EVENT FILTER This page is where you can select the event types to be shown in the Event Edit page You can access this page by pressing the PAGE button while in the Event Edit page Cehord tsmps measure Granapoes an J ig Mi E B oooo ochwa s Edit Eu Filter Hote OFF Micki OFF Frog OFF Pick OFF Chel OFF Bend OFF Teeter OFF Fathi OFF Turn On the filter for all event types you do not wish to see in the Event Edit page Note Notes Prog Program Change values Ctrl Control Change events T Meter Tempo and Met
83. remap to 40 120 0 48 OrchestraK v 120 0 49 remap to 48 120 0 50 Bdrum amp Sdrum 120 0 51 remap to 116 120 O0 52 55 remap to 48 120 0 56 SFX Kit v 120 0 157 63 remap to 56 120 0 64 Percus Kit1 120 0 65 Latin P Kit 120 0 66 TRI Per KIT 120 0 67 i30 Perc Kit 120 O 68 71 remap to 64 120 0 72 115 remap to 0 120 0 116 Arabian Kit 1 120 0 117 Arabian Kit 2 120 0 1118 127 remap to 0 Program Change ccoo CC32 PC Name GM2 120 0 0 Std Kit1 Vv 120 0 1 Std Kit2 120 0 2 Std Kit3 120 0 3 AcousticKit 120 0 4 Std Kit4 120 0 5 7 remap to 0 120 0 8 Room Kit1 v 120 0 9 HipHop Kit1 120 0 10 Jungle Kit 120 0 11 Techno Kit1 120 0 12 Room Kit2 120 0 13 HipHop Kit2 120 0 14 Techno Kit2 120 0 15 Techno Kit3 120 0 16 Power Kit1 Vv 120 0 17 Power Kit2 120 0 18 23 remap to 16 120 0 24 Electro Kit v 120 0 25 Analog Kit v 120 0 26 House Kit1 Factory Data 161 Drum Kit instruments DRUM KIT INSTRUMENTS Legend In the Drum Kit 120 0 0 Std Kitt 120 0 1 Std Kit2 120 0 2 Std Kit3 tables the numer 120 x x LL Sample Excl p NEL an Sample Excl before each Drum Kit 9 A 1 17 BD House 1 Off 17 BD House 1 Off 17
84. see Chord Recognition Mode on page 50 FULL UPPER The Upper 1 Upper 2 and or Upper 3 tracks play on the whole keyboard range The Lower track does not play By default selecting this keyboard mode automatically selects the Full chord scanning mode see Chord Recognition Mode on page 50 STYLE CHANGE This button turns the Style Change function on or off ON When you select a Performance the Style could change according to which Style num ber is memorized onto the Performance OFF When you select a Performance the Style and Style track settings remain unchanged Only Realtime Keyboard tracks settings are changed PERFORM Press this button to use the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section to select a Performance B PROGRAM Press this button to use the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section to select a Program and assign it to the selected track PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section PERF STYLE gt STS Use these buttons to open the Program Select or Performance Select window and select a Program or a Performance See Selecting a Program on page 26 or Selecting a Perfor mance on page 25 For a list of available Programs see Pro grams Program Change order on page 154 The leftmost button selects the upper or lower row of Pro gram or Performance banks Press it repeatedly to select one of the rows After both LEDs have consecutively turned on press the button again to turn them off UPPER LED ON Upper row
85. see Glo bal edit environment on page 125 and press ing the WRITE button MAKING A BACKUP COPY OF SYSTEM FILES Before starting playing with your new Pa50SD we suggest you make a back up copy of all system data including Pro grams Performances and Styles in case the internal data is changed To backup the Operating System please see Save OS on page 140 To backup the Factory Data Styles Programs see Backup Data on page 141 LOADING THE OPERATING SYSTEM Your Pa50SD can be constantly updated as new versions of the operating system are released by KORG You can down load the operating system from www korgpa com Please read the Readme file included with the operating system itself You can see which version of the operating systems is installed in your Pa50SD by keeping the SHIFT button pressed and pressing the ENTER and EXIT buttons together The operating system version number will appear in the dis play Press EXIT to close the message window To load a new system follow these instructions 1 Copy the three operating system s files in the root of an SD card These are the needed files BPa50SD Sys NBPa50SD Sys OsPa50SD lzx 2 Turn the instrument off and insert the card containing the operating system into the card drive Welcome Loading the operating system 3 Turn the instrument on A message appears in the dis play asking if you want to load the operating system 4 Press ENT
86. select an edit section using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons select an edit page using PAGE or press EXIT to exit the menu When in an edit page press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Song operating mode heed Cismps fmeseure Wramsposs apap ELLO ee Son Edit MEHU Mixer Tun Traner el Effects Del Dut Inz Track Edit Cops Duantize Evert Edit Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE Select an edit section from the Menu and or use the PAGE buttons to reach the desired page Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Song mode All edit pages share the same structure Song icon Page header Page number Cimpa ien gee c lo k C0 oooo measure transi fixer te lune t JP ILE eoe HI esa B HII esae III eo g HIL esa HIL gs a HIL esae HHI 112 Track status icons Song icon When on this icon indicates that the instrument is in Song mode Page header The header shows the name of the current edit page Usually the header is divided in a first word identifying the section name e g Mixer FX Send is a Mixer section page and a second word referring to the page name e g FX Send Section name Page name FMixer FA Se
87. to assign to all Songs a Reverb suitable for the venue where you are performing without having to modify any of the Songs This is true only for non Pa50SD 80 Songs Globally setting the Internal External status allows you for example to send the Piano track of all Songs to a dedicated expander just set globally the Piano track to the External mode The Play Mute status allows you to globally mute tracks that you don t want to play during a show for example the melody track This is ture only for non Pa50SD 80 Songs For more information on the Internal FX settings for the Song Play mode see Page 3 Mixer FX send A B or Page 3 Mixer FX send C D and following on page 76 Here is the procedure to save the Seq1 Seq2 Setup in mem ory 1 Press WRITE The Write page appears Campo meseure transpose Togga ES w WT TES Fress Entensdez to memercize the Seq 14 2 Setue 2 Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort If you confirm the Setup is saved into the Global You may then save this Setup on the card together with the Global data MAIN PAGE Press SONG PLAY to access this page from another operating mode Note When switching from Style Play to Song Play the Song Setup is automatically selected and various track parameters may change Press EXIT NO to access this page from the Menu or any of the Song Play edit pa
88. you should increase the output level of the connected device if it sounds fine it s ok if it distorts you should lower the level a little until the sounds is fine again MIDI CONNECTIONS You can play the internal sounds of your Pa50SD with an external controller i e a master keyboard a MIDI guitar a wind controller a MIDI accordion or a digital piano 1 Connect a standard MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT of your controller to the MIDI IN connector on the Pa50SD 2 Select a transmission MIDI channel on your controller Some controllers like the MIDI accordions usually transmit on more than one channel see more informa tion in the MIDI chapter 3 On the Pa50SD select the MIDI Setup that best fit your controllers type see Page 4 MIDI Setup on page 126 DAMPER PEDAL Connect a Damper Sustain pedal to the DAMPER connec tor on the back panel Use a KORG PSI PS2 or DS1H foot switch pedal or a compatible one To switch the Damper polarity see Damper Pol Damper Polarity on page 126 DEMO Listen to the built in Demo Songs to appreciate the power of the Pa50SD There are 16 Demo Songs to choose from Start up 11 Damper Pedal 1 Press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY buttons together Their LEDs start blinking At this point if you don t press any other button all the Demo Songs will be played back 2 Choose a page using the PAGE buttons There are two different pages in the Demo
89. 0 1 O Guitar Bld1 0 2 0 Groove Bld 2 1 Pop Beat 1 Guitar Bld2 1 Diva 3 2 Stndrd amp 8Beat 2 8Bt Analog1 2 Rock Ballad 4 3 Unplug8Bt 1 3 Analogyst 3 Folk Ballad 5 4 Love 8 Beat 4 8Bt Analog2 4 PopBallad 2 6 5 Half Beat 5 Trendy Beat 5 HalfTimeBld 7 6 UK 8 Beat 6 Slow Ballad 6 Country Bld 8 7 8BeatGroove 7 6Strings Bt 7 14 4 Ballad 9 8 UK RnB 8 Std16Beat 1 8 _ Love Ballad 10 9 PopBallad 1 9 Std16Beat 2 9 NaturalBeat 11 10 HipHop Beat 10 Unpl 16Beat 10 Celtic Bld 12 11 LightRock 1 11 Pop 16Beat1 11 16BtAnalog1 13 12 LightRock 2 12 Pop 16Beat2 12 Color Beat 14 13 Miami Beat 13 Cinema Bld 13 PopBallad 3 15 14 ClassicBeat 14 Windy Beat 14 8Bt Analog3 16 15 Unplug8Bt 2 15 Home Beat 15 16BtAnalog2 Li CCHO CC 32 PC Bank Ballroom CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank Dance CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank Rock 1 0 3 0 Slow Pop 0 4 0 HouseGarage 0 5 0 Open Rock 1 2 1 Slow Rock 1 1 House 1 Open Rock 2 3 2 Slow Rock 2 2 Dream 2 Pop Rock 4 3 Unpl SIRock 3 Techno 3 Fire Rock 5 4 BigBnd Fox1 4 Underground 4 Hard Rock 6 5 Slow Waltz1 5 _ Progressive 5 Heavy Rock 7 6 Slow Waltz2 6 Jungle 6 RockShuffle 8 7 Foxtrot 1 7 Rap 7 Rock Ballad 9 8 BigBnd Fox2 8 Hip Hop 8 Half Time 10 9 Slow Fox 9 Disco 70 9 Rock 6 8 11 10 Foxtrot 2 10 80 s Dance 10 Abbey Road 12 11 Operetta 11 Love Disco 11 Surf Rock 13 12 BigBnd Fox3 12 Disco Party 12 Pop Shuffle 14 13 Charleston 13 Disco Funky 13 BluesShuffl
90. 1 7 Pulse Clav Piano v 121 2 7 Clav Wah Piano 121 3 7 Clav Snap Piano 121 4 7 Sticky Clav Piano 121 0 8 Celesta Mallet amp Bell v 121 0 9 Glocken Mallet amp Bell v 121 1 9 Sistro Mallet amp Bell 121 0 10 Music Box Mallet amp Bell v 121 1 10 Orgel Mallet amp Bell 121 0 11 Vibraphone Mallet amp Bell v 121 1 11 Vibrap Wide Mallet amp Bell v 121 2 11 Vibraphone2 Mallet amp Bell 121 0 12 Marimba Mallet amp Bell v 121 1 12 MarimbaWide Mallet amp Bell v 121 2 12 RimbaKeyOff Mallet amp Bell 121 3 12 MonkeySkuls Mallet amp Bell 121 4 12 Log Drum Drum amp Perc 121 5 12 MalletClock Mallet amp Bell 121 6 12 Balaphon Mallet amp Bell 121 0 13 Xylophone Mallet amp Bell v 121 0 14 TubularBell Mallet amp Bell v 121 1 14 Church Bell Mallet amp Bell v 121 2 14 Carillon Mallet amp Bell v 121 3 14 ChurchBell2 Mallet amp Bell 121 0 15 Dulcimer Mallet amp Bell v 121 1 15 Santur Mallet amp Bell 121 0 16 Drawb Organ Organ 1 v 121 1 16 DetDrawbOrg Organ 1 v 121 2 16 It60 sOrgan Organ 1 v 121 3 16 DrawbOrgan2 Organ 1 v 121 4 16 DarkJazzOrg Organ 1 121 5 16 IperDarkOrg Organ 1 121 6 16 FullDrawbar Organ 1 121 7 16 DWGS Organ Organ 1 121 8 16 Jazz Organ Organ 1 121 9 16 GospelOrgan Organ 1 121 10 16 Good Old B Organ 1 121 11 16 VOX Legend Organ 1 121 12 16 ArabianOrg Organ 1 121 0 17 Perc Organ Organ 1 v 121 1 17 Det PercOrg Organ 1 v 121 2 17 Perc Organ2
91. 15 14 Quick Step 14 Disco Gully 14 60 s Rock 16 15 New Jive 15 Twist 15 Rock amp Roll CCHO CC 32 PC Bank Soul amp Funk CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank World 1 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank World 2 1 0 6 0 Rubber Funk 0 7 0 OberkrWaltz 0 8 0 Bluegrass 2 1 Groove Funk 1 OberkrPolka 1 Country 8Bt 3 2 Acid Jazz 2 Bavar Pop1 2 Country16Bt 4 3 Double Beat 3 Bavar Pop 2 3 CountryBeat 5 4 Groove 4 Party Polka 4 Mod Country 6 5 Jazz Funk 5 Pop Polka 5 CntryBoogie 7 6 Al Swing 6 Flipper 6 8 6 CountryShf1 8 7 HipHop Funk 7 Flipper 4 4 7 CountryShf2 9 8 HipHop Soul 8 Schlager 1 8 Country Bld 10 9 MotownShufl 9 Schlager 2 9 Country 3 4 11 10 PopBallad 4 10 Schlager 3 10 Orleans 12 11 RhythmBlues 11 Schlager 4 11 Jig 13 12 Soul 12 PopSchlager 12 CelticDream 14 13 Memphis 13 Trucker 13 Norteno 15 14 Motown 14 Cajun 14 Quebradita 16 15 Gospel 15 Zydeco 15 Tejano Factory Data Styles CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank World 3 CCHO CC 32 PC Bank Latin 1 CC 0
92. 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 55 G3 107 Splash Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 56 G 3 136 88 Cowbe Off 225 Cowbe Off 225 Cowbe Off 136 88 Cowbe Off 57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 58 A 3 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 59 B3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 mRide Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 60 C4 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 61 CH4 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open Off 62 D4 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 63 D 4 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 64 E4 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 65 F4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 66 F 4 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 67 G4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 68 G 4 224 lAgogo Be Off 224 lAgogo Be Off 224 Agogo Be Off 224 Agogo Be Off 69 A4 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 70 A 4 101 HH Old
93. 2B M1 Organ 121 5 17 Stereo Dist 121 8 30 Jazz Organ 121 8 16 Nylon Gtr 2 121 3 24 Dist Organ 121 5 18 Gtr Strings 121 7 24 RotaryOrgan 121 8 17 FingerK Off 121 7 25 DarkJazzOrg 121 4 16 St12Strings 121 5 25 Bx3ShortDec 121 7 17 gene Gultar 15 26 SuperBXPerc 121 6 18 SingleCoil 121 6 27 Percuss BX3 121 4 177 Clean Funk 121 8 28 Killer B 121 2 18 JoystGtr Y 121 3 30 Drawb Organ 121 0 16 Reso Guitar 121 12 25 DetDrawbOrg 121 1 16 St Folk Gtr 121 3 25 it60 sOrgan 121 Z T6 Steel amp Body 121 3 25 DrawbOrgan2 121 3 16 Hackbrett 121 6 25 Old Wheels 121 3 17 see Man 121 3 28 Perc Organ 121 0 17 DetCleanGtr 121 1 27 Det PercOrg 121 1 17 R amp R Guitar 121 a 28 Perc Organ2 121 2 17 OverdriveG 121 0 29 Rock Organ 121 0 18 Ukulele 121 1 24 Good Old B 121 10 16 Mandolin 121 2 25 Dirty B 121 3 18 Mandol KOff 121 10 25 IperDarkOrg 121 5 16 MandoTrem 121 11 25 FullDrawbar 121 6 16 Banjo 121 0 105 DWGS Organ 121 7 16 BanjoKeyOff 121 1 105 GospelOrgan 121 9 16 Bouzouki 121 5 104 PercShorDec 121 8 18 Tambra 121 6 104 Perc Wheels 121 9 18 Finger Tips 121 8 25 DirtyJazOrg 121 7 18 MidToneGtr 121 2 27 VOX Legend 121 1 16 Chorus Gtr 121 3 27 TeknoOrgBas 121 6 17 ProcesElGtr 121 5 27 ArabianOrg 121 12 16 Newstra Gtr 121 7 27 Bank Organ 2 DistRhytmGt 121 2 30 WetDistGtr 121 6 30 PipeMisturg 121 3 13 SoloDistGtr T27 7 30 FlautoPipes 121 3 20 L amp R ElL Gtr 121 9 27 Pipe Tutti T l B 13 L amp R El Gtr2 121 10 27 PositiveOrg 121 7 19 RhythmelGtr 121 7 28 Ch
94. 4 INTRO 1 2 FILL 1 2 ENDING 1 2 Press START STOP again to stop the playback Note When doing the above tests the Fingered 3 Chord Scanning mode is automatically selected EXIT AND SAVE ABORT STYLE When finished editing you can save your Style in memory or abort any change Press WRITE or RECORD to go to the Write page see The Write window on page 54 Note When saving the Style in memory Pa50SD automatically compresses it to reduce its size and save memory Hint Save often while recording to avoid accidentally losing your Style 54 Style Record mode The Write window LIST OF RECORDED EVENTS The Style Record mode filters out some events that may dam age the right operation of the Style Here are the recorded events and the most important filtered out events THE WRITE WINDOW This page appears when you press the WRITE or RECORD button while in Record mode Here you can save the recorded or edited Style in memory Chord tempe measure rue GED a 0G Se ag 7 Write to Stale name HeuBozza Tot LH 81 Bossa Foot To save the Style to the internal memory press the A or B VOLUME VALUE buttons then press ENTER The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort To return to the previous Style Record page leaving all untouched and the Style unsaved press EXIT To delete
95. 5 24 AcGtrKeyOff Guitar 121 2 32 Bass amp Ride Bass 121 6 24 Spanish Gtr Guitar 121 0 33 Finger Bass Bass v 121 7 24 Gtr Strings Guitar 121 1 33 Finger Slap Bass v 121 0 25 SteelGuitar Guitar v 121 2 33 Fing ElBass Bass 121 1 25 12StringGtr Guitar v 121 3 33 FingElBass2 Bass 121 2 25 Mandolin Guitar v 121 4 33 FingElBass3 Bass 121 3 25 Steel amp Body Guitar v 121 5 33 Stick Bass Bass 121 4 25 Steel Gtr 2 Guitar 121 0 34 Picked Bass Bass v 121 5 25 St12Strings Guitar 121 1 34 Pick ElBass Bass 121 6 25 Hackbrett Guitar 121 2 34 PickElBass2 Bass 121 7 25 FingerK Off Guitar 121 3 34 Stein Bass Bass 121 8 25 Finger Tips Guitar 121 4 34 Gtr Bass Bass 121 9 25 St Folk Gtr Guitar 121 5 34 Bass Mute Bass 121 10 25 Mandol KOff Guitar 121 0 35 Fretl Bass Bass v 121 11 25 MandoTrem Guitar 121 1 35 Fret Bass2 Bass 121 12 25 Reso Guitar Guitar 121 2 35 Fretless Sw Bass 121 0 26 Jazz Guitar Guitar v 121 3 35 Sweet Fret Bass 121 1 26 PedSteelGtr Guitar v 121 4 35 DarkR amp BBass Bass 121 2 26 Club J Gtr1 Guitar 121 0 36 Slap Bass 1 Bass v 121 3 26 Club J Gtr2 Guitar 121 1 36 SuperSwBass Bass 121 4 26 Ped Steel 2 Guitar 121 2 36 SuperSwBas2 Bass 121 0 27 CleanGuitar Guitar v 121 0 37 Slap Bass 2 Bass v 121 1 27 DetCleanGtr Guitar v 121 1 37 Thumb Bass Bass 121 2 27 MidToneGtr Guitar v 121 2 37 Dyna Bass Bass 121 3 27 Chorus Gtr Guitar 121 0 38 SynthBass 1 Bass v
96. Arabian Kit 2 Note Sample Exd Sample Exd Sample Excl Sample Excl 89 F6 356 Ramazan DVL1 3 175 Djembe Open 3 90 F 6 358 Ramazan DVL3 3 301 Dbk Tky Open 3 91 G6 355 Kup2 5 312 Bells Open 5 92 G 6 83 Tom Jazz Hi 5 323 Sagat HalfOpen 5 93 A6 355 Kup2 5 324 Sagat Close 5 94 A 6 354 Kup 1 Off 351 Davul Off 95 B6 2 BD Dry 3 Off 5 BD Jazz Off 96 C7 354 Kup 1 Off 361 Tef3 Off Factory Data Drum Kit instruments 169 120 0 50 Bdrum amp Sdrum 120 0 56 SFX Kit 120 0 64 Percus Kit1 120 0 65 Latin P Kit Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Exc Sampe Excl 0 C 1 257 Tribe Off 1 C 1 142 Zap1 Off 2 D 1 133 88 Tom Off 3 D 1 123 88 BD Off 4 E 1 123 88 BD Off 5 F 1 22 BD Hip 4 Off 6 F 1 23 BD Pop Kick Off 7 G 1 19 BD Hip 1 Off 8 G 1 18 BD House 2 Off 9 A 1 28 BD Pop 99 Off 10 A 1 123 88 BD Off 11 B 1 138 FM El Tom O 12 co 28 BD Pop 99 Off 13 CHO 27 BD Amb Rocker Off 14 DO 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 181 Guiro Short Off 15 D 0 24 BD Dance 99 Off 209 Tambourin Push Off 16 EO 23 BD Pop Kick Off 210 Tambourin Pull Off 17 FO 22 BD Hip 4 Off 211 Tambourin Acc1 Off 18 F 0 2
97. BD Deep 88 BD Deep 88 Tom 2 Floor 12 CO 124 88 SD Off 124 88 S5D 88 SD Tom 2 Lo 13 C 0 50 SD Dance Off 50 SD Dance SD Jazz Ring Tom 2 Hi 14 DO 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo SD Amb Piccolo SD Dry 2 15 D 0 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 25 BD Ambi Kick BD Amb Rocker BD Jazz 16 EO 9 BD Terminator Off 9 BD Terminator BD Pillow BD Pillow 17 FO 65 SD Vintage4 Off 65 SD Vintage4 SD Full Room FingerSnaps 18 F 0 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 HH1 Closed2 HH1 Closed1 19 GO 22 BD Hip 4 Off 22 BD Hip 4 BD Dry 3 20 G 0 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 SideStickDry 21 AO 66 SD Vintage5 Off 66 SD Vintage5 SD BrushTap1 22 A 0 310 Mouth Harp Off 310 Mouth Harp SD BrushTap1 23 BO 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit DrumStickHit 24 C1 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch SD Orch 25 CHT 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch RolT SD Orch Roll 26 D1 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps FingerSnaps FingerSnaps 27 D 1 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Zap2 Zap2 28 E1 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Noise White Noise White 29 F1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 DJ Scratch2 DJ Scratch2 30 FHI 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 DJ Scratch2 31 G1 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit DrumStickHit 32 Git1 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Zap1 33 A1 249 Click Off 249 Click Click 34 A 1 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Triangle Open 35 B1 28 BD Pop 99 Off 21 BD Hip 3 BD Pillow 36 c2 24 BD Dance 99 Off 11 BD Gated BD SoftRoom BD Jazz 37 CH2 141 PR House06 Off 73 SideStickKAm
98. BD House 1 Of 10 A 1 125 99 SD Off 125 99 SD Off 125 99 SD Off name is the Bank Select 11 B 1 123 88 BD O 123 88 BD O 123 88 BD O MSB CC00 Bank 12 co 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD Off Select LSB CC32 Pro 13 CHO 37 SD Full Room Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 38 SD Off Center Off 14 DO 48 SD Processed 1 48 SD Processed Off 48 SD Processed Off gram Change PC num 15 D 0 0 BD Dry i Off 6 BD Pillow Off 6 BD Pillow Off ber Sample enlists both 16 EO 12 BD Tight Off 27 BD Amb Rocker Off 27 BD Amb Rocker Off 17 FO 31 SD Dry 1 Off 39 SD Jazz Ring Off 42 SD BrushHit Off the sample number in 18 F 0 87 HHT Closed2 1 87 HHiClosed2 T 87 HHT Closed2 1 memory and the sample 19 GO 2 BD Dry3 Of 0 _ BD Dry1 Of 5 BD Jazz Off name Excl is the Exlcusive 20 G 0 73 SideStickAmb Off 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry Off 21 AO 120 SD Orch 7 32 SD Dry2 7 69 SD Brasser 7 parameter when a note is 22 AS0 119 SD Orch Roll 7 49 SD CrackerRoom 7 32 SD Dry2 Off struck all notes with the 23 BO 74 DrumStickHit Oo 74 DrumStickHit Oo 74 DrumsStickHit Oo same Exclusive number 24 C1 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 25 C 1 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll 7 are stopped A right point 26 D1 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 27 D 1 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off mg ATOW indicates a 28 ET 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise Wh
99. DACULI TrksBHll Resol A tEEH di h Eala BothowtG 1 Torts After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort E CV Style Element Chord Variation Non editable These read only parameters show which Style Element and Chord Variation are currently selected for edit ing See the Main page E Style Element and CV Chord Variation parameters on page 55 for information on select ing a different Style Element and Chord Variation Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected Drum Acc5 Selected track Resol Resolution This parameter sets the quantization after recording For example when you select 1 8a all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 division No quanti win N j jD iD 1 8 2 IE 1x 1 4 S 1 32 J 1 4 Grid resolution in musical values An a after the value means no swing A b f after the value means swing quantization S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to quantize If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the ke
100. Dry Dz LFO OSC Mode Note Key Follow Fixed a Determines whether the oscillator frequency follows the note number or whether it is fixed Note Interval 48 0 Sets the pitch difference from the note number when OSC Mode Note Key p Follow va Note Fine 100 100 Fine adjustment of the oscillator frequency iS Fixed Frequency Hz 10 0 80 0Hz Sets the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode Fixed Drez Src Off Tempo C Selects the modulation source for the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode Fixed Amt 80 80Hz Sets the oscillator frequency modulation amount when OSC Mode Fixed Envelope Pre LPF 1 100 d Sets the upper limit of the frequency range for which very low harmonics are added i Envelope Sens Envelope Sensitivity 0 100 Sets the sensitivity with which very low harmonics are added e Envelope Shape 100 100 Sets the oscillator s volume envelope curve Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dz f Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a OSC Mode b Note Interval b Note Fine The OSC Mode parameter selects the oscillator opera tion mode When Note Key Follow is selected the oscil lator s frequency
101. E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE buttons 5 Once the folder is selected press SHIFT F2 6 A dialog box will appear asking you to insert a new card into the card drive Insert the card and press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Note The text file will contain a list of mid kar and jbx files only i e the files you can select using the numeric keypad see Selecting a Song composing its progressive num ber on page 70 Folders and different kinds of files will not be included When saved the text file will be named after the selected folder For example a folder named Dummy will generate a Dummy txt file If a file with the same name already exists on the card it will be overwritten without waiting for any confir mation A file containing the list of all valid files contained into the root of the card will generate a Root txt file The list will include the progressive number assigned to each Song file names in MS DOS format 8 3 the total number of files in the list For the correct display and printing of the list on a personal computer use a fixed size i e non proportional character in your text editor Warning While the list may contain more than 9999 files you can t select Songs outside the 0001 9999 range when using the numeric keypad How to save a list of Songs contained in a Jukebox file 1 Press SONG PLAY to select the Song Play oper
102. Effects Pitch Phase Mod 024 RandomPhser Stereo Random Phaser This is a stereo phaser The effect uses a step shape waveform and random LFO for modulation creating a unique phasing effect Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Dry V gt Phaser Resonance gt Phaser Hah ene Right o I y 75 LFO Phase Sy LFO Waveform Step Tri Step Sin Random a Selects LFO Waveform 6 Fx 010 b LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 010 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed ts Fx 010 Dyer Src Off Tempo c Selects the modulation source commonly used for LFO speed and step speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed LFO Step Freq Frequency Hz 0 05 50 00Hz d Sets the LFO step speed t Fx 010 Dyar Amt 50 00 50 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO step speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes ts Fx 009 eye BPM MIDI 40 240 e Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo 137009 010 Base Note A d d 45 3 354 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 Times X1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 Step Base Note A ds A Da D Ja J Ja d 0 Selects the type of notes to s
103. External l CC 32 PC Both The track plays both the internal sounds and an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT PAGE 16 R T CONTROLS DAMPER This page lets you enable disable the Damper pedal for each of the Realtime Keyboard tracks Chord tempe measure engen Go Spes RE ELE RT Ctl Dmer Exern mg Dun Eum E j amp Din E W Bg Dim On m Din Er w D Damper PERF STS On When you press the Damper pedal and release the keys the track s sound is kept sustained Off The Damper pedal is not active on any track set to this status E Expression PERF STS This parameters allows you to switch the Expression control on off on each individual Realtime track The Expression control is a relative level control always subtracted from the Volume value of the track As an example imagine you have a Piano sound assigned to Upper 1 and a Strings sound assigned to Upper 2 If you turn the Expression switch on on Upper 2 and off on Upper 1 you can use a pedal to control only the Strings volume while the Piano remains unchanged To program a pedal or the Assignable Slider to act as an Expression control see Page 3 Assignable Pedal Foot switch Assignable Slider on page 126 You can only assign this function to a volume type pedal not to a switch type one Assign the
104. Fola Mono Right Pols Fols Fols E amp Be EE Parameters Drum Poly Mono PERF gt STYLE STS This is a Drum Percussion track No Master or Octave Transpose applies to this track You can set a different volume for each class of percus sive instruments see Page 13 Track Easy edit on page 45 Tracks of this kind are polyphonic i e they can play more than one note at the same time Tracks of this kind are monophonic i e each new note stops the previous note HE Both Eoth qi j 6 Both Both amp Bothy External Both fij Camps ueseurs AE Track Tete Ext Hi External Both External Both 6 Both Bath Both Bath Parameters Internal PERF gt STYLE STS The track plays the sounds generated by the internal sound engine It does not play an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT The track plays an external instrument con nected to the MIDI OUT It does not play the internal sounds therefore saving polyphony When a track is set to External a strings of transmitted Control Change and Program Change data is shown instead of the Program name assigned to the track In the following example CC 0 is the Control Change 0 Bank Select MSB CC 32 is the Control Change 32 Bank Select LSB PC is the Program Change izi 3 8 CCHO
105. Guide includes all the information you need 3 PLAYING A SONG Nothing easier than playing a Song on the Pa50SD You don t have even to load it from a card Move the BALANCE slider to the center This sets both onboard sequencers at the same level Insert the card containing the Song into the card drive Make sure your card is FAT formatted This is the typical Window format and you can make a card of this type also on the Mac by selecting the DOS option when initializing a card Press the SONG PLAY button to access the Song Play mode This is the display Campa measure rampos Je ome 88 C B ee oooo Coms c Mo zona Si Piarceil a En Guiter dal w Ler ics Strrgeres m UendPacil m select a Song Another easy task Press the A S1 VOLUME VALUE button to open the Song Select window Campo ensure ransposs cm ae BES C B eu oooo se iona Selection 5 aus It C BALLADS Be PYSOMG MID I b SELECT OPEN CLOSE Press the F1 button to select the card drive The list of files in the card appears Songs are files with the MID or KAR extension Pa50SD filters all other file types out for you Use the TEMPO VALUE controls or the VOLUME VALUE E H buttons to scroll the list
106. High pitched note played with Attack Decay Slope and Attack Decay Slope and Release Time Swing at 4 Release Time Swing at L1 Amp 1 EG changes Time AMS Velocity Intensity a positive value Note on Note on Note on lA TAR NL Softly played note with Strongly played note with Strongly played note with Attack Decay Slope and Attack Decay Slope and Attack Decay Slope and Release Time Swing at Release Time Swing at Release Time Swing at L1 AMS1 T Alternate Modulation Source 1 Time This parameter specifies the source that will control the Time parameters of the amp EG see AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 With a setting of Off there will be no modulation Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS1 will have For example if AMS1 T is Amp KTrk the Amp Keyboard Track settings see Amplifier keyboard tracking on page 117 will control the EG Time parameters With positive values of this parameter posi tive values of Ramp Ramp Setting will cause EG times to be lengthened and negative values of Ramp Ramp Setting will cause EG times to be shortened The direction of the change is specified by Attack Time Swing Decay Time Swing Slope Time Swing and Release Time When AMSI T is Velocity positive values will cause EG times to lengthen as you
107. If the card is not formatted Pa50SD asks if you want to format it Ho Carek ihi ormatte d ZhHERLaC to formak Keep SHIFT pressed and press ENTER to format the card Backup Data This command starts a backup of all internal factory data Styles Programs Performances excluding the Operating System itself Note Should you not do a back up and your internal data is changed you can download the data from www korgpa com or ask your local KORG dealer 1 Select the Backup Data command 2 The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to continue EXIT to abort If the card is not formatted Pa50SD asks if you want to format it Ha Candid nfoomatted ZbeERLeaC to formak Keep SHIFT pressed and press ENTER to format the card Restore Data This command restores the backup of the internal factory data executed with the Backup Data command Note Should your Factory Data card become corrupt you can download the data from www korgpa com or ask your local KORG dealer Warning Don t play on the keyboard while restoring data and stay in the Card mode Wait until the Wait message disap pears and the WRITE CARD IN USE LED turns off 1 Prepare a card containing the Backup folder and insert it into the drive 2 Select this command 3 The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to continue EXIT to abort Wait until the backup card has been read 5 When the Wait message has dis
108. IndianFrets 121 4 104 FreshBreath 121 7 91 Bank Strings amp Vocals EtherVoices 121 1 85 Solo Violin 121 2 40 DreamVoice 121 5 54 StringQuart 121 9 48 Humming 121 1 53 Ens amp Solo 121 11 48 AnalogVoice 121 1 54 St Strings 121 3 48 Mmmh Choir 121 8 52 Analog Str 121 2 50 StringChoir 121 13 52 i3 Strings 121 5 48 ClassicVox 121 4 54 Oh AhVoices 121 9 52 Doolally 121 2 Take Voices 121 4 52 Fresh Air 121 2 21 Slow Violin 121 3 40 Vocalscape Tel 3 54 Camera Str 121 12 48 Heaven 121 3 N ArcoStrings 121 7 48 Airways 121 3 53 LegatoStrng 121 4 48 Yang Chin 121 1 46 MasterPad 121 2 89 Bank Trumpet amp Trombone N Strings 121 6 48 MonoTrumpet 121 3 56 OhSlowVoice 121 3 52 Flugel Horn 121 7 56 TakeVoices2 121 5 52 TrumptPitch 121 5 56 SlowAttViol 121 1 40 TrumpetExpr 121 4 56 PizzEnsembl 121 1 45 HardTrombon 121 3 57 Fiddle 121 0 110 SoftTrombon 121 4 57 PizzSection 121 2 45 Wha Trumpet 121 2 59 SweepersStr 121 1 49 Muted Trp 121 0 59 AnalogVelve 121 3 50 Dual Trump 121 6 56 Aaah Choir 121 7 52 Warm Flugel 121 8 56 Oooh Voices 121 2 52 Trumpet 121 0 56 Violin 121 0 40 Trumpet 2 121 2 56 Viola 121 0 41 Trombone 121 0 57 Cello 121 0 42 Trombone 2 121 1 57 Contrabass 121 0 43 PitchTromb 121 5 57 Tremolo Str 121 0 44 BeBopCornet 121 9 56 PizzicatoSt 121 0 45 DarkTrumpet 121 1 56 Choir Aahs 121 0 52 Tuba 121 0 58 Voice Oohs 121 0 53 Tuba Gold 121 2 58 StringsEns1 121 0 48 Ob Tuba 121 1 58 StringsEns2 121 0 49 Dynabone 121 3 58 Orches Harp 12
109. LFO Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount g Shimmer High Damp 0 100 Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range Ld Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Us Fx 010 prez h Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 188 Effects Pitch Phase Mod b LFO Shape Feedback 100 100 Changing the LFO waveform shape controls the peak Sets the feedback amount 1 Fx 020 I sweep of flanging effects High Damp 0 100 Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range ts Fx 020 LFO Shape Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet LFO Shape 0 100 LFO Shape 0 100 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 AN t Fx 010 020 Drar amp H Ulo Waveform Sine fi Src Off Tempo i Z Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 g Feedback h Wet Dry Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 The peak shape of the positive and negative Feedback value is different The harmonics will be emphasized when the effect sound is mixed with the dry sound if you 022 Envel Flang set a
110. MIDI interface allows your Pa50SD to be connected to an external controller master keyboard MIDI guitar wind controller MIDI accordion to an expander or to a com puter running a sequencer or an editor For more informa tion on how to use the MIDI interface see the MIDI chapter IN This connector receives MIDI data from a computer or a controller Connect it to an external controller s or computer s MIDI OUT This connector sends MIDI data generated by Pa50SD s keyboard controllers and or the internal sequencer Connect it to an expander s or computer s MIDI IN This connector sends an exact copy of the data received on the IN connector Use it to cascade the Pa50SD with other MIDI instruments o ASSIGNABLE PEDAL FOOTSWITCH Use this to connect a continuous or footswitch pedal like the KORG EXP2 or XVP10 To program it see P S Pedal Switch on page 126 OUT THRU L output L INPUT Q DAMPER Use this to connect a Damper pedal like the KORG PSI PS or DS1H To change its polarity see Damper Pol Damper Polarity on page 126 Q OUTPUTS Use these unbalanced connectors to send the audio signal sound to a mixer a PA system a set of powered monitors or your hi fi system Set the output level with the MASTER VOLUME slider INPUT 1 and 2 Use these unbalanced connectors to input another keyboard synthesizer a non powered mixer s output or a CD tape player line impedance The sig
111. Mid High EQ 1 we Gain dB 18 418dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 Mid2 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Effects Filter Dynamic 179 007 Param 4B Eq Stereo Parametric 4 Band EQ This is a stereo 4 band parametric equalizer You can select peaking type or shelving type for Band 1 and 4 The gain of Band 2 can be controlled by dynamic modulation h Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 v Gain dB 18 418dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 Direct Mix 0 50 Sets the amount of the dry sound mixed to the distortion i Speaker Simulation Off On Switches the speaker simulation on off Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 pas i Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a Wah The Wah parameter switches the wah effect on off a Sw This parameter sets how the wah effect is switched on and off via the modulation source When Sw Moment the wah effect is usually turned off It is turned on only when you press the pedal or oper ate the joystick m When a value for the modulation s
112. Name Pa50SD Bank GM2 121 0 108 Kalimba Mallet amp Bell v 121 2 122 Thunder SFX v 121 1 108 VeloKalimba Mallet amp Bell 121 3 122 Wind SFX v 121 0 109 Bag Pipe Woodwind v 121 4 122 Stream SFX v 121 1 109 War Pipes Woodwind 121 5 122 Bubble SFX v 121 0 110 Fiddle Strings amp Vocals v 121 0 123 Bird Tweet SFX v 121 0 111 Shanai Woodwind v 121 1 123 Dog SFX v 121 1 111 Zurna Woodwind 121 2 123 HorseGallop SFX v 121 2 111 Hichiriki Woodwind 121 3 123 Bird Tweet2 SFX v 121 0 112 Tinkle Bell Mallet amp Bell v 121 0 124 Telephone 1 SFX v 121 1 112 Gamelan Mallet amp Bell 121 1 124 Telephone 2 SFX v 121 2 112 BaliGamelan Mallet amp Bell 121 2 124 Door Creak SFX v 121 3 112 GarbageMall Mallet amp Bell 121 3 124 Door SFX v 121 0 113 Agogo Drum amp Perc v 121 4 124 Scratch SFX v 121 0 114 Steel Drums Mallet amp Bell v 121 5 124 Wind Chime SFX v 121 1 114 Warm Steel Mallet amp Bell 121 0 125 Helicopter SFX v 121 0 115 Woodblock Drum amp Perc v 121 1 125 Car Engine SFX v 121 1 115 Castanets Drum amp Perc v 121 2 125 Car Stop SFX v 121 0 116 Taiko Drum Drum amp Perc v 121 3 125 Car Pass SFX v 121 1 116 Concert BD Drum amp Perc v 121 4 125 Car Crash SFX v 121 0 117 Melodic Tom Drum amp Perc v 121 5 125 Siren SFX v 121 1 117 MelodicTom2 Drum amp Perc v 121 6 125 Train SFX v 121 2 117 Rev Tom Drum amp Perc 121 7 125 Jetplane SFX v 121 0 118 Synth Drum Drum amp Perc v 121 8 125 Starship SFX
113. Note b Times c C Delay Base Note c Times d R Delay Base Note d Times The delay time is the length of the note obtained by mul tiplying the Base Note parameter by the Times value in relation to the tempo specified by the BPM parameter or the MIDI Clock tempo if BPM is set to MIDI 050 BPM Delay Stereo BPM Delay This stereo delay enables you to set the delay time to match the song tempo Note With extreme values the sync may be lost 207 Right e E Stereo In Stereo Out Wet Dry Left o o mj High Damp Low D fem BPM igh Damp Low Damp BPM 9 Base Note x Times Delay HL A Base Note x Times Input Level D mod L Base Note x Times i ua Input Level D mod i uan Low Damp Delay UN HK LE a BPM MIDI 40 240 n V Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo ce ight Pisos L Delay Base Note 9 25 2 25 4 ds d e E gem 3 E EAR a BPM 69 t Base Note x Times Adjust 74 Selects the type of notes to specify the delay time for Tapi Base Note x Times Adjust Pl EL e b Times x1 x16 i Sets the number of notes to specify the delay time for TapL BPM MIDI 40 240 Level 0 50 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo y Fx 049 eye Sets the output level of TapL a ns Z OVER C Delay Ba
114. Note All duplicate notes When two notes with the same pitch are encountered on the same tick the one with the lowest velocity is deleted A Touch After Touch events Note This kind of data is automatically removed during recording P Bend Pitch Bend events PrChange Program Change events excluding the bun dled Control Change 00 Bank Select MSB and 32 Bank Select LSB Note This kind of data is automatically removed during recording C Change All Control Change events for example Bank Select Modulation Damper Soft Pedal CC00 32 CC127 Single Control Change events Double Control Change numbers like 00 32 are MSB LSB bundles Note Some CC data are automatically removed during recording See the table on page 54 for more information on the allowed data S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to delete If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key board range to delete If you select the same note as the Bot tom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track Note These parameters are available only when the All or Note option is selected PAGE 7 EDIT DELETE ALL This function lets you quickly delete a selected Style Element or C
115. OPERATING MODE The Program operating mode is where you can listen to individual Programs and edit them To select a Program see the Basic operations chapter In this mode the selected Program can always be played across the full keyboard range To automatically select the Program to be assigned to the last selected track keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the PROGRAM button Hint This is useful to see the Bank Select Program Change numbers when programming a Song on an external sequencer Note The Program uses the same Scale of the latest selected Per formance or STS MAIN PAGE Here is the main page of the Program operating mode Tempo Program icon Page header Chora Campo measure transpose gu Sas em m P4 m Grand i ano E Groei Piano MIDI OOGA i1 CORES FG g Program icon When turned on this icon shows that the instrument is in Program mode Page header This line shows the selected Program name Use the TEMPO VALUE controls or the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE sec tion to select a Program See Selecting a Program on page 26 for more information Tempo This is the tempo of Sequencer 1 The Tempo is one of the AMSs see AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 Use the SHIFT DIAL combination to change it A Group This non editable parameter shows which group the Pro gram is included into A group is the e
116. Open2 Off 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush Off 101 HH Old Open2 Off 71 B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 72 C5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 73 CH5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 75 D 5 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 78 FHS 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Ht 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 79 G5 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 80 G 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 81 A5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 82 A 5 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 83 B5 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 85 C 6 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 86 D6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 87 D 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleL
117. Organ 1 v 121 3 17 Old Wheels Organ 1 121 4 17 Percuss BX3 Organ 1 121 5 17 M1 Organ Organ 1 121 6 17 TeknoOrgBas Organ 1 121 7 17 Bx3ShortDec Organ 1 121 8 17 RotaryOrgan Organ 1 121 0 18 Rock Organ Organ 1 v 121 1 18 BX3 Velo Sw Organ 1 121 2 18 Killer B Organ 1 121 3 18 DirtyB Organ 1 121 4 18 ClassiClick Organ 1 121 5 18 Dist Organ Organ 1 121 6 18 SuperBXPerc Organ 1 121 7 18 DirtyJazOrg Organ 1 121 8 18 PercShorDec Organ 1 Factory Data 155 Programs Program Change order ccoo CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2 ccoo CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2 121 9 18 Perc Wheels Organ 1 121 4 27 Vintage S Guitar 121 10 18 Jimmy Organ Organ 1 121 5 27 ProcesElGtr Guitar 121 0 19 ChurchOrg 1 Organ 2 v 121 6 27 SingleCoil Guitar 121 1 19 ChurchOcMix Organ 2 v 121 7 27 NewsStra Gtr Guitar 121 2 19 DetunChurch Organ 2 v 121 8 27 Guitarish Guitar 121 3 19 PipeMixture Organ 2 121 9 27 L amp REl Gtr Guitar 121 4 19 ChurchPipes Organ 2 121 10 27 L amp REl Gtr2 Guitar 121 5 19 Full Pipes Organ 2 121 11 27 Country Nu Guitar 121 6 19 Pipe Tutti Organ 2 121 12 27 FunkyWhaSw Guitar 121 7 19 PositiveOrg Organ 2 121 0 28 MutedGuitar Guitar v 121 0 20 Reed Organ Organ 2 v 121 1 28 FunkyCutGtr Gui
118. Pitch at note on 99 99 Offset value Delay This parameter specifies the time from note on until the LFO effect begins to apply When Key Sync is Off the delay will apply only when the LFO is first started 0 99 Delay time Fade In This parameter specifies the time from when the LFO begins to apply until it reaches the maximum amplitude When Key Sync is Off the fade will apply only when the LFO is first started Here is how Fade In affects the LFO when Key Sync is On Note on Note off Fade Delay 00 99 Fade rate Frequency MIDI Tempo Sync MIDI Tempo Sync This parameter enables disables the LFO synchronization with Sequencer 1 Tempo On The LFO frequency will synchronize to the tempo MIDI Clock of Sequencer 1 In this case the values you specified for Frequency see page 14 120 and Frequency modula tion see page 14 121 will be ignored Base Note Times When MIDI Tempo Sync is On these parameters set a note length relative to J Tempo and the multiple Times that will be applied to it These parameters will determine the frequency of the LFO1 For example if Base Note is J quar ter note and Times is 04 the LFO will perform one cycle every four beats Even if you change the J Tempo setting of Sequencer 1 the LFO will always perform one cycle every four beats Base Note pun This parameter is not available when editing a Drum
119. Pro gram Ju D Be du diy da ds Note value Times m This parameter is not available when editing a Drum Pro gram 01 16 Beats before restarting the cycle Frequency modulation You can use two alternate modulation sources to adjust the speed of the LFOI for the selected oscillator AMS1 F Alternate Modulation Source1 Selects the source that will adjust the frequency of the selected oscillator LFO1 see AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 LFO1 can be modulated by LFO2 Intensity AMS1 Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS1 F will have When this parameter is set to a value of 16 33 49 66 82 or 99 the LFO frequency being can be increased by a maximum of 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 times respectively or decreased by 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 16 1 32 or 1 64 respectively For example if AMS1 F is Note Number positive val ues of this parameter will cause the oscillator LFO to speed up as you play higher notes Negative values will cause the oscillator LFO to slow down as you play higher notes This change will be centered on the C4 note 121 Program operating mode Page 18 LFO2 If AMS1 F is set to JS Y raising the value of this parame ter will cause the oscillator LFO1 speed to increase as the joy stick is moved away from yourself With a setting of 99 moving the joystick all the way away from yourself will increase t
120. Realtime Keyboard tracks settings Four STS are included in each Style and can be recalled by pressing the SINGLE TOUCH SETTING F1 F4 buttons under the display Note You can select a STS only when you are in the main page of the Style Play or Backing Sequence operating mode CHANGING ALL KEYBOARD TRACKS AT ONCE Select a Performance or a Single Touch Setting F1 F4 but tons when you are in the Style Play main page to change keyboard Programs and effects at the touch of a button PLAYING A SONG FROM A CARD 1 Insertthe card containing the Song into the card drive 2 Press the SONG PLAY button to access the Song Play mode Campo meseurs iranepoes 4 ye 888 C B faim eu oooo aw o zona Ea Si FiarcBl qu EM Guiterat w Laica Strrseres Led adii 8 3 Press the A S1 VOLUME VALUE button to open the Song Select window Cismpa Go Wumspsss CER ipee BBE IC B IC oooo e SOM Selection CLLE It BALLADS wx PheCHG MID Lh SD SELECT OFEN CLOSE Page commands Note You can access the Song Select window also by press ing the PAGE button from the main page You can exit this window either by pressing EXIT or PAGE 4 Press the F1 button to select the SD card drive SD The card content appears
121. Ring SDoBrushHit Off 178 CastSingle Off 337 Alkis Off 122 Hand Claps Off 40 E2 45 45 SD BrushSwirl SDoBrushSwir Off 120 SD Orch Off 68 SD AmbiHop Off 33 SD Dry3 Off 41 F2 85 Tom Brush Hi Off 118 Timpani Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 42 F 2 90 HH1 Open 2 1 118 Timpani Off 88 HH1 Foot 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 43 G2 85 Tom Brush Hi Off 118 Timpani Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 44 G 2 94 HH2 Foot 1 118 Timpani Off 94 HH2 Foot 1 94 HH2 Foot 1 45 A2 85 Tom Brush Hi Off 118 Timpani Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 46 A 2 95 HH2 FootOpen 1 118 Timpani Off 89 HH1 Open 1 1 89 HH1 Open 1 1 47 B2 85 Tom Brush Hi Off 118 Timpani Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 48 C3 85 Tom Brush Hi Off 118 Timpani Off 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 49 CH3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 118 Timpani Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 50 D3 85 Tom Brush Hi Off 118 Timpani Off 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 51 D 3 112 Ride Edge 1 Off 118 Timpani Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 52 E3 106 China Cymbal Off 118 Timpani Off 352 Hollo 1 Off 301 Dbk Tky Open Off 53 F3 114 Ride Jazz Off 118 Timpani Off 353 Hollo 2 Off 300 Dbk Tky Mute Off 54 F 3 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 211 Tambourin Acc1 Off 211 Tambourin Acc1 Off 55 G3 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 345 Darbuka 2 Off 302 Dbk Tky Rim Off 56 G 3 225 Cowbe Off 225 Cowbe Off 225 Cowbe
122. Rocker Off 24 BD Dance 99 Off 37 CH2 121 FingerSnaps Off 242 Comp Voice Noise Off 72 SideStickDry Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 38 D2 66 SD Vintage5 Off 125 99 S5D Off 48 SD Processed Off 51 SD Rap Off 39 D 2 127 88 Claps Off 127 88 Claps Off 127 88 Claps Off 337 Alkis Off 40 E2 61 SD Tiny Off 125 99 SD Off 47 SD Yowie Off 55 SD Hip 2 Off 41 F2 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 139 Real El Tom Off 76 Tom 1 Floor Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 42 F 2 129 88 HH Open 1 99 HH Old TiteClos 1 93 HH2Closed2 1 97 HH OldClose1 1 43 G2 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 139 Real El Tom Off 76 Tom 1 Floor Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 44 G 2 102 j HH Hip Off 103 HH AlpoClose Off 94 HH2 Foot 1 102 HH Hip Off 45 A2 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 139 Real El Tom Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 46 A 2 98 HH Old Open1 1 101 HH Old Open2 1 91 HH1 Sizzle 1 98 HH Old Opent 1 47 B2 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 139 Real El Tom Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 48 c3 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 139 Real El Tom Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 49 CH3 132 88 Crash Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 50 b3 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 139 Real El Tom Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 75 Tom 1 Hi Off 51 D 3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 52 E3 108 CymbalReverse Off 108 CymbalReverse Off 106 China Cymbal Off 108 CymbalReverse Off 53 F3 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz Off 54 FES 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off
123. SCALE A s FMedTrkibEl BoAsect 12 This page lets you program the alternative scale for the selected tracks see Scale Mode on page 51 The remaining tracks use the Scale set in the Global mode see Scale on page 125 chord Cempe measure ue BBG cs ES 8228 Turina Scale ERES TES ScaletUser j Kesc w e Hotei CH w Deturei 55 m Scale PERF STS Selected scale See Scales on page 227 for a list of the avail able scales Key PERF STS Parameter required for some Scales when you should select a preferred key Note PERF STS Note in edit to be detuned This parameter can be accessed when a User Scale is selected Detune PERF STS Note detune relative to the standard Equal tuning This parameter can be accessed when a User Scale is selected A B PERF STYLE Effects assigned to the A and B effect processors Usually A is the reverb while B is the modulating effect chorus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see Effects on page 175 ModTrk Modulating Track PERF STYLE Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modu late an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller B gt Asend B gt A Send gt PERF gt STYLE Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect PAGE 8 FX C D SELECT Thi
124. STYLE A Style is a rhythm accompaniment structure that simulates a band backing your solos In a vertical direction it is composed of 8 different tracks Drums Percussion Bass and 5 different harmonic or melodic instruments You can play on the keyboard with 4 more Realtime tracks Upper 1 3 and Lower In a horizontal direction it is a series of Style Elements i e the various sets of patterns for each chord and each of the Intros Variations Fills Breaks and Endings STYLES AND PERFORMANCES Styles and Performances are linked in many ways When the SINGLE TOUCH LED is on selecting a Style also changes the Realtime Keyboard tracks a Single Touch Setting is selected The Performance settings are overridden When the STYLE CHANGE LED is on selecting a Per formance also selects a Style the one whose number is memorized with the Performance When pressing the WRITE button you can save the track s settings either in a Performance a Style Perfor mance or a Single Touch Setting STS CHANGING AND RESETTING THE TEMPO While in the main page of the Style Play mode you can change the Tempo using the DIAL or the DOWN and UP buttons In any other page keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the Tempo To recall the Tempo stored in the current Style keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the DOWN or UP buttons THE DIRECT SD BANK In addition to the internal memo
125. Sets the damping amount in the high range Pre Delay msec 0 200msec Sets the delay time from the dry sound iS Pre Delay Thru 0 100 Sets the mix ratio of non delay sound iS E EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dz Src Off tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 b Pre Delay msec b Pre Delay Thru 96 The Pre Delay sets the delay time to the reverb input allowing you to control spaciousness Using the Pre Delay Thru parameter you can mix the dry sound without delay emphasizing the attack of the sound Reverb Hall Plate Type Level Reverb Louder Time Pre Delay Reverb Time 056 Rev Room This room type reverb emphasizes the early reflections that make the sound tighter Changing the balance between the early reflections and reverb sound allows you to simulate nuances such as the type of walls of a room Effects Reverb 209 057 R BriteRoom This room type reverb emphasizes the early reflections that make th
126. Sets the gain of Band 1 Sets the gain of Band 2 E Band Cutoff Hz 50 5 00kHz E Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Sets the center frequency for Band 3 cle 0 5 10 0 4 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 ts Fx 006 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 ts Fx 006 Gain dB 18 418dB Gain dB 18 418dB Sets the gain of Band 2 Sets the gain of Band 9 E Banda Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz E Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Band 3 Sets the center frequency for Band 4 Ir 0 5 10 0 z Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 ts Fx 006 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 ts Fx 006 Gain dB 18 418dB Gain dB 18 418dB Sets the gain of Band 3 Sets te gain of Band s E Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz F Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the center frequency for Band 4 Sets the delay time B Q 0 5 10 0 F LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 ts Fx 006 Sets the LFO speed Gain dB 18 18dB LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Sets the gain of Band 4 Select EFOWavelorm P LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz F Depth 0 100 Sets the LFO speed Sets the depth of LFO modulation LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Feedback 100 100 Selects LFO Waveform Sets the feedback amount ts Fx 020 P Manual 0 100 F Cho Fing Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet 9 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied i Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger
127. Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again chord empo measure transpose Je B88 C B jeu oooo w Hirer Pari Ea CHG CH CHa CHa CHG CH B CHa CH Campo maseura transpose Je ome BEE eu oooo Mixer Pari Dun Dun lig Dun Dun fa Dun CHG CHAG THAG Pan 64 Hard Left 00 Center 63 Hard Right Off The direct uneffected signal does not go to the outputs only the FX signal is heard for this track PAGE 3 MIXER FX SEND A B This page lets you set the level of the track s direct unef fected signal going to the A and B Internal FX processors usually assigned to Sequencer 1 Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 Cempa measure transpose Je pge Be C B bu oooo Hixer Fssend E a AiG BGG A ies Bree 8 Biz Ese Brice Bs eo B Hiie Bee Brice Digma Ab iG Drga Brice Bigaa chord Cempe measure aramspaes jj pge B58 C B bu oooo cuo fixers Fatend ea s R i8gB Erea A ies Bee e fig Rizr Biene Ab lee Brema fte tri FE LIA Bee Bie Bee fg Aigo Bieter Aigo Ee ee Note When playing back a Song that makes use of all four effects A D yo
128. Song from a card ccc eee 27 Shortcut to see the original bank for a Style Performance or Program 00 cece eee trises 27 Tutorial 2 1 REED he keaton 28 1 Playing in realtime esses 28 2 Playing a Style co lperree Rr eR x RELY 29 3 PlayingaSong ieee eee eee eee ee 30 4 Recording a Song 0 eee eee eee eee eee ees 31 5 Editing a Song 0 6 eee eee eee eee eee eens 32 6 The Arabie Scale isi ee er Each Rene 34 MIDI 115r ek nnm mem Ee ea tae Ren 35 What is MIDI zero ente pag e S andes 35 Midifiles Leere ete RE R EDO eet ePi as 35 The General MIDI standard 005 35 The Global channel esee 35 The Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels The Control channel lseeeseeeesese MIDI Setup menigeen she bed atin Ux eM DRE P ER Connecting Pa50SD to a Master keyboard Connecting the Pa50SD to a MIDI accordion Connecting the Pa50SD to an external sequencer Playing another instrument with the Pa50SD Reference Guide Style Play operating mode What sia Style ceatesiqexe tet ber rA ERES Styles and Performances eeeee ee eens Changing and resetting the Tempo The DIRECT SD bank 00 00 eee Maiti pase 22 2 pt vaawenwiied doaeanuieawas Style tracks page cee cece eee eee eee How to select Programs eee eeeee eens The Write w
129. Strings amp Vocals 121 0 56 Trumpet Trp amp Trbn v 121 2 45 PizzSection Strings amp Vocals 121 1 56 DarkTrumpet Trp amp Trbn v 121 3 45 Dbl Strings Strings amp Vocals 121 2 56 Trumpet 2 Trp amp Trbn 121 0 46 Orches Harp Strings amp Vocals v 121 3 56 MonoTrumpet Trp amp Trbn 121 1 46 Yang Chin Strings amp Vocals v 121 4 56 TrumpetExpr Trp amp Trbn 121 0 47 Timpani Drum amp Perc v 121 5 56 TrumptPitch Trp amp Trbn 121 0 48 StringsEns1 Strings amp Vocals v 121 6 56 Dual Trump Trp amp Trbn 121 1 48 String amp Bras Strings amp Vocals v 121 7 56 Flugel Horn Trp amp Trbn 121 2 48 60s Strings Strings amp Vocals v 121 8 56 Warm Flugel Trp amp Trbn 121 3 48 St Strings Strings amp Vocals 121 9 56 BeBopCornet Trp amp Trbn 121 4 48 LegatoStrng Strings amp Vocals 121 0 57 Trombone Trp amp Trbn v 121 5 48 i3 Strings Strings amp Vocals 121 1 57 Trombone 2 Trp amp Trbn v 121 6 48 N Strings Strings amp Vocals 121 2 57 BrightTromb Trp amp Trbn v 121 7 48 ArcoStrings Strings amp Vocals 121 3 57 HardTrombon Trp amp Trbn 121 8 48 Oct Strings Strings amp Vocals 121 4 57 SoftTrombon Trp amp Trbn 121 9 48 StringQuart Strings amp Vocals 121 5 57 PitchTromb Trp amp Trbn 121 10 48 Symph Bows Strings amp Vocals 121 0 58 Tuba Trp amp Trbn v 121 11 48 Ens amp Solo Strings amp Vocals 121 1 58 Ob Tuba Trp amp Trbn 121 12 48 Camera Str Strings amp Vocals 121 2 58 Tuba Gold Tr
130. Style Import Export 2 0 cece eee eee eee eee Entering the Record mode 00sec eee Listening to the Style while in Record Edit mode Exit and Save Abort Style 0 00 e eee The Write window 0 00 cece eee ee eee List of recorded events 0 00 cece eee eee Fast Delete using the control panel buttons Mainpage soca te eas ce ees exse RE E bx E sae Style Tracks page esee emere 40 Step Record page Style Record procedure sc cece ee eee eee eens Menu eae deartev edna dnte db eid i Sauces ddnde Edit page structure irere cece ee eee eee eee en Page 1 Edit Quantize Page 2 Edit Transpose Page 3 Edit Velocity eret e Resa Page de Event Edit v ERR e i Page S Event Flltet 4 cesceerte e Ro PRERER euaceeaa Event Edit procedure cece eee eee eee eee Page 6 Edit Delete vs ciscicceug warded re RR wows Page 7 Edit Delete All eee eee eee eee eee eee Page 3 Edit CODY erede reb E EPEV CREAN Page 9 Style Element Controls Programs Page 10 Style Element Controls Expression Page 11 Style Element Controls Keyboard Range Page 12 Style Element Controls Chord Variation Table Page 13 Style Controls Mode Tension Song Play operating mode The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format Transport controls lssessseee ne MIDI Clock 55ocexkut e Dente nhe o Fade Mede
131. T Compl Driver NA H Output Level i F Output Level t Output Level i og Mode Overdrive Hi Gain 1 i rive gate i i us Dry Rights l Da Dry a C Sensitivity 1 100 C Sensitivity 1 100 Sets the sensitivity ts Fx 002 8 Sets the sensitivity re Fx 002 C Attack 1 100 C Attack 1 100 Table Sets the attack level on page 176 1S Fx 002 Table Sets the attack level on page 176 re Fx 002 b Output Level 0 100 Output Level 0 100 Sets the compressor output level ts Fx 002 Sets the compressor output level we Fx 002 C EQ Trim 0 100 O Drive Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 Switches between overdrive and high gain distortion c C Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Drive 1 100 d Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 Sets the degree of distortion ts Fx 006 Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 4150B O Output Level 0 50 Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 Sets the overdrive output level Fx 006 Dic A Amplifier Type SS EL84 6L6 d Src Off Tempo Selects the type of guitar amplifier Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level f Routing CMP AMP AMP gt CMP Amt 50 50 Switches the order of the compressor and amp simulation connection Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet O Low Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 S
132. This button doubles as a INSERT function for the Backing Sequence and Song modes see chapters 12 and 13 It is also used to insert a character at the cursor position dur ing text editing WRITE CARD IN USE In Style Play mode this button opens the Write window that lets you save all the tracks onto a Performance the Realtime Keyboard tracks in a Single Touch Setting STS or the accompaniment tracks onto a Style Performance See The Write window on page 42 In the Global edit environment press it to save Global parameters in memory See The Write window on page 125 This button s LED works as a CARD IN USE indicator and turns on when the card drive is in use 9 ENSEMBLE PERF STS This button turns the Ensemble function on or off When on the right hand melody is harmonized with the left hand chords Note The Ensemble function works only when the keyboard is in SPLIT mode and the LOWER Chord Scanning mode selected 9 RECORD This button sets the instrument in Record mode depending on the current operating mode MENU This button opens the Menu page for the current operating mode or edit environment After opening a menu you can jump to one of the edit pages by pressing the corresponding VOLUME VALUE buttons or browse them using the PAGE buttons Otherwise go back to the main page of the current operating mode or close the edit environment by pressing the EXIT button See the
133. To change the event type use the C VOLUME VALUE but tons to select the Event line then use the same buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a different event type To select and edit the event s value use the F3 and F4 func tion keys and use the G VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Length Length of the selected Note event The value format is the same as the Position value Note If you change a length of 000 00 000 to a different value you can t go back to the original value This rather uncommon zero length value may be found in the drum and percussion tracks of Songs made in Backing Sequence mode Transport navigation and editing controls E F and H VOLUME VALUE buttons These buttons are the Scroll to previous event and Scroll to next event controls They corresponds to the scroll arrows shown on the screen G VOLUME VALUE buttons Use these buttons to select the corresponding parameter value area F3 and F4 buttons After selecting the parameter value area with the G VOL UME VALUE buttons use these buttons to select respec tively the first and second value of the event in edit Song operating mode 103 Page 25 Event Filter SEQ1 PLAY STOP button Press PLAY STOP to listen to the Song in edit Press PLAY STOP again to stop it SHIFT lt lt or gt gt Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the lt lt or gt gt but ton to open the Go to Measure window so to lesse
134. Trim 0 100 Sets the input level b Band1 Type Peaking Shelving Low Selects the type of Band 1 1S Band4 Type Peaking Shelving High Selects the type of Band 4 Var Band2 Dynamic Gain Src Off Tempo s Selects the modulation source of the Band 2 gain v Amt dB 18 418dB Sets the modulation amount of Band 2 gain iS Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 1 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 ts Fx 006 Gain dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 1 Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 2 t Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 ts Fx 006 Gain dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 2 S prez Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 3 Q 0 5 10 0 9 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 Fx 006 Gain dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 3 Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 4 h Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 ts Fx 006 Gain dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the gain of Band 4 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 D i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 b Band1 Type c Band4 Type Selects a filter type for Band 1 and 4 Parametric 4EQ Band1 Band4
135. Type Band4 Type Peaking Band1 Type Shelving Low Band1 Cutoff Band4 Cutoff 180 Effects Filter Dynamic d Band2 Dynamic Gain Src d Amt dB f Gain dB You can configure a 21 Band Graphic EQ ranging from You can control the gain of Band 2 using the modulation 80Hz to 18kHz if you route three Graphic 7Band EQ source effects in series with a setting of 7 Low 9 Mid and Parametric 4EQ Band2 Dynamic Gain Control 1 1 H ig h for each EQ E 15dB Daz Band2 Cutoff 009 Wah AutoWah Bani Cutof Stereo Wah Auto Wah Dy mode r 1 This stereo wah effect allows you to create sounds from vin Band2 Dynamic Gain AmtdB e 90 Band2 Dynamic Gain Amt dB 15 0 tage wah pedal simulation to auto wah simulation and much broader range settings Stereo In Stereo Out 008 Graph 7B Eq zm Stereo Graphic 7 Band EQ t al i Envelope Sens This is a stereo 7 band graphic equalizer The bar graph of P f Envelope Shape f Seer Mode Response H the gain setting for each band gives you a clear visual idea of Date fo i i i LFO TRE i frequency responses You can select a center frequency setting i Jis for each band from twelve types according to the sound s Righto
136. VALUE controls the A VOLUME VALUE buttons or the lt gt buttons while the lt lt gt gt buttons let you move to the previous or following mea sure When using one of these controls the locator moves in steps of 1 8 192 ticks or jumps to the next event The locator s format is as follows Men Measure Beat Tick D LET Em RE ama mam mum Measure Measure or bar number Beat Divider in the Time Signature ratio e g a quarter in a 3 4 time Tick Minimal sequencer s resolution The Pa50SD internal sequencers feature a resolution of 384 ticks per quarter INSERT When the Measure parameter is selected press INSERT to insert a measure starting from the current position All Chord Acc events con tained into the current measure will be moved to the following measure The event at the Mxxx xx 000 position ie exactly at the beginning of the measure like a Time Signa ture or Style change will not be moved When the Measure parameter is selected press DELETE to delete the current measure All Chord Acc event contained into the following measures are moved to the current measure SHIFT DELETE When the Measure parameter is selected press SHIFT DELETE to delete all events in the Style tracks starting from the current position to the end of the Song To delete all events in the Style tracks go back to the M001 01 000 position and press SHIFT DELETE Note All events on the very first tick MO001 01 000 li
137. VARIATIONI ENDING2 To copy the settings of this page to another Style Element keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the button of the target Style Element Value Use this parameter to set the Expression value for the corre sponding track PAGE 11 STYLE ELEMENT CONTROLS KEYBOARD RANGE The Keyboard Range automatically transposes any pattern note that would otherwise play too high or too low in pitch compared to the original acoustic instrument when trans posed by the arranger This will result in a more natural sound for each accompaniment instrument For example the lower limit for a guitar is E2 If you play a chord under the E2 the transposed pattern could exceed this limit and sound unnatural A Bottom limit set to E2 for the guitar track will solve the problem Campo mossurs iranspose Ss SESS 9 ees C style ey 3 a brl 1 r SECULI EbdEna3 Ti L3 6e ica Bottom Top Note The Keyboard Range is ignored while recording The selected track can play on the full range of the keyboard When in this page press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element VARIATION ENDING2 To copy the settings of this page to another Style Element keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the button of the target Style Element Bottom Top Use these parameters to set th
138. VOLUME VALUE button pair to set the vol ume of the Realtime tracks Press one of the VOLUME VALUE button to select a track Then press the right one to increase the volume the left one to lower it Press the left one to lower C and the right one to raise Press FULL UPPER on the KEYBOARD MODE sec tion and play Again the Upper tracks can play across the full keyboard range Save your track configuration in a Performance That s all When you find the right sound you can press the WRITE button to save the track configuration into a Perfor mance a Single Touch Setting STS or a Style Performance The Performance is a handy idea for saving Realtime tracks See The Write window on page 42 for more information Tutorial 29 2 Playing a Style 2 PLAYING A STYLE A Style will be your virtual band in your best solos Select one of the 304 Styles we fitted in this machine OK select your favorite musical Style There are plenty of Styles to choose from We will go with a Jazz Style the Jazz Brush Let s come on Select the second row of Styles Press the leftmost STYLE but ton to switch the lower LED on Now you are free to press button number 4 called JAZZ 1 The Style Select window appears Cehord Campo meacura manspoes Caxt T Gap M s cm gg er 888 BY 28 SoftBeat JazzEriumh JaceWaltel Med Swine o Jamialtzz Slowind med main SuircBal
139. Wet Selecting Stop will stop the rotation Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 f Horn Rotor Balance Rotor 1 99 Horn Dz Sets the level balance between the high range horn and low range rotor Src Off Tempo Mic Distance 0 100 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Sets the distance between the microphone and rotary speaker g Amt 100 100 Mic Spread 0 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Sets the angle of left and right microphones S ance on page 175 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 a Pitch Shift cent e Depth Dz These parameters set the amount of pitch shift and n Ste Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 amount of modulation by means of the LFO Amt 100 100 Prien Shift Mog Pitoh Shift Depth Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Piten ance on page 175 LFO Waveform Triangle 4 5 Depth value 2 f Piten Shift value a Sw Original Pitch LFO Waveform Square Depth value Lower f Pan g Wet Dry The Pan parameter pans the effect sound and dry sound to the left and right With L the effect sound is panned left and the dry sound is panned right With a Wet Dry Wet setting the effect and dry sound will be outpu
140. added to deter mine the depth and direction of the pitch modulation applied by the pitch EG Portamento Portamento This parameter turns the portamento effect smooth change in pitch from one note to the next on off and specifies how it will be applied Note Portamento will also be switched when CC 65 Porta mento SW is received On Portamento will be applied Off Portamento will not be applied Portamento Time This parameter sets the portamento time Increasing the value will produce a slower change in pitch 000 127 Portamento time in MIDI value PAGE 4 PITCH LFO1 In this page you can set the LFO1 modulation parameters for the selected oscillator Campa measure framspoes gti w Fitch LFBI ech F Selected Ceci Intengitu B Be Jowstick r H Er APE Cheere LAT 4 Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alter natively you can select oscillators using the F1 F4 buttons Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the pitch modulation applied by the LFOI settings you made on Page 17 LFO1 With a setting of 12 00 a maximum of 1 octave of pitch modulation will be applied Negative values will invert the LFO waveform 12 00 12 00 Intensity depth and direction JS Y JoyStick Y This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that joystick movemen
141. alternate at random intervals of time i e a square wave with random period O Sine AS Sine wave Guitar L Guitar vibrato Exponential 7 Triangle a Exponential I Saw Down Random6 Vector Exponential A These s cause Random 1 3 to change Saw Up P E smoothly They can be used to simulate the instability of acoustic instruments etc Random4 Vector Random5 Vector Frequency Set the LFO frequency A setting of 99 is the fastest 00 99 Frequency rate Key Sync This parameter specifies if the LFO is synchronized to key strokes On The LFO will start each time you play a note and an independent LFO will operate for each note Off The LFO effect that was started by the first played note will continue to be applied to each newly played note In this case Delay and Fade will be applied only to the LFO when it is first started Offset This parameter specifies the central value of the LFO wave form For example with a setting of 0 as shown in the follow ing diagram the vibrato that is applied will be centered on the note on pitch With a setting of 99 the vibrato will only raise the pitch above the note on pitch in the way in which vibrato is applied on a guitar When Wave is set to Guitar the modulation will occur only in the positive direction even if you set Offset to 0 Here are offset settings and pitch change produced by vibrato offset 0 offset 99 Pitch offset 99
142. analog records It also reproduces some of the modulation caused by a warped turntable ee A Wet Dry EQTrim Pre EQ Analog Record SL Simulation Stereo In Stereo Out Ere gt EQ Trim Pre EQ Biante Braise a Speed RPM 33 1 3 45 78 Sets the r p m of a record b Flutter 0 100 Sets the modulation depth ws Noise Density 0 100 Sets the noise density c Noise Tone 0 100 Sets the noise tone Noise Level 0 100 Sets the noise level Dae d Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the noise level Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the noise level Click Level 0 100 Sets the click noise level S pz 7 Src Off tempo Selects the modulation source for the click noise level Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the click noise level EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 Pre EQ Cutoff Hz Sets the EQ center frequency 300 10 00kHz Q 0 5 10 0 9 Sets the EQ band width Gain dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the EQ gain Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dz h Src Off tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 b Flutter Thi
143. and limiter connection Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger ts Fx 010 020 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger 1S Fx 060 mod Dz Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Src Off Tempo Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 D Amt 100 100 Src Off Tempo Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 ance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 Effects 219 Mono Mono Chain 077 Exc Phaser Exciter Phaser This effect combines a mono type limiter and a phaser Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o JExeiter Phaser EQ Trim LEQ HEQ Pus Dry HX Exeiter Resonance Normal Output Mode Wet Invert jPhaser Wet Dry Right o SUD croci Sine i X Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect os Fx 011 b X Emphatic Point 0 70 Sets the frequency range to be emphasized os Fx 011 c X EQ Trim 0 100 Table Set
144. are Type Note Pitch C4 Velocity 100 Length 192 After inserting an event use the C VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Event line and the same buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a different event type DELETE Press the DELETE button to delete the event shown in the display PAGE 5 EVENT FILTER This page is where you can select the event types to be shown in the Event Edit page You can access this page by pressing the PAGE button while you are in the Event Edit page Canara Campa msssurs iranepoxe ca cee BEES 7 Edit Eu Filter Hate OFF mL mer Chel OF Turn Off the filter for all event types you wish to see in the Event Edit page Note Some of the events are ghosted and non editable since the corresponding events are not editable in a Style Note Notes Ctrl Control Change events Only the following Control Change numbers are allowed Control function CC Control Change Number Modulation 1 1 Modulation 2 2 Pan 10 Expression 11 CC 12 12 CC 13 13 Control function CC Control Change Number Damper 64 Filter Resonance 71 Low Pass Filter Cutoff 74 CC 80 80 CC 81 81 CC 82 82 a Expression events cannot be inserted at the starting Position 001 01 000 An Expression value is already among t
145. below Other wise if you prefer to do a Step Record jump to Step Record procedure on page 59 Realtime Record procedure 1 When still in the Main page of the Style Record mode press one of the E VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the R parameter Use these buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select the RT Realtime recording mode RST Press TRK SELECT to switch to the Style Tracks page Here you can assign the right Program to each Style track For more details see Style Tracks page on page 56 m chord Camps measure Sremsposa Gom UU MeubBozza Il 01 H Erush 2 Fianc l pa 4 Fec Kit Guiter al 6 eoufess Strrcerez E I BeocuPianoz Woe peg If you like you can set the tempo again from this page just use the TEMPO VALUE controls Assign a Program to each track by using the PRO GRAM PERFORMANCE section If needed set the Octave Transpose for each track Note The Octave Transpose will affect only the notes coming from the keyboard and not from the arranger Select the track to put in record Its status icon will begin flashing Note When entering the Record mode the last selected track is already in record When you press START STOP after entering the Record mode you can immedi ately start recording If you like you can try your part before recording Set the track
146. between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 D h Src Off Tempo L Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 j Sets the signal compression ratio ts Fx 003 Amt 100 100 Threshold dB 40 0dB Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Sets the level above which the compressor is applied Fx 003 ance on page 175 218 Effects Mono Mono Chain 075 Exc Limiter Exciter Limiter 076 Exc ChorFlg Exciter Chorus Flanger This effect combines a mono type exciter and a limiter You This effect combines a mono type limiter and a chorus can change the order of the effect connection flanger Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Lette Routing Wet Dry Let Wet Dry Exciter F X Limiter Exciter Chorus Flanger EQ Trim LEQ HEQ EQ Trim LEQ HEQ N gt lt hHlExciter H Limiter e 4 gt H lt H Exciter 2 ii H Gain Adjust A Ie o Output Mode i Feedback Wet Invert i B Cho Fing Wet Dry Right o d m Righto nvelope Ganira M ronan Wet Dry X Exciter Blend 100 100 X Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the in
147. change the corre sponding parameter s value The left button decreases the value the right button increases it 9 TRACK SELECT Depending on the operating mode this button switches between the various tracks view STYLE PLAY MODE Switches between the Realtime tracks and the Style tracks SONG PLAY MODE Switches between the main page showing the Realtime Keyboard tracks Song tracks 1 8 and Song tracks 9 16 SONG MODE Switches between the main page Song tracks 1 8 and Song tracks 9 16 The TRACK SELECT LED shows the current page view VALUE Off Main page Realtime tracks or Song controls On 2nd page Style tracks or Song tracks 1 8 Flashing 3rd page Song tracks 9 16 SINGLE TOUCH SETTING F1 F4 FUNCTION KEYS buttons While in the main page of the Style Play or Backing Sequence mode these buttons select a Single Touch Setting each Each of the Styles includes a maximum of four Single Touch Set tings STS to automatically configure the Realtime tracks and effects at the touch of a finger When the SINGLE TOUCH LED is lit an STS is automatically selected when selecting a Style In Edit mode these buttons double as function keys to select the corresponding items in the display SHIFT With this button held down pressing certain other buttons accesses to a second function 9 TEMPO VALUE section The DIAL and the DOWN and UP buttons can be used to control the Tempo assign a different value to t
148. coco ostave Hixer FESend 8 CHB D668 Ciga Dieta Cig Digne Ci ibe De pha aa ti Clie Dieta Ci ibe Dema KE ia Clee Dee CIGG Dee amp Here is the edit procedure 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F1 F4 buttons to select a parameter for that track 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the parame ter s value Parameters 000 No effect Only the direct uneffected signal goes to the outputs 127 10096 effect The direct uneffected and effected signals go to the outputs with the same level PAGE 4 FX A B SELECT This page lets you select the A and B effects Usually the A effect is a reverb while the B effect is a modulating effect Effects A and B are usually reserved to Sequencer 1 You can however create Songs by using all four effects in Song mode Depending on the status of the S2 FX Mode parameter this effect pair could be reserved to Sequencer 2 too see page 80 Campa maseure transpose Je B58 C B Gu oooo CE emo FAE Select sin Boy BicHall Mlwihrs FodTrkibE1 BoAserd 127 Note When playing back a Song that makes use of all four effects A D you can t edit any effect parameter These param eters appear greyed out in the display Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the def
149. corrupted or its structure is too different from Pa series data Error while formatting medium An error was reported when formatting the medium card The format procedure has been aborted Try again If format ting a card replace the card and try again Error while Writing Press Exit An error was reported while writing on the medium card The procedure has been canceled Select a different medium and try again Existing Files Not Copied Press Exit After a Copy procedure no Overwrite selected all files shar ing the same name have not been copied Factory Styles Protected Press Exit The SET file you just loaded included some banks of Fac tory Styles Since the Factory Style Protect flag was switched on Factory Style banks were not loaded See Factory Style Protect on page 141 Fast Format Failed Full Format Enter Exit The Fast Format procedure failed Press ENTER to go on with a Full Format procedure slower File is protected You have tried to write over a read only or system file Pa50SD can t write over this kind of files Should you need to write over one of these file use a personal computer to change the file s properties then try again Read your com puter s user s manual File Dir Already Existing Press Exit During a Rename or New Dir operation you were trying to use an existing name Use a different name File in Use Press Exit The file you tried to delete is in use by another
150. delay time in Voice2 Level 0 100 R Delay Time msec 0 0 500 0msec Sets the Voice2 output level ts the right ch delay ti Sets the right channel delay time Pan L6 R6 Depth 0 200 Sets the Voice2 stereo image Sets the depth of LFO modulation Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount os Fx 020 High Damp 0 100 Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range ts Fx 020 Effects Pitch Phase Mod 193 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 pun Src Off tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a Control Mode e Voice1 Resonance h Voice2 Resonance This parameter determines the resonance intensity When Control Mode Manual the Resonance parameter sets the intensity of resonance If the Reso nance parameter has a negative value harmonics will be changed and resonance will occur at a pitch one octave lower When Control Mode LFO the intensity of resonance varies according to the LFO The LFO sways between posi tive and negative values causing resonance to occur between specified pitches an octave apart in turn When Control Mode D mod the resonance is con trolled by the dynamic modulation source If JS X or Rib bon is assigned a
151. depth of the sampling frequency LFO modulation pgz d Src Off Tempo Selects the LFO modulation source of the sampling frequency Amt 100 100 Sets the LFO modulation amount of the sampling frequency Resolution 4 24 e Sets the data bit length var Output Level 0 100 Sets the output level S prez t Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the output level Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the output level Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dz Src Off tempo 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a Pre LPF If a sampler with a very low sampling frequency receives very high pitched sound that could not be heard during playback it could generate pitch noise that is unrelated to the original sound Set Pre LPF to ON to prevent this noise from being generated If you set the Sampling Freq to about 3kHz and set Pre LPF to OFF you can create a sound like a ring modulator e Resolution f Output Level If you set a smaller value for the Resolution parameter the sound may be distorted The volume level may also be changed Use Output Level to adjust the level 015 Analog Rec Stereo Analog Record This effect simulates the noise caused by scratches and dust on
152. effect be Fx 011 Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency Fx 009 X Emphatic Point 0 70 W Sweep Mode Auto D mod LFO g Sets the frequency range to be emphasized ce Fx 011 Selects the control from auto wah modulation source and LFO ts Fx 009 Drez Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet g pa Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Src Off Tempo De Selects the modulation source for the wah when Sweep Mode D mod n Ste Off Tempo W LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Sets the LFO speed Amt 100 100 p Resonance 0 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Sets the resonance amount ance on page 175 LPF O On Switches the wah low pass filter on and off i Routing PEQ WAH WAH gt PEQ Changes the order of the parametric equalizer and wah connection Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 D Src Off tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 Effects 211 Mono Mono Chain 060 4EqPhsrChFl However if a mono input type effect is connected after Parametric 4 Band EQ Chorus Flanger this effect the left and right sounds may cancel each other elimin
153. filter EG Filter A B modulation AMS1 fA B Alternate Modulation Source1 for filter A B Selects the source that will control modulation of the filter A cutoff frequency See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 Note The filter B parameters will be displayed when Filter Type on page 112 is Low Pass amp High Pass Intensity Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS1 will have When AMS is JS X a positive value for this parameter will cause the cutoff frequency to rise when the joystick is moved toward the right and fall when the joystick is moved toward the left With a negative value for this parameter the opposite will occur This value is added to the setting of the Filter A Frequency AMS2 Alternate Modulation Source2 Selects the source that will control modulation of the filter A cutoff frequency see AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 Intensity Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that the selected source will have see Intensity on page 114 PAGE 9 FILTER LFO1 Here you can use the filter LFO to apply cyclic modulation to the cutoff frequency of the filter for the selected oscillator to create cyclical changes in tone Campo mossurs 20 Filter LF ll scl Selected Daci Intercite to Ai 4 Irtersita to B 4 Josstick to Ai 9a
154. frequency range for the effect on the left channel t Fx 009 R Manu Bottom R Manual Bottom 0 100 Sets the lower limit of the frequency range for the effect on the right channel B t Fx 009 R Manu Top R Manual Top 0 100 Sets the upper limit of the frequency range for the effect on the right chan nel ts Fx 009 Sweep Mode EG D mod Determines whether the flanger is controlled by the envelope generator or by the modulation source s Fx 022 Dese Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that triggers the EG when EG is selected for Sweep Mode or modulation source that causes the flanger to sweep when D mod is selected for Sweep Mode EG Attack 1 100 F Sets the EG attack speed vs Fx 022 EG Decay 1 100 Sets the EG decay speed vs Fx 022 Resonance 100 100 Sets the resonance amount Ws Fx 023 t High Damp 96 0 100 Sets the resonance damping amount in the high range Fx 023 Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 t Ex 010 023 Dz Src Off Tempo 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 Effects Pitch Phase Mod 191 027 Vibrato Stereo Vibrato This effect causes the pitch of the input signal to shimmer Using the AutoFade allows you to increase or decrease the shimmeri
155. g Switches the order of the limiter and multitap delay connection L Attack 1 100 p Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet ts the attack ti 1S Fx b Sets the attack timg iun Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Release 1 100 Dyz ts the rel ti oS Fx Sets the release time x 003 Sic Off Tempo E L Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 lie EE Sets the limiter output gain Fx 003 Ami 100 100 P LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal 4 Sets the LFO speed ance on page 175 LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform z 074 Exc Compr e P Manual 0 100 Excit C Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied xciter Compressor P Depth 0 100 This effect combines a mono type exciter and a compressor Sets the depth of LFO modulation i f 4 You can change the order of the effect connection Resonance 100 100 Sets the resonance amount os Fx 023 Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out P Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Left Wet Dy Sets the phaser effect balance t Fx 010 023 O Exciter VN compressor uu Output Mode Normal Wet Invert es mu EEicEG i Selects the phaser output mode Vs Ex 067 gt CH Exciter Comp f n Routing LMT gt PHS PHS gt LMT output Level Switches the order of the limiter and phaser connection F
156. go to the previous or next step 1 8 or 192 ticks If an event is located before the previous or next step the locator stops on that event For example if you are positioned on M001 01 000 and no event exists before M001 01 192 the gt button moves to the M001 01 192 loca tion If an event exists on M001 01 010 the gt button stops to the M001 01 010 location These commands are effective even if the M easure parame ter is not selected SHIFT lt or gt Previous or Next Event Keep the SHIFT button pressed while pressing the lt or gt button to move to the previous or next recorded event HOW TO DELETE A WHOLE SONG You can delete a whole Song with the simple SHIFT DELETE key sequence 1 Enter the Backing Sequence mode You must be in the main page of the mode If you are in Record mode go back to the Playback mode 2 Press SHIFT DELETE 3 The Delete Song message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort 88 Song operating mode Transport controls 13 SONG OPERATING MODE The Song operating mode is the full featured onboard sequencer where you can create from scratch or edit a Song You can also use this mode to edit the initial parameters of a Standard MIDI File either made with an external sequencer or with Pa50SD own Song and Backing Sequence modes You can save the edited Song as a Standard MIDI File MID file and playback it either in Song Play Backing Sequence or Son
157. hene hee ode 139 Pages bormat necesse eh ee RE n HERE 139 Page6 New Dir eco kehrt eser cee eae 139 Page 7 RENAME 6 esccs pate eke dani nce ice ER 140 Page 8 Utilities 1 v c t 02cedsentaeaeieiametoe anwar 140 Page9 Utilities L4 c uesomdas cnees gue satie eases 141 Appendix Factory Data ssi state view eR 144 Styles xct esse es E ds Va E OU He reU Masa 144 Style Elements us saxo pepe E RR UE E RENREN ERES 146 Single Touch Settings STS 0 0 cece eee eee eee 146 Programs bank order 00 e eee eee eee 147 Programs Program Change order 154 Drami Kits sais se foun rece Ode aves oer dein ens Rede Ob RE FETU 160 Drum Kit instruments 0 eee eee eee 161 Performances i socev ev EDU RUPERICE E I Mae ee 173 MIDI Setup 21 2 obe Ra et Rer metre td aee 174 Effects iili eiie wenige ora le da 175 Diagrams cci cave sade eb REF ep Eae 175 Dynamic Modulation sources 000ee eee eee 175 Filter Dynamie ccendcierisasiecied anirien an RAN 175 Pitch Phase Mod i4 sei eee Y ene 185 Mod P Shift s srlecentRie keep RR RD ERE 195 ER Delay eee t eere g eec de ee ice n 202 Reverb inesse E EE T vaa Pep a pU P ed ine 208 Mono Mono Chain sssrisrecisisirrirers resniem 210 Assignable parameters sese 225 List of functions assignable to the Footswitch 225 List of functions assignable to the Pedal or Assignable Sn c 226 List of sounds assignable
158. in semitone steps Master Transpose The transposition value is shown as a note name on the top right of the display oP octave Press both buttons together to reset the Master Transpose to zero Note The Master Transpose has no effect on tracks set to Drum mode and even if set in a different status on the Drum and Percussion tracks See Page 14 Track Mode on page 46 and Page 7 Track Mode on page 78 b Lowers the Master Transpose a semitone i Raises the Master Transpose a semitone OCTAVE gt PERF STYLE STS These buttons transpose the selected track in steps of a whole octave 12 semitones max 2 octaves The transposition value is shown in octaves on the top right area of the dis play ee octave Press both buttons together to reset the Octave Transpose to zero Note The Octave Transpose has no effect on tracks set to Drum mode and even if set in a different status on the Drum and Percussion tracks Lowers the selected track an octave t Raises the selected track an octave BALANCE slider In Song Play mode this slider balances the volume of the two on board sequencers When fully on the left only the Sequencer 1 can be heard When fully on the right only the Sequencer 2 can be heard When in the middle both sequencers play at full volume B SEQUENCER TRANSPORT CONTROLS SEQ1 and SEQ2 The instrument is equipped with two sequencers Sequencer 1 and Seq
159. in this tutorial and save them into Performance 1 1 You ll soon see how to do it select a different Performance Is the PERFORM LED switched on If so press one of the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE buttons and select a Performance with the VOLUME VALUE buttons on the side of the display Csliard amps Cansu ransposs E cod SEG Ge A M StereoGrand Senecam Blue ClupPiano Legend Forrestotr Melam RecorPac Dears Select a Performance with the VOLUME VALUE buttons Go on trying with the different Performances We provided 160 of them for you Select Performance 1 1 Grand Piano again As above press Performance bank 1 and use the A VOL UME VALUE buttons to select Performance 1 1 The Upper 2 track will be selected and 1 unmuted The Play icon will appear sur rounded by the selected track frame and accompanied by o Unmute the Upper 2 track Press both F VOLUME VALUE buttons the pointing arrow You will hear the Dark Pad Program play together with the Grand Piano herd Campo measure aw Ea Eee L pee mL UTI SoftBeat IST51 a BiG Drum Fero GrarcPiseno 6 Bassa z it fed Pic 1 3 Press the F VOLUME VALUE buttons Press SPLIT on the KEYBOARD MODE section and play Now the keyboard is split in two p
160. instru ment off or entering Record again either in Backing Sequence or Song mode Save the Song to the card if you wish to preserve it CHORD ACC STEP RECORDING While in the Backing Sequence operative mode you can enter the Chord Acc Step Mode to create or edit the Style Chord Acc part of a Song This mode lets you enter chords even if you are not a keyboard player or fix any error made playing chords or selecting Style controls during the Real time Recording mode You can edit only Songs created on the Pa50SD Pa60 or Pa80 Backing Sequence mode provided that you have the same Styles in the same locations When saving a Song created in Backing Sequence mode all Chord Acc data is preserved and can be loaded later to be edited using the Chord Acc Step Mode Here is how to enter the Chord Acc Step Mode and execute your editing 1 Press B SEQ to enter the Backing Sequence mode 2 Press RECORD You will be prompted to select the Real time Recording mode or the Chord Acc Step Mode Camps mesure Wransposs 888 E B coco Ceme Coh play Eeconrd Realtime Recordirnd U kerdBec Shee Mode 3 Press one of the B Chord Acc Step Mode VOLUME VALUE buttons to enter the Step Mode The Chord Acc Backing Sequence operating mode 83 Chord Acc Step recording Step mode page appears see Chord Acc Step Record ing page
161. is determined based on the note number allowing you to use it as an octaver The Note Interval parameter sets the pitch offset from the original note number by semitone steps The Note Fine parame ter allows you to fine tune in steps of cents d Envelope Pre LPF This parameter sets the upper limit of the frequency range to which very low harmonics are added Adjust this parameter if you do not want to add lower harmonics to the higher range Sweep Mode D mod LFO a Switches between modulation source control and LFO control Dw Bottom 1 49 Center 51 99 Top Manual Voice Control Voice pattern control b Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls the voice pattern Voice Top A U E O Selects a vowel sound at the top end of control d Voice Center A l U E O Selects a vowel sound in the center of control E Voice Bottom A U E O Selects a vowel sound at the bottom end of control LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed t Fx 009 prez t Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes s Fx 009 eye BPM MIDI 40 240 g Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo vs Fx 009 Base Note A Ds 2 ds J d3 d 0 Selects the type of notes
162. lengthen the time and setting it to will allow AMSI to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no effect AMS2 Alternate Modulation Source 2 This is another alternate modulation source for the Amp EG See above AMS1 parameters PAGE 17 LFO1 In this and the next page you can make settings for the LFO that can be used to cyclically modulate the Pitch Filter and Amp of each oscillator There are two LFO units for each oscillator By setting the LFO1 or LFO2 Intensity to a negative value for Pitch Filter or Amp you can invert the LFO waveform Cehierd Cempe measure transposes gti LFDL l sci PE Selected Ceci ave Triangle Earned Fremer Sl Kes Saoi Or Wave This parameter selects the LFO waveform The numbers that appear at the right of some of the LFO waveforms indicate the phase at which the waveform will begin Triangle 0 Step Triangle 4 g Triangle 90 AV Triangle wave Step Triangle 6 wA i ue Phase will change Tenge 3N randomly at each keyn Step Saw 4 Fx Saw o T StpSaw 6 fs Sawtooth down Saw 180 Random1 S H m Conventional sample amp hold S H in which the level changes randomly at fixed intervals of Square FL Square wave time Random S H Both the levels and the time intervals will change randomly L1 Randoms S H The maximum level and minimum level will
163. non volatile memory used for Factory and User data will be preserved see Memory Mode on page 51 CONTROLLING THE VOLUME Use the MASTER VOL UME slider to control the overall volume of the instrument This slider controls the volume of the sound going to the internal speakers the LIMONO amp RIGHT OUTPUTS and the HEADPHONES con nector Note Start at a moderate level then raise the MASTER VOLUME up Don t keep the volume at an uncomfortable level for too long Use the ACC SEQ VOLUME slider to control the Style tracks drums percussion bass volume This slider also controls both Sequencers tracks excluding the Realtime Keyboard tracks By default you can use the ASSIGN SLIDER to control the keyboard tracks volume This slider is user assign able but is set to the Keyboard Expression parameter by default MASTER VOLUME ACC SEQ ASSIGN VOLUME SLIDER ra eo me o Sor teh eto ey Ochs Pao god is THE BALANCE SLIDER The BALANCE slider sets the relative volume of the two onboard sequencers Sequencer1 and Sequencer 2 Move it fully left to set Sequencer 1 to the maximum level and Sequencer 2 to zero Move it fully right to set Sequencer 1 to zero and Sequencer 2 to the maximum level Move it to the center to set both Sequencer at the same level Note When turning the instrument on move this slider to the center to avoid starting a Song at the minimum level HEADP
164. of Programs or Performances selected LOWER LED ON Lower row of Programs or Performances selected On the front panel Program banks are identified by the instrument names while Performance banks are identified by numbers 1 10 0 bank 10 A note about Program banks and names Programs from PIANO to SFX are standard Programs the user can t directly modify 18 Front panel Programs USERI and USER are locations where you can load new Programs from card USER DK is where you can load new drum kits Each Program bank contains various pages each with up to 8 Programs You can browse them using the PAGE buttons Shortcut to see the original bank for a Performance or Pro gram You can see the original bank where a Performance or Program is contained Just keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the lefmost button of the PROGRAM PERFOR MANCE section A message window will appear showing the name of the original bank Release the SHIFT button to exit the window Shortcut to see all pages of the selected bank To cycle all pages for a selected bank repeatedly press the bank s button PADS 1 4 STOP gt PERF STS These programmable pads can be used to trigger a sound effect Use the STOP button to stop a cyclic sound See List of sounds assignable to the Pads on page 226 Each Pad corresponds to a dedicated Pad track TRANSPOSE PERF gt STYLE These buttons transpose the whole instrument
165. of the multisample is o 2 1 Transpose Use this parameter to adjust the pitch of the selected oscilla tor in semitone steps over a range of 1 octave 12 12 Transposition in semitones Tune Use this parameter to adjust the pitch of the sample in one cent steps a semitone is 100 cents over a range of 1 octave 1200 1200 Fine tune value in cents Octave transposition Delay ms This parameter sets a delay time from the note on to the real beginning of the sound With a setting of KeyOff the sound will begin when note off occurs This is useful to create sounds such as the click that is heard when a harpsichord note is released In this case set the Sustain Level parame ter to 0 see page 14 115 Key Off The sound will begin when the note is released 0 5000 Delay time in milliseconds PAGE 2 DK SAMPLES DRUM PROGRAMS This page appears when you edit a Drum Program Here you can select a different percussive sample for each layer High and Low on each key Cod Cmpa Gmessurs fremsposs gn DE Samples Kee Cz Assi dred es MS Hi Bark bMume ROM ED 5oftEoom 44 Key Key in edit You can press a key on the keyboard to select a key Assigned Use this parameter to turn the sample on off Yes The sample is assigned to the selected key No The sample is not assigned The sample assigned to the next
166. on off When L Only or R Only is selected the gate is controlled by either of the channel signals b Polarity This parameter reverses the Gate on off operation With a negative value the gate is closed when the input signal level exceeds the Threshold The gate operation con trolled by the modulation source is also reversed c Threshold d Attack d Release This parameter sets the signal level below which Gate is applied when Envelope Select is set to L R Mix L Only or R Only The Attack and Release parameters set the Gate attack time and release time Gate Threshold n Output Level Threshold EV Louder Louder Input Level Gate Attack Release reor emen emensus Threshold M i N Release e Delay Time This parameter sets the delay time of the Gate input If the sound has a very fast attack increase the delay time so that the signal will be input after the Gate is opened This will preserve the attack part of the sound Attack 100 Release 100 Attack 006 OD HGain Wah Overdrive Hi Gain Wah This distortion effect utilizes an Overdrive mode and a Hi Gain mode Controlling the wah effect the 3 band EQ and the amp simulation will allow you to create versatile distor tion sounds Th
167. parameter is set to values of 16 33 49 66 82 or 99 the specified EG times will speed up as much as 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 times respectively or slowed down to 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 16 1 32 or 1 64 of the original time For example if AMS is set to Velocity increasing the abso lute value of Intensity will allow strongly played notes to increase the changes in pitch EG Time values The direc tion of the change is specified by Attack Time Swing and Decay Time Swing As you play more softly the pitch EG times will more closely approach the actual settings of the pitch EG 99 99 Attack Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS will affect the Attack Time parameter With positive values of Intensity a setting of will cause the time to be length ened and a setting of will cause the time to be shortened With a setting of 0 there will be no change Parameter value Decay Time Swing Specify the direction in which AMS will affect the Decay Time With positive values of Intensity a setting of will cause the time to be lengthened and a setting of will cause the time to be shortened With a setting of 0 there will be no change PAGE 7 FILTER Here you can make settings for the filters that will be used by the oscillators You can select either a 24 dB octave low pass filter with resonance or a series connection of a 12 dB octave low pa
168. play more strongly and negative 119 120 Program operating mode Page 17 LFO1 values will cause EG times to shorten as you play more strongly With a setting of 0 the EG times will be as specified by the Amp envelope parameters see page 14 118 Attack Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction of the effect that AMS1 will have on Attack Time With positive values of Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMSI to lengthen the time and setting it to will allow AMSI to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no effect Decay Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction of the effect that AMS1 will have on Decay Time With positive values of Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMSI to lengthen the time and setting it to will allow AMSI to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no effect Slope Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction of the effect that AMS1 will have on Slope Time With positive values of Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMSI to lengthen the time and setting it to will allow AMSI to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no effect Release Time This parameter specifies the direction of the effect that AMS1 will have on Release Time With positive val ues of Intensity setting this parameter to will allow AMSI to
169. positive value for both Feedback and Wet Dry Stereo Envelope Flanger and if you set a negative value for both Feedback and Wet Dry g High Damp This parameter sets the amount of damping of the feed back in the high range Increasing the value will cut high This Flanger uses an envelope generator for modulation You will obtain the same pattern of flanging each time you play You can also control the Flanger directly using the modula tion source range harmonics Stereo In Stereo Out ute fem 021 RandomFlang V e Flanger Stereo Random Flanger renes EON The stereo effect uses a step shape waveform and random J Fanas ibus T A LFO for modulation creating a unique flanging effect A I f e Dose opened PSUR Stereo In Stereo Out i gt EG Attack Decay 4 Sweep Modi Lone Y fran Y Flanger F At aaa TAN L Dly Bottom msec L Delay Bottom 0 0 50 0msec A 7N Sets the lower limit of the delay time on the left channel Fx 009 i a J Flanger Misi M L Dly Top msec L Delay Top 0 0 50 0msec i n Sets the upper limit of the delay time on the left channelt Fx 009 Right o o Watt Dry R Dly Bottom msec R Delay Bottom 0 0 50 0msec CFO Step Tri Random b Set
170. previous note Mono Right A Mono track but with priority assigned to the rightmost highest note PAGE 16 TRACK INTERNAL EXTERNAL This page lets you set the Internal or External status for each track It is very useful to let a Song track drive an external expander Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again Kick V Kick drums volume Snare V Snare drums volume Tom V Toms volume HiHat V Hi Hat volume CymbalV Ride Crash and other cymbals volume Percus1V Classic percussion set volume Percus2V Ethnic percussion set volume SFX V Special effects volume Reset You can reset the parameters value by keeping the SHIFT button pressed while pressing the selected track VOLUME VALUE button When you press the above combination the Reset window appears Press ENTER YES to reset the currently selected track Keep SHIFT pressed and press ENTER YES to reset all tracks Press EXIT NO to abort and leave all parameters unchanged PAGE 15 TRACK MODE This page lets you set the polyphony mode for each track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again tempo measure rremsposs ama EG 888 oooo l Tracks Tribe Eset ia Both Both Both Bothy B Both External t Both Bothy chord Cmpa m
171. relevant chapter devoted to each operating mode or edit environment to see their maps in detail 9 PAGE After pressing MENU to open a menu use these buttons to browse the edit pages of an operating mode or editing envi ronment Press EXIT to go back from an edit page to the main page of the current operating mode or to close the Glo bal or Card Edit environment In addition you can use these buttons to select a different page in a Style Select or Program Select window 16 Front panel e VOLUME VALUE MUTE A H buttons PERF gt STYLE STS Within this user s manual each button pair is marked with an alphabetic letter A H See Display and User Interface on page 19 for more details ES Caha faneure Wenspcss HB BBB BH sB laal Se sesso ES Co tJ E m EJ E EJ BossaMoua ISTA ccu DRUM PERC DRUM BE Pisco in ERI ACCZ ot amp Bass il Baitarel UI C C cS ESSA 9 Aec 1 5 SireeERSZ UI opem S ma m j SE m o FR a B C mesas t p ul E x Ea wn C i ination A corresponding track name is printed over each button pair These names show the corresponding track the button pair affects in the main page of the Style Play mode The left half is for the main page where you can see the Realtime tracks and the Style tracks grouped to
172. shot Press it twice to let it play in loop and select any other Style ele ment Fill Intro Variation to exit the loop B ENDING 1 2 DOT TRIPLET buttons gt PERF gt STYLE While the Style is running these two buttons trigger an End ing and stop the Style Press one of them and the Style will stop running with an Ending If pressed while the Style is stopped they act as an additional couple of Intros Press them twice LED blinking to let them play in loop and select any other Style element Fill Intro Variation to exit the loop ENDINGI also doubles as a DOT function and ENDING2 doubles as a TRIPLET function to be used in Song mode see chapter 13 Note Ending 1 plays a short sequence with different chords while Ending 2 plays on the last recognized chord INTRO 1 2 buttons PERF gt STYLE These two buttons set the arranger in Intro mode After pressing one of these buttons start the Style and it will begin with the selected intro The INTRO LED automatically goes off at the end of the intro Press them twice LED blinking to let them play in loop and select any other Style element Fill Intro Variation to exit the loop Note Intro 1 plays a short sequence with different chords while Intro 2 plays on the last recognized chord START STOP Starts or stops the Style running SHIFT You can reset all frozen notes and controllers on the Pa50SD and any instrument connected to its M
173. t Fx 010 020 P Depth 0 100 Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Sets the depth of LFO modulation Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger is h Resonance 100 100 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the resonance amount ws Fx 023 Tabie Seis the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 P Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Dz Setsthe phaser effect balance t Fx 010 023 Src Off Tempo o utput Mode Normal Wet Invert J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Selects the phaser output mode 1S Fx 060 Amt 100 100 Wet Dr z r i y Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 ance on page 175 Drez Ca i Output Mode j Sre Off Tempo p i J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 When Wet Invert is selected the right channel phase of n ae E mt 100 100 the chorus flanger effect sound is inverted This creates Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal pseudo stereo effects and adds spread ance on page 175 212 Effects Mono Mono Chain
174. tempo t Fx 009 When Sweep Mode D mod the modulation source trol the fl directly Select th dulati Base Note A Ds 2 Js 2 d d o can contro e flanger directly selec e moqulation Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed 1 Fx 009 source using the Src parameter me aoe ts thi f notes that ify the LFt Vs Fx The effect is off when a value for the modulation source speci Sets the number abnalse diet epealy GeO sed x 009 fied for the Src parameter is smaller than 64 and the effect is e Manual i 0 100 on when the value is 64 or higher The Envelope Generator is Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied triggered when the value changes from 63 or smaller to 64 or Depth 0 100 higher Sets the depth of LFO modulation Dze Src Off Tempo d EG Attack d EG Decay f Selects the modulation source for the LFO modulation depth Attack and Decay speed are the only adjustable parame Amt 100 4100 ters on this EG Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth Resonance 100 100 Sets the resonance amount 023 Phaser d High Damp 0 100 Stereo Phaser Sets the resonance damping amount in the high range LS 1 ifH 1 Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet This effect creates a swell by shifting the phase It is very Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 effective on electric piano sounds You can add sp
175. the effect 5d 17 9 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 13 Ex 006 B le 39 s the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 ms Gain dB 18 4180B Ste Off Tempo Sets the gain of Band 4 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 h Routing CMP gt PEQ PEQ gt CMP Amt 100 100 Switches the order of the compressor and parametric EQ connection Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet ance on page 175 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 pa E ar h Output Mode i Routing rc Tempo A Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 When Wet Invert is selected the right channel phase of AS on con the chorus flanger effect sound is inverted This creates Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal pseudo stereo effects and adds spread ance on page 175 However if a mono input type effect is connected after this effect the left and right sounds may cancel each other eliminating the chorus flanger effects When Routing is set to FLNG CMP Output Mode will be set to Normal Effects 215 Mono Mono Chain 068 Cmp Phaser Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Compress or Phas er oe the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 pl This effect combines a mono type compressor and a phaser Src Off
176. the left of the split point and the chord for the automatic accompaniment are kept in memory even when you raise your hand from the keyboard OFF The sound and chords are released as soon as you raise your hand from the keyboard This button doubles as a TIE function for the Song mode see chapter 13 BASS INVERSION REST This button turns the Bass Inversion function on or off ON The lowest note of a chord played in inverted form will always be detected as the root note of the chord Thus you can specify to the arranger composite chords such as Am7 G or F C OFF The lowest note is scanned together with the other chord notes and is not always consid ered as the root note This button doubles as a REST function for the Song mode see chapter 13 MANUAL BASS This button turns the Manual Bass function on or off Note When you press the MANUAL BASS button the Bass track volume is automatically set to the maximum value The volume is automatically set back to the original value when the MANUAL BASS button is deactivated 14 Front panel ON The automatic accompaniment stops playing apart for the Drum and Percussion tracks and you can manually play the Bass track on the Lower part of the keyboard You can start the automatic accompaniment again by press ing one of the CHORD SCANNING buttons OFF The bass track is automatically played by the Style SPLIT POINT lt gt GBL Keep this butt
177. the quantization during record ing Quantization is a way of correcting timing errors notes played too soon or too later are moved to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid set with this parameter thus playing perfectly in time Hi No quantization applied J 1 32 1 8 Grid resolution in musical values For example when you select 1 16 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 16 division When you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division No quanti 1 16 abe o p o Meter This is the meter or time signature of the Song You can edit this parameter only when the Song is empty i e before you begin recording anything To insert a meter change in the middle of the Song use the Insert Measure function see page 13 101 Sel Tempo Select Tempo Select this parameter to use the TEMPO VALUE controls to set the tempo Note You can always change the Tempo when other parame ters are selected by keeping the SHIFT button pressed and rotating the DIAL Note The tempo is always record in overwrite mode old data is replaced by the new data Tempo Tempo mode This parameter sets the way tempo events are read Record All Tempo changes made during recording will be recorded to the Master Track Auto The Sequencer plays back all recorded Tempo events No new Tempo events are recorded The latest manual Tempo setting made using the TEMPO VALUE controls is considered the current Tempo val
178. this icon shows that the instrument is in Program mode Page header The header shows the name of the current edit page Oscillator in edit When in an edit page where selecting an oscillator is required this area shows the selected oscillator Use the F1 F4 buttons to select one of the four available oscillators Page number This area shows the current page number Parameters Select an edit parameter using the A D VOLUME VALUE buttons You can scroll the parameter list using the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE but tons Parameter value Use the A D VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the parameter value THE COMPARE FUNCTION While in edit you can compare the current Program with its original values You cannot edit the Program while you are in Compare mode Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press ENTER to enter the Compare function The PROGRAM LED begins flashing Play on the keyboard to listen to the original Program e Press SHITF ENTER again to exit the Compare mode and return to the edited Program HOW TO SELECT OSCILLATORS While in an edit page requiring an oscillator to be selected for editing use the F1 F4 buttons to select one of the available oscillators ERASE PROGRAM OSCILLATOR You can initialize any parameter value by using one of the following shortcuts While in the Basic page keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the DELETE button to initial
179. to the Pads 226 List of functions assignable to the Pads 227 SCALES Rec 227 MIDI Controllers 2020202 ee eee 228 MIDI Implementation Chart 0 0008 229 Parameters i xw a acre Rhe ea 230 Recognized chords LL s 233 Error messages amp Troubleshooting 235 Errormnessages 4 v ee Rer e RETE UR nete 235 Troubleshooting 0 cece eee eee eee eens 238 Technical specifications 239 Alphabetical Index Less 240 INTRODUCTION 8 Welcome Live Performing 1 WELCOME Welcome to the world of KORG Pa50SD Professional Arranger Pa50SD is one of the most powerful arranger avail able today both for professional and home entertainment use Here are some of the features of your new instrument Powerful HI Hyper Integrated KORG sound genera tion system as seen in our best professional synthesiz ers OPOS Objective Portable Operating System multi tasking operating system to let you load data while playing your instrument Operating System updates to load new features from card Don t let your instrument get old Solid State Disk SSD for any system update a smart way to replace the usual ROM memory SD card drive capable of reading and writing on SD and MMC memory types Direct Style access from SD card General MIDI Level 2 Sounds compatible More than 660 S
180. to the ring modulator If the input sound contains lots of harmonics the effect may sound dirty In this case cut a certain amount of high range b OSC Mode This parameter determines whether or not the oscillator frequency follows the note number c Fixed Frequency Hz This parameter sets the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode is set to Fixed d Note Offset d Note Fine These parameters for the oscillator are used when OSC Mode is set to Note Key Follow The Note Offset sets the pitch difference from the original note in semitone steps The Note Fine parameter fine adjusts the pitch in cent steps Matching the oscillator frequency with the note number produces a ring modulation effect in the correct key 037 Detune Using this effect you can obtain a detune effect that offsets the pitch of the effect sound slightly from the pitch of the input signal Compared to the chorus effect a more natural sound thickness will be created Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Wet Dry Input Level High Damp Detune X Delay H7 N Feedback Input Level tante LY Dry Pitch Shift cent 100 100cent Sets the pitch difference from the input signal Dz z a Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the pitch shift Amt 100 100cent Sets the modulation amount of the pitch shift b Delay Time msec 0 1000msec Set
181. track Bass Bass track Accl 5 One of the Auto accompaniment tracks S1 T1 16 S2 T1 16 Global One of Sequencer 1 tracks One of Sequencer 2 tracks Special channel to simulate the Pa50SD s inte grated controls keyboard pedals joystick with an external keyboard or controller MIDI messages coming on this channel are consid ered as being generated by Pa50SD s integrated controllers On this special channel the Pa50SD receives MIDI messages to remotely select Styles Per formances STS and Style Elements See tables on page 144 and following for more informa tion on the received data Control 127 128 Global edit environment Page 7 MIDI IN Controls 1 PAGE 7 MIDI IN CONTROLS 1 This page is where you can program the Chord Recognition channels for the internal arranger and a fixed velocity value for all notes appearing at the input coy meen 688 pi Mida Chl 1 hordi channelioft Dhondi chanreliorr Melocits IniHormal There are two separate Chord channels This is very useful when you must send chords to Pa50SD on two channels like with some MIDI Accordions Chord1 channel gt GBL Notes entering this channel are sent to the Chord Recogni tion engine Chord2 channel gt GBL Notes entering this channel are sent to the Chord Recogni tion engine Velocity Input gt GBL Use this parameter to
182. turn off its LED The Main page of the Song Record mode appears again Campa messurs Granapoea J 132m 888 C B eu 0000 Eec Hewsond Rectiverdus Trkii S8 zi E Metro eid Resol Meteeide4 Sel Terro Teneot Auto 9 From the Main page of the Song Record mode press RECORD to exit the Record mode While in the Main page of the Song mode you may press SEQ1 PLAY STOP to listen to the Song or select the Save Song com mand to save the Song to the card Chords and second voices With Pa50SD you are not obliged to insert single notes in a track There are several ways to insert chords and double voices For more information see the Chords and second voices in Step Record mode section on page 10 60 of the Style Record mode chapter SONG RECORD PAGE While in the Song mode press RECORD to enter the Song Record mode The Song Record page appears chord tempo mossurs transpose en Ji 888 C B amo IEU oooo Ceetave co Recieusona FS Rect Overdue Trkil GE zi E Metrot ni Resol Metenide4 Sel Terro TempoiButa Rec Record mode Set this parameter to select a recording mode Overdub The newly recorded events will be mixed to any existing events Overwrite The newly recorded events will replace any existing events Auto Punch Recording will a
183. v 121 1 118 Rhyt BoxTom Drum amp Perc v 121 9 125 Burst Noise SFX v 121 2 118 Electr Drum Drum amp Perc v 121 0 126 Applause SFX v 121 3 118 Rev Snare Drum amp Perc 121 1 126 Laughing SFX v 121 0 119 Reverse Cym Drum amp Perc v 121 2 126 Screaming SFX v 121 1 119 Dragon Gong Drum amp Perc 121 3 126 Punch SFX v 121 0 120 GtFretNoise SFX v 121 4 126 Heart Beat SFX v 121 1 120 GtrCutNoise SFX v 121 5 126 Footsteps SFX v 121 2 120 AcBassStrng SFX v 121 6 126 Stadium SFX 121 3 120 VoxWahChick Guitar 121 0 127 Gun Shot SFX v 121 0 121 BreathNoise SFX v 121 1 127 Machine Gun SFX v 121 1 121 Flute Click Woodwind v 121 2 127 Lasergun SFX v 121 0 122 Seashore SFX v 121 3 127 Explosion SFX v 121 1 122 Rain SFX v 160 Factory Data Drum Kits DRUM KITS The following table enlists all Pa50SD Factory Drum Kit Pro grams in order of Bank Select Program Change number Legend The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely select the Programs CC00 Control Change 0 or Bank Select MSB CC32 Control Change 32 or Bank Select LSB PC CCOO0 CC32 PC Name GM2 120 0 27 House Kit2 120 0 28 House Kit3 120 0 29 House Kit4 120 0 30 31 remap to 24 120 0 32 Jazz Kit v 120 0 133 39 remap to 32 120 0 40 Brush Kit1 v 120 0 41 Brush V S 2 120 O 42 47
184. value 127 semitones S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to be transposed If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key board range to be transposed If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single per cussive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track Since in a Drum Kit each instrument is assigned to a different note of the scale transposing a percussive instrument means assign ing the part to a different instrument Note These parameters are available only when a Drum or PAGE 3 EDIT VELOCITY In this page you can change the velocity dynamics value of notes in the selected track chord Camps measure transpose ab Cab Gece B88 B 2g Ba Cia coco Cam EditsUelocitau EJ DACULI Trek DRUM Us Luge cen ZEB Gi cee ERS 1 192 EottomiG 1 Toris After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort E CV Style Element Chord Variation Non editable These read only parameters show which Style Element and Chord Variation are currently selected for edit ing See the Mai
185. value 0 is used instead Together with the Note On message a Velocity value is always sent This value tells the instrument how loud the note must play Pitch Bend PB You can generate this message acting on the joystick X movement The pitch is translated up or down Program Change PC When you select a Program a Pro gram Change message is generated on the channel Use this message together with Control Change 00 and 32 to remotely select Pa50SD data from a sequencer or a master keyboard Control Change CC This is a wide array of messages controlling most of the instrument parameters Some exam ples CC00 or Bank Select MSB and CC32 or Bank Select LSB This message pair is used together with the Pro gram Change message to select a Program CCOL or Modulation This is the equivalent of pressing up the joystick A vibrato effect is usually triggered on CCO07 or Master Volume Use this controller to set the channel s volume CCIO0 or Pan This one sets the channel s position on the stereo front MIDI 35 What is MIDI CC64 or Damper Pedal Use this controller to simulate the Damper pedal Tempo Tempo is a global MIDI message that is not tied to a particu lar channel Each Song includes Tempo data Lyrics Lyrics are non standard MIDI events made to display text together with the music Pa50SD can read many of the avail able Lyrics format on the market
186. values of Inten sity setting this parameter to will allow AMS to lengthen the time and setting this parameter to will allow AMS to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no change Intensity value Decay Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS1 2 T will affect the decay time With positive values of Inten sity setting this parameter to will allow AMS to lengthen the time and setting this parameter to will allow AMS to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no change Slope Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS1 2 T will affect the slope time With positive values of Inten sity setting this parameter to will allow AMS to lengthen the time and setting this parameter to will allow AMS to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no change Release Time Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS1 2 T will affect the release time With positive values of Inten sity setting this parameter to will allow AMS to lengthen the time and setting this parameter to will allow AMS to shorten the time With a setting of 0 there will be no change PAGE 12 AMP These parameters control the volume and pan of the selected oscillator Shore Campa meseurs transpose I de e fae Fine lose EH Selected Deci Level 126
187. you don t want to listen to it set the track to the MUTE sta tus 4 Start recording again Anyway if you are recording the RT track you can t use the Style controls 5 Press PLAY STOP SEQI to finish the Song and exit Recording mode 10 Time to save your Song isn t it If you dont save your Song it is lost when you turn the instrument off or switch to the Song Play mode So save it to a card See Save Song page on page 84 Need more information Go to Backing Sequence operating mode on page 82 The Reference Guide includes all the information you need 5 EDITING A SONG You can edit a Song either a Standard MIDI File bought at the shop or one of your Songs made in Backing Sequence mode What about changing those boring General MIDI sounds with those gorgeous original KORG sounds You can do it in Song mode Press SONG to go to the Song mode This is the Song garage where you may find tools to reshape your Song chord Cmpa messa cq et Hew Sora Lomd Song Meteo Orr Ease Sore Medved 4d Sel Teneo Tenece pubic insert in the card drive the card containing the midifile you wish to edit Midifiles are files generated by a computer sequencer or a musical instrument usually after a conversion For example if working with a computer you should find a command whose name could sound a litt
188. you can t open a SET folder and copy one of its files You can only open generic folders Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to reach this page Caw Cmpa measure Wwanspose bs E ao FEB gR 88S 738 CE m n ar Card Cora from p Ecurrent dirt C LILE SET ETHICA SET 4 tb COPY OPEM CLOSE Copying a whole folder or folder s content You can copy a folder generic or SET into a different folder If selecting the lt current dir gt item you can copy the current folder s content without copying the folder itself If copying a whole folder a new folder with the same name is created at the target location Note During the Copy procedure you can t open a SET folder You can anyway open any generic folder 1 Insert the card into the card drive 2 Press Fl to scan the card and show the file list 3 Move the folder that you want to copy to the first line of the display If it is contained in another folder use the F3 Open button to open it Press F4 Close to go back to the previous hierarchic level To copy just the current folder s content move the lt cur rent dir gt item to the first line of the display 4 Once the item to copy is on the first line press F2 Copy to confirm the item selection The window s header changes from Copy from to Copy to
189. 00 Sets the Tap1 output level ve Feedback Tap2 100 100 Sets the Tap2 feedback amount Dm e Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the Tap2 feedback amount Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the Tap2 feedback amount f High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range ts Fx 043 Low Damp 0 100 9 Sets the damping amount in the low range ts Fx 043 Input Level Dmod 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the input level t Fx 037 Dese Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level t Fx 037 Spread 100 100 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound t Fx 043 Dese i Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect sound s stereo image width Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect sound s stereo image width Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 pue Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a Mode You can change how the left and right delay signals are panned by modifying the routing of the left and right delay as shown in the figure above You need to input dif ferent sounds to each channel in order for this parameter to be effective d Tap1 Level This parameter sets the output leve
190. 02 30 00Hz h r 1S Ey Sets the LFO1 speed Dre Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed Fx 020 Sre Off Tempo LFO Frequency Mod D mod AUTOFADE Selects the modulation source of LFO1 amp 2 speed d ue ae between D mod and AUTOFADE for the LFO frequency modula Amt 30 00 30 00 Sets the modulation amount of LFO1 speed aie eO Eod a X009 Dee i z pu LFO2 Frequency Hz 0 02 30 00Hz Src Off Tempo Sets tag LEO speed Dz Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amt 30 00 30 00 Sets the modulation amount of LFO2 speed aula th modulation amouht or LFO spe d 20 00 20 00Hz Depth1 0 100 i m BPM MIDI Sync Off On Sete the depth of LFO timodulation Dz Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the Src Off Tempo tempo and notes r Fx 009 eye Selects the modulation source of LFO1 amp 2 modulation depth BPM MIDI 40 240 Amt 100 100 Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo ts Fx 009 Sets the modulation amount of LFO1 modulation depth Base Note bh db Depth2 0 100 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed UR Fx 009 Sets the depth of LFO2 modulation Duez Times X1 x16 Amt 100 100 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed t Fx 009 Sets the modulation amount of LFO2 modulation depth Depth 0 100 L Pre Delay msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the depth of LFO modulation Ds Sets the delay time for the left channel os Fx 016 Src Off Tempo R Pre Delay msec 0 0 50 0msec 9 Select
191. 1 4 E 1 5 F 1 6 F 1 7 G 1 8 G 1 9 A 1 10 A 1 11 B 1 12 co 322 Rik3 Off 13 C 0 321 Rik2 Off 14 DO 320 RiK1 Off 15 D 0 319 Rek Jingle Off 16 EO 318 Rek dom ak Off 17 FO 303 Djembe Bass Off 18 FHO 195 Taiko Open Off 19 GO 317 Pand Pattern4 Off 20 G 0 316 Pand Pattern3 Off 21 A0 315 Pand Pattern2 Off 209 Tambourin Push Off 22 A80 314 Pand Pattern1 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 23 BO 313 Pand Open O 189 Tabla Na O 24 C1 1962195 Taiko Rim Taiko Open Off 233 Flexatone Off 25 CH 197 Tsuzumi Tsuzumi Off 230 Finger Cymbal Off 26 D1 175 175 Djembe Open Djembe Open Off 197 Tsuzumi Off 27 D 1 1775176 Djembe Slap Djembe Mute Off 172 BongoHi Slap Off 28 E1 185 184 Baya Ghe Baya Open Off 173 BongoHi Stk1 Off 29 F1 18625187 Baya Mute1Baya Mute2 Off 170 BongoLo Stk Off 30 F 1 1885303 Baya Mute5 Djembe Bass Off 211 Tambourin Acc1 Off 31 G1 190 190 Tabla Open Tabla Open Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 32 G 1 191 194 Tabla Tin Tabla Mute3 Off 273 Wind Off 33 AT 1925193 Tabla MuteT Tabla Mute2 Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 34 A 1 1895193 Tabla Na gt Tabla Mute2 6 174 BongoHi Stk2 Off 35 B1 192 Tabla Mute1 9 200 Woodblock1 9 36 c2 116 BD Orch Off 199 Claves Off 37 C 2 257 Tribe Off 201 Woodblock2 Off 38 D2 121 FingerSnaps Off 225 Cowbell Off 39 D 2 122 Hand Claps Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 40 E2 214 Triangle Mute 1 179 CastDouble Off 41 F2 213 Triangle Open 1 184 Baya Open Off 42 F 2 179 CastDoubl
192. 1 and the El Piano 2 Program to the Upper 2 track Then set Upper 1 to L 0 H 80 and Upper 2 to L 81 H 127 The El Piano 1 will play when playing softer the El Piano 2 when playing louder Clamps m ranaposs M s em Bg Dg Be E Clinic oooo octavi mm ET CEI z Drap arie Hg Lie Hrizy W Lia Huis SOS tS Lib Hiz Lia Hilzr W Here is the edit procedure 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE E H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F3 F4 buttons to select the L or H parameter for that track 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the parame ter s value L H gt PERF gt STS This parameter pair sets the Lower and Higher dynamic range for the track 0 Lowest velocity value 127 Highest velocity value PAGE 19 R T CONTROLS ENSEMBLE This page lets you program the Ensemble function This function harmonizes the right hand played melody with the left hand recognized chords chord Campo Gro anepo o Eg E EBB Bb 8 Clink L CB oooo octave RT CLL Ensemble E Dual Uei Hormal Dan i Z UWF Hobeit 8 LESS Up1 Up3 PERF STS Right hand Upper tracks Off There is no harmonization on this track Normal This track is included in the harmonization Mute This track only plays the Ensemble notes
193. 1 0 46 BrightTromb 121 2 57 60s Strings 121 2 48 Muted Trp 2 121 1 59 Oct Strings 121 8 48 Bank Brass synStrings3 121 1 30 BigBandBrs 121 4 61 Oooh Choir 121 6 32 Tight Brass 121 2 61 Choir Aahs2 121 1 52 Trp amp Brass 121 7 6i String amp Bras 121 1 48 Glen amp Friend 121 3 61 Dbl Strings 121 3 a gt MutEnsemble 121 3 59 ArabStrings 121 13 48 Horns amp Ens 121 7 60 SynStrings1 121 0 50 Syn Brass 121 0 62 SynStrings2 121 0 31 Orches Hit 121 0 55 Odissey 121 2 30 BrassSect 121 0 61 Grand Choir 121 11 52 Fat Brass 121 13 6i 150 Factory Data Programs bank order Name ccoo CC32 PC Name ccoo CC32 PC Trumpet Ens 121 9 61 Bank Woodwind Glen amp Boys 121 6 61 Jazz Flute 121 1 73 MutEnsembl2 121 4 59 Old Shaku 121 1 77 French Horn 121 0 60 FluteSwitch 121 2 73 Syn Brass 121 0 63 FluteDyn5th 121 3 73 Brass Hit 121 25 61 Flute Frull 121 4 73 AttackBrass 121 8 61 Pan Flute 121 0 75 BrassSect 2 121 1 61 Jazz Clarin 121 1 71 TromboneEns 121 10 61 Flute 2 121 9 73 Sax amp Brass 121 5 61 Double Reed 121 1 68 Flute Muted 121 6 73 EnglisHorn2 121 1 6
194. 1 BD Hip 3 Off 211 Tambourin Acc1 Off 240 Hit It Off 19 GO 19 BD Hip 1 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 238 Yeah Solo Off 20 G 0 18 BD House 2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 237 Yeah Off 21 AO 16 BD Dance 3 Off 209 Tambourin Push Off 241 Uhhhh Solo Off 22 A 0 15 BD Dance2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 214 Triangle Mute 7 23 BO 13 BD Squas O 319 Rek Jingle O 213 Triangle Open 7 24 C1 30 BD Klanger Off 233 Flexatone Off 233 Flexatone Off 25 Cn 29 BD Deep 88 Off 230 Finger Cymbal Off 230 Finger Cymbal Off 26 D1 29 BD Deep 88 Off 0 BD Dry 1 Off 197 Tsuzumi Off 136 88 Cowbell Off 27 D 1 123 88 BD Off 296 Amp Noise Off 172 BongoHi Slap Off 179 CastDouble Off 28 E1 12 BD Tight Off 235 Chinese Gong Off 173 BongoHi Stk1 Off 178 CastSingle Off 29 F1 29 BD Deep 88 Off 153 DJ BD Rub Off 170 BongoLo Stk Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 30 F 1 17 BD House 1 Off 148 DJ Scratch3c Off 211 Tambourin Acc1 Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 31 G1 14 BD Dance 1 Off 154 DJ SD Rub Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 99 HH Old TiteClos Off 32 G 1 16 BD Dance 3 Off 145 DJ Scratch2 Off 273 Wind Off 236 Metal Hit Off 33 Al 20 BD Hip 2 Off 286 GtCutNois1 Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 197 Tsuzumi Off 34 A 1 26 BD Amb Crackle Off 287 GtCutNois2 Off 174 BongoHi Stk2 Off 197 Tsuzumi Off 35 B1 29 BD Deep 88 O 292 E GtrPick1 O 200 Woodblock1 O 197 Tsuzumi O 36 C 17 BD House 1 Off 294 Gtr Scratch Off 199 Claves Off 116 BD Orch 1 37 C 2 23 BD Pop Kick Off 290
195. 1 PCG 1 Piano 1 64 SynBrass22 USERO2 PCG 1 SopranoSax 64 Noise USERDK PCG 1 Standard Kit 64 Orchestral Kit STYLE BANKO1 STY 1 1 8 Beat 1 1 16 8 Beat 16 BANK STY BANK16 STY 16 1 Traditional 1 16 8 Traditional 16 USERO1 STY U1 1 User 1 U1 16 User 16 USERO2 STY U2 1 User 1 U2 16 User 16 USEROS STY U3 1 User 1 U3 16 User 16 131 132 Card Edit environment File and folder size display FILE AND FOLDER SIZE DISPLAY The size of any file and folder in the card can be seen in the display The single file size is always shown on the right of the file tempo measure transpose Team SS ELS Sooo Cardi Load gt ETHICA MID HUS To see a folder size first move it to the first line of the display then keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the F3 Open function key under the display A dialog box will appear showing the size of the folder Press EXIT to exit this dialog PAGE STRUCTURE Here is the typical structure of a Card page Operating mode icon Page header chord Cmpa am BE Waneposs BBS BH 28 oooo
196. 1 SynBassReso 121 2 38 Dig PolySix 121 7 90 Bass amp Ride 121 2 32 Pop Syn Pad 121 4 91 FingElBass2 121 3 33 Noisy Stabb 121 8 90 PickElBass2 121 2 34 152 Factory Data Programs bank order Name ccoo CC32 PC Name ccoo CC32 PC Fretless Sw 121 2 35 SFX Kit 120 0 56 Thumb Bass 121 1 37 Percus Kit1 120 0 64 Finger Slap 121 1 33 Latin P Kit 120 0 65 Attack Bass 121 1 39 TRI Per KIT 120 0 66 Rubber Bass 121 2 39 ArabianKit1 120 0 116 FingElBass3 121 4 33 ArabianKit2 120 0 117 DarkR amp BBass 121 4 35 Timpani 121 0 47 Sweet Fret 121 3 35 Agogo 121 0 113 Dyna Bass 121 2 37 Log Drum 121 4 12 Stick Bass 121 5 33 Woodblock 121 0 115 Gtr Bass 121 4 34 Taiko Drum 121 0 116 Bass Mute 121 5 34 Melodic Tom 121 0 117 Dr Octave 121 16 38 Synth Drum 121 0 118 Nasty Bass 121 6 39 Reverse Cym 121 0 119 30303 Bass 121 5 38 Dragon Gong 121 1 119 Stein Bass 121 3 34 Castanets 121 1 115 Euro Bass 121 4 39 Concert BD 121 1 116 Jungle Rez 121 5 39 MelodicTom2 121 1 117 30303Square 121 6 38 Rhyt BoxTom 121 1 118 Bass Square 121 7 38 Electr Drum 121 2 118 Phat Bass 121 7 39 Rev To
197. 121 0 79 Ocarina Woodwind v 121 4 62 ElectrikBrs Brass 121 0 80 Lead Square Synth 2 v 121 5 62 Syn Brass 5 Brass 121 1 80 LeadSquare2 Synth 2 v 121 0 63 Syn Brass 2 Brass v 121 2 80 Lead Sine Synth 2 v 121 1 63 Syn Brass 4 Brass v 121 3 80 Old Portam Synth 2 121 2 63 AnalogBras2 Brass v 121 4 80 Dance Lead Synth 2 121 3 63 Brass Pad Brass 121 5 80 Wave Lead Synth 2 121 4 63 Big Panner Synth 1 121 6 80 Sine Wave Synth 2 121 0 64 Soprano Sax Sax v 121 7 80 Analog Lead Synth 2 121 1 64 Sweet Sprno Sax 121 8 80 Old amp Analog Synth 2 121 0 65 Alto Sax Sax v 121 9 80 Gliding Sq Synth 2 121 1 65 Alto Breath Sax 121 10 80 Sine Switch Synth 2 121 2 65 SaxEnsemble Sax 121 11 80 Square Rez Synth 2 121 3 65 BreathyAlto Sax 121 0 81 Lead Saw Synth 2 v 121 4 65 AltSaxGrowl Sax 121 1 81 Lead Saw 2 Synth 2 v 121 0 66 Tenor Sax Sax v 121 2 81 LeadSawPuls Synth 2 v 121 1 66 Tenor Noise Sax 121 3 81 LeadDblSaw Synth 2 v 121 2 66 Soft Tenor Sax 121 4 81 Seq Analog Synth 2 v 121 3 66 TenorBreath Sax 121 5 81 Power Saw Synth 2 121 4 66 Tenor Growl Sax 121 6 81 Octo Lead Synth 2 121 5 66 Folk Sax Sax 121 7 81 SeqLead Synth 2 121 0 67 BaritoneSax Sax v 121 8 81 PhatSawLead Synth 2 121 1 67 Barit Growl Sax 121 9 81 Glide Lead Synth 2 121 2 67 BreathyBari Sax 121 10 81 Fire Wave Synth 2 121 0 68 Oboe Woodwind v 121 11 81 Rezbo Synth 2 121 1 68 Double Reed Woodwind 121 12 81 Syn Pianoid Synth 2
198. 158 CongaLo Open CongaLo Open Off 216 Cuica Lo Off 73 CHS 160 CongaLoSlap Off 208 Timbale Paila Off 74 D5 159 CongaLoMtSIp Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 75 D 5 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 206 TimbaleHi Rim1 Off 76 E5 161161 CongaHi Open CongaHi Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 77 F5 162 CongaHiMute Off 135 88 Clave Off 78 F 5 166 CongaHeel Off 136 88 Cowbell Off 79 G5 164 CongaHi Slap1 Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 80 G 5 167 CongaToe Off 196 Taiko Rim Off 81 A5 165 CongaHi Slap2 Off 195 Taiko Open Off 82 A 5 224 Agogo Bell Off 143 Zap2 Off fentnuesonthenextpage 172 Factory Data Drum Kit instruments continued 120 0 66 TRI Per KIT 120 0 67 130 Perc Kit Note Sample Exd Sample Exd 83 B5 224 Agogo Bell Off 119 SD Orch Roll 5 84 C6 1835182 MaracasPull gt MaracasPush Off 120 SD Orch 5 85 C 6 2175217 Shaker1Shaker1 Off 117 Orch Cymb 6 86 D6 2182218 Shaker2 Shaker2 Off 117 jOrch Cymb 6 87 D 6 2212220 Cabasa Tap Cabasa Down Off 336 Udu f open Off 88 EG 2192221 Cabasa Up Cabasa Tap Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 89 F6 2222223 Caxixi Hard Caxixi Soft Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 90 F 6 209 Tambourin Push Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 91 G6 21125211 Tambourin Acc1 Tambourin Acc1 Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 92 G 6 210 Tambourin Pull Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 93 A6 212 Tambourin Ac
199. 19 CC40 CCW32 PC Bank 20 1 1 16 0 1 0 T 18 0 7 19 0 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 4 3 3 3 3 5 4 4 4 4 6 5 5 5 5 7 6 6 6 6 8 7 7 7 7 174 Factory Data MIDI Setup MIDI SETUP DEFAULT Master Kbd Sequencer1 Sequencer2 Accordion 1 Accordion 2 Accordion 3 Ext Seq 1 S1 Tr 1 Global S1 Tr 1 S2 Tr 1 Global Upp1 Upp1 S1 Tr 1 2 S1 Tr2 S1 Tr2 S2_Tr 2 Lower Lower Lower S1_Tr2 3 1_Tr 3 1_Tr 3 2_Tr 3 Bass Bass S1 Tr 3 4 S1 Tr 4 S1 Tr 4 S2 Tr4 Upp2 Upp2 S1_Tr 4 5 1_Tr 5 1 Tr 5 S2 Tr 5 Upp3 Upp3 1 Tr 5 6 S1 Tr 6 S1 Tr 6 S2 Tr 6 S1 Tr 6 7 S1 Tr 7 1 Tr 7 S2 Tr 7 S1 Tr 7 MIDI IN 8 S1 Tr 8 S1 Tr 8 S2_Tr 8 S1_Tr 8 Channel 9 1 Tr9 1 Tr9 2 Tr 9 Bass 1 Tr9 10 S1 Tr 10 S1 Tr 10 S2 Tr 10 Drum Drum Drum S1 Tr 10 11 S1 Tr 11 S1 Tr 11 S2 Tr 11 Perc Perc Perc S1 Tr 11 12 S1 Tr 12 S1 Tr 12 S2 Tr 12 Acci Acc1 Acc1 S1 Tr 12 13 S1 Tr 13 S1 Tr 13 S2 Tr 13 Acc2 Acc2 Acc2 S1 Tr 13 14 S1 Tr 14 S1 Tr 14 S2 Tr 14 Acc3 Acc3 Acc3 S1 Tr 14 15 1 Tr 15 S1 Tr 15 S2 Tr 15 Acc4 Acc4 Acc4 S1 Tr 15 16 S1 Tr 16 S1 Tr 16 S2 Tr 16 Acc5 Acc5 Acc5 S1 Tr 16 1 1 Upp1 Upp1 S1 Tr 1 S2 Tr 1 Upp1 S1 Tr 1 S2 Tr 1 Upp 1 2 Upp2 Upp2 1 Tr 2 S2 Tr2 Upp2 S1 Tr2 S2 Tr2 3 Upp3 Upp3 1 Tr 3 S2 Tr 3 Upp3 S1 Tr 3 2 Tr 3 4 Lower Lower S1 Tr 4 S2_Tr 4 Lower
200. 2 Fingered 2 Fingered 3 One Finger Scale Mode gt GBL This parameter determines which tracks will use the selected alternative scale see Scale on page 44 Realtime tracks The scale will only affect the Realtime Key board tracks Upper tracks The scale will only affect the Upper 1 3 Real time Keyboard tracks The scale will affect all tracks Realtime Style Pads Memory Mode gt GBL This parameter sets the way the MEMORY button works Chord When its LED is on the MEMORY button keeps the recognized chord in memory When its LED is off the chord is reset when raising the hand from the keyboard Chord Lower When its LED is on the MEMORY button keeps the recognized chord in memory and keeps the Lower track held until the next note or chord is played When its LED is off the All Tracks Style Play operating mode 5 Page 24 Preferences controls chord is reset when raising the hand from the keyboard and the Lower track is not sustained When its LED is on the MEMORY button keeps the Lower track held until the next note or chord is played When off the Lower track is not sustained when raising the hand from the keyboard The chord is always kept in memory Lower Velocity Control gt GBL Set this parameter to trigger a Fill or a Break simply by play ing louder with your left hand When playing on the Lower track with a velocity higher than 95 the selected Style Ele ment will start F
201. 2 73 CH5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 75 Dit5 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 78 F 5 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 79 G5 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 80 G 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 81 A5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 82 A 5 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 83 B5 228 Sleigh Be O 228 Sleigh Be O 228 Sleigh Be O 84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 85 CH6 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 86 D6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 87 D 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 88 EG 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 162 Factory Data Drum Kit instruments 120 0 3 AcousticKit 120 0 4 Std Kit4 120 0 8 Room Kit1 120 0 9 HipHop Kit1 Note S
202. 21 11 52 Grand Choir Strings amp Vocals 121 15 38 Hybrid Bass Bass 121 12 52 Choir Light Strings amp Vocals 121 16 38 Dr Octave Bass 121 13 52 StringChoir Strings amp Vocals 121 0 39 SynthBass 2 Bass v 121 0 53 Voice Oohs Strings amp Vocals v 121 1 39 Attack Bass Bass v 121 1 53 Humming Strings amp Vocals v 121 2 39 Rubber Bass Bass v 121 2 53 Doolally Strings amp Vocals 121 3 39 AttackPulse Bass v 121 3 53 Airways Strings amp Vocals 121 4 39 Euro Bass Bass 121 0 54 Synth Voice Strings amp Vocals v 121 5 39 Jungle Rez Bass 121 1 54 AnalogVoice Strings amp Vocals v 121 6 39 Nasty Bass Bass 121 2 54 Vocalesque Strings amp Vocals 121 7 39 Phat Bass Bass 121 3 54 Vocalscape Strings amp Vocals 121 8 39 PoinkerBass Bass 121 4 54 ClassicVox Strings amp Vocals 121 0 40 Violin Strings amp Vocals v 121 5 54 DreamVoice Strings amp Vocals 121 1 40 SlowAttViol Strings amp Vocals v 121 0 55 Orches Hit Brass v 121 2 40 Solo Violin Strings amp Vocals 121 1 55 BassHitPlus Brass v 121 3 40 Slow Violin Strings amp Vocals 121 2 55 6th Hit Brass v 121 0 41 Viola Strings amp Vocals v 121 3 55 Euro Hit Brass v 121 0 42 Cello Strings amp Vocals v 121 4 55 j Brasslmpact Brass 121 0 43 Contrabass Strings amp Vocals v 121 5 55 HitInindia SFX 121 0 44 Tremolo Str Strings amp Vocals v 121 6 55 Wild Arp Synth 2 121 0 45 PizzicatoSt Strings amp Vocals v 121 7 55 Flip Blip Synth 2 121 1 45 PizzEnsembl
203. 23 88 BD Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 46 A 2 89 HH1 Open 1 1 129 88 HH Open 1 131 99 HH Open 1 97 HH OldClose1 1 47 B2 139 Real El Tom Off 133 88 Tom Off 139 Real El Tom Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 48 c3 139 Real El Tom Off 133 88 Tom Off 139 Real El Tom Off 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 49 CH3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 132 88 Crash Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 50 D3 139 Real El Tom Off 133 88 Tom Off 139 Real El Tom Off 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 51 D 3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 52 E3 108 CymbalReverse Off 106 China Cymbal Off 108 CymbalReverse Off 108 CymbalReverse Off 53 F3 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz Off 54 F 3 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 282 Noise FM Mod Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 55 G3 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal Off 56 G 3 225 Cowbe Off 136 88 Cowbe Off 225 Cowbe Off 225 Cowbe Off 57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 58 A 3 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 59 B3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 60 C4 171 BongoHi Open Off 134 88 Conga Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 61 CH4 168 BongoLo Open Off 134 88 Conga Off 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open Off 62 D4 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 134
204. 25 Bdrum amp Sdrum 120 0 50 Train 121 6 125 Name ccoo CC32 PC Jetplane 121 7 125 Starship 121 8 125 Burst Noise 121 9 125 Laughing 121 1 126 Screaming 121 2 126 Punch 121 3 126 Heart Beat 121 4 126 Footsteps 121 5 126 Machine Gun 121 1 127 Lasergun 121 2 127 Explosion 121 3 127 Ice Rain 121 0 96 Jaw Harp 121 3 105 HitlnIndia 121 5 55 Stadium 121 6 126 Factory Data Programs bank order 153 154 Factory Data Programs Program Change order PROGRAMS PROGRAM CHANGE ORDER The following table enlists all Pa50SD Factory Programs in order of Bank Select Program Change number Legend The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely select the Programs CC00 Control Change 0 or Bank Select MSB CC32 Control Change 32 or Bank Select LSB PC Pro gram Change ccoo CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2 121 0 0 Ac Piano Piano v 121 1 0 AcPianoWide Piano v 121 2 0 AcPianoDark Piano v 121 3 0 Grand Piano Piano 121 4 O Class Piano Piano 121 5 0 L R Piano Piano 121 6 0 Piano amp Vibes Pi
205. 3 Edit Velocity Trk Track Track in edit To select a different track press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to open the Go To Track window Bo to Track DRH Exit b mel Erkek Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a track and press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort E CV Style Element Chord Variation Selected Style Element and Chord Variation This parameter can t be edited To select a different Style Element and Chord Variation press EXIT to go back to the Main page of the Style Record mode see Main page on page 55 Position Position of the event shown in the display expressed in the form aaa bb ccc aaa is the measure bb is the beat ccc is the tick each quarter beat 384 ticks You can edit this parameter to move the event to a different position Ev Event Type and values of the event shown in the display Depending on the selected event the value may change This parameter also shows the non editable End Loop marking when the end of a track is reached Event First value Second value Note Note name Velocity Ctrl Control Change number Control Change value Bend Bending value To change the event type use the C VOLUME VALUE but tons to select the Event line then use the same buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a different event type To select and edit the event s value use the F3 and F4 func tion keys and
206. 3 Use the leftmost PROGRAM PERFORMANCE button to select a row of Program banks upper lower pil Re SA 4 Select the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE bank contain ing the Program you are looking for Program banks are identified by instrument names PROGRAM PERFORMANCE f PIANO EPIANO MALLET amp ACCORDION ORGAN1 ORGAN2 GUITAR STRINGS amp TRUMPET amp BRASS o BELL VOCALS TROMBONE UL JL JUL JC JL 30 30 306 206 306 Jb J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o BASS DRUM amp PERC SFX USER 1 USER 2 USER DK o A SAX WOODWIND SYNTH 1 SYNTH 2 The Program Select window appears See Programs Program Change order on page 154 for a list of Fac tory Programs Last selected Program Selected track ConXa Campo mensura remsposs EC JEJE oooo f estes atre pley Piano Telli ERR Piani EFi Fiat E Fiarei Piani Harrzi E Fiarcl Clairet 5 Browse all the Programs in the selected bank using the PAGE buttons There can be various pages for each bank containing up to 8 Programs each 6 As you find the Program you are looking for select it using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons 7 Ifthe DISPLAY HOLD LED is on press EXIT to exit this window SELECTING A STYLE A Style is a set of rhythm and accompaniment patterns You can select a Style from the internal memory or from a card
207. 40 240 d Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo t Fx 009 Base Note A d d Jaddada Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed us Fx 009 Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 Effects 197 Mod P Shift 035 Phaser Trem enables you to offset the timing of the phaser peak and control a subtle movement and rotation of the sound Stereo Phaser Tremolo f f Phaser WetDry i Wet Dry This effect has a stereo phaser and tremolo LFOs linked The Phaser Wet Dry parameter sets the balance together Swelling phaser modulation and tremolo effects between the phaser output and the dry sound The Wet synchronize with each other creating a soothing modulation Dry parameter sets the balance between the final phaser effect It is suitable for electric piano type sounds and tremolo output level and the dry sound Stereo In Stereo Out us V fem 036 RingModulat 4 Phaser 4 Tremolo Stereo Ring Modulator x Phaser Wet Dry 4 5 g etorans This effect creates a metallic sound by applying the oscillators Phaser o ep et On oe to the input signal Use the LFO or Dynamic Modulation to e E N modulate the oscillator to create a radical mod
208. 43 SD BrushTap1 7 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 22 A 0 43 SD BrushTap1 7 283 Tubular Off 283 Tubular Off 23 BO 74 DrumStickHit Off 225 CowbelT Off 225 Cowbell Off 24 C1 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 25 CH 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch RolT Off 119 SD Orch Roll Off 26 D1 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 27 D 1 143 Zap2 Off 86 HH1 Closed1 Off 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 28 E1 281 Noise White Off 88 HH1 Foot Off 87 HH1 Closed2 Off 87 HH1 Closed2 Off 29 F1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 89 HH1 Open 1 7 145 DJ Scratch2 Off 145 DJ Scratch2 Off 30 FHI 145 DJ Scratch2 7 112 Ride Edge 1 Off 145 DJ Scratch2 Off 145 DJ Scratch2 Off 31 G1 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 32 G 1 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zapi Off 165 CongaHi Slap2 Off 165 CongaHi Slap2 Off 33 A1 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 34 AR 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 35 B1 5 BD Jazz Off 4 BD SoftRoom Off 2 BD Dry 3 Off 2 BD Dry 3 Off 36 C2 3 gt 4 BD Normal BD gt SoftRoom Off 116 BD Orch Off 17 BD House 1 Off 12 BD Tight Off 37 C 2 43 SD BrushTap1 Off 73 SideStickAmb Off 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry Off 38 D2 43 44 sD Brushtap1 gt SD Brushlap2 Off 120 SD Orch Off 33 SD Dry 3 Off 33 SD Dry 3 Off 39 D 2 39 gt 42 SD Jazz
209. 5 Orchestra Hit Off 231 Marc Tree Off 104 G 7 62 SD Vintage1 Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 231 Marc Tree Off 105 A7 125 99 SD Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 228 Sleigh Bell 2 106 A7 71 SD Whopper Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 340 Bongo Roll 6 107 B7 71 SD Whopper Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 140 PR House05 Off 108 C8 50 SD Dance Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 140 PR House05 Off 109 C 8 50 SD Dance Off 290 Dist Slide1 Off 17 BD House 1 Off 110 D8 125 99 SD Off 291 bist Slide2 Off 125 99 SD Off 111 D 8 125 99 SD Off 286 GtCutNois1 Off 29 BD Deep 88 Off 112 E8 60 SD Ringy Off 287 GtCutNois2 Off 124 88 SD Off 113 F8 292 E GtrPick1 Off 39 SD Jazz Ring Off 114 F 8 293 E GtrPick2 Off 48 SD Processed Off 115 G8 294 Gtr Scratch1 Off 0 BD Dry 1 Off 115 G 8 295 Gtr Scratch2 Off 27 BD Amb Rocker Off 117 A8 289 Fret Noise Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 118 Ai 288 Power Chord Off 86 HHT Closedi Off 119 B8 288 Power Chord Off 6 BD Pillow Off 120 C9 296 Amp Noise Off 73 SideStickAmb Off Factory Data 171 Drum Kit instruments 120 0 66 TRI Per KIT 120 0 67 i30 Perc Kit Note Sample xc Sample Excl 0 C 1 1 C 1 2 D 1 3 D
210. 6 43 SD BrushTap1 Off 299 Cat Off 117 Orch Cymb 6 332 Tambourin Mute 6 86 D6 42 SD BrushHit Off 251 Bird 2 Off 117 Orch Cymb 6 333 Tambourin Open 6 87 D 6 42 SD BrushHit Off 308 Growl Off 336 Udu f open Off 336 Udu f open Off 88 E6 42 SD BrushHit Off 243 Stadium Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 175 Djembe Open Off 89 F6 45 SD BrushSwirl Off 277 Telephone Ring Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 183 MaracasPulT Off 90 F 6 45 SD BrushSwirl Off 276 ChurchBell Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 183 MaracasPull Off 91 G6 45 SD BrushSwir Off 244 jApplause Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 215 Cuica Hi Off 92 G 6 31 SD Dry 1 Off 244 Applause Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 180 Guiro Long 3 93 A6 33 SD Dry 3 Off 243 Stadium Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 181 Guiro Short 3 94 Ato 46 SD Big Rock Off 281 Noise White Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 181 Guiro Short 3 95 B6 68 SD AmbiHop Off 258 GunShot 1 Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 216 Cuica Lo Off 96 C7 54 SD Hip 1 Off 266 Train Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 199 Claves Off 97 C 7 62 SD Vintage1 Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 234 SambaWhistle 4 98 D7 56 SD Hip 3 Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 234 SambaWhistle 4 99 D 7 67 SD Vintage6 Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 323 Sagat HalfOpen 5 100 E7 143 Zap2 Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 323 Sagat HalfOpen 5 101 F7 58 SD Hip 5 Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 324 Sagat Close 5 102 F 7 71 SD Whopper Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 311 Jingle Bell Off 103 G7 69 SD Brasser Off 15
211. 63 Castanet2 98 Kup 2 133 PhoneRing 29 Scratch 1 64 Aah 99 Kup 3 134 Applause 30 Scratch 2 65 Uuh 100 Kup 4 135 Wind 31 Scratch 3 66 Yeah 1 101 Baya 1 136 Starship 32 Scratch 4 67 Yeah 2 102 Baya 2 137 Jetplane 33 Scratch 5 68 Hit It 103 Laughing 138 Siren 34 Scratch 6 69 Hollo 1 104 Scream 139 Cosmic 35 DistSlid1 70 Hollo 2 105 Punch LIST OF FUNCTIONS ASSIGNABLE TO THE PADS You can assign the following functions to the Pads and use them as switch controls Function Meaning StyleUp Selects the next Style StylDown Selects the previous Style PerfUp Selects the next Performance PerfDown Selects the previous Performance ProgUp Selects the next Program ProgDown Selects the previous Program Punchl O Turns the Punch Recording on off FxA Mute Mute of the Internal FX A FxB Mute Mute of the Internal FX B FxC Mute Mute of the Internal FX C FxD Mute Mute of the Internal FX D Fx Mute Mute of all Internal FXs Upp1Mute Mute of the Upper 1 track Upp2Mute Mute of the Upper 2 track Upp3Mute Mute of the Upper 3 track Low Mute Mute of the Lower track DrumMute Mute of the Drum track PercMute Mute of the Percussion track BassMute Mute of the Bass track AcciMute Mute of the Acc1 track Acc2Mute Mute of the Acc2 track Acc3Mute Mute of the Acc3 track Acc4Mute Mute of the Acc4 track Acc5Mute Mute of the Acc5
212. 7 not start another device you must set the MIDI Clock parameter to MIDI and make sure that the external device transmits MIDI Clock data Does not respond to MIDI mes Make sure that all MIDI cables are connected correctly 22 sages Make sure that the external device is transmitting through MIDI channels enabled to 46 receive in the Pa50SD 78 Make sure that the MIDI IN Filters of the Pa50SD do not prevent the reception of mes 129 sages Percussive instruments are not Make sure that the Percussion and Drum Track is set to Drum Mode and the 46 played correctly external device has not transposition applied 78 Some clicks can be heard when playing a percussive instrument This is part of the sound and not a problem A background noise can be heard after selecting a Perfor mance Style or STS The selected Performance Style or STS recalled the effect 15 Analog Record simulating the noise of a old vinyl recording Cannot format a card Is the card inserted correctly 130 Cannot save data to a card Is the card formatted 139 Is the card inserted correctly 130 Cannot load data from a card Is the card inserted correctly 130 Does the card contain data compatible with the Pa50SD 131 Technical specifications 239 24 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Model KORG Pa50SD Keyboard 61 keys with velocity Operating System KORG OPOS Objective Portable Operating System Mu
213. 78 CastSingle Off 86 D6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 87 D 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 88 E6 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 stadium Off 243 Stadium Off Factory Data Drum Kit instruments 167 120 0 41 Brush V S 2 120 0 48 OrchestraK 120 0 116 Arabian Kit 1 120 0 117 Arabian Kit 2 Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl 9 A 1 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 17 BD House 1 Off 17 BD House 1 Off 10 A 1 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 125 99 SD Off 125 99 SD Off 11 B 1 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD Off 12 co 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD Off 13 CHO 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 37 SD Full Room Off 37 SD Full Room Off 14 DO 32 SD Dry 2 Off 48 SD Processed 1 48 SD Processed 1 15 D 0 5 BD Jazz Off 0 BD Dry 1 Off 0 BD Dry 1 Off 16 EO 6 BD Pillow Off 12 BD Tight Off 12 BD Tight Off 17 FO 121 FingerSnaps Off 31 SD Dry 1 Off 31 SD Dry 1 Off 18 F 0 86 HHT Closed1 1 87 HHT Closed2 1 87 HHi Closed2 1 19 GO 2 BD Dry 3 Off 2 BD Dry 3 Off 2 BD Dry 3 Off 20 G 0 72 SideStickDry Off 73 SideStickAmb Off 73 SideStickAmb Off 21 A0
214. 8 418dB Gain dB 18 418dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 O Mid2 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz O Mid2 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Q 0 5 10 0 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 t Fx 006 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 t Fx 006 Gain dB 18 418dB Gain dB 18 418dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 f A Amplifier Type SS EL84 6L6 F LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Selects the type of guitar amplifier Sets the LFO speed Routing OD AMP AMP OD LFO Waveform Triangle Sine g Switches the order of the overdrive and amp simulation connection Selects LFO Waveform Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet F Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Sets the delay time mod Dz Depth 0 100 h Src Off Tempo Sets the depth of LFO modulation Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Feedback 100 100 Amt 100 100 Sets the feedback amount ts Fx 020 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 F Cho FIng Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger t Fx 010 020 Output Mode Normal Wet Invert 080 OD H G ChoFl Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger 0s F
215. 88 Conga Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 63 D 4 161 CongaHi Open Off 133 88 Tom Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 64 E4 158 CongaLo Open Off 133 88 Tom Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 65 F4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 66 F 4 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 67 G4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 68 G 4 224 lAgogo Be Off 224 lAgogo Be Off 224 Agogo Be Off 224 Agogo Be Off 69 A4 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 70 A 4 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush Off 102 HH Hip Off 209 Tambourin Push Off 71 B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 72 C5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 73 C 5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 75 D 5 199 Claves Off 135 88 Clave Off 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 78 F 5 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 239 Uhh Off 215 Cuica Hi 4 79 G5 216 Cuica Lo 4 215 C
216. 9 0 32 Oo oO Bank Select MSB LSB A 1 2 Oo Oo Modulations A 64 o o Damper A 6 9 9 Data Entry MSB A 38 X Oo Data Entry LSB A Control 7 11 Oo Oo Volume Expression A Change 10 91 93 o o Panpot A B or C D FX Block Send A 71 72 73 9 9 Harmonic Content EG time Release Attack A 74 75 Oo Oo Brightness Decay Time A 76 77 78 Oo Oo Vibrato Rate Depth Delay A 98 99 9 Oo NRPN LSB MSB A 100 101 Oo Oo RPN LSB MSB A 1 120 121 X Oo All sounds off Reset all controllers A Program O 0 127 O 0 127 A Change True KKK KK KEK KERR KER 0 127 System Exclusive 0 Oo 2 Song Position X X System Song Select X X Common Tune X X System Clock o 0 3 Real Time Commands Oo o 3 Local On Off X X Aux All Notes Off X O 123 127 Messages Active Sense 0 Oo Reset X X A Sent and received when MIDI Filters In and Out are set to Off in Global mode Notes 1 LSB MSB 00 00 Pitch Bend range 201 00 Fine Tune 202 00 Course Tune 2 Includes Inquiry and Master Volume messages 3 Transmitted only when the Clock Send parameter Global page 6 is set to Midi Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 0OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No 230 Parameters 21 PARAMETERS Control panel and operating modes parameters The following table shows the parameters you can save to memory when pressing the WRITE button in the various operating modes and edit environments Single Touc
217. 9 Attack Time This parameter specifies the time over which the level will change from note on until the attack level is reached Time value 116 Program operating mode Page 11 Filter EG Decay Time This parameter specifies the time over which the level will change from the attack level to the break point level Slope Time This parameter specifies the time over which the level will change after the decay time has elapsed until the sustain level is reached Release Time This parameter specifies the time over which the level will change after note on occurs until the release level is reached Filter EG Level modulation Filter 1 EG changes level AMS Velocity Intensity a positive value Note on Note on Note on Note off INA Note off Softly played note with Start Level Strongly played note with Start Strongly played note with Start Break Level Swing set to and Break Level Swingsetto and Break Level Swing set to 0 AMIS L Alternate Modulation Source This parameter selects the source that will control the Level parameters of the filter EG AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 Intensity AMS Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect applied by AMS With a setting of 0 the levels specified by Frequency A Cutoff Frequency A will be used For example if AMS is Velocity and you set Start Level Swing Att
218. 9 FrenchHorn2 121 1 60 Recorder 2 121 1 74 Syn Brass 3 121 1 62 Nay 121 2 72 Euro Hit 121 3 55 Orch Flute 121 5 73 TightBrass2 121 12 61 WoodenFlute 121 7 73 Dyna Brass 121 14 61 War Pipes 121 1 109 Trombones 121 11 61 ClarinetEns 121 5 71 Brass Band 121 16 61 Woodwinds 121 6 71 Brass Pad 121 3 63 Small Orch 121 1 72 French Sect 121 2 60 Kawala 121 1 75 Syn Brass 4 121 1 63 Shaku 2 121 2 77 6th Hit 121 2 35 Whistle 2 121 1 78 Power Brass 121 21 61 Sect Winds 121 3 71 Brass Expr 121 15 61 Sect Winds2 121 4 71 Dyna Brass2 121 22 61 Clarinet G 121 2 71 Film Brass 121 17 61 Folk Clarin 121 7 71 Brass Slow 121 18 61 Oboe 121 0 68 ClassicHorn 121 3 60 EnglishHorn 121 0 69 ElectrikBrs 121 4 62 Bassoon 121 0 70 Brasslmpact 121 4 55 Clarinet 121 0 71 Fanfare 121 19 61 Piccolo 121 0 72 Movie Brass 121 20 61 Flute 121 0 73 Sfz Brass 121 23 61 Recorder 121 0 74 Jump Brass 121 3 62 Bambu Flute 121 8 73 AnalogBras1 121 2 62 BlownBottle 121 0 76 AnalogBras2 121 2 63 Shakuhachi 121 0 77 Syn Brass 5 121 5 62 Whistle 121 0 78 Brass Fall 121 26 61 Ocarina 121 0 79 BassHitPlus 121 1 55 Bag Pipe 121 0 109 Dbl Brass 121 24 61 Zurna 121 1 111 Bank Sax Hichiriki 121 2 111 Tenor Noise 121 1 66 Shanai 121 0 111 Alto Breath 121 1 65 Flute Click 121 1 121 Sweet Sprno 121 1 64 Bank Synth 1 Barit Growl 121 1 67 The Pad 121 4 89 BreathyBari 121 2 67 Future Pad 121 5 91 Soft Tenor 121 2 66 Air Clouds 121 1 97 SaxEnsemble 121 2 65 Dark Pad 121 6 89 Folk Sax 121 5 66
219. 9 A 1 19 BD Hip 1 Off 271 Explosion Off 23 BD Pop Kick Off 23 BD Pop Kick Off 10 A 1 125 99 SD Off 59 SD Hip 6 Off 67 SD Vintage6 Off 125 99 SD Off 11 B 1 123 88 BD Off 3 BD Normal Off 29 BD Deep 88 Off 29 BD Deep 88 Off 12 co 124 88 SD Off 47 SD Yowie Off 124 88 SD Off 124 88 SD Off 13 CHO 38 SD Off Center Off 39 SD Jazz Ring Off 50 SD Dance Off 50 SD Dance Off 14 DO 64 SD Vintage3 Off 71 SD Whopper Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 15 D 0 23 BD Pop Kick Off 23 BD Pop Kick Off 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 16 EO 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 24 BD Dance 99 Off 9 BD Terminator Off 9 BD Terminator Off 17 FO 59 SD Hip 6 Off 69 SD Brasser Off 65 SD Vintage4 Off 65 SD Vintage4 Off 18 F 0 128 88 HH Close 1 86 HHi Closed1 1 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 19 GO 17 BD House 1 Off 19 BD Hip 1 Off 22 BD Hip 4 Off 22 BD Hip 4 Off 20 G 0 143 Zap2 Off 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 21 A0 48 SD Processed Off 59 SD Hip 6 Off 66 SD Vintage5 Off 66 SD Vintage5 Off 22 A 0 65 SD Vintage4 Off 61 SD Tiny Off 310 Mouth Harp Off 310 Mouth Harp Off 23 BO 74 DrumstickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 24 C1 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 25 CH 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch RolT 7 26 D1 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 27 D 1 143 Za
220. A 10 Connecting the AC power adapter 00 005 10 Turning the instrument on and off uusuu 10 Controlling the Volume 0 eee eee eee eee 10 The BALANCE slider 2c eect eens 10 Headphones ses ie iiie Ce hee deny aan es 10 Audio Outputs ss44 0ked i ge e Rer RR e ER E ER 10 Audio Inputs s vswes siepe rper EVE VR UO Ahead 10 MIDI connections 0 cece eee ee eee eee eee 10 Damper Pedal vcciicvetgxneasa nantes aia be ER Re 11 DEMO 54 ee Gatti quo Late erem baute spera eti 11 The musi stand sect ee ripit EE REDERE ERS 11 Front panel 000 c ee eee eee ee 12 Display and User Interface 19 Display controls 0 0 e cece e cece nena ee 19 Interface structure aj ciaidnsahiwiacieaadacbae RE RN 20 Message windows 00sec eect eee e eee ene 21 Symbols and Icons eee ia n eee eee ee ee 21 Grayed out non available parameters 21 Rear panel 2 0 ne eee ee RR rmn 22 Basic Guide Basic operations 00 0 0c e eee eee 24 Playing on the keyboard cee e eee eee eee ee 24 Selecting muting unmuting and soloing a track 24 Selecting a Performance 6 cece eee eee eee eee 25 Selecting a Program eee eee eect eee eee 26 Selecting a Style oii iii secet eee ree es 26 Selecting a Single Touch Setting STS 0 27 Changing all keyboard tracks at once 0 27 Playing a
221. AL BANK FOR A STYLE PERFORMANCE OR PROGRAM You can see the original bank where your Style Performance or Program came from Just keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the lefmost button of the STYLE or PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section A message window will appear showing the name of the original bank Release the SHIFT button to exit the window y Tena Playing in realtime 7 TUTORIAL This chapter is fully devoted to step by step instructions that we hope may be useful to learn the basics on field 1 PLAYING IN REALTIME As soon as you turn your Pa50SD on it is in Style Play mode and you can play it in realtime Please follow me Play on the keyboard When you turn the Pa50SD on Performance 1 1 Ste reoGrand is automatically selected This sets the Realtime Keyboard tracks for you In this case unless someone mod ified this Performance earlier you get the Upper 1 track play ing on the full keyboard range with the Grand Piano Program selected You may know there are four available Realtime tracks Upper 1 3 and Lower Upper Realtime tracks may play on the full range of the keyboard the selected KEYBOARD MODE shall be FULL UPPER Otherwise the Lower track plays on the left of the Split Point and the Upper tracks on the right KEYBOARD MODE shall be SPLIT If you are not satisfied with this setting at startup just select another Performance Or change the track s settings as you will see
222. Amt Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 100 100 208 Effects Reverb 051 Seq Delay Sequential Delay This four tap delay enables you to select a tempo and rhythm pattern to set up each tap Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Letts Wet Dry Ei Anput Level D mod CN Di Input Level D mod f Right c 4 a BUD m Dy DD BPM MIDI 44 240 a Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo F eje nc p Rhythm Pattern 2228 Selects a rhythm pattern Uu ce Tap1 Pan L 1 99 R Sets the panning of Tap1 Tap2 Pan L 1 99 R Sets the panning of Tap2 c Tap3 Pan L 1 99 R Sets the panning of Tap3 Tap4 Pan L 1 99 R Sets the panning of Tap4 Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount Dmz d Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of feedback amount Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the feedback High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range os Fx 043 e Low Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the low range oS Fx 043 Input Level Dmod 100 100 i Sets the modulation amount of the input level Fx 037 pysese Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level ts Fx 037 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance betwe
223. Beathas Froma H Toro FremfrksDgR TolrkiDE After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort Note If you copy too many events on the same tick the Too many events message appears and the copy operation is aborted Note When you copy over an existing Chord Variation Pro gram Change data is not copied to leave the original Programs unchanged for that Chord Variation When in this page press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element VARIATION ENDING2 From Style Use the first parameter to select the source Style to copy the track Chord Variation or Style Element from From to Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the source and target Style Ele ments or Chord Variations Note You can t copy from a Variation to a different Style Ele ment or vice versa because of their different structure All All Style Elements i e the whole Style You can t change the target that is automatically set to All Varl End2 Single Style Element V1 CV1 E2 CV2 Single Chord Variation From to Track Use these parameters to select the source and target track to copy All All tracks of the selected Style Style Element or Chord Variation Drum Acc5 Single track of the selected Style Style Element or Chord Variation Sty
224. BongoLo Stk Off 55 G3 15 BD Dance 2 Off 255 Heart Beat Off 311 Jingle Bell Off 173 BongoHi Stk1 Off 56 G 3 138 FM El Tom Off 248 Footsteps 2 Off 180 Guiro Long Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 57 A3 133 88 Tom Off 247 Footsteps 1 Off 232 Marc Tree LP Off 174 BongoHi Stk2 Off 58 A 3 29 BD Deep 88 Off 244 Applause Off 231 Marc Tree Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 59 B3 16 BD Dance 3 O 260 DoorCrea O 182 MaracasPus O 211 Tambourin Acc1 9 60 C4 33 SD Dry3 Off 261 DoorSlam Off 122 Hand Claps Off 208 Timbale Paila Off 61 C 4 37 SD Full Room Off 145 DJ Scratch2 Off 127 88 Claps Off 205 TimbaleHi Edge Off 62 D4 38 SD Off Center Off 231 Marc Tree Off 144 DJ Scratch1 Off 208 Timbale Paila Off 63 D 4 39 SD Jazz Ring Off 262 Car Engine Off 145 DJ Scratch2 Off 205 TimbaleHi Edge Off 64 E4 31 SD Dry 1 Off 263 Car Stop Off 150 DJ HitRub Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 65 FA 41 SD Paper Off 264 Car Pass Off 234 SambaWhistle Off 206 TimbaleHi Rim1 Off 66 F 4 65 SD Vintage4 Off 265 Car Crash Off 234 SambaWhistle Off 318 Rek dom ak Off 67 G4 69 SD Brasser Off 254 Crickets Off 165 CongaHi Slap2 Off 318 Rek dom ak Off 68 G 4 47 SD Yowie Off 266 Train Off 166 CongaHeel Off 318 Rek dom ak Off 69 A4 49 SD CrackerRoom Off 281 Noise White Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 319 Rek Jingle Off 70 ASA 46 SD Big Rock Off 267 Helicopter Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 227 Mambo Bell Off 71 B4 59 SD Hip 6 O 298 Swish Terra O 215 C
225. Bottom 25 Topaad Higher Dz Higher Dz c pS eS Zero lax Zero Max Sweep Mode Auto Frequency Frequency Top 75 Wah Bottom 75 t 2 2 Wo Woo 4 Bottom 25 Top 25 ee Envelope Time Envelope Time b Sweep Mode This parameter changes the wah control mode Setting Sweep Mode to Auto will select an auto wah that sweeps according to envelope changes in the input signal level Auto wah is frequently used for funk guitar parts and clav sounds When Sweep Mode is set to D mod you can control the filter directly via the modulation source in the same way as a wah pedal When Sweep Mode is set to LFO the effect uses LFO to sweep in cycle c Envelope Sens Envelope Sensitivity This parameter sets the sensitivity of auto wah Increase the value if the input signal is too low to sweep Reduce the value if the input signal is so high that the filter is stopped temporarily c Envelope Shape This parameter determines the sweep curve for auto wah Envelope Shape Level a Envelope values 0 100 gt value 0 100 gt Time d LFO Frequency Hz e BPM MIDI Sync When BPM MIDI Sync Off the LFO speed uses the LFO Frequency parameter setting When BPM MIDI Sync On the LFO speed follows the BPM Base Note and Times settings e BPM e Base Note e Times One cycle of LFO sweep is obtained by multiplying the length of a no
226. Clock and assigns tempo t Fx 009 Base Note 5 25 2 45 J d5 d 6 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 Pitch Depth 0 100 Sets the pitch variation of the moving sound S Dae Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of pitch variation Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of pitch variation Pan Depth 100 100 Sets the panning of the moving sound y pz f Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of panning Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of panning Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Doe Src Off Tempo 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Ten Wet Dry Doppler an Depth ngs eus Dry LFO mode Trigger 2 o LFO Mode 1 Shot LFO Mode Loop 1 Shot Switches LFO operation mode prez a Src Off Tempo When LFO Mode is set to 1 Shot this modulation source triggers the LFO var LFO Sync Off On Switches between LFO reset on and off when LFO Mode is set to Loopt ance on page 175 a LFO Mode a Src b LFO Sync The LFO Mode parameter switches LF
227. DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective holders DISCLAIMER The information contained in this manual have been care fully revised and checked through Due to our constant efforts to improve our products the specifications might differ to those in the manual KORG is not responsible for any eventual differences found between the specifications and the contents of the instruction manual the specifica tions being subject to change without prior notice LIABILITY KORG products are manufactured under strict specifica tions and voltages required by each country These prod ucts are warranted by the KORG distributor only in each country Any KORG product not sold with a warranty card or carrying a serial number disqualifies the product sold from the manufacturer s distributor s warranty and liability This requirement is for your own protection and safety SERVICE AND USER S ASSISTANCE For service please contact your nearest Authorized KORG Service Center For more information on KORG products and to find software and accessories for your keyboard please contact your local Authorized KORG distributor PA50SD ON THE WEB For up to date information please point your web browser to http www korgpa com Copyright 2009 KORG Italy Spa Printed in China THE BALANCE SLIDER When turning the instrument on please be assur
228. E OPEN ADE 6 While the ALL item is selected press F3 Open to open it 7 Use the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOL UME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE section controls to move the STYLE item to the first line of the display and press F2 Save 8 Select the SD card SD as the target using the F1 but ton 9 The card directory appears Use the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE section controls to scroll the card content Move the first folder of the directory to the first line of the display 10 Press ENTER twice to save the banks MAIN PAGE This is the page you see after you turn the instrument on To access this page from another operating mode press the STYLE PLAY button Note When switching from Song Play to Style Play a Perfor mance is automatically selected and various track parameters may change To return to this page from one of the Style Play edit pages press the EXIT NO button To switch between the Realtime Keyboard tracks and the Style tracks use the TRACK SELECT button Selected STS or Style Play icon Performance Selected Style Cempa 197 em i a fc enn SottBeat Accompaniment backing tracks grouped Realtime Keyboard tracks Style Play icon When on this icon indicates t
229. E3 106 China Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal Off 106 China Cymbal Off 53 F3 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz Off 54 F 3 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 55 G3 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Off 56 G 3 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 58 A3 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 59 B3 113 jRide Edge 2 O 113 Ride Edge 2 O 113 Ride Edge 2 9 60 C4 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 61 C 4 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open Off 62 D4 159 CongaLoMtSIp Off 159 CongaLoMtSIp Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 63 D 4 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 64 Eq 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 65 FA 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 66 F 4 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 67 G4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 68 G 4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 69 A4 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 70 A 4 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush Off 71 B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 72 C5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle
230. ELECTING MUTING UNMUTING SOLOING A TRACK Selecting Use the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a track AND Calend Games mansura B s Gel Goss BS E deu Am E ELA 3 ene BossaMova STS ee ened sacas mo Ii Peres Mes Ly c5 EE DrumPerc Pianc l n co c3 acm d Babi Gidbacdi D mee cR a Fcc 1 5 StereEnez M CUPES poc ort ow D d No o m I a Fa a ee O Cem O ut EE The selected track is shown with a solid square surrounding its status icons E Fianoz T i Selected track If you can t see the track you are looking for use the TRACK SELECT button to scroll up or down the tracks and find the hidden ones TRK SELECT Mute unmute Press both VOLUME VALUE A H but tons to mute or unmute a track For example if you are in the main page that appears after turning the instrument on and you want to mute the Upper 1 track press the E UPPERI ACC2 buttons together PAGE VOLUME VALUE UPPER1 ACC2 The mute play status is shown by the relevant icon in the dis play Play status the track plays on the keyboard no icon Mute status the track doesn t play on the key board Solo While in the Style Play Song Play and Song modes you can solo one of the tracks Just keep the SHIFT button pressed and press both VOLUME VALUE buttons corre sponding to the track you wish to solo To exit th
231. ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected 1 16 Selected track Master Master track This is where the Tempo Scale and Effect events are recorded Ev Event Type of MIDI event to delete All All events The measures will not be removed from the Song Note All notes in the selected range Dup Note All duplicate notes When two notes with the same pitch are encountered on the same tick the one with the lowest velocity is deleted A Touch After Touch events P Bend Pitch Bend events PrChange Program Change events excluding the bun dled Control Change 00 Bank Select MSB and 32 Bank Select LSB C Change All Control Change events for example Bank Select Modulation Damper Soft Pedal CC00 32 CC127 Single Control Change events Double Control Change numbers like 00 32 are MSB LSB bundles S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to delete If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Song operating mode 101 Page 20 Edit Delete Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key board range to delete If you select the same note as the Bot tom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum track Note These p
232. ER to load or EXIT to cancel the loading pro cedure If you press ENTER wait until the loading is fin ished When the operating system is finished loading a mes sage appears asking you to remove the card and press any button Hint When done delete the operating system files to avoid Pa50SD starts the upgrade procedure each time it is turned on with the same card in the drive 5 Remove the card and press any button RELOADING THE FACTORY DATA Should the internal memory content get damaged you can reload the original Factory Data from the backup card See Restore Data on page 141 9 10 Start up Connecting the AC power adapter 2 START UP CONNECTING THE AC POWER ADAPTER Connect the supplied AC power adapter to the dedi cated socket on the rear of the instrument Then plug it into a wall socket Q Warning Use only the sup plied adapter or an adapter suggested by Korg Other adapters may look similar but they may damage your instrument TURNING THE INSTRUMENT ON AND OFF Press the POWER switch on the rear panel to turn the instrument on The display will light up showing a wel come message Press again the POWER switch on the rear panel to turn the instrument off Warning When turning the instrument off all data con tained in RAM a volatile memory used for Song editing will be lost On the contrary data contained in the SSD disk a
233. FX Feedback Send B gt A or D gt C FX Parameters A B C D m Easy Program Edit Track Mode Internal External Mode ITE 2 AL al AN al lt lt lt lt lt s ES A SSS 4 SI I I I a Saved as SysEx data b For this Program to be used in a Style the Prog parameter should be set to Orig in the Style Play mode See Prog Program on page 49 c Not all Control Change messages are allowed in Styles Please see List of recorded events on page 54 for more information Recognized chords 233 22 RECOGNIZED CHORDS The following pages show the most important chords recognized by the Korg Pa80 when the selected Chord Recognition mode is Fingered 2 see Chord Recognition Mode on page 50 Recognized chords may vary with a different Chord Recognition
234. H1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 1 19 GO 6 BD Pillow Off 6 BD Pillow Off 6 BD Pillow Off 6 BD Pillow Off 20 G 0 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry Off 21 A0 47 SD Yowie Off 47 SD Yowie Off 46 SD Big Rock Off 47 SD Yowie Off 22 A 0 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 Off 23 BO 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 24 C1 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 7 25 CH 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch RolT 7 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll 7 26 D1 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 27 D 1 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 28 E1 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off 29 F1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 30 FHI 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 31 G1 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 32 G 1 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 33 A1 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 34 AR 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 35 B1 19 BD Hip 1 Off 13 BD Squash Off 12 BD Tight Off 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 36 C2 29 BD Deep 88 Off 17 BD House 1 Off 27 BD Amb
235. HONES Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES output on the rear of the insturment You can use headphones with an impedance of 16 200 2 50 suggested Use a headphone distributor to connect more than one pair of headphones AUDIO OUTPUTS You can send the sound to an external amplification system instead of the internal speakers This is useful when record ing or when playing live Stereo Connect two mono cables to the L MONO amp RIGHT OUTPUTS Connect the other end of the cables to a stereo channel of your mixer two mono channels two pow ered monitors or the TAPE AUX input of your audio system Don t use the PHONO inputs of your audio system Mono Connect a mono cable to the LIMONO OUTPUT Connect the other end of the cable to a mono channel of your mixer a powered monitor or a channel of your TAPE AUX input of a hi fi system you will hear that channel only unless you can set the amplifier to Mono mode AUDIO INPUTS Connect any other electronic musical instrument a mixer s output non powered or a CD tape player to the INPUTS on the back of the instrument These inputs expect a line level signal To connect a microphone you need a dedicated microphone preamplifier or a mixer Use the connected device s volume control to adjust the input level Be careful not to make it distort or clip Here is how to set the volume of the connected device if the sound heard on Pa50SD s outputs is too low
236. ICONS Many icons and symbols on the custom display show the status of a parameter or the display content Realtime Keyboard track Upper 1 3 Lower lei Drum track Style track view Gee Percussion track Style track view m Grouped Drum and Percussion tracks e Bass track Style track view acc Grouped accompaniment tracks This symbol indicates the five grouped accompaniment tracks Acc1 5 Selected track or parameter When this symbol appears you can execute any available opera tion on the selected item The track is in mute and can t play on the key board Accompaniment tracks Style track view Sequencer tracks no icon GRAYED OUT NON AVAILABLE PARAMETERS Currently non available parameters are now shown in gray in the display i e with a ghost texture Here is an example of a grayed out parameter compared to a normal parameter Eocttomstri1 Toes Text in solid black Text in gray CERO Cum GED esp Gino d DLE ear Em Lardt Load 22 Rear panel 5 REAR PANEL o 60000 Mor 06699 OUT ASSIGN THRU IN PDL SW DAMPER RIGHT O L MONO RIGHT L MONO PHONES 0000000000 LL MIDI AC POWER ADAPTER CONNECTOR Plug the supplied power adapter into this connector POWER switch Use this switch to turn the instrument on or off Q MIDI INTERFACE The
237. IDI OUT by using the Panic key combination Just press SHIFT START STOP to stop all notes and reset all controllers e SYNCHRO START STOP DELETE This button turns the Synchro Start and Synchro Stop func tions on or off Press it repeatedly to turn the functions on or off The LEDs cycle in this order START gt START STOP gt OFF START LED ON When this LED is lit just play a chord in the chord recognition area usually under the split point see CHORD SCANNING section on page 17 to automatically start the Style run ning If you like you can turn one of the INTROs on before starting the Style START STOP LEDs ON When both LEDs are lit raising your hand from the keyboard momentarily stops the Style running If you play a chord again the Style starts again OFF All Synchro functions are turned off This button doubles as a DELETE function for the Backing Sequence and Song modes see chapters 12 and 13 It is also used to delete the selected character during text editing TAP TEMPO RESET INSERT This is a double function button acting in a different way depending on the Style status stop play Front panel 15 Tap Tempo When the Style is not playing you can beat the tempo on this button At the end the accompaniment starts playing using the tapped in tempo Reset When you press this button while the Style is in play the Style pattern goes back to the previous strong beat
238. IJ w Nj Pad 4 Ch Acc This Backing Sequence track includes all Style tracks including recognized chords They will be Song tracks 9 16 MUTE The track is muted If this tracks has already been recorded it will not be heard during recording of the other Backing Sequence track PLAY The track is in play If there are recorded data they will be heard during recording of the other Backing Sequence track REC The track is in record All previously recorded data will be deleted CHORD ACC STEP RECORDING PAGE While you are in Backing Sequence mode press RECORD then one of the B VOLUME VALUE buttons to access the Chord Acc Step Recording mode The RECORD LED turns on choral Campo measure 558 CO ee Shee Choncd Bcc MEG G1 GGG Temes ina Stale lel Bossa Perf 101 1 SE OFF pE Maj En Side arrow The small arrow next to a parameter means that its value is effective at the current position For example if you are at the M003 01 000 position and an arrow lights up next to the Chord parameter this means that a chord change happens at the M003 01 000 position 86 Backing Sequence operating mode Chord Acc Step Recording page M easure This is the locator It shows the current position of the Step Editor To go to a different position within the Song select this parameter then use the TEMPO
239. If you assign CVLen a value lower than RecLen the value of RecLen is not immediately updated in the dis play Therefore you are still free of changing the value of CVLen before the measures exceeding its value are deleted see warning in CVLen Chord Variation Length below However if you press START STOP to begin recording the real RecLen value is changed to the new one even if the dis play still shows the old value For example you may have CVLen 4 and RecLen 4 If you set CVLen to 2 and press START STOP to begin record ing RecLen is still shown as 4 but it is in reality set to 2 and recording will cycle for just 2 measures After you press START STOP to stop recording RecLen is updated to 2 and all measures after the second measure are deleted CVLen Chord Variation Length This parameter sets the total length in measures for the selected Chord Variation When playing a Style this will be the length of the accompaniment pattern to be cycled when the chord corresponding to the Chord Variation is recognized on the keyboard Warning If you reduce the Chord Variation Length after recording any measure after the selected length will be deleted Be very careful when setting the CVLen to a lower value after recording Metro Metronome This is the metronome heard during recording Off No metronome click will be heard during recording A one bar precount will be played before starting recording 56 Style Record mode
240. K Telephone 01908 857100 UK Technical Support Tel 01908 857122 Fax 01908 857199 E mail info korg co uk Many KORG distributors also have their own web page on the internet where you can find infos and software Useful web pages in English are the following www korg com www korg co uk www korgcanada com A place to find operating system updates and various system files for example a full backup of the factory data is at the following link www korgpa com Other useful information can be found worldwide by access ing to other KORG web sites like the following www korg co jp www laboitenoiredumusicien com www korg de www ekomusicgroup com www korg es ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual is divided in three sections A Basic Guide containing an overview of the instru ment as well as a series of practical guides named Tutorials A Reference Guide with each page and parameter described in detail An Appendix with a list of data and useful information for the advanced user Within the manual you will find the following abbreviations gt PERF The parameter can be saved onto a Perfor mance by pressing the WRITE button gt STYLE The parameter can be saved onto the current Style Performance by pressing the WRITE but ton gt STS The parameter can be saved onto a Single Touch Setting by pressing the WRITE button gt GBL The parameter can be saved onto the Global by going to the Global environment
241. Level 0 50 Sets the output level of TapC R Delay Time msec 0 1360msec Sets the delay time of TapR c Level 0 50 Sets the output level of TapR Feedback C Delay 100 100 Sets the feedback amountof TapC Drez d Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the TapC feedback amount Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the TapC feedback amount High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range os e Low Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the low range is Input Level Dmod 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the input level t Fx 037 Dese f Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level ts Fx 037 Spread 0 50 9 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound iS Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dz h Src Off tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 Effects ER Delay 203 e High Damp e Low Damp These parameters set the damping amount of high range and low range The tone of the delayed sound becomes darker and lighter as it feeds back g Spread This parameter sets the pan width of the effect sound The stereo image is widest with a value of 50 and the effect sound of both channels is output from the center w
242. Long Guiro Long 75 D 5 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Claves 76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Woodblock1 77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Woodblock1 78 F 5 215 Cuica Hi 4 239 Uhh Cuica Hi 79 G5 215 Cuica Hi 4 237 Yeah Cuica Lo 80 G 5 233 Flexatone 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 81 A5 233 Flexatone 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 82 A 5 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 83 B5 228 j Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 85 C 6 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 86 D6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 87 D 6 342 Darbuka 1 DumOp 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 88 E6 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 stadium Off 243 Stadium Off Factory Data Drum Kit instruments 165 120 0 24 Electro Kit 120 0 25 Analog Kit 120 0 26 House Kit1 120 0 27 House Kit2 Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl
243. Louder 194 Effects Pitch Phase Mod 031 Scratch This effect is applied by recording the input signal and mov ing the modulation source It simulates the sound of scratches you can make using a turntable Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Wet Dry Scratch Mix Rec Control Scratch F Right o o Wet Dry i D mod i prar i DZz Envelope Control i Input i Scratch Source Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for simulation control Uy pz b Response 0 100 Sets the speed of the response to the Scratch Source Lg Envelope Select D mod Input Selects whether the start and end of recording is controlled via the modula tion source or the input signal level S pz Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls recording when Envelope Select is set to D mod S Threshold 0 100 d Sets the recording start level when Envelope Select is set to Input d Response 0 100 Sets the speed of the response to the end of recording Lg t Direct Mix Always On Always Off Cross Fade Selects how a dry sound is mixed Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dz Src Off tempo 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation
244. Low EQ 17 E Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz q 7S ere tho gain of Low EQ OR page 176 Sets the center frequency of Band 1 Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 d Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 ts Fx 006 F Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the delay ti Gain dB 18 18dB ee Sets the gain of Band 1 F LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed E Band Cutoff Hz 50 5 00kHz B Sets the center frequency of Band 2 LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform e Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 ts Fx 006 F Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulati Gain dB 18 18dB PE Se Wee Sets the gain of Band 2 Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount t Fx 020 E Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz s Sets the center frequency for Band 3 F Cho Fing Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger ts Fx 010 020 1 0 5 10 0 h Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 ts Fx 006 Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Selects the output mode for the ch fl var Gain dB 841845 e output mode for the chorus flanger Sets the gain of Band 3 Routing CMP FLNG FLNG CMP i Switches the order of th d ch fl ti E Band4 Cutoff Hz B00 ODIDUKH i wi order of the compressor and chorus flanger connec pi Sets the center frequency for Band 4 a 055 100 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet NEUE Table Sets th I twi
245. N and UP buttons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the DELETE button Song Play operating mode 79 Page 9 Jukebox 4 When you have finished writing a name press F2 Save to confirm The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort F2 Add Adds a Song at the end of the current list You can add up to 127 Songs in a list Note A Jukebox list can include only Songs contained in the same folder F3 Ins Inserts a Song at the cursor position i e the first line of the display All subsequent Songs are moved to the next higher numbered slot You can add up to 127 Songs in a list Note A Jukebox list can include only Songs contained in the same folder F4 Del This command let s you delete the Song on the first line of the display Pressed while keeping SHIFT pressed the whole Jukebox list is deleted The instrument asks for a confirma tion with the Are you sure message press ENTER to con firm EXIT to abort The Jukebox file name changes to NEW_NAME JBX PAGE 10 PREFERENCES In this page you can set various general parameters Compo measure Cranspose ap BBG Ss Be awe Preferences Obl Lirk Mock OFF S2 FA Moses CO Perf Fe Mode Ct
246. Note The SD MMC card is not included It must be purchased separately Note The Pa50SD supports SD cards with a power supply voltage of 2 7 3 6V SD and MMC card handling Do not remove the card from the drive while the Pa50SD is reading or saving data The SD MMC card may be hot immediately following use Power off the Pa50SD and wait for the card to cool before removing it SD MMC cards are precision parts Do not bend them drop them or subject them to physical shock Avoid using or storing SD MMC cards in locations of extremely high or low temperature such as in direct sunlight a closed automobile or near a heater or in locations of high humidity or excessive dust Avoid using or storing SD MMC cards in locations where they may be subject to strong static electricity or electrical noise Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to adhere to the contacts of an SD MMC card If the contacts should become soiled gently wipe them off using a dry cloth When you are not using an SD MMC card keep it in the protective case that was included with the card to prevent it from being damaged by static electricity Do not leave an SD MMC card where it is accessible by infants or children who might place it in their mouth and swallow it Carefully read and observe the owner s manual included with your SD MMC card Write protecting an SD card SD cards have a write protect switch that prevents the data from being overw
247. O operation mode When Loop is selected the Doppler effect will be created repeatedly If LFO Sync is set to On the LFO will be reset when the modulation source specified with the Src parameter is turned on When LFO Mode is set to 1 Shot the Doppler effect is created only once when the modulation source specified in the Src field is turned on At this time if you do not set the Src parameter the Doppler effect will not be created and no effect sound will be output m The effect is off when a value for the modulation source speci fied for the Src parameter is smaller than 64 and the effect is on when the value is 64 or higher The Doppler effect is trig gered when the value changes from 63 or smaller to 64 or higher e Pitch Depth With the Doppler effect the pitch is raised when the sound approaches and the pitch is lowered when the sound goes away This parameter sets this pitch variation f Pan Depth This parameter sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound With larger values the sound seems to come and go from much further away With positive values the sound moves from left to right with negative values the sound moves from right to left 2 8 Ed Doppler Pitch Pan Depth lt p H Pan Depth z value i Pitch Depth i Pan Depth value Higher Original Pitch Lower Pan Depth lt lt lt occum RR 99 gt gt gt Louder Volume
248. O waveform is changed S Src Off tempo b LFO Phase degree 180 180 Selects the modulation source of the LFO modulation depth Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 010 Amt 100 100 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth Sets the LFO speed Fx 009 posse i 2 c ammar 0 100 d Src Off Tempo ets the amount of shimmering of the LFO waveform iS Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed D OET BPM MIDI Sync Off On rc Tempo i i i d a Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 tempo and notes t Fx 009 Qs Amt 100 100 BPM MIDI 40 240 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo 1S Fx 009 ance on page 175 e Base Note A ds 2 Js de 45 dre Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed vs Ex 009 c Shimmer g Times x1 x16 This parameter sets the amount of shimmering of the LFO Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed 1 Fx 009 waveform Increasing this value adds more shimmering Depth 0 100 making the chorus effect more complex and richer Sets the depth of LFO modulation Ensemble
249. Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level 0s Fx 037 i Spread 50 450 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound VE Fx 043 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Duis Src Off Tempo l Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 204 Effects ER Delay 045 M Tap Delay Stereo Multitap Delay The left and right Multitap Delays have two taps respectively Changing the routing of feedback and tap output allows you to create various patterns of complex effect sounds Stereo In Stereo Out Leno A Wet Dry Feedback a DS s Input Level D mod High Damp Low Damp 1 Mode Tap1 Level Mode Spread Tapt 1 x Tap2 2 Input Level D mod High Damp Low Damp axe 2 N V n NEZ Delay Right Aresaback oue Wet Dry Mode Normal Mode Cross Feedback Mode Cross Pant Mode Cross Pan2 Soo aan oo ie x a Mode Normal Cross Feedback Cross Pan1 Cross Pan2 Switches the left and right delay routing 1S b Tap1 Time msec 0 0 680 0msec Sets the Tap1 delay time Tap2 Time msec 0 0 680 0msec Sets the Tap2 delay time d Tap1 Level 0 1
250. Off On b Selects the modulation source that toggles between slow and fast Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the Sw To zA ggle Moment tempo and notes te Fx 009 eg Selects switching mode of the modulation source that toggles between slow BPM MIDI 40 240 and fast d Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo e Fx 009 Manual Speed Ctrl Manual Speed Control Off Tempo Base Note A D 3 45 4 45 d e c Selects the modulation source in case the rotation speed is changed Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed 1S Fx 009 directly Dz Times x1 x16 Horn Acceleration 0 100 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed te Fx 009 How quickly the horn rotation speed in the high range is switched Depth 100 100 d Sets the LFO modulation depth for pitch shift amount prez Horn Ratio Stop 0 50 2 00 Adjusts the high range side horn rotation speed Standard value is 1 00 Src Off Tempo Selecting Stop will stop the rotation Selects the modulation source of the depth of modulation Rotor Acceleration 0 100 Amt 100 100 Determines how quickly the rotor rotation speed in the low range is switched Sets the modulation amount of the depth of modulation e Pan L 1 99 99 1 R Rotor Ratio Stop 0 50 2 00 Sets the panning effect sound and dry sound separately iS Adjusts the low range side rotor rotation speed Standard value is 1 00 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1
251. Off 225 Cowbe Off 57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 350 Darbuka D3 Off 302 Dbk Tky Rim Off 58 A 3 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 59 B3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 117 Orch Cymb Off 339 Bandir Closed Off 304 Douf Dom ak Off 60 C4 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 353 Hollo 2 Off 307 Douf Tek ak 2 Off 61 CH4 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open Off 62 D4 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 353 Hollo 2 Off 306 Douf Tek ak 1 Off 63 D 4 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open Off 64 E4 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 305 Douf rim ak Off 305 Douf rim ak Off 65 F4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 344 Darbuka 1 Closed Off 328 Tabla Dom Off 66 F 4 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 348 Darbuka D1 4 348 Darbuka D1 4 67 G4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Off 346 Darbuka 3 4 331 Tabla Tak 4 68 G 4 224 lAgogo Be Off 224 lAgogo Be Off 349 Darbuka D2 Off 329 Tabla Flam Off 69 A4 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 341 Darbuka 1 Tek7 Off 330 Tabla Rim Off 70 A 4 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush Off 341 Darbuka 1 Tek7 Off 189 Tabla Na Off 71 B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 343 j Darbuka 1 Tek5 Off 191 Tabla Tin Off 72 C5 234 sambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle 2 359 Tef 1 Off 318 Rek
252. Out waveform b LFO Phase Pan This parameter determines the difference in the left and right LFO phases When you change the value gradually from 0 the sound from the left and right channels will chase each other around If you set the parameter to 180 Harg or 180 the sound from each channel will cross over each other You need to input different sounds to each channel in order for this parameter to be effective Pan 15 Righto 4 c LFO Tri Sin LFO Shape LFO Waveform Triangle Sine acere Selects LFO Waveform CLFO Phase 0 degrees LFO Phase 90 degrees LFO Phase 180 degrees a D LFO Shape 100 100 e S C C Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed Lg e pce a t b LFO Phase degree 180 180 f t oS t amp i ED J Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right vs 3 E LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz ED s ED fu a Sets the LFO speed s Fx 009 Dae C c c Src Off Tempo ED lt ED amp Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Gi Ci M Amt 20 00 20 00Hz amp e Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed Left Center Right Output Stereo Image BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes ts Fx 009 ee BPM MIDI
253. Output Level A Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Drive e Pa Dry O Drive Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Switches between overdrive and high gain distortion a Drive 1 100 Sets the degree of distortion ts Fx 006 220 Effects Mono Mono Chain O Output Level 0 50 O Output Level 0 50 Sets the overdrive output level t Fx 006 Drie Sets the overdrive output level t Fx 006 Dmic b Src Off Tempo Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level Amt 50 450 Amt 50 50 Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level O Low Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz O Low Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type Gain dB 18 18dB Gain dB 18 18dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 O Mid1 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz O Mid1 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type d Q 0 5 10 0 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 ts Fx 006 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 t Fx 006 Gain dB 1
254. P to begin recording Depending on the Metro option you selected a 1 or 2 bars precount may play before the recording actually begins When it begins play freely If you selected the Auto Punch recording mode the recording will begin only when reaching the Start point If you selected the Pedal Punch recording mode press the pedal when you want to begin recording Press it again to finish recording Note The Punch functions will not work on an empty Song At least one track must already be recorded When finished recording press PLAY STOP to stop the sequencer Select a different track and go on recording the whole Song When finished recording the new Song press RECORD to exit the Record mode The Song will be saved in memory Warning Save the Song to a card to avoid it is lost when turning the instrument off Note When exiting the Record mode the Octave Trans pose is automatically reset to 0 Edit the new Song press the MENU page and select the various edit pages STEP RECORD PROCEDURE The Step Record allows you to create a new Song by entering the single notes or chords in each track This is very useful when transcribing an existing score or needing a higher grade of detail and is particularly suitable to create drum and percussion tracks 1 While in the Main screen of the Song mode press RECORD to enter the Song Record mode The Main page of the Song Record mode will appear Cam
255. PAGE or either the B Load Song buttons while you are in the main page Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Backing Sequence operating mode without selecting a Song Cmpa measure tramapoas fat bi Gum 58 ELTE Load Song Ed Po EALLADS n MNS MYSONG MID It tb LOAD OPEM CLOSE A C File folder Move the file or folder to be selected to the first line of the display To select a file press the F2 Select button To open a folder press the F3 Open button The CJ symbol identifies a folder E F Scroll Up Scroll the list up Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of these buttons to jump to the previous alphabetical section G H Scroll Down Scroll the list down Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of these buttons to jump to the next alphabetical section TEMPO VALUE section These controls scroll the list up or down F1 SD Press this button after replacing a card in the card drive The new card will be read and the file list shown on the display will be updated F2 Load Load the Song at the first line of the display F3 Open Opens the selected folder file whose name begins with the CJ symbol F4 Close Closes the current folder returning to the parent upper folder SAVE SONG PAGE The recorded Song is contained in RAM and is lost when turning the inst
256. Pa50SD by sending it Bank Select MSB CC 0 Bank Select LSB CC 32 and Program Change messages on the Control channel see page 127 If a Style is already selected just send the Program Change message CCH0 CC 32 PC STS PC STS PC STS PC STS The same as the Style to which the STS pertains 64 STS1 65 STS2 66 STS3 66 STS4 PROGRAMS BANK ORDER The following table enlists all Pa50SD Factory Programs in the same order as they appear by pressing the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE bank buttons Legend The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely select the Programs CC00 Control Change 0 or Bank Select MSB CC32 Control Change 32 or Bank Select LSB PC Pro gram Change Factory Data Programs bank order 147 Name ccoo CC32 Bank Piano Grand Piano 121 Class Piano 121 L R Piano 121 AcPianoWide 121 Ac Piano 121 BrightPian 121 ElGranPian 121 ElGrandWide 121 AcPianoDark 121 BrPianoWide 121 90 s Piano 121 M1 Piano 121 2000 sPiano 121 ChorusPiano 121 Honky Tonk 121 Honky Wide 121 Piano Pad 121 Piano Pad 2 121 PnoStrngPad 121 Pno amp Strings 121 PianoLayers 121 Piano amp Vibes 121
257. R SPLIT FULL UPPER UPPEI ACC4 D FULL LOWER ACC5 STYLE c 1 BITING WANE H lt a gt CHANGE GENNA GRO Oz GENERAL SS EE iii SINGLE TOUCH SETTING a 6 9 SHIFT BALANCE SEQUENCER 2 So RUSE LAV ISTOP PROGRAM PERFORMANCE f PIANO EPIANO MALLET amp ACCORDION ORGAN1 ORGAN2 GUITAR STRINGS amp TRUMPET amp BRASS BELL VOCALS TROMBONE a 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 V SAX WOODWIND SYNTH 1 SYNTH2 BASS DRUM amp PERC SFX USER1 USER2 USER DK SYNCHRO TAP TEMPO WRITE ENSEMBLE PAD TRANSPOSE OCTAVE START STOP START STOP RESET CARD IN USE 2 3 4 STOP b E DELETE INSERT e e eo e e e MASTER VOLUME This slider controls the overall volume of the instrument both of the internal speakers the LIMONO and RIGHT out puts and the HEADPHONES output Warning At the maximum level with rich sounding Songs Styles or Programs the internal speakers could distort during signal peaks Should this happen lower the Master Volume a little ACC SEQ VOLUME This slider controls the accompaniment tracks volume Style Play mode or the Song tracks volume excluding the Real time tracks Song and Song Play modes This is a relative control whose effective maximum value is determined by the MASTER VOLUME slider position Q ASSIGN SLIDER This is a freely programmable slider see Sld Slider on page 126 By default it acts as the Keyboard Expression con trol to let you balance the rela
258. Routing CMP DLY DLY gt CMP Switches the order of the compressor and multitap delay connection Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dz 216 Effects Mono Mono Chain 070 Lim Par 4Eq 071 Lim ChorFlg Limiter Parametric 4 Band EQ Limiter Chorus Flanger This effect combines a mono type limiter and a four band This effect combines a mono type limiter and a chorus parametric equalizer You can change the order of the effect flanger You can change the order of the effect connection connection Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Lent Routing Wet Dry Left o Limiter Y wx Chorus Flanger Routing Wet Dry i 7 i 7 a Limiter FN Parametric 4Band EQ E Limiter KZL I 3X E Chorus Flanger F EQ Trim LEQ HEQ 1 Ou Modi Limiter 2 AA Gain Adjust Ade Na Zu Gain Adjust iCho Fing Wet Dry j Righte H Wet Dry gt Envelope Control LFO Tri Sine Right 1 i Xo i i Wet Dry L Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 A r L Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compress
259. S buttons are automatically dis abled meaning that you can t change the Realtime Keyboard tracks while in Chord Acc Step Mode DELETE When the Perf parameter is selected and the side arrow showing that a Performance Change event has been selected at the current position appears next to it press DELETE to delete the Performance Change at the current position Note If the side arrow doesn t appear the event was not selected at the current position and will not be deleted SHIFT DELETE When the Perf parameter is selected press SHIFT DELETE to delete all Performance Change events starting from the current posi tion to the end of the Song To delete all Per formance Change events in the Song go back to the M001 01 000 position and press SHIFT DELETE Note All events on the very first tick M001 01 000 like Perf Style Tempo Chord Style Element selection cannot be deleted SE Style Element This is the Style Element i e a Variation Fill Intro or End ing The length of the selected Style Element is always shown on the measure counter at the top of the display 026 0 000 C000 This will let you know where to place the following Style Ele ment Change For example if you inserted an Intro event lasting for 4 measures you can insert 4 empty measure after this event and a Variation event at the end of the Intro beginning at the 4th empty measure Off means that the accompanimen
260. S1_Tr 4 S2_Tr 4 5 S1 Tr 5 S2 Tr 5 S1 Tr 5 S2 Tr 5 6 S1 Tr 6 S2 Tr 6 S1 Tr 6 S2 Tr 6 7 S1 Tr7 S2 Tr 7 S1 Tr 7 S2 Tr7 MIDI OUT 8 7 1_Tr 8 S2_Tr 8 1_Tr 8 S2_Tr 8 Channel 9 Bass Bass 1 Tr9 2 Tr 9 Bass 1 Tr9 2 Tr9 10 Drum Drum S1 Tr 10 S2 Tr 10 Drum S1 Tr 10 S2 Tr 10 11 Perc Perc S1 Tr 11 S2 Tr 11 Perc S1 Tr 11 S2 Tr 11 12 Acci Acci S1 Tr 12 S2 Tr 12 Acci S1 Tr 12 S2 Tr 12 13 Acc2 Acc2 S1 Tr 13 S2 Tr 13 Acc2 S1 Tr 13 S2 Tr 13 14 Acc3 Acc3 S1 Tr 14 S2 Tr 14 Acc3 S1 Tr 14 S2 Tr 14 15 Acc4 Acc4 S1 Tr 15 S2 Tr 15 Acc4 1 Tr 15 2 Tr 15 16 Acc5 Acc5 S1 Tr 16 S2 Tr 16 Acc5 S1 Tr 16 S2 Tr 16 MIDI IN Velocity Normal Normal Normal Normal 110 110 Normal Normal Chord 1 Chann Off 1 Off Off 2 2 2 Off Chord 2 Chann Off Off Off Off 3 3 3 Off 18 EFFECTS Pa50SD is equipped with four powerful Effect Processors A B C D You can send them the internal tracks DIAGRAMS The following instructions show the signal path diagram for each of the effect types The signal coming from the tracks Send is mono Before entering an effect processor it is split in two wires Left and Right and processed in stereo The signal is then output in stereo from the effect processor and sent to the Mix output Left amp Right the heaphones or the internal speakers Effect Block Di S Rum DYNAMIC MODULATION SOURCES When the pgz symbol is encoutered a Dynamic Modula tio
261. Style tracks INTERFACE STRUCTURE Thanks to its multitasking operating system the Pa50SD user interface is structured in overlapping active layers From the lower level operating modes Style Play Backing Sequence Song Play Song Program edit environments Global Card e selecting windows Style Select Song Select Program Select Performance Select Edit environments Operating modes Operating modes See diagram at the bottom of this page At the lowest level an operating mode is always active The current operating mode is indicated by the lit LED on the STYLE PLAY B SEQ SONG PLAY SONG or PROGRAM button in the MODE section The relevant icon lights up in the display An operating mode is divided into a main page the page where you usually play a Style a Song or a Program a menu and a series of edit pages Press MENU to access the Menu Use the MENU and PAGE buttons to browse across the various edit pages Press EXIT to go back to the main page Operating modes ea m mn ame D Mp ea Ce Di eg Em Guo fg Den coos mod dp em caso Bg To GEB eun BoszsaMova PST Em 77 Stale Plas Menu ER Maron HE OroumPerc Piawai QU Mixer RT Ctrls BPD I izz L ga OU Basset Buitarel W Tinira Sty Ctrls binpp im IIG lt W Sp Bzc i 5 Strae AM Effects Ireut Pad emp II 127 111I ges NUI UePadl 4m Track Edit Preferences MILI di2 gg
262. The E F buttons are the Scroll Up t while the G H buttons are the Scroll Down 4 Move the Song to play to the first line of the display Then press the F2 SELECT button Press PLAY STOP SEQ1 The playback begins Q if you like select a Song for the Sequencer 2 Press the B S2 VOLUME VALUE button and repeat the above procedure to select the Song for Sequencer 2 Use the right SEQ 2 PLAY STOP button to start stop the second Song Use the BALANCE cursor to mix between Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 Take a pause Press PAUSE to stop the playback without going back to mea sure 1 The PAUSE LED begins flashing Press PAUSE again to resume the playback Stop it Sure the Song automatically stops when reaching the end But you can stop it before the end just by pressing PLAY STOP again 4 RECORDING A SONG The Backing Sequence mode is a fast and effective way of recording a new Song making full use of the features of the Style Play mode So arm your recorder and play live with the Styles a song will be ready in seconds First enter Backing Sequence mode Press B SEQ to access the Backing Sequence mode The Real time tracks on the keyboard will remain the same you selected in the Style Play mode ahora Camp msseure raneposs P D ys oot BY eB L m cooo Css i cae DSi Hew Sona Load Sore Meteo OPP See mon Petec
263. This page contains the editing parameters for the B effect usually modulating effect for the Style tracks For more details see Page 9 FX A editing above Parameters gt PERF gt STYLE PAGE 11 FX C EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the C effect usually reverb for the Realtime tracks For more details see Page 9 FX A editing above Parameters PERF STS PAGE 12 FX D EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the D effect usually modulating effect for the Realtime tracks For more details see Page 9 FX A editing above Parameters PERF STS PAGE 13 TRACK EASY EDIT In this page you can edit the main parameters of the Pro grams assigned to each track Note All values are relative to the value of the original Pro gram Style Play operating mode 45 Page 9 FX A editing You can also change the volume for each class of Drums and Percussion if the selected track is set in Drum mode see below Page 14 Track Mode Camps massurs transpose Ga f dE an gugar BE ESOS TracktEazu Edit BE Aitaka 6 Ataki Htbackt B Rd mmm Httacki A Lack ia choral Campo measure tremeposs Topp BBB BASE Tracki Ege Edit Kick WF Aitak 8 Fecir Abbeck 8 E E Ataki Abback 8 E Ataka Attack 8
264. Tinklin Pad 121 3 97 Tenor Sax 121 0 66 Pods In Pad 121 4 97 Alto Sax 121 0 65 Analog Pad 121 8 89 Soprano Sax 121 0 64 Analog Pad2 121 9 89 BaritoneSax 121 0 67 Money Pad 121 5 89 TenorBreath 121 3 66 TsunamiWave 121 6 91 Tenor Growl 121 4 66 RavelianPad 121 8 91 BreathyAlto 121 3 65 AstralDream 121 1 95 AltSaxGrowl 121 4 65 Meditate 121 2 95 Reso Down 121 2 97 Sky Watcher 121 2 90 Factory Data Programs bank order 151 Name ccoo CC32 PC Name ccoo CC32 PC Super Sweep 121 4 90 Mega Synth 121 9 90 Wave Sweep 121 5 90 TecnoPhonic 121 10 90 Cross Sweep 121 6 90 DarkElement 121 3 95 Digi IcePad 121 2 101 Band Passed 121 3 102 Crimson5ths 121 1 86 Cat Lead 121 9 87 Freedom Pad 121 7 89 Pan Reso 121 4 102 Noble Pad 121 5 97 Square Rez 121 11 80 Mellow Pad 121 4 95 Rezbo 121 11 81 Lonely Spin 121 1 100 Auto Pilot 121 14 38 Cinema Pad 121 5 95 MetallicRez 121 4 84 VirtualTrav 121 1 88 Square Bass 121 7 87 Syn Ghostly 121 2 100 Syn Pianoid 121 12 81 MotionOcean 121 1 96 Brian Sync 121 5 84 Moon Cycles 121 5 102 Arp Twins 121 6 84 Farluce 121 11 90 Arp Angeles 121 2 88 Bell Pad 121 6 98 Big amp Raw 121 8 87 Bell Choir 121 7 98 Caribbean 121 2 96 Warm Pad 121 0 89 Lead Square 121 0 80 Sweep Pad 121 0 95 Lea
265. Transposition applied to the track For example if the Octave Transposition is 1 a received C4 will still play a C4 Mute In gt GBL Use this parameter to determine if a muted track can still play data received via MIDI On No data received via MIDI on a muted track can be played by Pa50SD Off Data received via MIDI on a muted track can still play on the Pa50SD PAGE 9 MIDI IN FILTERS Use this page to set up to 8 filters for the MIDI data received by the Pa50SD chord Campa measure transpose Cet caD Hg a coe oe CD ane 773 GblifidiIn Filt SE PitcBered HonoTouch OFF B Bark Sel OFF 1 Med C OFF Filters gt GBL Selected MIDI IN filters Off No filter Pitch Bend Pitch Bend MonoTouch Mono or Channel After Touch PolyTouch Poly After Touch PrgChange Program Change SysExd System Exclusive All CC All Control Change messages 0 127 Control Change message 0 127 See MIDI Controllers on page 228 for a list of available Control Change messages PAGE 10 MIDI OUT CHANNELS In this page you can assign to any MIDI OUT channel one of Pa50SD s tracks Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from channels 1 8 to channels 9 16 Cmpa maseure ranspoes rd EE oooo octava C BeliMidi Out Chnl CELI Ler heni Freg
266. WINDOW You can apply a realtime groove quantization to Sequencer l Groove quantization is a way of changing the music groove during the playback moving notes to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid Please feel free to experiment this func tion is a great source of musical invention While in Song Play press G QUANTIZE The following win dow will appear Cep E j cmo BEB au CU oooo c rone Duantize Erablettn HetactiUn Bec OXO len Houretith mango lem Fest Ao heec ig Press EXIT to exit this window Song Play operating mode 71 Master Volume Sequencer Volume BALANCE Enable Enables disable the quantize It is automatically set to Off each time the instrument is turned on or when selecting a different Song NStart Note Start Enables disables the quantization of the Note On event i e beginning of the note NDurat Note Duration Enables disables the quantization of the Note Off event i e the length of the note Res Resolution Coarse quantize grill resolution This parameter is the main quantization value to be varied with the Acc Swing and Window values J 1 32 d 1 4 Grid resolution in musical values a 3 after the value means triplet For example when you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the near est 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved
267. When this parameter and the assigned value is in small letters cv cv1 the Chord Variation is empty when it is in cap itals CV CV1 it is already recorded SE V1 V4 You can select one of 6 Chord Variations to edit SE I1 E4 You can select one of 2 Chord Variations to edit R Recording Mode This parameters lets you select between the Realtime and the Step recording modes Use one of the E VOLUME VALUE buttons and the F3 function key to select this parameter Change its status using the E VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls RT Realtime This methods allows you to record in realtime each pattern of the Style Stp Step Record This method allows you to enter the events one at a time See Style Record pro cedure below for more information RL Recording Length This parameter sets the recording length in measures of the selected track Its value is always equal to or a divider of the Chord Variation Length see next parameter This is not the total length of the Chord Variation but just of the current track For example you may have a Chord Varia tion eight measures long with a drum pattern repeating each two measures If so set the CV Len parameter to 8 and the RecLen parameter to 2 before starting recording the Drum track When saving the Style or executing any edit operation on the Style the 2 measures pattern will be extended to the full 8 measures length of the Chord Variation Warning
268. With a value of 0 there will be no change in pitch and the C4 pitch will sound regardless of the keyboard location you play The diagram shows how the Pitch Slope and pitch are related Pitch 2 Key 1 0 2 0 JS X This parameter specifies how the pitch will change when the joystick is moved all the way to the right A setting of 12 pro duces 1 octave of change For example if you set this to 12 and move the joystick all the way to the right the pitch will rise one octave above the original pitch 60 12 JS X This parameter specifies how the pitch will change when the joystick is moved all the way to the left A setting of 12 pro duces 1 octave of change For example if you set this to 60 and move the joystick all the way to the left the pitch will fall five octaves below the original pitch This can be used to simulate the downward swoops that a guitarist produces using the tremolo arm 60 12 Maximum pitch change in semitones Pitch slope value Maximum pitch change in semitones Pitch modulation AMS Alternate Modulation Source This parameter selects the source that will modulate the pitch of the selected oscillator See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect produced by AMS With a setting of 0 no modulation will be applied With a setting of 12 00 the pitch will change up to one octave
269. YLE CHANGE LED is on the Style memorized in the Performance will be selected If the STYLE CHANGE LED is off the Style doesn t change 26 Basic operations Selecting a Program SELECTING A PROGRAM You can select a different Program i e sound to be played by a track Before selecting a Program you must select the track you want to assign the Program to Note To assign different Programs to the Style tracks press TRACK SELECT to see the Style tracks If you select a Program while grouped tracks Drum Percussion or ACC are selected the Program will be assigned to the last selected track Each Style Element Variations Fills can have different Programs so your selection might be automatically reset when selecting a different Element To avoid this reset see Prog Program on page 49 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE E H buttons on the right side of the display to select the Realtime Keyboard track you wish to assign a different Program to SINGLE TOUCH SETTING E imps vul Bua las uem S au BossaMosa STS Bg C CS BP DeawTerc Piawai U C c5 6 Bassi Guitarel 40 ort os Pen1 S Stergere M E ca EE UcPadl 4m mne Mj 0 O menn E do Co CO 2 Press the PROGRAM button This changes the PRO GRAM PERFORMANCE section into a Program selec tor PERFORM o C
270. a breakdown fire or electrical shock Be careful not to let metal objects get into the equip ment If something does slip into the equipment unplug the AC adapter from the wall outlet Then contact your nearest Korg dealer or the store where the equipment was purchased KEEP THESE INSTRUCTIONS CLEAN ONLY WITH A DRY CLOTH THE FCC REGULATION WARNING FOR THE U S A AND CANADA ONLY This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer ence in a residential installation This equipment gener ates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc tions may cause harmful interference to radio commu nications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is con nected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV tech nici
271. a ret s Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 amp 15dB Sets the sensitivity Fx 002 Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 C Attack 1 100 P LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Table Sets the attack level on page 176 ts Fx 002 e Sets the LFO speed Output Level 0 100 LEO Waveform Triangle Sine Sets the compressor output level Vs Fx 002 Selects LFO Waveform C EQ Trim 0 100 c i P Manual 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied C Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB P Depth 0 100 j Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 415dB g Resonance 100 100 Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 Sets the resonance amount ts Fx 023 D Tap1 Time msec 0 680msec P Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet p ERIS Me Tapi delay time Sets the phaser effect balance ts Fx 010 023 Tap1 Level 0 100 Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Sets the Tap1 output level Vs Fx 045 Selects the phaser output mode s Fx 067 D Tap2 Time msec 0 680msec Routing CMP PHS PHS gt CMP i Sets the Tap2 delay time i Switches the order of the compressor and phaser connection Feedback 100 100 t Fx 067 Sets the Tap2 feedback amount D High Damp 96 0 100 9 Sets the damping amount in the high range ts Fx 043 h D Mt Delay Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the multitap delay effect balance i
272. a stereo compressor You can link left and right channels or use each channel separately Stereo In Stereo Out Left gt o Wet Dry EQ Trim LEQ HEQ X BD Ch Compressor Output Level Envelope Control sl lect gt Envelope Control X Bt lt H Compressor Output Level a EQ Trim LEQ HEQ Right A o Wet Dry Envelope Select L R Mix L R Individually a Determines whether the left and right channels are linked or used sepa rately va Sensitivity 1 100 Sets the sensitivity d Attack 1 100 Sets the attack level d EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the EQ input level Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 415 0dB Sets the gain of Low EQ Pre HEQ Gain dB Sets the gain of High EQ Output Level 0 100 Sets the output level of the compressor S Dame 15 0 15 0dB Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the compressor output level Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the compressor output level Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Daz Src Off Tempo 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a Envelope Select This parameter selects whether the left and right cha
273. able when the Mode parameter is set to Mono Yes Legato is on When multiple note on s occur the first note on will retrigger the sound and the second and subsequent note on s will not retrigger When legato is on multiple note on s will not retrigger the voice If one note is already on and another note is turned on the first voice will continue sounding The oscillator sound envelope and LFO will not be reset and only the pitch of the oscillator will be updated This setting is effective for wind instrument sounds and analog synth type sounds No Legato is off Notes will always be retriggered when note on occurs When legato is off multiple note on s will retrigger the voice at each note on The oscilla tor sound envelope and LFO will be reset and retriggered according to the settings of the Program Note If Legato is On certain multisamples or keyboard loca tions may produce an incorrect pitch Priority This parameter is available when the Mode parameter is set to Mono It specifies which note will be given priority to play when two or more notes are played simultaneously Low Lowest note will take priority High Highest note will take priority Last Last note will take priority Program operating mode 107 Page 2 Sample Sound Programs PAGE 2 SAMPLE SOUND PROGRAMS The multisample s waveform on which the Program will be based can be selected here for each of the four oscillators F
274. ach oscillator can use 1 or 2 multisamples each one assigned to the High or Low layer F Celerd Campo measure tremsposs J 3 Lr g e UB Coates Sani lez ec F9 Selected Deci ME Hi Bark Mumt ROM L2BcousticPiano B H Reuerzet Ha 4 The internal Flash ROM contains 340 different multisamples preset multisamples Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alter natively you can select oscillators using the F1 F4 buttons MS Hi Lo Bank Num Use these parameters to select a different multisample for each of the High and Low layers You can use velocity to switch between the two multisamples Reverse Offset and Level can be adjusted independently for the High and Low multisamples The first line shows the bank ROM while the second line is for selecting the multisample The Program number appears at the end of the second line The multisample you select for the High layer will be trig gered by velocities higher than the value of the Velocity Switch parameter see page 14 108 If you do not wish to use velocity switching set the switch to a value of 001 and select only the High multisample Note Each multisample has an upper limit and may not pro duce sound when played above that limit H L Reverse The multisample will be played in reverse In the case of Flash ROM multisamples that were orig
275. ack Level Swing and Break Level Swing to and set Intensity to a positive value the EG levels will rise as you play more strongly If Intensity is set to a nega tive values the EG levels will fall as you play more strongly 99 99 Start Level Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS will affect Start Level When Intensity has a positive value a setting of for this parameter will allow AMS to raise the EG level and a setting of will allow AMS to lower the EG level With a setting of 0 there will be no change Attack Level Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS will affect Attack Level When Intensity has a positive value a setting of for this parameter will allow AMS to raise the EG level and a setting of will allow AMS to lower the EG level With a setting of 0 there will be no change Break Level Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS will affect Break Point Level When Intensity has a positive value a setting of for this parameter will allow AMS to raise the EG level and a setting of will allow AMS to lower the EG level With a setting of 0 there will be no change Intensity value Filter EG Time modulation Filter 1 EG changes Time AMS Velocity Intensity a positive value Note on Note on Note on Note off
276. acks Campa measure transpose j M ED M EM Shylt L hrap Rna Preaece ig obey Wi KRO E Whi KRiDe bi KEO Whi KRiDe bi ERC E Ej 8 E El Here is the edit procedure 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a parameter 2 Use the F1 F4 buttons to move the cursor between the parameter and its status or value 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the parame ter s status or value Prog Program gt PERF gt STYLE This parameter lets you select a different Program other than the one recorded into the Style Element Variations Fills Intros Endings Note This parameter is automatically set to On each time you assign a Program to any of the Style tracks either from the front panel or via MIDI Original Style tracks always use the original Programs If you assign a different Program to a Style track it may be reset to the original one when selecting a different Style Element On You can assign different Programs to each Style track and save them in a Performance or Style Performance This becomes the only track s Program for all Style Elements W Wrap Around gt PERF STYLE The wrap around point is the highest register limit for the backing track The accompaniment patterns will be trans posed according to the detected chord If the chord is too high the Style tracks might play in a register that i
277. ae Switching between sequencers during editing Selecting a Song composing its progressive number Realtime and sequencer tracks Master Volume Sequencer Volume BALANCE Effects in Song Play mode ccc eee eee eens Groove Quantize window eee The Write window eesseeeeeeeen ne Man Page x ccs seek e ete eae ete es slates p Tracks 1 8 pagewseesssceceeeckikerbe e eR CETUR Tracks 9 16 page cece eee eee nee eee teens Song Select page oes ct e Mead tates aed Eee ee The Lyrics page cc soa este to aes ikes eee noes Playing a Jukebox file 00 cece eee eee tits Menu does e bie E PUDE Sa E be Ew herder tea Edit page structure ssec esee vere EREVAN Page 1 Mixer Volume 0 0 eee cece ee eee eee Page 2 Mixer Pan Page 3 Mixer FX send A B 1 ee eee eee eee eee Page 3 Mixer FX send C D 00 eee eee eee Page 4 FX A B Select 0 cece eee eee eee eee Page 4 FX C D Select Page 5 FX A editing Page 6 FX Bediting cece eee eee eee ee eee Page 5 FX C editing Page 6 FX D editing Page 7 Track Mode 0 ee cece eee eee eee eee Page 8 Track Internal External Page 9 Jukebox i eee eee eee eee Page 10 Preferences eee eee e ener bens Saving a list of Songs Backing Sequence operating mode Transport controls cc cece eee eee eee eee eee The Backing Sequence Song and Song Play modes Ho
278. ain Amt 50 450 n Switches between overdrive and high gain distortion Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level Drive 1 100 O Low Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz Sets the degree of distortion ts Fx 006 Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type O Output Level 0 50 e Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the overdrive output level t Fx 006 Drez Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 Sre Off Tempo O Mid1 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz D Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Amt 50 450 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 ts Fx 006 O Low Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 Gain dB 18 418dB O Mid2 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type O Mid1 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 ts Fx 006 Q 0 5 10 0 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 1 Fx 006 Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 Gain dB 18 418dB P LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the gairi of Mid Migh EH Sets the LFO speed O Mid2 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz LFO Waveform Triangl
279. ain by pressing the lt button b section Event to be inserted See the following parameters for infor mation on each element of this section M Measure This is the position of the event note rest or chord to be inserted Meter Meter of the current measure This parameter can t be edited You can set the Meter in the Main page of the Style Record Style Record mode 57 Step Record page mode before actually starting recording see step 6 on page 58 for more information key This is a prompt asking for a note or chord to be played on the keyboard to enter an event on the current step Step value Length of the event to be inserted Use the NOTE VALUE buttons on the lower left area of the control panel to change this value VARIATION COUNT IN ENDING 2 3 BREAK 1 2 O o o o o o HC OOG GGA AG E J J 5 EN Note value Dot Augments the selected note by one half of its value Triplet 3 Makes the selected note a triplet note V Velocity Set this parameter before entering a note or chord This will be the playing strength i e velocity value of the event to be inserted KBD Keyboard You can select this parameter by turning all counter clockwise the dial When this option is selected the playing strength of the played note is recognized and recorded Velocity value The event will be inserted with this velocity value and the actual playing s
280. al Patent Pending 240 Alphabetical Index 25 ALPHABETICAL INDEX A Acc Seq Volume 10 13 AMS Alternate Modulation Source Resonance 112 Arabic Scale 34 Assignable Slider 126 Attack 119 Attack Level Amp EG 119 Attack Time Filter EG 116 Audio Inputs 10 22 Audio Outputs 10 22 B Backing Sequence mode 31 82 87 Backup 8 140 Balance 10 18 27 30 Bank Select 37 BPM MIDI Tempo Sync LFO 121 C Chord Recognition Mode 50 Chord Scanning 17 Cutoff Frequency 113 D Damper 11 47 Polarity 126 Decay Time Filter EG 116 Delay LFO 120 Demo 11 Direct SD 40 Disk 130 141 Backup 140 Format 139 Display 19 21 F1 F4 buttons 16 19 Page buttons 19 Volume Value buttons 16 19 Display Hold 17 Double Sequencer 27 70 Drum mode 78 Drum tracks 45 99 E Edit Environment 21 Effects Song mode 96 97 Song Play mode 71 76 Style Play mode 43 44 Ending 14 Ensemble 47 F F1 F4 buttons 16 19 Fade LFO 120 Fill 14 Filter Cutoff Frequency 113 Filter Type 112 Low Pass amp High Pass 112 Low Pass Resonance 112 Footswitch 126 Polarity 126 Format 139 G General MIDI 35 Global 125 129 Global channel 35 Groove Quantize 71 I Inputs 10 22 Intro 15 J Joystick 47 Jukebox 74 79 K Keyboard Mode 17 Keyboard settings 24 L Level Program Trim 112 LFO Waveform LFO waveform 120 Local Off 37 127 Lock 49 Low Pass amp High Pass 112 Low Pass Resonance 112 Lyrics 73
281. al MIDI compliant instruments use only 2 effects Need more information Go to Song operating mode on page 88 The Reference Guide includes all the information you need 6 THE ARABIC SCALE You can program an Arabic scale in real time by assigning a footswitch or a pad the Quarter Tone function Another way of changing the scale is assigning it to a Perfor mance or Single Touch Setting STS but this is the most convenient way to change the pitch in real time Program a footswitch to be the Quarter tone switch Simply go to the Global environment and reach Page 3 Assignable Pedal Footswitch Assignable Slider There you will find the P S Pedal Switch parameter to which you can assign the Quarter tone function Press WRITE to save the Global status in memory see The Write window on page 125 Q Lower some note pitches Keep the Quarter tone pedal pressed The keyboard will not play at this time Press the notes you want to lower a quarter of tone Release the pedal Q Play with your new scale The notes you pressed are now lowered of a quarter of tone Reset the original scale Press the Quarter tone pedal again All pitches will be reset and the scale selected by the Performance STS or Style Per formance will be recalled Need more information As stated you can assign an alternative scale to a Perfor mance or STS Go to Page 5 Tuning Scale on page 44 and give also a look to the
282. al Off mode see Local on page 127 to avoid that the notes are simulta neously played by the keyboard and by the MIDI events sent by the external sequencer When the Pa50SD is in Local Off the Pa50SD keyboard transmits data to the external sequencer but not to the inter nal sound generation The sequencer will receive the notes played on the Pa50SD keyboard Upper 1 and send them to the selected track of the song The track will transmit the data to the internal sound generation of the Pa50SD Note In order to send data to the Pa50SD sound generation the MIDI Thru function must be activated in the external sequencer normally active the name may be different accord ing to the type of sequencer For more information refer to the instructions manual of the sequencer The programs The Song that is played back by the computer sequencer can select the Pa50SD Programs through the MIDI messages Bank Select MSB and Bank Select LSB bank selection two messages and Program Change program selection For a list of Programs and MIDI values see Programs Program Change order on page 154 A suggestion for those who program songs on computer Even though it is not essential you usually set the bass on channel 2 melody on channel 4 drum kit on channel 10 control for an external voice harmonizer on channel 5 38 MIDI Playing another instrument with the Pa50SD PLAYING ANOTHER INSTRUMENT WITH THE PA50SD You can use
283. ale Heu Stale Select Current Style if you want to edit the current Style or make a new Style starting from an existing one Select New Style if you want to start from scratch with an empty Style After you select your preferred option the Main page of the Style Record mode will appear Cae Cg m Qrssspoes P Je pge OG i L m coos Cmm HewEinssa ITIDR ERR eno corcol ERT RLZ CU Len i amp Metroid Resol PMetenide4 C mal HTIT Sth Use the A VOLUME VALUE buttons and the F1 and F2 function keys to select the E Style Element and CV Chord Variation parameter Note For more information on the Style Elements and Chord Variations and the Style structure in general see The Style s structure on page 52 Use the RL Recording Length parameter to set the length in measures of the pattern to step record Select this parameter using the E VOLUME VALUE buttons and the F4 function key Use the TEMPO VALUE con trols to set the value Use the Meter parameter to set the Style s meter You can edit this parameter only if you selected the New Style option when entering the Record mode Set the tempo Keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the tempo At this point if you want to do a Realtime Recording go on reading Realtime Record procedure
284. all changes to the Style press one of the D VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Abort com mand The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm deletion or EXIT to return to the Write page Style name Use this parameter to change the Style s name Press the right A VOLUME VALUE button to enter editing and modify the name using the UP DOWN buttons to move the cursor and the DIAL to select a character Press INSERT to insert a char acter at the cursor position or DELETE to delete it To Style number Use the B VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a different User Style location in memory Note Only User locations are available Abort Select this command to delete any change to the Style Control function CC Control Change Number Allowed Note On Note Off Pitch Bend Modulation 1 1 Modulation 2 2 Pan 10 Expression 11 CCH2 12 CCiH3 13 Damper 64 Filter Resonance 71 Low Pass Filter Cutoff 74 CC 80 80 CC 81 81 CC 82 82 Not allowed After Touch Volume 7 All other Control Change messages A Note Off will always be inserted at the end of the Chord Variation Note Some Control Change messages cannot be recorded directly using Pa50SD integrated controls FAST DELETE USING THE CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS While in the Main page or the Style Tracks page you can use the control p
285. amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a Scratch Source b Response The Scratch Source parameter enables you to select the modulation source that controls simulation The value of the modulation source corresponds to the playback posi tion The Response parameter enables you to set the speed of the response to the modulation source Scratch Source Start Playback Position End Recorded Sound E Scratch Source i Scratch i modes JSX le i H gt Ribbon i Max Zero i Max JS Y i i JS Y Zero Max etc c Envelope Select c Src d Threshold When Envelope Select is set to D mod the input signal will be recorded only when the modulation source value is 64 or higher When Envelope Select is set to Input the input signal will be recorded only when its level is over the Threshold value The maximum recording time is 1365msec If this is exceeded the recorded data will start being erased from the top e Response This parameter enables you to set the speed of the response to the end of recording Set a smaller value when you are recording a phrase or rhythm pattern and set a higher value if you are recording only one note f Direct Mix With Always On a dry sound is usually output With Always Off dry sounds are not output With Cross Fade a dry sound is usually output and it is muted only when scratching Set Wet Dry to Wet to use this p
286. ample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl 9 A 1 17 BD House 1 Off 17 BD House 1 Off 13 BD Squash Off 13 BD Squash Off 10 A 1 125 99 SD Off 125 99 SD SD Hip 6 11 B 1 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD 12 CO 124 88 S5D Off 124 88 SD 13 C 0 38 SD Off Center Off 38 SD Off Center 14 DO 49 SD CrackerRoom Off 48 SD Processed 15 D 0 6 BD Pillow Off 27 BD Amb Rocker BD Ambi Kick 16 EO 27 BD Amb Rocker Off 12 BD Tight BD Gated 17 FO 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 39 SD Jazz Ring SD Amb Piccolo 18 F 0 87 HH1 Closed2 1 87 HH1 Closed2 HH1 Open 2 19 GO 5 BD Jazz Off 2 BD Dry 3 BD Pillow BD Pillow 20 G 0 72 SideStickDry Off 72 SideStickDry SideStickDry SideStickDry 21 AO 120 SD Orch 7 32 SD Dry2 SD Yowie SD Yowie 22 A 0 119 SD Orch Roll 7 31 SD Dry 1 SD Hip 6 SD Hip 6 23 BO 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit DrumStickHit DrumStickHit 24 C1 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch 25 Ci 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch Roll SD Orch RolI 26 D1 121 FingerSnaps Off 121 FingerSnaps FingerSnaps FingerSnaps 27 D 1 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Zap2 Zap2 28 E1 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Noise White Noise White 29 F1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 DJ Scratch2 DJ Scratch2 30 F 1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 DJ Scratch2 DJ Scratch2 31 G1 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit DrumStickHit 32 G 1 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Zap1 33 Al 249 Click Off 249 Click Click 34 Af 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Triangle Open
287. an for help Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void theuser s authority to operate this equipment NOTICE REGARDING DISPOSAL EU ONLY When this crossed out wheeled bin symbol is displayed on the product owner s manual battery or battery package it signifies that when you wish to dispose of this product manual package or battery you must do so in an approved manner Do not dis card this product manual package or battery along with ordinary household waste Disposing in the correct manner will pre vent harm to human health and potential damage to the environment Since the correct method of disposal will depend on the applicable laws and regulations in your locality please contact your local administrative body for details If the battery contains heavy metals in excess of the regulated amount a chemical symbol is displayed below the crossed out wheeled bin symbol on the battery or battery package DATA HANDLING Data in memory may sometimes be lost due to incorrect user action Be sure to save important data to card KORG will not be responsible for damages caused by data loss LCD DISPLAY Some pages of the manuals show LCD screens along with an explanation of functions and operations All sound names parameter names and values are merely examples and may not always match the actual display you are working on TRADEMARKS Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc MS
288. and 2 Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 E Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz W Frequency Bottom 0 100 Sets the center frequency for Band 3 Sets the lower limit of the wah center frequency t Fx 009 e a 9 i 0 5 10 0 Frequency Top 0 100 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 ts Fx 006 Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency ts Fx 009 Gain dB 18 18dB W Sweep Mode Auto D mod LFO Sets the gain of Band 3 Selects the control from auto wah modulation source and LFO ws Fx mos E Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz f Fx 009 D2 Sets the center frequency for Band 4 Src Off tempo 0 5 10 0 Selects the modulation source for the wah when Sweep Mode D mod Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 ts Fx 006 W LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Gain dB 18 418dB Sets the LFO speed Sets the gain of Band 4 W Resonance 0 100 D Tap1 Time msec 0 680msec jel 221S the resonance amount Sets the Tap1 delay time Low Pass Filter Off On Tap Level 0 100 Switches the wah low pass filter on and off Sets the Tap1 output level ts Fx 045 i Routing CMP WAH WAH CMP D Tap2 Time msec 0 680msec Switches the order of the compressor and wah connection Sets the Tap2 delay time Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet g amp Feedback 400 100 Table Does the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Sets the Tap2 feedback amount Dz i Src Off Tempo D Mt Delay Wet DryDry 2 98 98 2 Wet i D Sets th
289. and direction of the effect that LFO1 will have on the volume of the selected oscilla tor Negative values will invert the LFO waveform 99 99 Intensity value Amplifier LFO1 modulation AMS Alternate Modulation Source Use this parameter to select a source that will control the depth by which LFO1 will modulate the volume of the selected oscillator See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 Intensity As the absolute value of this setting is increased the effect of AMS on LFO1 will increase Negative values will invert the LFO waveform 99 99 Intensity value PAGE 15 AMP LFO2 These parameters let you use LFO1 see Page 17 LFO1 on page 120 and LFO 2 see Page 18 LFO2 on page 121 to control the selected oscillator volume See Page 14 Amp LFO1 for more information on parameter s edit ing Cmpa mossurs tremeposs J 20 cee AE LEO lOscl P Selected Deci Irtergitut 4 ARE Josstick Intercity 4 PAGE 16 AMP EG These parameters let you create time varying changes in the volume of the selected oscillator chord mpo meses tramsposs tg Eri ee AMF EG isci P Selected Qecl Start Level Tun Httack Time to Htback Leuel 55 4 Selecte
290. and second voices in Step Record mode With Pa50SD you are not obliged to insert single notes in a track There are several ways to insert chords and double voices Lets look at some Inserting a chord When the key prompt appears in the display play a chord instead of a single note The event s name will be the first note of the chord you pressed followed by the marking C 2 Leese DIES Inserting a chord with notes with different velocity values You can make the upper or lower note of a chord for exam ple louder than the remaining ones to make the most important note emerge from the chord Here is how to insert a three note chord 1 Edit the Velocity value of the first note Press the first note and keep it pressed Edit the Velocity value of the second note Press the second note and keep it pressed Edit the Velocity value of the third note Or ee 4 Press the third note then release all notes Inserting a second voice You can insert passages where one note is kept pressed and another voice moves freely Ex 1 Step Time Press nd and C s E continue holding C Step Time J On Off Press G Release G and C Ex 2 Step Time J Step Time J MY Egas gulli gelu On On Off Press C Press G continue holding C Release G and C Ex 3 Step Time Step Time Step Time Press F m C NUS F prees G continue holding C continue holding C S
291. andard MIDI File and cannot be played back Select a MID or KAR file Pa50SD can play back Standard MIDI Files in 0 and 1 format 236 Error messages amp Troubleshooting Error messages Standard Midi File format 2 You have tried to read a Format 2 Standard MIDI File Pa50SD can t play this kind of file Select a Standard MIDI Files in 0 and 1 format Program Overwrite Program Enter Exit You are trying to store a Program to a memory location already occupied by a Program Press ENTER to overwrite it or EXIT to abort Card mode Can t Read Card Press Exit The card is probably damaged Try again If the message appears again try with a different card Can t Read File Press Exit The file you are trying to load copy erase or rename is dam aged or has a null size 0 kb thus can t be read This mes sage during a New Dir operation means there are problems on the card Try loading the file from a different card Copy Failed Press Exit An error occurred during Copy Copy operation aborted Copy Invalid Destination Press Exit You tried to copy an ordinary file or folder into a SET folder Corrupted Style Perf Save it again The Style Performance is damaged Save it again by pressing WRITE and selecting the Current Style option Delete all data Continue Enter Exit Formatting will delete all data on the card you are ready to format Be sure you have a copy of all data you wish t
292. anel buttons to delete various elements of the Style DELETE note When a track is selected you can use this key sequence to delete a single note or a single percussive instrument If the Style is playing this shortcut deletes the instrument only while the key is kept pressed leaving all other notes untouched within the track DELETE Track While in the Style Tracks page you can delete a whole track with a single shortcut Keep the DELETE button pressed then press one of the VOLUME VALUE buttons correspond ing to the track to be deleted The Are you sure message appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort MAIN PAGE After pressing the RECORD button and selected the Style to record edit the Main page of the Style Record mode appears Chord Measure counter Campo measure transpose Style Play icon l Gm 72 ay ul L m am ELI GED coco Comme l HewuBozza TIDE eral coro RRT RLIZ Dbesi amp Meteo Ord Resol So Metertded IM mair NTT Sth Style name Track in record edit Style Play icon When this icon appears in the display you are in Style Play or Style Record mode Chord While in the Main and Style Tracks page this area shows the Original Key Chord see Original Key Chord on page 56 for the selected track Style name This is the name of the Style in record edit Measur
293. ange the order of the flanger You can change the order of the effect connection effect connection Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Wet Dry Left o gt o Routing Wet Dry Compressor Y N Parametric 4Band EQ Routing s Compressor f x ChorusFlanger EQ Trim LEQ HEQ N gt H lt CH Comp B Chorus Flanger 2 Normal H Output Level A H Output Mode f comp Lat gn LAF AL aa ae i Aet a i i Output Level jCho Fing Wet Dry Fight H i Wet Di t gt Envelope Control LFO Tri Sine y Right o o i Wet Dry C Sensitivity 1 100 Sets the sensitivity ts Fx 002 4 C Sensitivity 1 100 Sets the sensitivity ts Fx 002 C Attack 1 100 Table Sets the attack level on page 176 os Fx 002 C Attack 1 100 b Table Sets the attack level on page 176 Vs Fx 002 Output Level 0 100 b Sets the compressor output level t Fx 002 Output Level 0 100 Sets the compressor output level s Fx 002 C EQ Trim 0 100 z E Trim A00 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 Sets the parametric EQ input level C Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Table Sets th in of
294. ano 121 7 0 Pno amp Strings Piano 121 0 1 BrightPiano Piano v 121 1 1 BrPianoWide Piano v 121 2 1 Piano Pad Piano 121 3 1 Piano Pad 2 Piano 121 4 1 PnoStrngPad Piano 121 0 2 ElGranPiano Piano v 121 1 2 ElGrandWide Piano v 121 2 2 MI Piano Piano 121 3 2 90 s Piano Piano 121 4 2 2000 sPiano Piano 121 5 2 ChorusPiano Piano 121 6 2 PianoLayers Piano 121 0 3 Honky Tonk Piano v 121 1 3 Honky Wide Piano v 121 0 4 E Piano 1 E Piano v 121 1 4 DetunedEP 1 E Piano v 121 2 4 EP1Veloc sw E Piano v 121 3 4 60 sElPiano E Piano v 121 4 4 Vintage EP E Piano 121 5 4 Pro Dyno EP E Piano 121 6 4 ProStage EP E Piano 121 7 4 Studio EP E Piano 121 8 4 R amp B E Piano E Piano 121 9 4 ThinEIPiano E Piano 121 10 4 DynoTine EP E Piano 121 11 4 ClubElPiano E Piano 121 0 5 E Piano 2 E Piano v 121 1 5 DetunedEP 2 E Piano v 121 2 5 EP2Veloc sw E Piano v 121 3 5 EP Legend E Piano v 121 4 5 EP Phase E Piano v 121 5 5 SynPiano X E Piano 121 6 5 StereoDigEP E Piano 121 7 5 ClassDigiEP E Piano 121 8 5 Hybrid EP E Piano 121 9 5 Class Tines E Piano 121 10 5 PhantomTine E Piano 121 11 5 DWS8000 EP E Piano 121 12 5 Sweeping EP E Piano 121 13 5 WhitePad EP E Piano 121 0 6 Harpsichord Piano v 121 1 6 Harpsi Oct Piano v 121 2 6 Harpsi Wide Piano v ccoo CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2 121 3 6 HarpsiK Off Piano v 121 4 6 Harpsi Korg Piano 121 0 7 Clav Piano v 121
295. appeared and the WRITE CARD IN USE LED has turned off turn the instrument off then on again Note At the end of a Restore Data operation the Some files missing error message may appear This is due to the lack of Performance banks 11 20 on older versions of the operating sys tem of Pa80 whose data you are probably reading However this is not a problem Press EXIT to close the message window Card Edit environment Page 9 Utilities 2 141 PAGE 9 UTILITIES 2 This page includes the Protect functions Chord tempo measure waneposs cap pHga BBB B 28 Cink ssq3 oooo Coetus C ane Carcdilitil 2 H p Global FrotectiOPF Fact Style Frotecti n Global Protect gt GBL When loading a SET file this parameter if On protects the Global from being reprogrammed by the loaded data All Global parameters are therefore left unchanged When loading a single GLB file this parameter is ignored and the Global is overwritten by the loaded data Note This parameter is automatically set to Off when turning the instrument off Factory Style Protect When On this parameter protects the Factory Styles from the 8 BEAT 16 BEAT 1 to the TRADITIONAL bank from being overwritten when loading data from card Fur thermore you can t access these banks when saving data When Off you can load or save Use
296. appears Camps msssurs amsposs Gab Ga be 25 Gap SHG ean Lg Cardi Load f PUL 1 i1 BeatHeu Uis 2 Best Li 3 WelzerMarch I SD LOAD OPEN CLOSE Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the desired item to the first line of the display Press F2 Load to confirm the file selection The inter nal memory file list appears If you are loading a single file or bank of Styles Programs or Performances you are prompted to choose a destination in memory For example when loading a single Style after selecting the Load command a page similar to the following appears in the display Chord Cmpa mgg E tardi Load f bto Uli 1 i amp BestMeu to U Loa ec esasure In the page above the previously selected Style will be loaded into the location U1 1 USERI button Style 01 Card Edit environment Page 2 Save 135 in memory The existing Style in memory will be deleted 3 The content of the target card appears and overwritten 11 Scroll the available locations in memory using the E H m pn us peg Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls ot BB ea coos Camm When the target location is selected i e
297. arameter effectively Other modulation and pitch shift effects 032 Tremolo Stereo Tremolo This effect modulates the volume level of the input signal The effect is stereo and offsetting the LFO of the left and right phases from each other produces a tremolo effect between left and right Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Wet Dry Tremolo Tremolo Righto xg 3 Wet Dry Effects Mod P Shift 195 b LFO Phase degree This parameter determines the difference between the left and right LFO phases A higher value will simulate the auto pan effect in which the sound is panned between left and right 033 EnvelTremol Stereo Envelope Tremolo This effect uses the input signal level to modulate a stereo tremolo You can simulate a tremolo effect that becomes deeper as it fades out while the level gets lower fes Tremolo p Stereo In Stereo Out TIN gt Tremolo F Righto tempo and notes tr Fx 009 jaye BPM MIDI 40 240 LFO Phase Wet Dry Vt BEO Phase LFO Tri Sin Vintage LFO Shape yi LFO Tri Sin Vintage Up Down gt LFO Shape F Envelope f Envelope Shape Envelope Sens LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Vintage Up Down Selects LFO Waveform var a LFO Shape 100 100 Envelope Sens Envelope Sensitivity 0 100 De
298. arameters C 1 G9 Lowest Highest note in the range Tracking Low Keyboard tracking will apply to the range below the specified note number Tracking High Keyboard tracking will apply to the range above the specified note number Ramp This parameter specifies the angle of keyboard tracking 99 499 Angle value Here is how cutoff frequency is affected by keyboard location and the Ramp setting Intensity to A and Intensity to B 50 Cutoff frequency High Ramp 990 High Ramp 620 High Ramp 00 High Ramp 430 Low Ramp 499 Q 1 Low Ramp 43 i High Ramp 99 1 Low Ramp 0 j 1 Low Ramp 62 gt Key Low Key High Key Low Ramp 99 Ramp Low Ramp High If Intensity to A and Intensity to B are set to 50 Ramp Low is set to 62 and Ramp High is set to 62 the angle of the change in cutoff frequency will correspond to the key board location pitch This means that the oscillation that occurs when you increase the Resonance A will correspond to the keyboard location If you set Ramp Low to 43 and Ramp High to 43 the cutoff frequency will not be affected by keyboard location Use this setting when you do not want the cutoff frequency to change for each note Tracking to A B These parameters specify the note numbers at which key board tracking will begin to apply and set the Intensity to A and Intensity to B parameters to specify the depth and direction
299. arameters are available only when the All or Note options are selected PAGE 21 EDIT CUT MEASURES In this page you can cut measures from the Song Campo measurs Wanspose Je gj a58 E pagi amme coco Cosme B EditsCut Meas Stacti d enatis i After selecting the Start and Length parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort After the cut the following measure are moved back to fill the cut measures Start First measure where to begin cutting Length Number of measures to be cut PAGE 22 EDIT INSERT MEASURES In this page you can insert measures in the Song You can also use this function to insert measures with a different meter time signature Camps massurs enpo Je 130 8B C B8 quo GU oooo Comms EditeIns Meas E amp Meter dd Starti d enatis i After selecting the Meter Start and Length parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort Note You cannot append measures after the end of the Song To append measures use the Record or Copy function Note You cannot use this function on an empty Song Meter Meter of the measures to be inserted Start
300. arameters as necessary and save the Glo bal in the memory with the Write function see The Write window on page 125 CONNECTING PA5O0SD TO A MASTER KEYBOARD You can control the Pa50SD with a master keyboard or any other MIDI keyboard You only need to connect the MIDI OUT connector of the master keyboard to the MIDI IN con nector of the Pa50SD The master keyboard will become the integrated keyboard of the Pa50SD if it transmits over the same channel programmed as Global in the Pa50SD E HEEL TEE L1 H ATT MIDI IN i i MIDI OUT If the master keyboard transmits over the Global channel of the Pa50SD the split point and the status of the KEYBOARD MODE section in the control panel will affect the notes received from the master keyboard Connections and settings To connect the master keyboard to the Pa50SD follow this procedure 1 Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the master key board to the MIDIIN connector of the Pa50SD 2 Program the master keyboard to transmit over the Glo bal channel of the Pa50SD see Page 6 MIDI IN Channels on page 127 For information on the master keyboard programming see the user s manual of the master keyboard 3 Press GLOBAL to enter the Global mode then go to Page 4 MIDI Setup see page 126 4 Select the Master Keyboard Setup Note The settings can change when new data is loaded from a card To protect the settings from
301. arts the Lower part on the left and the Upper part on the right The AnalogStr Program is playing on the Lower part while the Grand Piano and the Dark Pad are playing on the Upper part Q Set the split point Not happy with the current split point Keep the SPLIT POINT button held down and play the new split point on the keyboard You can even save this setting in memory see The Write window on page 125 Mute unmute various tracks Press both H VOLUME VALUE buttons You will mute the Lower track hora Cempe measure Qrameposs Ca ripam BO Beg E y Ck aD coco SoftBeat IST51 E Ee Dium Fero GrencPisno T 6 Bassi DarkPadi Fnalosste a Acca 1 5 Stres Press the H VOLUMEIVALUE buttons Press them again to unmute the Lower track Try also with the Upper tracks using the E F and G VOL UME VALUE buttons You will notice the sound becomes more or less fuller sounding depending on the number of tracks muted or unmuted Camp amra Capa EFD CTE M s C a cap eR Ss Got B 3B Cm oooo ete 7 SoftEeat IST51 ES ER Dum Per Basti DarkPad fap Aoc 1 5 Z Braneiano W w Press the E G VOLUMEIVALUE buttons Set the relative volume of the Realtime tracks Use each E H
302. ating the chorus flanger effects This effect combines a mono type four band parametric equalizer and a chorus flanger 061 Par4Eq Phsr Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Parametric 4 Band EQ Phaser Left o zd This effect combines a mono type four band parametric equalizer and a phaser Chorus Flanger Normal i 3 Output Mode Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Feedback Wet Invert Left Cho Fing Wet Dry Wet Dry Righto o Parametric 4BandEQ Phaser 1 i Wet Dry i f LFO Tri Sine AIA Phaser Normal Output Mode a E Trim 0 100 Wet Invert Sets the parametric EQ input level Ronie E Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz ro mr Sine ae Sets the center frequency of Band 1 b Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 ts Fx 006 p E Trim 0 100 Gain dB 18 418dB Sets the parametric EQ input level Sets the gain or Band 1 E Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz E Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 5 00kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 1 Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Q 0 5 10 0 Q 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 ts Fx 006 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 ts Fx 006 Gain dB 18 418dB Gain dB 18 418dB
303. ation depth BPM MIDI 40 240 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet f Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo t Fx 009 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 prez Base Note A d d d d 5 4 mE Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO spee 12 Fx 009 Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal LFO Depth 0 100 ance on page 175 Sets the depth of LFO modulation for the oscillator frequency D E g Src Off Tempo a Type a LFO Phase deg ree Selects the modulation source of the depth of modulation Select the type of phaser LFO and tremolo LFO for the Amt OH 2100 Type parameter How the effect sound moves or rotates Sets the modulation amount of the depth of modulation depends on the type of LFO Selecting LFO Phase 198 Effects Mod P Shift Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Du h Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a Pre LPF This parameter enables you to set the damping amount of the high range sound input
304. ation parameters for the selected oscillator See Page 4 Pitch LFO1 for informa tion on the various parameters chord tempo measure treneposs de 20 Castave Fitch LFZ Decl Selected Deci Irtergitut B Be Jonstick r H8 EI Hits U hanneglHT PAGE 6 PITCH EG Here you can make settings for the pitch EG which creates time variant changes in the pitch of the oscillators The depth of pitch change produced by these EG settings on the oscilla tors is adjusted by the Intensity AMS1 2 Intensity param eter see page 14 111 Campa measure ransposs 13m E B J fg Case Pitch EG FE Sant Leeli 4 Httack Time 33 Aktak Level 4 Denes Time B Pitch envelope Time varying pitch settings when Pitch EG Intensity 412 00 99 approximately 1 octave Attack Level Note on Note off 0 pitch when key is heldO Time sustained p Level Release Level Release Time 99 approximately 1 octave Start Attack Decay Release Level These parameters specify the amount of pitch change The actual amount of pitch change will depend on the Intensity AMS1 2 Intensity parameter see below For example with an Intensity setting of 12 00 a Level setting of 99 would raise the pitch one octave and a Level setting of
305. ative mode 2 To select an existing Jukebox file press one of the A S1 VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Load Song page If you are creating a new Jukebox file press MENU instead select the Jukebox page and jump to step 7 3 Use the F3 Open and F4 Close buttons to browse through the folders inside the card 4 Move the folders and files to select to the first line of the display Use the TEMPO VALUE controls or the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE buttons 5 When the Jukebox file you are looking for is selected press F2 Select to select it 6 Oncethe Jukebox file is selected press MENU and select the Jukebox page Song Play operating mode 81 Saving a list of Songs 7 While you are in the Jukebox page press SHIFT F2 to save the list 8 Adialog box will appear asking you to insert a new card into the card drive Insert the card and press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Note When saved the text file will be named after the selected Jukebox file For example a Jukebox file named Dummy jbx will generate a Dummy txt file A new unnamed Jukebox file will generate a New_name txt file If a file with the same name already exists on the card it will be overwritten without waiting for any confirmation The list will include the progressive number assigned to each Song file names in MS DOS format 8 3 the total number of files in the list For the correct di
306. attern this setting will not be recorded and saved However this will allow you to play back louder any reference track or the track you are recording Track status When in the Style Tracks page each track can be in one of three status Play Visible status icon This status is available only for non selected tracks When in play a track can play back the recorded pattern Mute Hidden status icon When in this status you can play the track on the keyboard but you can t record on it This is useful to do some preliminary test before actually start record ing To set a track in mute first select it then press both corresponding VOLUME VALUE buttons to hide the status icon To set the track in record again press again the corresponding VOLUME VALUE buttons Record Flashing status icon When in this status the track is ready to record Just select a track to set it in record status STEP RECORD PAGE Access this page from the Main page of the Style Record mode by selecting the Stp recording mode R parame ter and pressing START STOP Previous event Event to be inserted Compo fessura fremsposs BER B 28 a HEB SS dooo E UI CUINTiDR EE in TUR it Current position Step value Waiting for a keystroke a section Previously inserted event You may delete this event and set it in edit ag
307. ault effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again Edit the Song in Song mode to permanently change the effects A B Effects assigned to the A and B effect processors Usually A is the reverb while B is the modulating effect chorus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see Effects on page 175 ModTrk Modulating Track Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modu late an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller B gt Asend B gt A Send Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect PAGE 4 FX C D SELECT This page lets you select the C and D effects Usually the C effect is a reverb while the D effect is a modulating effect Effects C and D are usually reserved to Sequencer 2 and the Realtime tracks You can however create Songs using all four effects in Song mode Depending on the status of the S2 FX Mode parameter Sequencer 2 might also use the A B effect pair see page 80 Campa aeasure Wreneposs i in B8H Gun EL em emo FR CAD Select cae prse BicHall MluChrs FedTrkibEl DoCsengsdzr Note When playing back a Song that makes use of all four effects A D you can t edit any effect parameter These param eters appear greyed out in the display Note When you stop the Son
308. ay of correcting timing errors notes played too soon or too later are moved to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid set with this parameter thus playing per fectly in time Hi No quantization applied J 1 32 1 8 Grid resolution in musical values For exam ple when you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 division Hi no i 1 i i momim D P di iQ tion Sel Tempo Select Tempo Select this parameter to use the TEMPO VALUE section to select the Tempo When you select this parameter the VALUE LED turns off Metro Metronome This parameter sets the metronome mode during recording Off The metronome can be heard only during the precount Backing Sequence operating mode 85 Realtime Recording page Onl The metronome plays during recording Recording begins with a 1 bar precount Start recording after bar 1 On2 The metronome plays during recording Recording begins with a 2 bar precount Start recording after bar 1 RT Pads Ch Acc These parameters let you decide the track status during recording RT Pads This Backing Sequence track includes the four Realtime Keyboard tracks and the four Pads They will be Song tracks 1 8 as in the following table RT Pad track Song track Channel Upper 1 Upper 2 Upper 3 Lower Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 OINI DD um A
309. b X Emphatic Point 0 70 Sets the frequency range to be emphasized oS Fx 011 X EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 X Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB 4 Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 D Tap1 Time msec 0 680msec Sets the Tap1 delay time e Tap1 Level 0 100 Sets the Tap1 output level V Fx 045 D Tap2 Time msec 0 680msec Sets the Tap2 delay time Feedback Tap2 100 100 Sets the Tap2 feedback amount D High Damp 96 0 10096 9 Setsthe damping amount in the high range 0s Fx 043 h D Mt Delay Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the multitap delay effect balance Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dzs i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 079 OD HG Amp S Overdrive Hi Gain Amp Simulation This effect combines a mono type overdrive high gain dis tortion and an amp simulation You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out x Wet Dry Routing ary Overdrive Hi Gain YN Amp Simulation 3 Band PEQ Driver Lat NY Amp Simulation Filter H
310. b SideStickAmb SideStickAmb 38 D2 47 SD Yowie Off 31 SD Dry 1 SD BrushTap1 39 D 2 127 188 Claps Off 127 88 Claps SD BrushHit 40 E2 59 SD Hip 6 Off 52 SD Noise SD BrushSwirl 41 F2 139 Real El Tom Off 139 Real El Tom Tom Brush Hi 42 F 2 128 88 HH Close 1 128 88 HH Close HH2 Closed1 HHT Open 2 43 G2 139 Real El Tom Off 139 Real El Tom Tom JazzFloor Tom Brush Hi 44 G 2 128 88 HH Close 1 129 88 HH Open HH2 Foot 45 A2 139 Real El Tom Off 139 Real El Tom Tom Brush Hi 46 A 2 129 88 HH Open 1 129 88 HH Open HH2 FootOpen 47 B2 139 Real El Tom Off 139 Real EL Tom Tom Brush Hi 48 C3 139 Real El Tom Off 139 Real El Tom Tom Brush Hi 49 CH3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 132 88 Crash Crash Cymbal 1 50 D3 139 Real El Tom Off 139 Real El Tom Tom Brush Hi 51 D 3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 111 CYM 99 Ride Ride Edge 1 52 E3 108 CymbalReverse Off 108 CymbalReverse China Cymbal 53 F3 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz Ride Jazz 54 FHS 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 211 Tambourin Acc1 Tambourin Acc2 55 G3 107 Splash Cymbal Off 107 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal 56 G 3 225 Cowbe Off 136 88 Cowbe 57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 58 Ait3 198 Vibraslap Off 198 Vibraslap Vibraslap 59 B3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Ride Edge 1 Ride Edge 2 60 C4 171 BongoHi Open Off 171 BongoHi Open BongoHi Open BongoHi Open 61 Ci4 168 BongoLo Open Off 168 BongoLo Open BongoLo Open BongoLo Open 62 D4 163 CongaHiMtSlap Off 163 CongaHiM
311. but tons to select mute unmute or change the volume of the cor responding tracks TRACKS 9 16 PAGE To see and edit tracks 9 16 press TRACK SELECT once from the Tracks 1 8 page or twice from the main page The TRACK SELECT LED begins flashing Press the TRACK SELECT button again to go back to the main page shard Campa monsure transpose Sm Sa Hiona FS 9 Stringi Wow Er fts w CkStrings Bassi tm Legato Strrgeres fr fS BreeesHorn Stringit Song operating mode 89 Tracks 1 8 page A H Tracks 9 16 Programs Name of the Programs assigned to tracks 9 16 Use these but tons to select mute unmute or change the volume of the cor responding tracks SONG SELECT PAGE This page appears when you press PAGE or either the B Load Song buttons while you are in the main page Press EXIT to go back to the Main page of the Song operating mode without selecting a Song Cmpa measure manapa BBS H28 Toe dH oooo oad ona i DO BALLADS pt C PIHE HOM MID E SD LORD OPEN CLOSE A C File folder Move the file or folder to be selected to the first line of the display To select a file press the F2 Load button To open a folder press the F3 Open button The 1 symbol identifies a folder E F Scroll Up Sc
312. by AMS For example if Pan is set to C064 and AMS is Note Number positive values of this parameter will cause the sound to move toward the right as the note numbers increase beyond the C4 note i e as you play higher and toward the left as the note numbers decrease i e as you play lower Negative values of this parameter will have the opposite effect 99 499 Parameter value Program operating mode Page 12 Amp PAGE 13 AMP MODULATION These settings allow you to apply modulation to amp for each oscillator to modulate the volume Chord Campo measure tremsposs J eu E Pm Pod ec Selected Deci Tracking Lows Ca Tracking Hight PER Fame Lows TB Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alter natively you can select oscillators using the F1 F4 buttons Amplifier keyboard tracking These parameters let you use keyboard tracking to adjust the volume of the selected oscillator Use the Key and Ramp parameters to specify how the volume will be affected by the keyboard location that you play Tracking Low High These settings specify the note number at which keyboard tracking will begin to apply The volume will not change between Tracking Low and Tracking High C 1 G9 Lowest Highest note in the range Tracking Low Keyboard tracking will apply to
313. c These parameters set the delay time for the Enhancer left and right channel Specifying a slightly different delay time for the left and right channel will add a stereo image depth and width to the sound 012 Sub Oscill Stereo Sub Oscillator This effect adds very low frequencies to the input signal It is very useful when simulating a roaring drum sound or emphasizing powerful low range This effect is different from the equalizer in that you can add very low range harmonics You can also adjust the oscillator frequency to match a partic ular note number for use as an octaver Stereo In Stereo Out Left o e N j CEnvelope Shape Envelope Sens Pre LPF Fixed Sine Oscillator ma Pitch ymod __ Fixed Frequency 3 D amp OSC Mode Note NIT Note Interval Fine 99 7 Note Key Follow Envelope Sens Pre LPF og UN IM Envelope Shape Righte Effects Filter Dynamic 183 013 Talking Mod Talking Modulator This effect adds an unusual character like a human voice to the input signal Modulating the tone via dynamic modula tion you can create an interesting effect that sounds as if the guitar or synthesizer is talking Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Wet Dry Talking Modulator A I U E O 7 Right o Wet
314. c2 9 155 Orchestra Hit O 94 A 6 228 gt 228 Sleigh Bell gt Sleigh Bell Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 95 B6 234 SambaWhistle 4 155 Orchestra Hit Off 96 C7 234 SambaWhistle 4 155 Orchestra Hit Off 97 C7 229 RapSleighBell Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 98 D7 234 SambaWhistle 4 155 Orchestra Hit Off 99 D 7 231 Marc Tree 5 155 Orchestra Hit Off 100 E7 234 SambaWhistle 4 155 Orchestra Hit Off 101 F7 312 Bells Open 5 155 Orchestra Hit Off 102 F 7 259 Rainstick Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 103 G7 235 Chinese Gong Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 104 G 7 250 Bird 1 Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 105 A7 250 Bidi Off 155 OrchestraHit Off 106 A 7 251 Bird 2 Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 107 B7 279 Cricket Spectrum Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 108 C8 231 Marc Tree Off 155 Orchestra Hit Off 109 C 8 290 Dist Slide1 Off 110 D8 214 Triangle Mute 3 111 D 8 213 Triangle Open 3 112 E8 233 Flexatone Off 113 F8 312 Bells Open Off 114 F 8 223 Caxixi Soft Off 115 G8 179 CastDouble Off 115 G 8 179 CastDouble Off 117 A8 121 FingerSnaps O 118 A88 121 FingerSnaps Off 119 B8 236 Metal Hit Off 120 C9 236 Metal Hit Off Factory Data 173 Performances PERFORMANCES All Performances are user editable Use the following table as a model for your own Perfomance lists Note You can remotely select Performances on the Pa50SD by sending it Bank Select MSB CC 0 Bank Select LSB CC 32 and
315. cale parameter does not change when selecting a different Performance Style or Sin gle Touch Setting Auto Octave gt GBL This lock lets the instrument automatically transpose the Upper tracks when switching between the FULL UPPER and the SPLIT Keyboard modes On When switching to the FULL UPPER or SPLIT Keyboard Mode the Upper tracks transposi tion is left unchanged Off When switching to the FULL UPPER Key board Mode the Upper tracks Octave Trans pose is automatically set to 0 When switching to the SPLIT Keyboard Mode the Upper tracks Octave Transpose is automat ically set to 1 M Trnsp Master Transpose gt GBL The Master Transpose value is memorized into the Perfor mance or Style Performance To prevent the Master Trans pose to be automatically changed when selecting a Style or Performance this lock should be set to On On Default The lock is engaged When selecting a Style or Performance the Master Transpose will not change Off The lock is turned off When selecting a Style or Performance the Master Transpose value may change according to the data memorized into the Performance or Style Performance PAGE 24 PREFERENCES CONTROLS In this page you can set various general parameters for the Style Tord Cmpa momsura Wenepose Cext 253 1 M cao SEG te EE FPrefiCtl bl U EecRechockei Che Finger Scale PFodesET Tracks Ferona Mode Choe Uelocite Chl Steet
316. ci fied in the Src parameter is 63 or smaller and the effect is on when the value is 64 or higher The LFO is triggered and reset to the L LFO Phase and R LFO Phase settings when the value changes from 63 or smaller to 64 or higher 047 Dynam Delay Stereo Dynamic Delay This stereo delay controls the level of delay according to the input signal level You can use this as a ducking delay that applies delay to the sound only when you play keys at a high velocity or only when the volume level is low fem y o Out Wet Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o t i High Damp Low Damp Delay AHA 1 ga Feedback Right o p h High Damp Low Damp i gt Delay NHAZ Ke 2 3B CEnvelope Y A Attack Release Threshold Spread Control Target Effects 205 ER Delay High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range ts Fx 043 Low Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the low range ts Fx 043 i Spread 100 100 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound ts Fx 043 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dz Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal
317. cifies the time over which the volume will change from when it reaches the break point level until it reaches the sustain level Release Time This parameter specifies the time over which the volume will change after note off until it reaches 0 Amp EG Level modulation Amp 1 EG changes Level AMS Velocity Intensity a positive value Note on Note on Note on lA UA Ad Softly played note when Start Level Strongly played note when Start Level Strongly played note when Start Level and Breack Level Swing are setto Breack Level Swing are setto Breack Level Swing are setio AMS L Alternate Modulation Source This parameter specifies the source that will control the Level parameters of the amp EG See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have For example if AMS is Velocity set ting Start Level Swing Attack Level Swing and Break Point Level Swing to and setting Intensity to a positive value will cause the amp EG volume levels to increase as you play more strongly Setting Intensity to a negative values will cause the amp EG volume levels to decrease as you play more strongly With a setting of 0 the levels will be as specified on Page 16 Amp EG 99 499 Intensity value Program operating mode Page 16 Amp EG Start Level Swing This parameter specifies t
318. ck B gt A or D gt C Send 5 6 FX Parameters A B C D Track Mode E 8 Track Internal External E E 9 Jukebox 3 10 Link Mode E S2 FX Mode Performance FX Mode Separate tracks I A wj N General parameters Apb Separate tracks R List saved to card General parameters A T Song data See table Style and Song parameters 1 Velocity Curve Master Tune Scale Key Speakers On Off m Metronome Volume 2 Master Transpose on Style Realtime tracks Seq 1 2 Midi In Scale Transpose Position E 3 Pedal Switch Function Assignable Slider Function Damper Polarity Footswitch Polarity z 4 MIDI Setup Preset E 5 Local On Off Clock Clock Send E 6 Midi In Channels 1 16 7 Chord 1 Channel E Chord 2 Channel Velocity Input 8 Upper Octave Lower Octave Octave Transp on the Midi In E Mute In 9 Midi In Filters 1 8 E 10 Midi Out Channels 1 16 11 Midi Out Filters 1 8 General parameters ALII Set to On at startup General parameters 4 lt lt lt lt I d I l Set to On at startup B Set to Int at startup General parameters Separate tracks
319. contact your dealer or the nearest KORG Service Cen ter Page No sound Is a jack connected to the HEADPHONES connector This would disable the internal 22 speakers Check the connections of your amp or mixer 22 Make sure that all the components of the amplifying system are turned on Are the MASTER VOLUME or ASSIGN SLIDER sliders of the Pa50SD set to a position other 13 than 0 Is the Local parameter set to Off Turn it On 127 Is the Speaker parameter set to Off Turn it On 125 Is the Attack parameter value too high Set it to a lower value to let the sound start 43 faster Is the Volume parameter too low Set it to a higher value 45 Lowest note are not played When the SPLIT button is lit up the keyboard will be divided into the Lower part low 24 notes below the split point and the Upper part high notes above the split point Is the Lower track muted Unmute it Wrong sounds Do the USER banks contain modified data Load the appropriate data for the Song or the 133 Style you wish to playback Has one of the USER Drum Kits been modified Load the appropriate Drum Kits 133 Have the Styles or Performances been modified Load the appropriate data Styles or Per 133 formances Sound does not stop Make sure that the damper switch polarity parameter is set correctly 126 The selected Style or Song can Make sure that the Clock parameter is set to Int If you are using the MIDI Clock of 12
320. cording the whole Style When finished recording the new Style press WRITE or RECORD to save it in memory The Write page will appear Ces men CEsmapuss D ys no gag GAD coos Caste Write ta Stale name Hewsza Tot U 61 Bossa Peiori J To change the Style s name press the right A VOL UME VALUE button to enter editing and modify the name using the UP DOWN buttons to move the cursor and the DIAL to select a character Press INSERT to insert a character at the cursor position or DELETE to delete it To select a different location in memory press one of the B VOLUME VALUE buttons then select a location with these buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Press ENTER to confirm or one of the D Abort VOL UME VALUE buttons to abort the save The Are you sure message will appear in the display Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort After pressing ENTER you will exit from the Record mode If you press EXIT while in the Write page you will go back to the previous Style Record page without any change Step Record procedure 1 When still in the Main page of the Style Record mode press one of the E VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the R parameter Use these buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select the Stp recording mode Ra She Press TRK SELECT to switch to the Style Tracks page Here y
321. ct mute unmute or change the volume of the cor responding tracks SONG SELECT PAGE This page appears when you press either the A S1 or B S2 button while you are in the main page You can also access the Song Select page by pressing PAGE Press EXIT or PAGE to go back to the main page of the Song Play operating mode without selecting a Song Campo measure sposa J Ee 888 a IEC oooo Casta mf m OY Selection N E pt O BHLPDS aL FSO MID E SO SELECT OPEN CLOSE While in this page select a Song for the selected Sequencer or a Jukebox file for Sequencer 1 Note There is a separate working directory for each onboard sequencer A C File folder Move the MID KAR or JBX file or folder to be selected to the first line of the display To select a file press the F2 Select button To open a folder press the F3 Open but ton The CJ symbol identifies a folder E F Scroll Up Scroll the list up Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of these buttons to jump to the previous alphabetical section G H Scroll Down Scroll the list down Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of these buttons to jump to the next alphabetical section F1 SD Press this button after replacing a card in the card drive The new card will be read and the file list shown on the display 74 Song Play operating mo
322. d Slider gt GBL Function assigned to the ASSIGNABLE SLIDER on the front panel Damper Pol Damper Polarity gt GBL Polarity of the Damper pedal Pedal Sw Pol Pedal Footswitch Polarity gt GBL Polarity of the Assignable pedal or footswitch PAGE 4 MIDI SETUP MIDI channels can be automatically configured by selecting a MIDI Setup Each of them assigns the best values to various MIDI parameters to allow an easier connection with a par ticular MIDI controller chord tempo measure iranspose Bgpem BBB BY ag a cooo Cms ICA Gblibidi etur Ea Default Becondioni Haster kbd o Becorndicniz Sesuercer PFecondiconi tespenpeernz Eka Sey Note After selecting a MIDI Setup you can apply any changes to each channel s settings To store the changes in memory press WRITE and save the Global in memory See MIDI on page 35 for more information on using the MIDI Setups Default This a default setting It is suitable both for programming on an external sequencer and for playing Pa50SD with a master keyboard Master Kbd Select this setting when you are connecting a mute master keyboard Sequencer 1 This setting is for playing a Song Sequencer 1 with an external instrument sounds or for lis tening to a Song performed by an external sequencer using Pa50SD as a sound generator Each track S1 Tr1 16 corresponds to a MIDI chann
323. d Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alter natively you can select oscillators using the F1 F4 buttons Amp envelope Amplifier EG Attack Level Note off Note on Break Point Volume Y SustainO Level StartO Level Time Release Time Attack DecayOSlopeO Time Time Time Start Attack Break Sustain Release Level These parameters are the level of the envelope segment 0 99 Level value Start Level This parameter specifies the volume level at note on If you want the note to begin at a loud level set this to a high value Attack Level This parameter specifies the volume level that will be reached after the attack time has elapsed Break Level This parameter specifies the volume level that will be reached after the decay time has elapsed Sustain Level This parameter specifies the volume level that will be main tained from after the slope time has elapsed until note off Occurs Attack Decay Slope Release Time These parameters specify the time over which the volume change will occur 0 99 Time value Attack Time This parameter specifies the time over which the volume will change after note on until it reaches the attack level If the start level is 0 this will be the rise time of the sound Decay Time This parameter specifies the time over which the volume will change from when it reaches the attack level until it reaches the break point level Slope Time This parameter spe
324. d Saw 121 0 81 Soundtrack 121 0 97 Calliope 121 0 82 Sine Pad 121 1 89 Chiff 121 0 83 Itopia Pad 121 1 91 Charang 121 0 84 Big Panner 121 4 63 Fifths Lead 121 0 86 Dance ReMix 121 10 91 Bass amp Lead 121 0 87 Rave 121 6 97 New Age Pad 121 0 88 ElastickPad 121 7 97 Polysynth 121 0 90 Moving Bell 121 5 98 BowedGlass 121 0 92 Bank Synth 2 MetallicPad 121 0 93 Old Portam 121 3 80 Crystal 121 0 98 Power Saw 121 5 81 Atmosphere 121 0 99 Octo Lead 121 6 81 Brightness 121 0 100 ElectroLead 121 2 87 LeadSquare2 121 1 80 Rich Lead 121 3 87 Lead sine 121 2 ae ThinAnaLead 121 4 87 Lead Saia Tel f 2l Dance Lead 121 7 30 LeadSawPuls 121 2 81 Wave Lead 121 5 80 LeadDblSaw 121 3 81 Sine Wave 121 6 80 Seq Analog 121 4 81 Synchro Cit 121 2 84 Wire Lead 121 1 si Wild Arp 121 6 55 SEES 121 1 87 EspressLead 121 5 87 Bank Bass HipHop Lead 121 6 87 Acous Bass 121 0 32 Analog Lead 121 7 80 Finger Bass 121 0 33 Seq Lead 121 7 81 Picked Bass 121 0 34 Old amp Analog 121 8 80 Fretl Bass 121 0 35 PhatSawLead 121 8 81 Slap Bass 121 0 36 Glide Lead 121 9 81 Slap Bass 121 0 37 Gliding Sq 121 9 80 SynthBass 121 0 38 Flip Blip 121 7 55 SynthBass 121 0 39 Power Synth 121 3 89 AcBass Buzz 121 1 32 Sine Switch 121 10 80 Fing ElBass 121 2 33 Reso Sweep 121 1 90 Pick ElBass 121 1 34 Syn Sweeper 121 3 90 Fret Bass2 121 1 35 Cosmic 121 1 93 SuperSwBass 121 1 36 MotionRaver 121 1 101 SuperSwBas2 121 2 36 Sync Kron 121 3 84 SynBassWarm 121 1 38 Fire Wave 121 10 8
325. de The Lyrics page will be updated F2 Select Selects the item on the first line in the display Song or Juke box file If a Song is already playing it stops and the new Song starts playing You are returned to the Main page F3 Open Opens the selected folder item whose name begins with c CJ my F4 Close Closes the current folder returning to the parent upper folder THE LYRICS PAGE This page shows the lyrics and chord abbreviations included in the midifile if any To access this page select the Lyrics command or press PAGE twice from the main page of the Song Play mode see Main page on page 72 Chords Campa messurs framspces B Ge ne mS LS exe Sls Michelle ERE Gl Michelle ma belle 1 Exit from this display and go back to the main page of the Song Play mode by pressing the EXIT button While the Song is playing the text flows in the display and the chord abbreviations if any will appear on the chords area of the display The lyrics at the current position are underlined Michelle ma belle A 1 Press this button pair to show Lyrics and Chords of Sequencer 1 B 2 Press this button pair to show Lyrics and Chords of Sequencer 2 PLAYING A JUKEBOX FILE With Sequencer 1 you can select a Jukebox file a file with the JBX extension instead of a single So
326. de This setting harmonizes the notes of the Bass track or the Accl 5 tracks to the new chord when the chord is changed Off Each time you play a new chord the current notes will be stopped The track will remain silent until a new note will be encountered in the pattern Rt Retrigger The sound will be stopped and new notes matching the recognized chord will be played back Rp Repitch New notes matching the recognized chord will be played back by repitching notes already playing There will be no break in the sound This is very useful on Guitar and Bass tracks T Tension Tension adds notes a 9th 11th and or 13th that have actu ally been played to the accompaniment even if they haven t been written in the Style pattern This parameter specifies Style Record mode 69 Page 13 Style Controls Mode Tension whether or not the Tension included in the recognized chord will be added to the Acc1 5 tracks On The Tension will be added Off No Tension will be added 70 Song Play operating mode The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format 11 SONG PLAY OPERATING MODE The Song Play operating mode is where you can listen to Songs played directly from the card and play along with the Song on the four Realtime Keyboard tracks Upper 1 3 Lower Since the Pa50SD is equipped with two onboard sequencers you can play two Songs at the same time This is very useful to mix between two Songs during a live perf
327. ding by pressing the left PLAY STOP button or the START STOP button After a count in see Metro Metronome on page85 you can start recording Play a solo intro or start the auto accompaniment with the START STOP button To start with the Style playing right from bar 1 keep the chord pressed during the pre count and press START STOP before the end of the precount Otherwise the Style will start playing from the next bar following the one where you pressed START STOP Since you can use any Style control you could start with the usual combinations INTRO ENDING FILL see 2 Playing a Style on page 29 for more information Note While in Backing Sequence mode you can t record the SYNCHRO FADE IN OUT TAP TEMPO RESET ACCOMPANIMENT VOLUME controls 8 Play your music You can even stop the Style by pressing START STOP If you stop the Style while recording start it again with the START STOP button 9 When finished recording your performance press the left PLAY STOP button The RECORD LED will turn off and you will go back to the Playback page see How to playback a Song before The recorded Song will be automatically converted to the Standard MIDI File format 10 At this point you can edit the Song in Song mode see Song operating mode on page 88 or save it to a card see Save Song page on page 84 Warning The recorded Song is in RAM Random Access Memory and will be deleted when turning the
328. display Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again Edit the Song in Song mode to permanently change the effects Parameters See Effects on page 175 for a list of available parameters for each effect type PAGE 6 FX B EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the B effect usually modulating effect for Sequencer 1 For more details see Page 5 FX A editing above PAGE 5 FX C EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the C effect You can access this page only when the S2 FX Mode param eter is set to C D see S2 FX Mode on page 80 For more details see Page 5 FX A editing above Note C and D effects are used also by the Realtime Keyboard tracks 78 Song Play operating mode Page 6 FX D editing PAGE 6 FX D EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the D effect You can access this page only when the S2 FX Mode param eter is set to C D see S2 FX Mode on page 80 For more details see Page 5 FX A editing above Note C and D effects are used also by the Realtime Keyboard tracks PAGE 7 TRACK MODE This page lets you set the polyphony mode for each Song track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16
329. dit on page 98 The track plays both the internal sounds and an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT 100 Song operating mode Page 17 Edit Quantize PAGE 17 EDIT QUANTIZE The quantize function corrects any rhythm error after recording Celiord Campa mosua Wrameposs em Jn 888 C B amo IEU oooo ee Egit Guant ize Trkil Resol 500l G1 BG BRL BL 132 BottomiC 1 Toe Go After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected 1 16 Selected track Resol Resolution This parameter sets the quantization after recording For example when you select 1 8a all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 division No quanti we NE IDE ED TA AN DE I n d 3 D D J 32 1 4 Grid resolution in musical values An a after the value means no swing A b f after the value means swing quantization S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to quantize If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 B
330. dom ak Off 73 C 5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short 3 360 Tef2 Off 321 Rik2 Off 74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long 3 320 Rik1 Off 320 Rik1 Off 75 D 5 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Off 322 Rik3 Off 322 Rik3 Off 76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 360 Tef2 Off 322 Rik3 Off 77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Off 359 Tef1 Off 319 Rek Jingle Off 78 F 5 215 Cuica Hi 4 215 Cuica Hi 4 360 Tef2 Off 360 Tef2 Off 79 G5 216 Cuica Lo 4 216 Cuica Lo 4 318 Rek dom ak Off 318 Rek dom ak Off 80 G 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 359 Tef 1 Off 359 TeT 1 Off 81 A5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 321 Rik2 Off 321 Rik2 Off 82 A 5 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 361 Tef3 Off 322 Rik3 Off 83 B5 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 360 Tef2 Off 319 Rek Jingle Off 84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 312 Bells Open 2 312 Bells Open 2 85 CH6 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 323 Sagat HalfOpen 2 323 Sagat HalfOpen 2 86 D6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 324 Sagat Close 2 324 Sagat Close 2 87 D 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 351 Davul Off 351 Davul Off 88 E6 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 357 Ramazan DVL2 3 175 Djembe Open 3 continues on the next page 168 Factory Data Drum Kit instruments continued 120 0 41 Brush V S 2 120 0 48 OrchestraK 120 0 116 Arabian Kit 1 120 0 117
331. e Percus1V Classic percussion set volume Percus2V Ethnic percussion set volume SFX V Special effects volume Reset You can reset the parameters value by keeping the SHIFT button pressed while pressing one of the selected track VOL UME VALUE buttons After you press the above button com bination the Reset window appears Press ENTER YES to reset the currently selected track Keep SHIFT pressed and press ENTER YES to reset all tracks Press EXIT NO to abort and keep all parameters unchanged Mono Right A Mono track but with priority assigned to the rightmost highest note PAGE 15 TRACK INTERNAL EXTERNAL This page lets you set the Internal or External status for each track It is very useful to let a Style track drive an external expander or play a digital piano with one of Pa50SD s Real time tracks Campo meseurs Cranspose J BE aee 558 BY 28 i coog Track Irbe Ext E PAGE 14 TRACK MODE This page lets you set the polyphony mode for each track Comps msssurs AD Go BHBems ES BL 7 Tracki Mode HE Fone Right 6 Poly Pols Fols Pols ohare Camp Gesu Ganeposs BY 2B Ces cap Je BE BH Track t Mode Drum Drum Fols
332. e All folder A list of User data types appear each type is a separate folder Camps qeaeure Gui 599 Cet puy B E Card Save ER f pc GLOBAL Lt C PERFORM C PROGRAM ES b SAVE OEH OIE 3 Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the data type you are looking for to the first line of the display 4 7 8 Once the data type is selected press F3 Open to open the folder and gain access to the separate banks Cempe measure are ar gugem B8 82 8 xdi ae Bu Card Daue Ea l p MERGL STY pt LEEREG ST LEERE STY IE Do SHE OPEN UME Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the bank containing the file to save to the first line of the display Once you have selected the bank press F3 Open to gain access to the single files tempo measure can BEB B 28 Cu GHG e oooo Coms etre iy Cardi Save k pHi 1 orowe Ui z groet UL 3 SESGCOOSseA 4 SD WE OEH OE Once you have selected the file that you want to save press F2 Save to confirm the selection The content of the target card appears in the display Cia Ca cae Ee es Cats pe
333. e Sine Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Selects LFO Waveform Q 0 5 10 0 e P Manual 0 100 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 ts Fx 006 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Gain dB 18 418dB Depth 0 100 Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 9 Sets the depth of LFO modulation D Tap1 Time msec 0 680msec Resonance 100 100 Sets the Tap delay time Sets the resonance amount s Fx 023 Tap1 Level 0 100 P Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Seis the Tapi output level BEES Sets the phaser effect balance ts Fx 010 023 D Tap2 Time msec 0 680msec Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Sets the Tap delay time Selects the phaser output mode s Fx 067 Feedback 100 100 Routing OD PHS PHS OD Sets the Tap2 feedback amount i Switches the order of the overdrive and phaser connection D Mt Delay Wet Dry Dry 2 98 98 2 Wet tS Fx 067 Sets the multitap delay effect balance High Damp 96 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range ts Fx 043 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Da 222 Effects Mono Mono Chain 083 Wah AmpSim 084 Decim Amp S Wah Auto Wah Amp Simulation Decimator Am
334. e inserted If you don t want to insert a note at this position insert a rest instead as shown in step 7 To jump to the next measure filling the remaining beats with rests press the gt gt button To change the step value use the NOTE VALUE buttons on the lower left area of the control panel VARIATION 1 2 3 4 o o o o o o o o o LL C JC CJC JE J CLJC I e J J 9 4d m FILL COUNT IN ENDING 1 2 BREAK 1 2 Insert a note rest or chord at the current position To insert a single note just play it on the keyboard The inserted note length will match the step length You may change the velocity and relative duration of the note by editing the V Velocity and D Duration parameters See V Velocity and D Duration on page 57 To insert a rest just press the REST button Its length will match the step value To tie the note to be inserted to the previous one press the TIE button A note will be inserted tied to the previ ous one with exactly the same name You don t need to play it on the keyboard again To insert a chord or a second voice see Chords and second voices in Step Record mode below After inserting a new event you may go back by pressing the button This will delete the previously inserted event and set the step in edit again When the end of the pattern is reached the End Loop End of Loop event is shown in the first two lines of
335. e the type of walls in the room That is a larger ER Level simulates a hard wall and a larger Reverb Level simu lates a soft wall Reverb Room Type Level Dry ER Early Reflections Reverb Louder Pre Delay Thru Pre Delay Reverb Time 210 Effects Mono Mono Chain 059 Par4Eq Wah Parametric 4 Band EQ Wah Auto Wah Effects that combine two mono effects connected in series This effect combines a mono type four band parametric equalizer and a wah You can change the order of the connec 058 Par4Eq Exc tion Parametric 4 Band EQ Exciter Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Wet Dry This effect combines a mono type four band parametric Routing Parametric 4Band EQ w Wah Auto Wah equalizer and an exciter E ANA Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Wet Dry Parametric 4Band Wet Dry gt Exciter Right Wet Dry E Trim 0 100 Sets the parametric EQ input level E Trim 0 100 E Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz 8 Sets the parametric EQ input level Sets the center frequency of Band 1 E Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz b IQ 0 5 10 0
336. e Off 217 Shaker1 Off 43 G2 178 CastSingle Off 186 Baya Mute1 Off 44 G 2 179 CastDouble Off 182 MaracasPush Off 45 A2 180 Guiro Long 2 184 Baya Open Off 46 A 2 181 Guiro Short 2 219 Cabasa Up Off 47 B2 180 Guiro Long 2 190 Tabla Open O 48 C3 198 Vibraslap Off 192 Tabla Mute1 Off 49 cua 199 Claves Off 198 Vibraslap Off 50 D3 135 88 Clave Off 189 Tabla Na Off 51 D 3 2162216 Cuica LoCuica Lo 3 214 Triangle Mute 3 52 E3 2152215 Cuica Hi gt Cuica Hi Off 116 BD Orch Off 53 F3 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 213 Triangle Open 3 54 F3 200 Woodblock1 Off 181 Guiro Short Off 55 G3 204 TimbaleLo Rim Off 311 Jingle Bell Off 56 G 3 200 Woodblock1 Off 180 Guiro Long Off 57 A3 203 TimbaleLo Mute Off 232 Marc Tree LP Off 58 A83 200 Woodblock1 Off 231 Marc Tree Off 59 B3 205 TimbaleHi Edge 9 182 MaracasPus O 60 C4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 122 Hand Claps Off 61 CH4 226 ChachaBell Off 127 88 Claps Off 62 D4 206 TimbaleHi Rim1 Off 144 DJ Scratch1 Off 63 D 4 227 Mambo Bell Off 145 DJ Scratch2 Off 64 E4 2082208 Timbale Paila gt Timbale Paila Off 150 DJ HitRub Off 65 F4 168 BongoLo Open Off 234 SambaWhistle Off 66 F 4 225 Cowbell Off 234 SambaWhistle Off 67 G4 169 BongoLo Slap Off 165 CongaHi Slap2 Off 68 G 225 Cowbell Off 166 CongaHeel Off 69 A4 1771 BongoHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open Off 70 A 4 174 BongoHi Stk2 Off 158 CongaLo Open Off 71 B4 1722172 BongoHi Slap BongoHi Slap 9 215 Culca Hi O 72 C5 158 gt
337. e Transpose Position allows you to decide the rela tion between the Scale and the Master Transpose Post KB When this option is selected notes will be transposed immediately after they leave the keyboard The Scale will be applied to the transposed notes For example if you altered an E and then set the Master Transpose to 1 the E key will play F and the altered key will be EP that will play an altered E ToneO When this option is selected all notes are transposed immediately before they enter the Pre OSC internal tone generator Therefore the Scale will be applied before transposition For exam ple if you altered an E and then set the Master Transpose to 1 the altered key will still be E that will play an altered F ToneO Transpose generator PAGE 3 ASSIGNABLE PEDAL FOOTSWITCH ASSIGNABLE SLIDER This page lets you program the Assignable Pedal Footswitch and the Assignable Slider Cehord Campa messurs Srmmsposs cn gugam BER BUE Bbl Peuz1d Pes Eldib uolume Danger Fol Cicero Fedal mu Pol i tkioredo See page 225 for a list of the assignable functions The first functions are switch type functions while the remaining starting from Master Volume are continuous like func tions P S Pedal Switch gt GBL Continuous pedal or footswitch connected to the ASSIGN ABLE PDL SW connector Si
338. e bottom and top of the key board range for the corresponding track PAGE 12 STYLE ELEMENT CONTROLS CHORD VARIATION TABLE This is the page where you can assign a Chord Variation to each recognized chord When a chord is recognized the assigned Chord Variation will be automatically selected by the arranger to play the accompaniment Ctsmpo meseurs rensposa ge gag E oooo SECtl ChTable Ul EE Hace Cu Mince Ou Seuerntht nu Faith Cue 4 When in this page press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element VARIATION ENDING2 E F Scroll Up G H Scroll Down Use these buttons to scroll the available parameters in the dis play Chords Chord Variation Use these parameters to assign a Chord Variation to each of the enlisted chords PAGE 13 STYLE CONTROLS MODE TENSION In this page you can set the Retrigger mode for the Style tracks and activate deactivate the Tension for the Accompa niment tracks Campo messurs trsmeposs J SHG Ss 888 CI eD oooo Comma EEL Moder Tens MOF TOn 3 NR Se MRL TiDh Z 6 HFF HRe TiO ped HRE Tin Mike TiOPF When in this page press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element VARIATIONI ENDING2 M Mo
339. e counter This counter shows the measure in record The measure range is specified by the RecLen parameter see RL Recording Length on page 55 Track in record edit Most editing in this edit mode are executed on a single track While in the main page the currently selected track is shown on the upper right area of the display The abbreviations are DR Drums PC Percussion BS Bass Al A5 Accom paniment 1 5 To select the track to edit press TRACK SELECT to jump to the Style Tacks page see Style Tracks page on page 56 and use the VOLUME VALUE buttons to select it E Style Element Use the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the line and the F1 button to select this parameter This parameter lets you select the Style Element to put in edit Each Style Element corresponds to one of the buttons on the control panel carrying the same name Note When this parameter and the assigned value is in small letters e v1 the Style Element is empty when it is in capitals E V1 it is already recorded V1 V4 Variation 1 to Variation 4 I1 I2 Intro 1 to Intro 2 F1 F2 Fill 1 to Fill 2 E1 E2 Ending 1 to Ending 2 CV Chord Variation Use the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the line and the F2 button to select this parameter This parameter lets you select the Chord Variation to edit after selecting the Style Element this Chord Variation pertains to Style Record mode 55 Main page Note
340. e dopa epus 95 Page 3 Mixer FX Block 2 cece eee eee eee 96 Page 4 Mixer FX Send A B or C D Lsses 96 Page 5 Tuning Detune 2 err e ereber 96 Page6 Tuning Scale eee eee eee eee vir 97 Page 7 Tuning PitchBend Scale 0000 97 Page 8 FX A B Select 0 eee eee ee eee eens 97 Page 9 FX C D Select 0 2 ccc eee eee eee eens 97 Page 10 FX A editing 0 0 eee cece eee eee 98 Page 11 FX Bediting 0 cece eee eee ee 98 Page 12 EX C editing isse eter even 98 Page 13 FX Dediting cece eee eee 98 Page 14 Track Easy edit 0 0 eee eee eee eee ee 98 Page 15 Track Mode 0 cece eect eens 99 Page 16 Track Internal External 99 Page 17 Edit Quantize 0 2 6 eee eee eee eee 100 Page 18 Edit Transpose eee e eee eee ees 100 Page 19 Edit Velocity 0 eee eee eee eee 100 Page 20 Edit Delete 00 eee eee eee eee 101 Page 21 Edit Cut Measures 000 e eee eens 101 Page 22 Edit Insert Measures 22 eee eee 101 Page 23 Edit Copy sci ceieeianed ebiceiaeeenean ead 102 Page 24 Event Edit 0 cece cece eee eens 102 Page 25 Event Filter lecce secet n 103 Event Edit procedure eee e eee eee ees 104 Program operating mode 105 M in page ie s RR LES octave ene 105 Sound Programs and Drum Programs
341. e effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 ance on page 175 f Envelope Select f Src g Input Reverb Mix g Threshold The Envelope Select parameter enables you to select whether turning the gate on and off is triggered by the input signal level or controlled directly by the modulation source You can select from Off to Gate2 Dmpr for the Src parameter to specify the modulation source When Envelope Select is set to Input the gate is con trolled by the level of signals that are the combination of the dry sound and the reverb sound When the signal level exceeds the threshold the gate opens and the reverb sound is output Normally set Input Reverb Mix to Dry the gate is con trolled only by the dry sound If you wish to extend the gate time set the Input Reverb Mix value higher and adjust the Threshold value 19 ASSIGNABLE PARAMETERS LIST OF FUNCTIONS ASSIGNABLE TO THE FOOTSWITCH The following functions can be assigned to a footswitch Assignable parameters List of functions assignable to the Footswitch Function Meaning Function Meaning Style Up Selects the next Style Style Down Selects the previous Style Perform Up Selects the next Performance Perform Down Selects the previous Performance Off
342. e linked to control the Limiter using the mixed signal If L Only or R Only is selected the left and right channels are linked and the Limiter is controlled via only the left or right channel With L R individually the left and right channels control the Limiter individually b Ratio c Threshold dB e Gain Adjust dB This parameter sets the signal compression Ratio Com pression is applied only when the signal level exceeds the Threshold value Adjust the output level using the Gain Adjust parame ter since compression causes the entire level to be reduced Limiter Threshold Ratio Ratioz1 0 1 Output Level Ratioz2 0 1 Ratioz4 0 1 Ration Inf 1 Threshold Louder Louder Input Level Threshold Ratio Inf 1 gt Time d Attack d Release These parameters set the attack time and release time A higher attack time will cause the compression to be applied more slowly Limiter Attack Release Threshold 3 Ratio Inf 1 Attack 100 Release 100 Release attack f Side PEQ Insert g Side PEQ Cutoff Hz g Q g Gain dB These parameters are used to set the EQ appli
343. e multitap delay effect balance Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 5 Amt 100 100 High Damp 0 100 a Sets the damping amount in the high range ws Fx 043 deu mee Modulation amountor ths erect bat Wet DryDry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 prez SrcOff Tempo i Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance on page 175 Effects 213 Mono Mono Chain 064 Cmp AmpSim 065 Cmp OD HiG Compressor Amp Simulation Compressor Overdrive Hi Gain This effect combines a mono type compressor and an amp This effect combines a mono type compressor and an over simulation You can change the order of the effect connec drive high gain distortion You can change the order of the tion effect connection Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Left o Routi Wet Dry Routi Wet Dry Compressor Amp Simulation Compressor YX Overdrive Hi Gain EQ Trim LEQ HEQ i i 3 Band PEQ i gt H lt H comp h Amp Simulation Filter
344. e recalled When fin ished recording you will save the new Style onto a User Style location After recording the Style please save it see Exit and Save Abort Style below Then edit the Style Perfor mance to adjust the track s settings Tempo Volume Pan FX Send see page 43 and following in the Style Play operating mode chapter and save it by pressing the WRITE button Note After a record or edit operation the Style is rewritten in memory When you press START STOP there is a delay before you can actually listen to the Style This delay is higher with a Style containing more MIDI events Note While in Record mode all footswitches are disabled LISTENING TO THE STYLE WHILE IN RECORD EDIT MODE While you are in Record Edit mode you can listen to the selected Chord Variation or to the whole Style depending on the page you are in To select a Chord Variation go to the Main page of the Record Edit mode see E Style Element and CV Chord Variation on page 55 When you are in the Quantize Transpose Velocity or Delete pages you can listen to the selected Chord Vari ation Press START STOP to check how it works Press START STOP again to stop the playback When you are in the Delete All Copy Style Element Controls or Style Control pages you can listen to the whole Style Press START STOP and play some chords to do your tests Select any Style Element using the control panel buttons VARIATION 1
345. e sampling frequency Resolution 4 24 Sets the data bit length os Fx 014 D Output Level 0 100 Sets the decimator output level os Fx 014 d C Sensitivity 1 100 Sets the sensitivity t Fx 002 C Attack 1 100 Table Sets the attack level on page 176 t Fx 002 e Output Level 0 100 Sets the compressor output level t Fx 002 f Routing DECI gt CMP CMP DECI Switches the order of the decimator and compressor connection Effects 2923 Mono Mono Chain Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet 087 Ch FI MTDly bon the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Ch orus Fl anger Multitap Del ay p Src Off Tempo This effect combines a mono type chorus flanger and a mul 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on 175 i i u urce of the effect balance on page titap delay Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Wei Mons in cano Dat Ga Stores inc Gra DUE ance on page 175 ien x Wet Dry ChorusiFlanger MultitapDelay 086 AmpS Tremol l Amp Simulation Tremolo LE DACH e ehorsmianger j NID R Trim Wet Dry High Damp This effect combines a mono type amp
346. e solo mode keep the SHIFT button pressed again and press both VOLUME VALUE buttons corresponding to the soloed track SELECTING A PERFORMANCE A Performance is a set of Programs and settings for the Key board and Style tracks that makes selecting complex combi nations live fast and easy When the STYLE CHANGE LED is on a Performance can also select a different Style It is always advisable to use Performances rather than single Programs when playing even a solo sound since a Perfor mance lets you select the right effects transposition plus many other parameters together with the Programs Data type Parameters Realtime Tracks Upper 1 Upper 2 Upper 3 Lower Master Transpose Pro gram Volume Pan Octave Scale Detune Pitch Bend Poly Mono Drum Int Ext Damper Dynamic Range Joystick C amp D Effect Send level Type Parameters Program parameters Pads Style Tracks Drum Percussion Bass Acc1 Acc2 Acc3 Acc4 Acc5 Program Volume Pan Octave Detune Pitch Bend Poly Mono Drum Int Ext Wrap Around Keyboard Range A amp B Effect Send level Type Parameters Program parameters Drum Mapping Kick amp Snare Assignation Other performance parameters are saved in the Global Global Chord Recognition Mode Memory Mode Velocity Trigger Lock 1 Press the PERFORM button This changes the PRO GRAM PERFORMANCE section into a Performance selector
347. e sound brighter See 056 Reverb Room Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Wet Dry gt ER EQ Trim id LEQ HEQ Pre Delay Thru gt lt HfPre Delay Reverb Reverb Level gt ERs EQ Trim Righto o Wet Dry Reverb Time sec 0 1 3 0sec Sets the reverberation time a High Damp 96 0 10096 Sets the damping amount in the high range Pre Delay msec 0 200msec B Sets the delay time from the dry sound ts Fx 052 Pre Delay Thru 0 100 Sets the mix ratio of non delay sound Vs Fx 052 ER Level 0 100 Sets the level of early reflections va d Reverb Level 0 100 Sets the reverberation level va a EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB i Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 paus Src Off Tempo 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 c ER Level d Reverb Level These parameters set the early reflection level and reverb level Changing these parameter values allows you to simulat
348. easure ap eg Be c Track Intz Ext Baas Both Both Both Both Both Parameters Campa masura Wranepoze CHD in ag IC B EL Sooo Cms c Tracki pode 3 a Pala Pals B Fola Fola Pala Pola a Pols Pols 8 Campa maaeure Wansposs HD in 888 C B Wl coco Ceme c Tracki pode E Pala Poly fis Deum Fola ag Deum Fols 2 Pols Pola fi Parameters Drum This is a Drum Percussion track No Master or Internal External Both The track plays the sounds generated by the internal sound engine It does not play an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT The track plays an external instrument con nected to the MIDI OUT It does not play the internal sounds thus saving polyphony When a track is set to External a strings of transmitted Control Change and Program Change data is shown instead of the Program name assigned to the track In the following example CC 0 is the Control Change 0 Bank Select MSB CC 32 is the Control Change 32 Bank Select LSB PC is the Program Change Isle B CCHO0 CCH32 PC Octave Transpose applies to this track You can set a different volume for each class of percus sive instruments Page 14 Track Easy e
349. ed Otherwise you will enter this page with an empty NEW NAMEJBX file To create a new file even when a Jukebox file is already selected press SHIFT F4 Del and confirm with ENTER see below the F4 Del paragraph When you press PLAY STOP from this page the Jukebox playback begins from the currently selected Song i e the Song on the fist line of the display F1 Save Press this button to save the Jukebox file to the card The Jukebox Save page appears allowing you to save your file to the card chord Camps weasure ranepoes m prj es HEB C B iE oooo Eu aan JEM manm C HERLFRFE JERK p FEDLEVL JEX I4 cp We ABORT Note You can save your JBX file only in the same folder as the Songs in the list You can create a new file or overwrite an existing one 1 Move to the first line of the display the JBX file you want to save your list into Select an existing file if you want to overwrite it Select the NEW _NAME JBX item to create a new file Use the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOL UME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to scroll the list 2 If you are making a new fie when the NEW NAMEJBX item is on the first line of the dis play press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons You are prompted to assign a name to the selected item EE HPTPE 3 Move the cursor using the DOW
350. ed and using the tempo and notes iS ee h ok of Band 6 EE BPM MIDI 40 240 e Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo i Band7 dB 18 0 18 0dB Sets the hi of Band 7 Base Note 5 35 2 ds J ds n Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Tim s X1 x16 mas ii the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Sats the number of notes that specify the LFO speed a Src Off Tempo Resonance 0 100 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 t Sets the resonance amount Low Pass Filter Off On Amt 100 100 N Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Switches the Wah Low Pass Filter on and off ance on page 175 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dzc a Type yp Src Off Tempo This parameter selects a combination of center frequen 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 cies for each band Each center frequency is shown on the pem perm right edge of the LCD Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a Frequency Bottom a Frequency Top The sweep width and direction of the wah filter are deter mined by the Frequency Top and Frequency Bottom settings Sweep Mode D mod Frequency 4 Frequency Top 75 Higher Bottom 60 Woo
351. ed the BALANCE slider is set to the center This sets both Sequencer 1 SEQ1 and Sequencer 2 SEQ2 to their maximum level This will avoid you start a Song without hearing anything a H SEQ 1 l SEQ 2 HOW TO Keyboard select a Sound Program select a Performance play a Sound Program across the whole keyboard as with a piano Split the keyboard in two add sounds to the right hand mute unmute sounds Style Play mode select a Style start stop the Style select a Fill or a Break Select a Style Variation see the Style tracks create a new Style Song Play mode play a Song Standard MIDI File see the Lyrics see the Song tracks Start both Sequencers at the same time Backing Sequence mode Fecord a new Backing Sequence Song Song mode ecord a new Song edit a Standard MIDI File In general turn the speakers off change the Damper polarity select the Arabic Scale 91 88 125 126 34 TABLE OF CONTENTS Introduction Welcome 222 tm RE 8 Live Performing ssec eee rarer eb RR ari 8 Useful links wissen dene re bee xen mU ep UE ER Us 8 About this manual 00 cece eee eee eee eens 8 Making a backup copy of system files s 8 Loading the operating system lslssseeeeeess 9 Reloading the Factory Data ccc eee ee eee ee ee eee 9 Start up 24c46i6isentee ee eeide ae
352. ed to its MIDI IN port The Start Stop and Play Stop commands and the metronome Tempo cannot be selected from the control Global edit environment Page 5 MIDI Controls panel of the Pa50SD Use the external instru ment to set the Tempo and start or stop the sequencers Song Song Play Backing Sequence modes and the arranger Style and Backing Sequence modes Clock Send gt GBL This parameter turns the clock information on the MIDI OUT on or off Off The Pa50SD cannot send the MIDI Clock sig nal You cannot slave another instrument to the Pa50SD even when connected to the MIDI OUT The Pa50SD can send the MIDI Clock signal You can slave another instrument to the Pa50SD Tempo Start Stop and Play Stop com mands Connect the other instrument to the Pa50SD MIDI OUT port MIDI PAGE 6 MIDI IN CHANNELS In this page you can assign the Pa50SD tracks to any of the MIDI IN channels Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from channels 1 8 to channels 9 16 Calor Campa measure transpose i monem Bs ens pley J L page Gbl Midi In Chnl CHalibkgeni Chao eres CREE Lower OES Global Ghe Bass Cher iPedi CREA LP rer Chee Pet Channel gt GBL You can assign to each channel one of the following tracks Off No track assigned Lower Lower track Upperl 3 One of the Upper tracks Drum Drum track Perc Percussion
353. ed to the trigger signal The Limiter determines whether the compression is applied or not based on the post EQ trigger signal Set ting the equalizer allows you to set the Limiter to respond to any frequency band f Trigger Monitor Setting this parameter On will cause the trigger signal to be output instead of the effect sound Use this parameter to check the trigger signal with EQ applied Usually set this to Off Effects Filter Dynamic 004 MBandLimit Multiband Limiter This effect applies the Limiter to the low range mid range and high range of the input signal You can control dynamics for each range to adjust the sound pressure of the low range mid range and high range in a different way from the EQ Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Band Pass Filters Wet Dry Low i gt Limiter gf Envelope Control Gain Adjust gt Mid Low Offset X Limiter f Envelope Control High Mid Offset 5 P E Limiter f Envelope Control High Offset Righto o Wet Dry Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio ts Fx 003 b Threshold dB 40 0dB Sets the level above which the compressor is applied ts Fx 003 Attack 1 100 Sets the attack time t Fx 003 d Release 1 100 Sets the release time ts Ex 003 Lo
354. edback parameter see below Fourths LO Repeat Dyn amics PERF STS This parameter sets the velocity difference between the right hand melody and the added harmonization notes 10 0 Subtracted velocity value Tempo PERF STS Note This parameter only appears when the Trill Repeat or Echo options are selected Note value for the Trill Repeat or Echo Ensemble options This is in sync with the Metronome Tempo Feedback PERF gt STS Note This parameter only appears when the Echo option is selected This parameter sets how many times the original note chord is repeated by the Echo option PAGE 20 STYLE CONTROLS DRUM FILL In this page you can select various general parameters for the Style chord Campa measure renspose i x M ge ee m s E StuctiiDrumz UI Damart KickDezsiOPF Mz DR maeim SnarDesi OP US Deis Filli i H Le Debe Fillzi x3 V1 V4 Drum Map PERF STYLE The Drum Mapping lets you select an alternative arrange ment of percussive instruments for the selected Drum Kit without any additional programming Just select a Drum Map and some percussive instruments will be replaced with different instruments 0 7 Drum Map number Number 0 is the standard mapping Kick D esignation PERF gt STYLE The Kick Designation replaces the original Kick Bass Drum sound with a different Kick of the sa
355. el with the same number 1 16 Sequencer 2 As above but with Sequencer 2 Accordion 1 3 Select one of these settings when connecting a MIDI Accordion Ext Seq This setting is for programming a Song on an external sequencer PAGE 5 MIDI CONTROLS This page lets you program general MIDI parameters Campo meseure Aer Gap SEG Ge MU ELT Cmm um aie C Gbl MIDI Chl Local Oh Clock Internal Clock Seri Ort Local The Local parameter turns the keyboard on or off Note The Local parameter is always turned on again each time you turn the instrument on On When you play on the keyboard MIDI data is sent to the internal sound generator and to the MIDI OUT port Off The keyboard is connected to the MIDI OUT but cannot play the internal sound generator This is very useful when working with an external sequencer to send notes and control lers from the keyboard to the external sequencer and then let the sequencer send them back to the sound generator without overlapping See the MIDI chapter Clock This parameter selects the MIDI Clock source Note The Clock parameter is always set to Int each time you turn the instrument on Internal Internal i e the clock generated by the Pa50SD Sequencer 1 internal metronome MIDI External from MIDI The Pa50SD is slaved to an external instrument or sequencer con nect
356. elect the source that will control the pitch EG Level parameters AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 Intensity AMS1 2 Intensity These parameters specify the depth and direction of the effect applied by AMS1 With a setting of 0 the levels specified by Start Attack Decay Release Level will be used For example if AMS1 is Joystick Y pushing the joystick to turn it on will change the Level parameters of the Pitch EG As the absolute value of Intensity is increased the pitch EG levels will change more greatly when the joystick is released The direction of the change is specified by Start Level Swing and Attack Level Swing When the key pressure is released the pitch EG levels will return to their own settings If AMS1 is set to Velocity increasing the absolute value of Intensity will produce increasingly wider change in pitch EG levels for strongly played notes The direction of the change is specified by Start Level Swing and Attack Level Swing As you play more softly the pitch change will draw closer to the pitch EG levels 99 99 Parameter value Start Level Swing This parameter specifies the direction of change in Start Level caused by AMS1 2 If Intensity is a positive value a setting of will raise the EG level and a setting of will decrease it With a setting of 0 there will be no change Attack Level Sw
357. elected at M005 01 000 This works exactly as in Style Play mode Note When inserting a Style Change you may also insert a Tempo Change at the same position A Style Change will not automatically insert the Style s Tempo DELETE When the Style parameter is selected and the side arrow showing that a Style Change event has been selected at the current position appears next to it press DELETE to delete the Style Change at the current position Note If the side arrow doesn t appear the event was not selected at the current position and will not be deleted SHIFT DELETE When the Style parameter is selected press SHIFT DELETE to delete all Style Change events starting from the current position to the end of the Song To delete all Style Change events in the Song go back to the M001 01 000 position and press SHIFT DELETE Note All events on the very first tick M001 01 000 like Perf Style Tempo Chord Style Element selection cannot be deleted Perf This is the last selected Performance Select a Performance to recall the Style it memorizes To insert a Performance change at the current position follow the standard selecting proce dure using the buttons of the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section Note The STYLE CHANGE LED is automatically turned on when entering the Chord Acc Step Mode This means that selecting a Performance automatically selects the Style memo rized into the Performance The SINGLE TOUCH and ST
358. elected value Eas hoke iai Es Event Type First value Second value In the case of a Note event use the D VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Length line and use the same but tons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the event s length Measure After having modified the shown event you may scroll to the next event with the H VOLUME VALUE buttons Scroll to next or to the previous event with the E F VOLUME VALUE buttons Scroll to previous You may use the SHIFT lt lt or gt gt shortcut to go to a different measure see SHIFT lt lt or gt gt on page 103 While the sequencer is running you may use the SHIFT PAUSE shortcut to move the current event in the display see SHIFT PAUSE on page 103 As described in step 3 you may press SEQ PLAY STOP to listen to the Song and press SEQ PLAY STOP again to stop the sequencer Use the INSERT button to insert an event at the Position shown in the display a Note event with default values will be inserted Use the DELETE button to delete the event shown in the display When the editing is complete you may select a different track go to step 6 When finished editing the whole Song press EXIT to go back to the Main page of the Song mode and select the Save Song command to save the Song the card See Save Song page on page 90 for more information on saving a Song Program operating mode 105 Main page 14 PROGRAM
359. en the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dz Src Off Tempo 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a BPM b Rhythm Pattern With the tempo specified by the BPM parameter or the MIDI Clock tempo if BPM is set to MIDI the length of one beat equals the feedback delay time and the interval between taps becomes equal Selecting a rhythm pattern will automatically turn the tap outputs on and off When BPM is set to MIDI the lower limit of the BPM is 44 Reverb effects These effects simulate the ambience of reverberation in con cert halls 052 Rev Hall This hall type reverb simulates the reverberation of mid size concert halls or ensemble halls 053 RevSmthHall Smooth Hall This hall type reverb simulates the reverberation of larger halls and stadiums and creates a smooth release 054 RevWetPlate This plate reverb simulates warm dense reverberation 055 RevDryPlate This plate reverb simulates dry light reverberation Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out pets Wet Dry Pre Delay Thru EQ Trim LEQ HEQ LOI Pre Delay Reverb EQ Trim Plame Wet Dry Reverb Time sec 0 1 10 0sec Sets the reverberation time a High Damp 0 100
360. eneral MIDI compatible mid ifile there is a good chance it does But we can further improve on it Stop the Song This one is easy press PLAY STOP SEQ1 The LED on the PLAY STOP button turns off Please always remember make any changes to the Song when the sequencer is not playing Otherwise a Stop com mand will reset all your changes Not funny huh Select different Programs You can replace General MIDI Programs with KORG Pro grams It will sound more rich more lively 1 Press TRACK SELECT to see tracks 1 8 The LED turns on chord tempo meseure iranspose Js in 888 C B IE oooo Comms c Peor F4 a Fial Fianol B DeStrings uitati B Ledata SirreErZ a ErazzuHonn o UcePadl You are watching at tracks 1 8 You can switch to tracks 9 16 by pressing the TRACK SELECT button again Campa maseure 8 Ed nepa Tutorial 5 Editing a Song 33 2 Select the track you wish to assign a different Program using the VOLUME VALUE buttons Press one of the buttons corresponding to the track to select For exam ple one of the A buttons to select track 1 Camps mensura rameposs gli BBB C B Cink eu 0000 wate Fiarol B BGuitartl 8 SitrerneEneZ 7 Urea 8
361. enu This menu gives access to the various Song Play edit sections When in the menu select a section using the VOLUME VALUE buttons press PAGE to select a page or press EXIT to exit the menu When in an edit page press EXIT to go back to the Song Play mode main page Campo measure fmemsposs ee ea EE E Son Flaa Menu Fixer Preferences Effects Track cirels Jukebeos Each item of this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups many edit pages EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE Select an edit section from the Menu and or use the PAGE buttons to reach the desired page Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Song Play mode All edit pages share the same structure Selected Sequencer Song Play icon Page header Page number msssurs BES oooo Hixerilolume a LiL ee LEE asa B HII esa IIL ass sj HI esa HIL gs a HII esae HHI 112 Song Play icon When on this icon indicates that the instrument is in Song Play mode Page header The header shows the name of the current edit page Usually the header is divided into a first word identifying the section name e g Mixer FX Send is a Mixer section page and a second word referring to the page name e g FX Send Section name Page name Gd E aig
362. equencer Bar number This counter shows the current bar number position of the selected Song A S1 SongName Pressed a first time with a Song already selected this button pair selects Sequencer 1 Pressed a second time or with no Song selected it opens the Song Selection page see Song Select page on page 73 allowing for selection of a single Song or a Jukebox file for Sequencer 1 If you select another Song while a Song is in play within the same Sequencer the new Song will start playing While this parameter is selected you can select a Song by composing its progressive number see Selecting a Song composing its progressive number on page 70 B S2 SongName Pressed a first time with a Song already selected this button pair selects Sequencer 2 Pressed a second time or with no Song selected it opens the Song Selection page see Song Select page on page 73 allowing for selection of a single Song for Sequencer 2 If you select another Song while a Song is in play within the same Sequencer the new Song will start playing While this parameter is selected you can select a Song by composing its progressive number see Selecting a Song composing its progressive number on page 70 C Lyrics Open the Lyrics page see The Lyrics page on page 74 Lyr ics will be shown only if included into the selected Song and compatible with a standard format that Pa50SD can recog nize E Upper 1 Program F Uppe
363. er FX Block to select an FX pair Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 Chord Cempa measure transpose CR NM EI oooo Hixer Fssend A eG Bici Aigo Be ee Hizr Bigan Ab lee Brema A iig Bret Aigo Brema Ai Lee BEEG Aigo Brema eoep Cx e e fS Campo mossurs transpose on BB E GB oooo octave Hixer Fssend A eG Bici Aigi Brema Abie Bes Brice Be ee A iig Beha Ar lee Brema Ab ee Bret Ab Lee Brema fia m ie fig Baae Here is the edit procedure 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F1 F4 buttons to select a parameter for that track 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the parame ter s value Parameters 000 No effect Only the direct uneffected signal goes to the outputs 127 10096 effect The direct uneffected and effected signals go to the outputs with the same level PAGE 5 TUNING DETUNE This page is where you can set the fine tuning for each track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again Compe measure Granapoea de gn 888 IC B eu oooo Tunina Detune g 00 Ha B 00 Hx a 00 M tr al 00 n C
364. er Exit Protected files cannot usually be overwritten By pressing ENTER you can overwrite them during the current opera tion Rename Invalid Name Press Exit You can t use the name you entered Please retry and select a different name Rename New Name Must Be a SET You can t modify a SET folder extension Rename Failed Press Exit An error occurred during Rename Rename operation aborted Save Failed Press Exit An error occurred during Save Save operation aborted Some Files Missing Press Exit This message may appear at the end of a Restore operation Some User file may be missing This is not a problem for the Factory Data integrity Unit Not Found Press Exit You were trying to access a storage device not available on your instrument Unformatted medium You have selected a medium card that is not yet formatted or is in a format that Pa50SD can t recognize Format the medium using the Format procedure see Page 5 Format on page 139 Wait Pa50SD is busy with a card operation 238 Error messages amp Troubleshooting Troubleshooting TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Power does not turn on Solution Make sure that 1 the power cable is plugged into the outlet 2 the cable is plugged into the connector on the back of the instrument 3 and is not damaged 4 there are no problems with the mains Is the power switch turned ON If the power still does not turn on
365. er changes Master Track only Aftt Mono Channel Aftertouch events PAft Poly Aftertouch events Bend Pitch Bend events PaCtl Controls exclusive of the Pa50SD like the FX and Scale settings These controls are recorded to the Master Track and saved as System Exclusive data 104 Song operating mode Event Edit procedure EVENT EDIT PROCEDURE The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each single MIDI event of the selected track You can for example replace a note with a different one or change its playing strength Here is the general event editing procedure 1 While in the Main page of the Song mode load the Song to edit see Main page on page 88 If a Song is already loaded or just recorded this step is not needed Press MENU and use one of the H VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Event Edit section The Event Edit page appears see Page 24 Event Edit on page 102 for more information ahora Cismps Gisssurs i BEB mima oooo es Event Edit Tk 1 Position 001 010 It Ex Note Gl 94 LerchbiBEBR EE 118 i Press SEQ1 PLAY STOP to listen to the Song Press SEQ1 PLAY STOP again to stop it Press PAGE to go to the Event Filter page and turn Off the filter for the event types you wish to see in the display see Page 25 Event Filter on page 103 for more information
366. eration On a real rotary speaker the rotation speed is accelerated or decelerated gradually after you switch the speed The Horn Acceleration parameter sets the speed at which the rotation is accelerated or decelerated g Mic Distance g Mic Spread This is a simulation of stereo microphone settings Rotary Speaker Mic Placement Mic Spread Microphone orn Microphone N Mic Distance Mic Distance Fa Rotary Speaker Top View 202 Effects ER Delay Early reflection and delay effects 041 Early Refl Early Reflections This effect is only the early reflection part of a reverberation sound and adds presence to the sound You can select one of the four decay curves Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out tens Wet Dry EQ Trim LEQ HEQ H lt HP re Delay Early Reflections EQ Trim Fights Wet Dry Type Sharp Loose Modulated Reverse Selects the decay curve for the early reflection LS b ER Time msec 10 800msec Sets the time length of early reflection Pre Delay msec 0 200msec Sets the time taken from the original sound to the first early reflection d EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the input level of EQ applied to the effect sound Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 e Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0dB Table Sets the gain of Hig
367. es User Programs User Styles Global with a single operation 1 Insert the source card into the card drive 2 Press Fl to scan the card and show the file list 3 Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select the SET folder containing the data you wish to load Move the folder to the first line of the display If the folder you are looking for is in another folder use the F3 Open button to open it Use the F4 Close button to go back to the parent folder 4 Press F2 Load to confirm the selection The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort When the operation is completed the Wait indicator disappears the source page comes back in the display and you may perform further loading operations Note Data loaded from card and data already in memory is merged For example if there is data in all three USER Style banks in memory USERO1 USERO2 USERO3 and there is only the USEROI Style bank on the card the USERO1 bank is overwritten while USERO2 and USERO3 banks are left unchanged As a result you will have a STYLE folder in memory con taining the USERO1 bank you just loaded and the old USERO02 and USERO3 banks Loading all data of a specified type You can load all User data of a specified type User Programs User Styles Performances with a single operation 1 Insert the source card into the card drive 2 Press Fl to scan the card and
368. ets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type mod ee e Dz Gain dB 18 418dB Src Off Tempo Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 O Mid1 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Amt 100 100 Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 Q DA 0 5 10 0 Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 ts Fx 006 Gain dB 18 418dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 O Mid2 Cutoff Hz 500 20 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Q 0 5 10 0 g Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 t Fx 006 Gain dB 18 418dB Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 h Routing CMP gt OD OD CMP Switches the order of the compressor and overdrive connection Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dze i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 214 Effects Mono Mono Chain 066 Cmp Par 4Eq 067 Cmp ChorFlg Compressor Parametric 4 Band EQ Compressor Chorus Flanger This effect combines a mono type compressor and a four This effect combines a mono type compressor and a chorus band parametric equalizer You can ch
369. evel 1S Fx 045 Src Off tempo g e Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 PILP He OE uns koc Amt 100 100 h Y 2 Feedback Tap2 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 Sets the Tap2 feedback amount D Mt Delay Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the multitap delay effect balance I High Damp 95 0 10096 Sets the damping amount in the high range 0s Fx 043 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Daz Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 224 Effects Mono Mono Chain 088 Phser ChoFl 089 Rev Gate Phaser Chorus Flanger Reverb Gate This effect combines a mono type phaser and a chorus This effect combines a mono type reverb and a gate flanger Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out mw Reverb Wet Dry Left Wet Dry 3 Phaser ROUSE NADIE Pre Delay ez ER Reverb
370. ffect upward and by after touch data received via MIDI In this case the effect of after touch will be only half of the specified intensity example of Amp O Keybodra Track oeninga iden JS Y amp AT 2 Joy Stick Y amp After Touch 2 odd The effect will be controlled by the joystick Y vertically downward and by after touch data received via MIDI In this case the effect of after touch will be only half of the spec ified intensity Key Low Key High Note Number 4 ma m c ee Depth and direction of modulation AMS Amp KTrk 0 AMS Intensity positive value s max 4 AMS Amp KTrk DH max AMS Intensity positive value re Depth and direction of modulation La us A AMS Amp KTrk 0 0 max AMS Intensity positive value PEE d Depth and direction of modulation may n AMS Amp KTrk 00 max AMS Intensity positive value ad o Depth and direction of modulation mes Global edit environment The Write window 125 15 GLOBAL EDIT ENVIRONMENT The Global edit environment is the place where you can set most of the Pa50SD global functions i e functions overrid ing any operating mode This edit environment overlaps the current operating mode Style Song Play Song Backing Sequence THE WRITE WINDOW Open this window by pressing the WRITE button while one of the Global pages is in the display Here you can save vari ou
371. fore pressing START STOP to start recording Stop the Song To stop the Song press either START STOP or one of the ENDING buttons The Song will stop but the Recording will still be on So you can start with another Song to be recorded in the same session go back to step 6 if you like Otherwise finish the Recording going to the next step Q Finish the recording All done boys girls Yes Fine Then you may PRESS PLAY STOP SEQ1 and the Recording status will be gone Both Backing Sequence tracks RT and Ch Acc will be set to the PLAY sta tus Ky Tutorial 5 Editing a Song Listen to the Song When back in the Backing Sequence Play page press PLAY STOP SEQI to listen to the new Song How smart were you If the Song is fine you can switch to the Song mode and do some editing Or you can save it as seen below and play it in Song Play mode 9 And if want to delete and record again one of the tracks or the whole Song That s easy 1 Press RECORD again to enter Record mode amps measure E a Go prem Bat c Rc Heuwsonad Eiule iMeuBnsza oo Perf al al Meteo Ord Rezol HI FT Pac REC Sel Terro CheAect REC Tramsposs 2 Setthe track to delete and record again to the REC sta tus 3 Set the track you want to listen to during recording to the PLAY status If you don t want to delete it but
372. g or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song Play operating mode 77 Page 4 FX A B Select Song change the effects then start the Song again Edit the Song in Song mode to permanently change the effects C D Effects assigned to the C and D effect processors Usually C is the reverb while D is the modulating effect chorus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see Effects on page 175 ModTrk Modulating Track Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modu late an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller D gt Csend D gt C Send Amount of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect PAGE 5 FX A EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the A effect usually reverb for Sequencer 1 Cmpa measure ranspose D mem B8E Eu oooo cam FMEA Edit Few Time Decl hEr High Dare 1 8 Fre Dis Cre Fre Dla Treu KIE o 4 Use the E F and G H VOLUME VALUE button pairs to scroll the parameter list Use the A D VOLUMME VALUE button pairs to select and edit a parameter Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to edit the selected param eter Note When playing back a Song that makes use of all four effects A D you can t edit any effect parameter These param eters appear greyed out in the
373. g mode For a practical example of Song editing see 5 Editing a Song on page 32 TRANSPORT CONTROLS While in Song mode use the SEQ transport controls for the Song playback See SEQUENCER TRANSPORT CON TROLS SEQI and SEQ2 on page 18 for more informa tion MASTER VOLUME AND SEQUENCER VOLUME You can use the MASTER VOLUME and ACC SEQ VOL UME sliders to set the volume See Master Volume Sequencer Volume BALANCE on page 71 Move the BALANCE slider to the center or the left for the maximum volume of the sequencer Song mode relies on Sequencer 1 THE SONGS AND THE STANDARD MIDI FILE FORMAT The native Song format for Pa50SD is the Standard MIDI File See The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format on page 70 When saving a Song as a SMF an empty measure in automat ically inserted to the beginning of the Song This measure contains various Song initialization parameters When a SMF is loaded the empty measure is automatically removed FAST TRACK DELETION When you are in the Main page of the Song Record mode and the Song tracks are shown in the display keep the DELETE button pressed and press one of the VOLUME VALUE buttons corresponding to the track to delete The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to delete the track or EXIT to abort HOW TO DELETE A WHOLE SONG While in the Main page you can delete a whole Song with the simple SHIFT DELETE key sequence
374. ge Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Style Record mode Style Record mode 61 Menu All edit pages share the same structure Style Play icon Page header Page number BI u Sip play page Editi Quantize ELi CLC Tre All Resol A She1 1 Gee Eala BothomtG 1 Toris Style Play icon When on this icon indicates that the instrument is in Style Play mode Page header The header shows the name of the current edit page As a general rule the header is divided in a first word identifying the section name e g Edit Quantize is an Edit section page and a second word referring to the page name e g Quantize Section name Page name Editsblantize Page number This area shows the current page number A H Each pair of VOLUME VALUE A H buttons selects a differ ent parameter of command depending on the edit page After selecting a parameter you can change its value by press ing one of the two buttons in a pair or using the TEMPO VALUE controls 62 Style Record mode Page 1 Edit Quantize PAGE 1 EDIT QUANTIZE The quantize function may be used to correct any rhythm error after recording or to give the pattern a groovy feeling chord Tempo meseure transpose em B88 a 28 Bg if Tod DEL ean coco Ceme jena Edit Quant ize EJI
375. ges To see the Song s tracks use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the main page showing the Realtime tracks to the other tracks Pressed a first time you will see tracks 1 8 enlightened TRACK SELECT LED a second press will show tracks 9 16 flashing TRACK SELECT LED pressed again you will go back to the Realtime tracks TRACK SELECT LED switched off Selected Sequencer Song Play icon Measure number Page header Song select commands Realtime Keyboard tracks Song Play icon When on this icon shows that the instrument is in Song Play mode Page header This line shows the currently selected sequencer and the assigned Song S1 Song Name or S2 Song Name When no Song is assigned to the current sequencer this line shows only the selected sequencer number S1 or S2 depending on the selected sequencer When no sequencer or Song is selected only the No Song text appears Press either A S1 or B S1 to switch between Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 When one of the sequencers is selected the sequencer number is also shown at the right of the metro nome Tempo When a Jukebox file is in play its name appears on the page header Selected Sequencer These indicators show if the currently selected sequencer is Seq1 or Seq2 Use the A and B VOLUME VALUE buttons to select a s
376. gether VOLUME VALUE ere J3 6 Bessel LE Fac 1 5 The right half is for the Style tracks page where you can see each of the accompaniment tracks VOLUME VALUE DRUM PERC DRUM 1 Ojo awda Kit BASS PERC gee Lat in F ER T C3 tA e Fretless Bec AcGuiter MUTE SS s See Symbols and Icons on page 21 Use these buttons to execute various operations on the com mands and functions appearing in the display SELECTING Use each button pair to select the correspond ing item in the display i e a track a parameter or a command Use either the left or right button in a pair While you are in the main pages of any operat ing mode select a track and use these buttons to change the track s volume Use the left but ton to decrease it or the right button to increase it Press both buttons in a pair to mute the corre sponding track Press both buttons again to unmute the track VOLUME MUTE SOLO While in the Style Play Song Play and Song modes you can solo one of the tracks Just keep the SHIFT button pressed and press both VOLUME VALUE buttons corresponding to the track you wish to solo To exit the solo mode keep the SHIFT button pressed again and press both VOLUME VALUE buttons corresponding to the soloed track Use each button pair to
377. gt LFO Shape T E Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed ts Fx 020 5 LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 034 f Panning Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the panning speed Panning Depth 0 100 Sets the panning width Dze Src Off Tempo 9 Selects the modulation source for the panning width Amt 100 100 Set the modulation amount of the panning width Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dz h Src Off tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 049 LCR BPM Dly The L C R delay enables you to match the delay time with the song tempo You can also synchronize the delay time with the arpeggiator or sequencer If you program the tempo before performance you can achieve a delay effect that synchronizes with the song in real time Delay time is set by notes Note With extreme values the sync may be lost Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Wet Dry Input Level D mod L Delay F High Damp Low Damp e Delay Li H ff rssaback Input Level D mod R Delay Effects ER Delay a BPM b L Delay Base
378. gt STYLE STS Track s volume 0 127 MIDI value of the track s volume PAGE 2 MIXER PAN This page lets you set the pan position in the stereo front for each track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Realtime Keyboard tracks to the Style tracks and vice versa Campo measure Sra Gr guge BE Mixer Par Big caa E FAA lI CHG i s CHEI U CHAG m Cempe massurs EE mE SEHE HixeriFan s Ei 1I IL 64 C468 Z ie E ia Il Ue Z e cum IL 18 2 CHG CHG a Pan PERF STYLE gt STS L 64 Hard Left C 00 Center Style Play operating mode 43 Page 1 Mixer Volume R 63 Hard Right Off The direct uneffected signal does not go to the outputs only the FX signal is heard for this track PAGE 3 MIXER FX SEND This page lets you set the level of the track s direct unef fected signal going to the Internal FX processors The effect processors included in Pa50SD are connected in parallel so you can decide which percentage of the direct signal should be effected There are four Internal FX processors in Style Play mode You can assign them any kind of available effects but we found it convenient to arrange them in the following way for all the Styles included with the Pa50SD A Reverb processor for the Style tracks B Mod
379. h EQ on page 176 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Daz Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a Type This parameter selects the decay curve for the early reflec tion Early Reflections Type Sharp Loose Modulated Reverse Dry Pre Delay ER Time 042 AutoReverse Auto Reverse This effect records the input signal and automatically plays it in reverse the effect is similar to a tape reverse sound Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Leite Wet Dry Auto Reverse Rec Reverse Play H Control red Righto f m j po D Dm oo CEmelope Consi Control Envelope Select a Rec Mode Single Multi Sets the recording mode di b Reverse Time msec 20 1320msec Sets the maximum duration of the reverse playback v Envelope Select D mod Input Selects whether the start and end of
380. h Style Seqi1 Seq2 Setting STS Performance Global Setup Note Page Parameter Performance Master Volume Slider a E Acc Seq Volume Slider Assignable Slider m V function Selected Mode Memory Bass Inversion Manual Bass Split Point i v Not saved to card Groove Quantize amp Tempo Lock Single Touch Selected Style Number v General parameter Synchro Start Stop Fade In Out Style Element V1 V2 V3 V4 Fill 1 2 Count In Intro 1 2 Ending 1 2 Ensemble On Off Chord Scanning Keyboard Mode Style Change Perf Program Program Change Octave Transpose Master Transpose Tempo Display Hold I l i lt I I General parameters lt i lt lt lt lt lt l Separate tracks Le General parameters lt y lt s ba n I I i I Main Program Play Mute status Volume Pan FX Send Level Detune Scale Key Note Detune 6 Pitchbend Sensitivity v Separate tracks 7 8 FX Select A B C D V A B C D Y C D V A B Modulating Track V A B C D v C D vV A B B gt A or D gt C Send V A B C D v C D V A B 2 E General parameters 9 12 FX Parameters A B C D v A B C D v C D V A B 13 Easy Program Edit 14 Track Mode 15 Track Internal External 16 Damper Expres
381. hange this value VARIATION COUNT IN ENDING M 2 BREAK 1 2 o o o On o Ow o o n Note value Dot Augments the selected note by one half of its value Triplet 3 Makes the selected note a triplet note V Velocity Set this parameter before entering a note or chord This will be the playing strength i e velocity value of the event to be inserted KBD Keyboard You can select this parameter by turning all counter clockwise the dial When this option is selected the playing strength of the played note is recognized and recorded Velocity value The event will be inserted with this velocity value and the actual playing strength of the note played on the keyboard will be ignored D Duration Relative duration of the inserted note The percentage is always referred to the step value 1 127 5096 Staccato 85 Ordinary articulation 100 Legato Buttons used in Step Record mode TIE button Ties the note to be inserted to the previous note REST button Inserts a rest NOTE VALUE buttons Select the step value SEQ1 PLAY STOP button Exits the Step Record mode lt Previous step Goes to the previous step erasing the inserted event gt gt Fast Forward Goes to the next measure and fill the remaining space with rests MENU While in any page press MENU to open the Song edit menu This menu gives access to the various Song edit sections When in the menu
382. hange the Velocity value for the notes tempo monsurs fremsposs Je ig Bas C B E acco tese eo Editsuelocit2s Trk i Haler Seai ci eea EBai csi iss BottowG 1 Toet Gs After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected 1 16 Selected track Value Velocity change value S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to edit If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key board range to edit If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instru ment in a Drum track PAGE 20 EDIT DELETE This page is where you can delete MIDI events from the Song Cehard Camps meseure Wransposs J 120 888 E IE ocooo octave Edit belete Tred EB Sei ai cea EBai cdi iss BottomsG 1 Toes Os After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press
383. hat the instrument is in Style Play mode Selected Style Currently selected Style Selected STS or Performance The last selected Single Touch Setting STS or Performance A Drum Perc grouped tracks Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the vol ume of both Drum and Percussion tracks grouped together at the same time To mute these tracks press both VOLUME VALUE buttons To unmute press both buttons again To change the volume select the track then keep one of the but tons pressed B Bass track Program name Name of the Program assigned to the Bass backing track Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the volume of the Bass track To mute this track press both VOLUME Style Play operating mode 4 Main page VALUE buttons To unmute press both buttons again To change the volume select the track then keep one of the but tons pressed C Acc 1 5 grouped tracks Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the vol ume of the instrumental accompaniment tracks tracks 1 5 other than Bass Drum and Percussion To mute these tracks press both VOLUME VALUE buttons To unmute them press both buttons again To change the volume keep one of the buttons pressed E Upper 1 Program F Upper 2 Program G Upper 3 Pro gram H Lower Program Name of the Programs assigned to the Realtime Keyboard tracks Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the volume of the corresp
384. he LFO speed by approximately 64 times 99 499 Intensity value AMS2 F Alternate Modulation Source2 Intensity AMS2 Intensity Make settings for a second alternate modulation source that will adjust the frequency of the oscillator LFOI see above AMSI F Alternate Modulation Sourcel and Intensity AMSI Intensity PAGE 18 LFO2 Here you can make settings for the LFO2 which is the second LFO that can be applied to the selected oscillator See Page 17 LFO1 for more information on the parameters value However in Frequency modulation the LFO cannot be selected as a modulation source in AMS1 or AMS2 PAGE 19 EFFECTS Here you can select two effects for the whole Program switch them on off and specify chaining Camps measure mansposs 20 E m AK m mj cee effects c Fui 33 Recc2mthHall Serdi 6 FER i amp Chorus Serd B Note For details on the effects refer to the Effects chapter FX1 2 Use these parameters to select the effect type for effect 1 2 See the Effects chapter for more information Note If 000 No Effect is selected the output from the master effect will be muted Send Send level for each effect Drum samples have their own send level settings see Send FX1 and Send FX2 on page 14 109 Use this parameter to adjust the general offset of the Drum P
385. he Main page of the Song Record mode and you can prepare your recording For more details see Song Record page on page 93 Chord Cempa maasurs ranspose oR 888 C B am IEW oooo este oo ReciMewsona Recti erckb Trhil Ox St Er MetrotOnd Resol Petenided Sel Teneo Tempot Ako 3 Be sure one of the Overdub or Overwrite recording options is selected see Rec Record mode on page 93 4 Setthe tempo There are two ways of changing tempo Keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the tempo Move the cursor to the Sel Tempo parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change tempo 5 Press TRK SELECT to switch to the Song Tracks 1 8 page amps mesure Wmmsposs J 25 888 E B b ui coco Cesme RectiHewsonsd al Piano Pianol B CeStrings Guitact 8 Leadatao Hirret a BrazzeHoen UcPadl Press the button again to switch to the Song Tracks 9 16 page amp Gesu Wansposs oma etj PE RectiHewsorna FY 8 Hringi LocasEr fg DkSirings Bassi Legato Sirreirss ia ErecesHorn Stringed 6 If you like you can set the tempo again from these pages just use the TEMPO VALUE controls 7 Assign the right Program to each track 8 Selectthe track to put in record Its status icon will auto matically begin flashing 10 11 12 91 Song operating mode Realtime Record procedure While the status icon is flashing press PLAY STO
386. he Upper 2 track Ens on off Ensemble on off Upper 3 Mute Mute of the Upper 3 track Quarter tone Quarter Tone on off Lower Mute Mute of the Lower track Song Melody Mute Mute of the Song s track 4 usually the Melody track Chord Latch Holds the recognized chord until the pedal is released Song Drum amp Bass Mute of all tracks apart for track 2 usually Bass and 10 usually Drum Style Change Single Touch Same functions of the control panel buttons with the same name Chord Latch Damper Holds the recognized chord until the pedal is released and sustains tracks where the Damper has been turned on 225 226 Assignable parameters List of functions assignable to the Pedal or Assignable Slider LIST OF FUNCTIONS ASSIGNABLE TO THE Funetion Meaning PEDAL OR ASSIGNABLE SLIDER Joystick X Joystick right The following functions can be assigned to a continuous Joystick X Joystick left pedal or to the Assignable Slider Joystick Y Joystick forward Joystick Y Joystick backward Function Meaning Vdf cutoff RT tracks Filter cutoff on the Programs Master volume Master Volume assigned to the Realtime tracks Accomp Volume Accopaniment Volume FX CC12 Ctl Standard EX controllers Kb Ex
387. he default header parameters of the Style Element Bend Pitch Bend events EVENT EDIT PROCEDURE The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each single MIDI event of the selected Style Element You can for exam ple replace a note with a different one or change its playing strength i e velocity value Here is the general event editing procedure 1 Select the Style to edit and press RECORD Select the Current Style option to enter recording The LED on the RECORD button will turn on and the Main page of the Style Record mode will appear Chord Variation Style Element Gxsssurs rampos GB ft D oooo Cosma IT DR eng coico ERT Flas DU Lemigs Meteo Gnd Resol So Peteeided C mai HTT Sth 2 Usethe A VOLUME VALUE buttons and the F1 and F2 function keys to select the E Style Element and CV Chord Variation parameters Note For more information on the Style Elements and Chord Variations and the Style structure in general see The Style s structure on page 52 3 Press MENU and use the VOLUME VALUE A H but tons to select the Event Edit section The Event Edit page appears see Page 4 Event Edit on page 63 for more information Cmpa mossurs mE GED ea Hp E me oe pe Catyls play Event Edit Tre DRUM ER CUR CUI Pezirticn Gai fi aa T
388. he direction in which AMS will change Start Level If Intensity is set to a positive value setting this parameter to will allow AMS to increase the EG level and setting this parameter to will allow AMS to decrease the EG level With a setting of 0 no change will occur Attack Level Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS will change Attack Level If Intensity is set to a positive value setting this parameter to will allow AMS to increase the EG level and setting this parameter to will allow AMS to decrease the EG level With a setting of 0 no change will occur Break Point Level Swing This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS will change Break Level If Intensity is set to a positive value setting this parameter to will allow AMS to increase the EG level and setting this parameter to will allow AMS to decrease the EG level With a setting of 0 no change will Occur Amp EG Time modulation These parameters let you use an alternate modulation source to modify the amp EG times that were specified in Attack Decay Slope Release Time on page 119 Amp 1 EG changes Time O AMS Amp KTrk Intensity a positive value Ll When Amp Keyboard Track Low Ramp a positive value and 0 High Ramp a positive 4 value Note on Note on Note on Note off Note off Note off u Low pitched note played with
389. he selected parameter in the display or scroll a list of files in the Song Select and Card pages The VALUE LED shows the status of this section DIAL Turn the dial clockwise to increase the value or tempo Turn it counter clockwise to decrease the value or tempo SHIFT When used while pressing the SHIFT button this control always acts as a Tempo control DOWN and UP DOWN decreases the value or tempo UP increases the value or tempo Keep the SHIFT button pressed down and press either the DOWN or UP button to reset the Tempo to the value memorized onto the selected Style VALUE LED This LED shows the status of the DIAL and DOWN and UP buttons ON The DIAL and DOWN and UP buttons act as Value controls to change the value of the selected parameter in the display OFF The DIAL and DOWN and UP buttons control the Tempo EXIT NO Use this button to perform various actions leaving from the current status exita dialog box answer No to any question that appears in the display exit the Menu window go back to the main page of the current operating mode exit the Global or Card Edit environment and go back to the main page of the current operating mode exit from a Style Performance or Program Select win dow 9 ENTER YES Use this button to perform various actions agreeing the cur rent selected status answer Yes to any question that appears in the display
390. highest folder in the card hierarchy or into a generic folder You can t copy single files from a SET folder 1 Insertthe card into the card drive 2 Press Fl to scan the card and show the file list 3 Move the folder containing the file you wish to copy to the first line of the display If it is contained in another folder use the F3 Open button to open it Press F4 Close to go back to the previous hierarchic level 4 Press F3 Open to open the folder containing the file to copy 5 Move the file to copy to the first line of the display 6 Once the file is on the first line press F2 Copy to con firm its selection The window s header changes from Copy from to Copy to chard Campo measure renaposs cuni DYRE HHH Bag cmp 5055 Cema Carle iy Cardi Coru to oOo amp urrent dir C LIVE SET C ETHICA SET 4 SD COPY OPEN CLOSE 7 Move the target folder to the first line in the display Press F3 Open to open a folder F4 Close to close it 8 Once the target is selected press F2 Copy The Over write message appears Doeniuanite on Coed Enter es Exit Mo Press ENTER to confirm overwriting EXIT to avoid it When you decide to overwrite the data you are copying will replace the existing data on the target For example if the same midifile exists on the target fo
391. highest assigned key is used instead MS Hi Lo Bank Num Use these parameters to select a different multisample drum kit for each of the High and Low layers For more informa tion see MS Hi Lo Bank Num on page 107 H L Level These parameters specify the level of each multisample For more information see H L Level on page 107 H L Transpose These parameters transpose the selected multisample Use them to change the pitch of the selected key 0 No transposition applied 64 63 Transpose value in semitones H L Tune Use these parameters to fine tune the assigned sample 0 No fine tuning 99 99 Fine tuning value in cents 1 100 of a semi tone H L Reverse The multisample will be played in reverse For more informa tion see H L Reverse on page 107 H L Use Offset These parameters specify the point where the multisample s will begin to play For more information see H L Use Off set on page 107 H L Cutoff These parameters set the cutoff frequency for the filter applied to the selected sample H L Resonance These parameters set the resonance for the filter applied to the selected sample H L Attack These parameters are an offset to the selected sample s EG Attack H L Decay These parameters are an offset to the selected sample s EG Decay Velocity Switch This is the velocity value dividing the High and Low layers for the selected sample key Note
392. hord Variation or the whole Style resetting it to the default parameter s values Campa measure sremsposa L cun LEE um Baa Bb 2B B a t coco Cem M Editibelete All Bell Tre All After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort When in this page press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element VARIATION ENDING2 Del Delete Use this parameter to select the whole Style a single Style Element or a single Chord Variation All All Style Elements i e the whole Style When Del All and Trk All the whole Style is deleted and all parameters set to the default status Varl End2 Single Style Element V1 CV1 E2 CV2 Single Chord Variation Trk Track All All tracks of the selected Style Style Element or Chord Variation Drum Acc5 Single track of the selected Style Style Element or Chord Variation PAGE 8 EDIT COPY Here you can copy a track Chord Variation or Style Element inside the same Style or from a different one Furthermore you can copy a whole Style Warning The Copy operation deletes all data at the target location overwrite Craps m snspsss BER BY 28 B w tnd JHA e coco Come a 5 Edit Cores From 501 01 SE
393. idod Sel Teneo Teneo Aubo is J Don t worry about this display it s something you don t need to learn at this point You may find more information on it going to the Reference Guide see Backing Sequence operat ing mode on page 82 Suffice you to know this is the Backing Sequence Play page where you can load play or save a Song Now press RECORD You are prompted to select either the Realtime recording mode or the Chord Acc Step recording mode chord Tempo meseure B58 oooo Cath ply Record Realtime Recording Uhord Bec Stee Hode Select the Realtime recording mode Simply press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons The Record page appears Ctsmpe measure transpose GED pE BDI BF ap E Cini O eD coco C c Rei Heutona Sibale MeuEnsza SERES Perf il G1 Meteor Ohl RescltH FT Pac REC Sel Terro CheAect REC Tutorial 31 4 Recording a Song o If you think the selected Style is not what you like for your backing tracks select a different one Well you should already know how to do it see Selecting a Style on page 26 But here is a fast reminder 1 Select one of the Style rows in the STYLE section using the leftmost button 2 Select one
394. igBand40 s 14 Boogie Pno 16 15 Macarena 15 Big Band 2 15 Bossa Pno CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank Traditional CCHO CC 32 PC Bank User 1 3 1 0 15 O Ital Valzer 0 17 19 0 15 2 1 Valzer 3 2 GermWaltz 1 4 3 GermWaltz 2 5 4 Laendler 6 5 WalzMusette 7 6 ViennaWaltz 8 7 Viennese 9 8 Mazurka 1 10 9 Mazurka 2 11 10 Polka 1 12 11 Polka2 13 12 Germ Polka 14 13 Trad Polka 15 14 Marsch 16 15 FrenchMarsc 146 Factory Data Style Elements cco cos2 PC in pyestSP co com2 PC UT SD cc o cc 32 ee 3H 1 0 29 0 15 SET 0 30 0 15 SET 0 31 0 15 SET 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 STYLE ELEMENTS Note You can remotely select the various Style Elements on the Pa50SD by sending it Program Change messages on the Control chan nel see page 127 PC Style Element PC Style Element PC Style Element PC Style Element PC Style Element 80 Var 1 81 Var 2 82 Var 3 83 Var 4 84 Intro 1 85 Intro 2 86 Fill 1 87 Fill 2 88 Ending 1 89 Ending 2 90 Break Count IN 91 Fade IN OUT 92 Memory 93 Bass Inversion 94 Manual Bass 95 Tempo Lock 96 Single Touch 97 Style Change SINGLE TOUCH SETTINGS STS Note You can remotely select Single Touch Settings STS on the
395. imes x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 Step Base Note A As A 3 2 di J ds J 0 i Selects the type of notes to specify the LFO step speed ee Times Sets the number of notes to specify the LFO step speed Manual 9 Sets the filter center frequency Depth Sets the modulation depth of filter center frequency Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of filter modulation Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of filter modulation Resonance 0 100 Sets the resonance amount Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 iS Dz k Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a LFO Waveform c LFO Frequency Hz d LFO Step Freq Frequency Hz When LFO Waveform is set to Step Tri LFO is a step shape triangle waveform The LFO Frequency parame ter sets the original triangle waveform speed Changing the LFO Step Freq parameter enables you to adjust the width of the steps 182 Effects Filter Dynamic When LFO Waveform is set to Random the LFO Step 011 Excit Enhan
396. in b is the current posi tion This is the place where the note in edit will be inserted If you domt want to insert a note at this position insert a rest instead as shown in step 6 To jump to the next measure filling the remaining beats with rests press the gt gt button To change the step value use the NOTE VALUE buttons on the lower left area of the control panel VARIATION FILL 1 2 3 4 1 2 o o o o o o o o o C JC JC JC JJ L36 JC J COL E J J D 5 E Insert a note rest or chord at the current position To insert a single note just play it on the keyboard The inserted note length will match the step length You may change the velocity and relative duration of the note by COUNT N ENDING BREAK 1 2 editing the V Velocity and D Duration parameters See V Velocity and D Duration on page 94 To insert a rest just press the REST button Its length will match the step value To tie the note to be inserted to the previous one press the TIE button A note will be inserted tied to the previ ous one with exactly the same name You don t need to play it on the keyboard again To insert a chord or a second voice see Chords and second voices below 7 After inserting a new event you may go back by pressing the button This will delete the previously inserted event and set the step in edit again 8 When finished recording press SEQ1 PLAY STOP to
397. in mute by pressing both corresponding VOLUME VALUE buttons the status icon disappears Press START STOP to play back the other tracks if already recorded and practice on the keyboard When you have finished practicing press START STOP to stop the arranger and unmute the track by pressing both VOLUME VALUE buttons the track will be in record again While the status icon is flashing press START STOP to begin recording Depending on the Metro metro nome option you selected a 1 or 2 bars precount may play before the recording actually begins When it begins play freely The pattern will last for some mea sures according to the RecLen value then restart Since the recording will happen in overdub you can add notes on any following passage This is very useful to record different percussive instruments at any cycle on a Drum or Percussion track Note While recording the track s Keyboard Range see page 68 is ignored and the track can play over the whole keyboard range The Local parameter see Local on 10 page 127 is also automatically set to On to allow playing on the keyboard When finished recording press START STOP to stop the arranger Select a different track and go on record ing the whole Chord Variation Note You can select a different track only when the arranger is not running When finished recording the Chord Variation select a different Chord Variation or Style Element to go on re
398. in the Equal tuning Pelog Scale of the Indonesian Gamelan The octave is divided in 7 notes all white keys when Key is C The black keys are tuned as in the Equal tuning Stretch Simulates the stretched tuning of an acoustic piano Basically an equal tuning the lowest notes are slightly lower while the highest notes are slightly higher than the standard User User scale i e scale programmed by the user for the Style Play Backing Sequence and Song Play modes The user scale can be saved to a Performance Style Performance STS or Song You can t select a User scale in Global mode 228 MIDI Controllers 20 MIDI CONTROLLERS The following is a table including all Control Change mes sages and their effect on various Pa50SD functions CCH CC Name Pa50SD Function 0 Bank Select Program selection 1 Mod1 Y Joystick forward 2 Mod2 Y Joystick backward 3 Undef ctl 4 Foot ctl 5 Port time 6 Data ent 7 Volume Track volume 8 Balance 9 Undef ctl 10 Pan Pot Track panning 11 Expression Expression 12 Fx Ctl 1 13 Fx Ctl 2 14 15 Undef ctl 16 Gen pc 1 17 Gen pc 2 18 Slider 19 Gen pc 4 20 31 Undef ctl Control Change 32 63 are the LSB Least Significant Bytet of Control Change 0 31 i e the MSB Most Sig
399. inally specified to loop the multisample will be played back in one shot reverse mode If the multisample was originally set to reverse it will playback without change Yes The multisample will playback in reverse No The multisample will play back normally H L Use Offset These parameters specify the point where the multisample s will begin to play For some multisamples this parameter will not be available Yes The sound will begin from the offset location pre determined for each multisample No The sound will start from the beginning of the multisample waveform H L Level These parameters specify the level of each multisample 0 127 Multisample level Note Depending on the multisample high settings of this parameter may cause the sound to distort when a chord is played If this occurs lower the level 108 Program operating mode Page 2 DK Samples Drum Programs Velocity Switch This is the velocity value dividing the High and Low layers for the selected oscillator Notes struck harder than this value will be played by the High multisample V Zone Top Bottom Velocity Zone Here you can specify the velocity range for the selected oscil lator Note You cannot set the Bottom Velocity higher than the Top Velocity nor the Top Velocity lower than the Bottom Velocity 0 127 Assigned velocity Octave Use this parameter to adjust the pitch of the selected oscilla tor in octave units The normal octave
400. indow 0 00 cece eee eee aes Men i ae dads EREE ATE EE ERA Edit pape stt ctute 44 cesser meer eyes Page 1 Mixer Volume 200s eee eee Page 2 Mixer Pam iis leise aea aene Page 3 Mixer FX Send 2 eee eee eee Page 4 Tuning Detune 0c eee eee eee Page 5 Tuning Scale cee eee eee eee eee eee Page 6 Tuning PitchBend Sensitivity Page 7 FX A B Select 0 0 rras ranri Page 8 EX C D Select ss eese emer ees Page9 FX A editing cee eee eee eee eee Page 10 FX Bediting ec eee eee eee Page 11 FX Cediting cece eee eee Page 12 FX Dediting ee cece ee eee Page 13 Track Easy edit eee cere eee Page 14 Track Mode 0 00 e eee eee eee Page 15 Track Internal External Page 16 R T controls Damper 4 Page 17 R T controls Joystick 040 Page 18 R T controls Dynamic range Page 19 R T controls Ensemble Page 20 Style controls Drum Fill Page 21 Style controls Wrap Around Keyboard Range c yueeestsen e REOR UO ar acd RP Page22 Pads resdan er yia ue PII RENE enon Page 23 Preferences Lock ssseueessus Page 24 Preferences controls 040 Style Record mode The Style s structure 0 cece eee eee eee eee
401. ined when the right LFO is reset L Depth 0 200 Sets the depth of the left LFO modulation g R Depth 0 200 Sets the depth of the right LFO modulation L Delay Time msec 0 0 500 0 Sets the left delay time h R Delay Time msec 0 0 500 0 Sets the right delay time L Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount of left delay i R Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount of right delay Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 tS FX 010 Dime Src Off tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 b D mod Modulation When the modulation source is used for control this parameter reverses the left and right modulation direc tion e LFO Sync e Src f LLFO Phase degree f R LFO Phase degree The LFO can be reset via a modulation source The Src parameter sets the modulation source that resets the LFO For example you can assign Gate as a mod ulation source so that the sweep always starts from the specified point L LFO Phase and R LFO Phase set the phase obtained when the left and right LFOs are reset In this way you can create changes in pitch sweep for the left and right chan nels individually m The effect is off when a value of the modulation source spe
402. ing This parameter specifies the direction of change in Attack Level caused by AMS1 2 If Intensity is a positive value a setting of will raise the EG level and a setting of will decrease it With a setting of 0 there will be no change Pitch EG Time modulation Pitch EG changes Time AMS Velocity Intensity positive value Note on Note on Note on DOTT po PM HAMA Anote played softly with Attack A note played strongly with Anote played strongly with Time Swing set to and Attack Time Swing set to and Attack Time Swing set to and Decay Time Swing set to Decay Time Swing set to Decay Time Swing set to O AMS T Alternate Modulation Source This parameter selects the source that will control the Time parameters of the pitch EG see AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 Intensity AMS T Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have on the Time parameters With a set 112 Program operating mode Page 7 Filter ting of 0 the pitch EG times will be just as specified by the Attack Decay Release Time settings The alternate modulation value at the moment that the EG reaches each point will determine the actual value of the EG time that comes next For example the decay time will be determined by the alter nate modulation value at the moment that the attack level is reached When this
403. ion ratio Fx 003 Sets the signal compression ratio ts Fx 003 Threshold dB 40 0dB a ES Threshold dB 40 0dB Sets the level above which the compressor is applied Fx 003 Sets the level above which the compressor is applied t Fx 003 L Attack 1 100 Ug ys L Attack 1 100 i Sets the attack time Fx 003 b Sets the attack time ts Fx 003 Release 1 100 FEY Release 1 100 Sets the release time Fx 003 Sets the release time t Fx 003 e L Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB CA mee c LI Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 424dB Sets the limiter output gain Fx 003 Sets the limiter output gain ts Fx 003 F LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz E Trim 0 100 4 Sets the LFO speed Sets the parametric EQ input level LFO Waveform Triangle Sine E Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 00kHz Selects EFO Wav iorm Sets the center frequency of Band 1 F Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec a 0 5 10 0 Sets the delay time Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 ts Fx 006 e Depth 0 100 Gain dB 18 18dB Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the gain of Band 1 Feedback 100 100 DP Ey E Band Cutoff Hz 50 5 00kHz Sets the feedback amount Fx 020 Sets the center frequency of Band 2 f F EQ Trim 0 100 Q 0 5 10 0 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 ts Fx 006 F Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Gain dB 18 18dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 Sets the gain of Band 2 Pre HEQ Gain dB
404. is Pitch Shift 1 2tone 24 424 Sets the pitch shift amount by steps of a semitone Des b Src Off tempo Selects the modulation source of pitch shift amount Lg Amt 24 424 Sets the modulation amount of pitch shift amount is Fine cent 100 100cent Sets the pitch shift amount by steps of a cent y pz c Amt 100 100cent Sets the modulation amount of pitch shift amount LS d Delay Time msec 0 1000msec Sets the delay time Feedback Position Pre Post Switches the feedback connection i Feedback 100 100 i Sets the feedback amount cs High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Effects Mod P Shift Input Level Dmod 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the input level ts Fx 037 Dyz g Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level ts Fx 037 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 D h Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a Mode This parameter switches the pitch shifter operating mode With Slow tonal quality will not be changed too much With Fast the effect becomes a Pitch Shifter that has a quick response but may change the tone Medium is in between these two If you do
405. is effect is suitable for guitar and organ sounds Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Wet Dry Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Drive Pre Low cut 3 Band PEQ 7 Wah H Driver IgA INA Amp Simulation f Output Level Direct Mix Righto Wet Dry mode Wah Off On Switches Wah on off S prez Src Off tempo a Selects the modulation source that switches the Wah on and off Sw Toggle Moment Selects the switching mode for the modulation source that switches the Wah on and off va Wah Sweep Range 10 10 b Sets the range of Wah S prez Wah Sweep Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls the Wah Lg Drive Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Switches between overdrive and hi gain distortion Drive 1 100 d Sets the degree of distortion Pre Low cut 0 10 Sets the low range cut amount of the distortion input ws Output Level 0 50 Sets the output level y prez g Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the output level Amt 50 50 Sets the modulation amount of the output level Low Cutoff Hz 20 1 0kHz i Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type Gain dB 18 18dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 Mid1 Cutoff Hz 300 10 00kHz Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Q 0 5 10 0 9 Sets the band width of
406. is on or flashing press TRK SELECT one or two times to turn it off and see the Realtime tracks Front panel 13 B SEQ Backing Sequence mode where you can record a new Song based on the Realtime and Style tracks and save it as a new Standard MIDI File SONG Song mode where you can play record or edit a Song PROGRAM Program mode to play single Sound Programs on the keyboard or edit them Press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY but tons together to select the Demo mode This mode lets you listen to some Demo Songs to let you hear the sonic power of the Pa50SD Q GLOBAL This button recalls the Global edit environment where you can execute various global settings This edit environment overlaps any operating mode that still remains active in the background Press EXIT to go back to the underlying operat ing mode Q sD CARD This button recalls the Card edit environment where you can execute various operations on files and cards Load Save Format etc This edit environment overlaps any operat ing mode that still remains active in the background Press EXIT to go back to the underlying operating mode memory TIE This button turns the Lower and Chord Memory functions on or off Go to the Page 24 Preferences controls edit page Style Play mode see page 50 to decide if this button should be a Chord Memory only or a Lower Chord Memory button When it works as a Lower Chord Memory ON The sound on
407. it is in the first Card Saue line of the display press F2 Load to load the file J AURET Locations marked with a row of underscores _ _ _ Ea T are empty locations Hi dE PA DUE 12 Once the target location is selected press F2 Load to load the file The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort At this point you can Warning After confirming the item you are overwriting Create a new SET folder see Creating a new SET in memory will be deleted folder on page 137 When the operation is completed the Wait indicator Save onto an existing SET folder disappears the source page comes back in the display 4 If you are saving into an existing folder move the and you may perform further loading operations desired SET folder to the first line of the display using the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE con PAGE 2 SAVE trols 5 Once the target folder is selected press F2 Save to save In this page you can save User data from the internal mem ory to a card You can save files banks or all the User files of the internal memory Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to the files The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Warning After confirming all data in the target folder is deleted reachte page When the operation is completed the Wai
408. ite Off 281 Noise White Off velocity switch 29 FA 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 30 F 1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 v 31 G1 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 32 G 1 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 33 A1 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 34 A 1 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 35 B1 2 BD Dry 3 O 12 BD Tight O 0 BD Dry 1 9 36 c2 0 BD Dry 1 Off 10 BD Tubby Off 10 BD Tubby Off 37 C 2 73 SideStickAmb Off 73 SideStickAmb Off 73 SideStickAmb Off 38 D2 32 SD Dry2 Off 38 SD Off Center Off 39 SD Jazz Ring Off 39 D 2 122 Hand Claps Off 127 88 Claps Off 127 88 Claps Off 40 E2 37 SD Full Room Off 38 SD Off Center Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 4 F2 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 42 F 2 90 HH1 Open 2 1 86 HH1 Closed1 1 92 HH2 Closed1 1 43 G2 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 44 G 2 94 HH2 Foot 1 88 HH1 Foot 1 94 HH2 Foot 1 45 A2 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 78 Tom 2 Lo Off 46 A 2 89 HH1 Open 1 1 89 HH1 Open 1 1 89 HH1 Open 1 1 47 B2 78 Tom 2 Lo O 78 Tom 2 Lo O 78 Tom 2 Lo 9 48 c3 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 49 C 3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 50 D3 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 77 Tom 2 Hi Off 51 D 3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 52
409. ith a value of 0 044 Cross Delay Stereo Cross Delay This is a stereo delay and can by used as a cross feedback delay effect in which the delay sounds cross over between the left and right by changing the feedback routing Stereo In Stereo Out Left o gt o Wet Dry High Damp Low Damp Delay FON TAT Input Level D mod Stereo Cross X 2 Feedback Spread High Damp Low Damp Delay HM N LC Input Level D mod E Stereo Cross Rights aa Dry z Stereo Cross Stereo Cross Switches between stereo delay and cross feedback delay b L Delay Time msec 0 0 680 0msec Sets the delay time for the left channel c R Delay Time msec 0 0 680 0msec Sets the delay time for the right channel L Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount for the left channel Drez d Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of feedback amount Amt L 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the left channel feedback R Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount for the right channel Dez e Amt R 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the right channel feedback t High Damp 96 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range 0s Fx 043 Low Damp 0 100 9 Sets the damping amount in the low range V Fx 043 Input Level Dmod 96 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the input level t Fx 037 Dese h Src
410. itive settings the sound will become brighter when the EG levels set by Filter EG Level and Time parameters are in the area and darker when they are in the area With negative settings the sound will become darker when the EG levels set by Filter EG Level and Time parameters are in the area and brighter when they are in the area 99 99 Parameter value EG Intensity to B Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that the time varying changes created by the filter EG will have on the filter B cutoff frequency see EG Intensity to A 99 99 Parameter value EG AMS Alternate Modulation Source Selects the source that will control the depth and direction of the effect that the time varying changes produced by the fil ter EG will have on the cutoff frequency of filters A and B See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 Intensity to A Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have on filter A For details on how this will apply refer to EG Intensity to A Intensity to B Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have on filter B For details on how this will apply refer to EG Intensity to A Note The sum of the settings for Velocity to A B Intensity to A B and AMS Intensity to A B will determine the depth and direction of the effect produced by the
411. ive Groups assigned to the selected key When you play this key all other keys assigned to the same Exclusive Group will be stopped and this key will be stopped by other keys assigned to the same Exclusive Group 1 127 Pan This parameter sets the position in the stereo panorama of the selected key Send FX1 This parameter sets the FX1 send level for of the selected key Send FX2 This parameter sets the FX2 send level for of the selected key PAGE 3 PITCH Here you can make pitch settings for each oscillator These settings specify how keyboard location will affect the pitch of each oscillator and select the controllers that will affect the oscillator pitch and specify the depth of control You can also specify the amount of pitch change produced by the Pitch EG and by LFO1 and LFO2 switch portamento on off and spec ify how it will apply Ctsmpo maseure transpose Js E E w a ie Oecd Selected Osct Sloret H8 Jowstick X 42 Jowstick i 24 Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alter natively you can select oscillators using the F1 F4 buttons Slope Normally you will leave this parameter at 1 0 Positive values will cause the pitch to rise as you play higher notes Program operating mode 109 Page 3 Pitch and negative values will cause the pitch to fall as you play higher notes
412. ize the whole Program to a default status While in an edit page where the Osc abbreviation appears in the upper right area of the display keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the DELETE button to initialize the currently selected oscillator to a default sta tus After you press the shortcut the Init osc message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort THE WRITE WINDOW This page appears when you press the WRITE button Here you can save the Program into a User Program location in memory Trensposs J gt E gH Lj uu WRITE Los Hames GrandFi ano Tot Ll 8i enpiu 1 Select a name and a location then press ENTER to save the Program 2 The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Warning If you write over an existing User Program the Program will be deleted and replaced by the one you are saving overwrite Please save to card any Program you don t want to lose Name Use this parameter to change the Program s name Press the right A VOLUME VALUE button to enter editing Modify the name using the UP DOWN buttons to move the cursor and the DIAL to select a character Press INSERT to insert a char acter at the cursor position or DELETE to delete it To Location number Use the B VOLUME VALUE buttons to select a different User Program location in memory Otherwise select thi
413. k a fi fa Httacki Httacki ig Here is the edit procedure 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F1 F4 buttons to select a sound parameter or its value For the Drum and Percussion tracks see below the Drum tracks section 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the sound parameter or its value Parameters Attack Attack time This is the time during which the sound goes from zero at the moment when you strike a key to it s maximum level Decay Decay time Time to go from the final Attack level to the beginning of the Release Release Release time This is the time during which the sound goes from the sustaining or Decay phase to zero The Release is triggered by releasing a key Cutoff Filter cutoff This sets the sound brightness Resonance Use the Filter Resonance to define the width of the frequency range affected by the Filter Vibrato Rate Speed of the Vibrato Vibrato Depth Intensity of the Vibrato Vibrato Delay Delay time before the Vibrato begins after the sound starts Drum tracks When a track is set in Drum Mode like the Drum and Per cussion tracks you can adjust the volume for each of the 99 Song operating mode Page 15 Track Mode Poly Tracks of this kind are polyphonic i e they can play more than one note at the same time Mono Tracks of this kind are monophonic i e each Drum and Percussion categories new note stops the
414. ke Style Tempo Chord Style Element selection cannot be deleted DELETE Tempo This is the Tempo Change parameter To insert a Tempo Change event at the current position select this parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change its value DELETE When the Tempo parameter is selected and the side arrow showing that a Tempo Change event has been selected at the current position appears next to it press DELETE to delete the Tempo Change at the current posi tion Note If the side arrow doesn t appear the event was not selected at the current position and will not be deleted SHIFT DELETE When the Tempo parameter is selected press SHIFT DELETE to delete all Tempo Change events starting from the current position to the end of the Song To delete all Tempo Change events in the Song go back to the M001 01 000 position and press SHIFT DELETE Note All events on the very first tick M001 01 000 like Perf Style Tempo Chord Style Element selection cannot be deleted Style This is the last selected Style To insert a Style change at the current position follow the standard selecting procedure using the buttons of the STYLE section Note Any Style Change inserted after the beginning of the mea sure i e to a position other than Mxxx 01 000 will be effective at the following measure For example if a Style Change event has been inserted at M004 03 000 the selected Style will be effectively s
415. l El Tom Tom Processed Tom Processed 51 D 3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Ride Edge 2 Ride Edge 2 52 E3 108 CymbalReverse Off 108 CymbalReverse China Cymbal China Cymbal 53 F3 114 Ride Jazz Off 114 Ride Jazz Ride Jazz Ride Jazz 54 FHS 212 Tambourin Acc2 Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Tambourin Acc2 55 G3 107 Splash Cymbal Off 278 Xylophone Spectr Splash Cymbal 56 G 3 136 88 Cowbe Off 136 88 Cowbe 57 A3 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Off 104 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 58 Ait3 198 Vibraslap Off 212 Tambourin Acc2 Vibraslap 59 B3 113 Ride Edge 2 Off 113 Ride Edge 2 Ride Edge 2 Ride Edge 2 60 C4 134 88 Conga Off 171 BongoHi Open BongoHi Open BongoHi Open 61 CH4 134 88 Conga Off 168 BongoLo Open BongoLo Open BongoLo Open 62 D4 134 88 Conga Off 163 CongaHiMtSlap CongaHiMtSlap 63 D 4 134 88 Conga Off 161 CongaHi Open CongaHi Open 64 E4 134 88 Conga Off 158 CongaLo Open CongaLo Open 65 F4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 TimbaleHi Rim2 66 FHA 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open TimbaleLo Open 67 G4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Agogo Bell 68 G 4 224 Agogo Be Off 224 Agogo Be Agogo Be 69 A4 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Cabasa Up 70 A 4 182 MaracasPush Off 182 MaracasPush MaracasPush MaracasPush 71 B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle SambaWhistle SambaWhistle 72 C5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle SambaWhistle 73 C 5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short Guiro Short 74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro
416. l Synth 2 v 121 2 97 Reso Down Synth 1 121 2 87 ElectroLead Synth 2 121 3 97 Tinklin Pad Synth 1 121 3 87 Rich Lead Synth 2 121 4 97 Pods In Pad Synth 1 121 4 87 ThinAnaLead Synth 2 121 5 97 Noble Pad Synth 1 121 5 87 EspressLead Synth 2 121 6 97 Rave Synth 1 121 6 87 HipHop Lead Synth 2 121 7 97 ElastickPad Synth 1 121 7 87 Square Bass Synth 2 121 0 98 Crystal Synth 2 v 121 8 87 Big amp Raw Synth 2 121 1 98 SynthMallet SFX v 121 9 87 CatLead Synth 2 121 2 98 Vs Bell Boy Mallet amp Bell 121 0 88 New Age Pad Synth 1 v 121 3 98 KrystalBell Mallet amp Bell 121 1 88 VirtualTrav Synth 1 121 4 98 Digi Bell Mallet amp Bell 121 2 88 Arp Angeles Synth 1 121 5 98 Moving Bell Synth 1 121 0 89 Warm Pad Synth 1 v 121 6 98 Bell Pad Mallet amp Bell 121 1 89 Sine Pad Synth 1 v 121 7 98 Bell Choir Synth 1 121 2 89 MasterPad Synth 1 121 0 99 Atmosphere Synth 2 v 121 3 89 Power Synth Synth 1 121 0 100 Brightness Synth 2 v 121 4 89 The Pad Synth 1 121 1 100 Lonely Spin Synth 1 121 5 89 Money Pad Synth 1 121 2 100 Syn Ghostly Synth 1 121 6 89 Dark Pad Synth 1 121 0 101 Goblins SFX v 121 7 89 Freedom Pad Synth 1 121 1 101 MotionRaver Synth 2 121 8 89 Analog Pad Synth 1 121 2 101 Digi IcePad Synth 1 121 9 89 Analog Pad2 Synth 1 121 0 102 Echo Drops SFX v 121 0 90 Polysynth Synth 1 v 121 1 102 Echo Bell SFX v 121 1 90 Reso Sweep Synth 1 121 2 102 Echo Pan SFX v 121 2 90 Sky Watcher Synth 1 121 3 102 Ba
417. l of Tap1 Setting a dif ferent level from Tap2 will add a unique touch to a monotonous delay and feedback 046 Modul Delay Stereo Modulation Delay This stereo delay uses an LFO to sweep the delay time The pitch also varies You will obtain a delay sound with swell and shimmering You can also control the delay time using a modulation source Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Wet Dry Delay A i z Feedback Ee o o Delay is Righto ATUS D zc C Response e UR Sic IS uro syllf LEO TrL Sine LFO Shape f By Modulation Mode z Modulation Mode LFO D mod Switches between LFO modulation control and modulation source control D mod Modulation L R L R Reversed L R control by modulation source Ww Das b Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls delay time Response 0 30 Sets the rate of response to the modulation source LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform c LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed ts Fx 020 d LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed LFO Sync Off On Switches LFO reset off on S Dae e Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that resets the LFO L LFO Phase degree 180 180 i Sets the phase obtained when the left LFO is reset Lg R LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the phase obta
418. lad Mood Swing Press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to select Jazz Brush allan Intro You can engage an Intro to be played before the Style Press INTRO1 or INTRO2 The former plays more freely without letting you decide of the chords The latter lets you play a chord progression during its playing Q Start the Style Play a chord and press the START STOP button Then begin playing Usually when the SPLIT LED is on chords are rec ognized under the split point i e on the Lower part of the keyboard With the UPPER or FULL Chord Scanning mode you must play three or more notes to have a chord recog nized o Play your chords and your melody Go on playing As you may notice Pa50SD features a very sophisticate chord recognition engine Recognized chords are shown in the display Q Make a break or should we say a fill During your playing you are free to call a one bar break Try 1t PRESS BREAK Do you see Music stopped for one bar Then it is back again After a while let s go for something different PRESS FILL1 OR FILL2 No silence this time Pa50SD plays a complex passage to let you take a breath FILLI is the simpler one where the FILL2 is the more sophisticate Usually you will touch FILL1 when playing with Variations 1 and 2 the most easy FILL2 when in business with Variations 3 and 4 more complex ones 30 Tuto
419. lay icon When on this icon indicates that the instrument is in Style Play mode Page header The header shows the name of the current edit page As a general rule the header is divided into a first word identify ing the section name e g Mixer FX Send is a Mixer sec tion page and a second word referring to the page name e g FX Send Section name Page name T lxe Page number This area shows the current page number A H Each pair of VOLUME VALUE A H buttons selects a differ ent parameter of command depending on the edit page After selecting a parameter you can change its value by press ing one of the two buttons in a pair or using the TEMPO VALUE controls PAGE 1 MIXER VOLUME This page lets you set the volume for each of the Realtime Keyboard or Style tracks Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Realtime Keyboard tracks to the Style tracks and vice versa Cmpa maseurs ransposs Bs moms HH Hixencilolume HM III ia ollie 1 amp lll ia Iig W se IIL iz Ii EE Om HIE L2 m Campo meseure iranspoes B a Grunge BB aes 7 HixeniUolume B lll ie HIN ese aa 8 lll im lll ese MI 1318 Ii ees gi amp IIIT Wie Till 2 Volume PERF
420. lder it will be overwritten Data that doesn t exist on the source folder is left unchanged For example if the MYSONGO1 MID midi file exists on the target folder but not in the source folder it is left untouched after copying the other data When you decide not to overwrite data existing on the target folder is left unchanged therefore are not copied 9 The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort the copy PAGE 4 ERASE The Erase function lets you erase files and folders from cards hon Campa measure iranspses an grep 288 BH 2B ecco Card Erase i p MAFILES SET it LIVE SET ETHICA SET He b DEL OPEN CLOSE Erase procedure 1 Ifthe file to be deleted is contained in a card insert the card into the card drive 2 Press F1 to select a device Devices are selected in this order SD gt SSD gt SD Device Type SD SD or MMC Card SSD Solid State Disk internal memory 3 Move the file or folder that you want to erase to the first line of the display If the file or folder you are looking for is in another folder use the F3 Open button to open it Press F4 Close to go back to the previous hierarchic level 4 Press F2 Erase to delete the selected item The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort
421. le Record mode 67 Page 8 Edit Copy Copying on a Chord Variation with a different length You can copy a Chord Element on a different Chord Element with a different length Just keep in mind the following f the source length is a divider of the target length the source Chord Variation will be multiplied to fit the tar get Chord Variation For example if the source is 4 measures long and the target 8 measures the source will be copied two times x2 3 T4 03 I2 I I4 Dh IIS Ifthe source length is not a divider of the target length the source Chord Variation will be copied for as many measures as can fit the target Chord Variation For example if the source is 6 measures long and the target 8 measures the source will be copied once then the fist 2 measures will be copied to fit the remaining 2 mea sures 1 2 3 4 5 6 o v T2 I I4 DS Te D E2 Note Avoid copying on a Chord Variation with a different meter for example a 4 4 Chord Variation onto a 3 4 one PAGE 9 PROGRAMS In this page you can assign a different Program to each track of the selected Style Element Each Style Element can have different Programs after saving the new Style please don t forget to set the Prog parameter to Original see Prog Program on page 49 to let the Style select the Program bypassing the Style Performance settings STYLE ELEMENT CONTROLS Campo meseure meneposa BEES B8B
422. le USERO2 and USERO3 banks are left unchanged As a result you will have a STYLE folder in memory con taining the USERO1 bank you just loaded and the old USERO02 and USERO3 banks Loading a single bank You can load a single bank of User data User Programs User Styles Performances with a single operation A bank corre sponds to a STYLE or PROGRAM PERFORMANCE button 1 Insert the source card into the card drive 2 Press Fl to scan the card and show the file list 3 Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select the SET folder containing the data you wish to load Move the folder to the first line of the display If the folder you are looking for is in another folder use the F3 Open button to open it Use the F4 Close button to go back to the parent folder 4 Press F3 Open to open the SET folder A list of User data appears Global Performance Program Style Cehord Ciempo mss Wemsposs auge Be Cere piny Card Load i amp PERFORM pt 5 PROGRAM Pj SME H4 tb LOAD OPEN CLOSE 5 Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the data type you are looking for to the first line of the display 134 Card Edit environment 6 10 Page 1 Load Press F3 Open to open the selected folder A list of User banks appears
423. le like Convert to MID A midifile has a MID or KAR extension Q Load the Song Press one of the BVOLUME VALUE buttons corresponding to the Load Song command As expected the Load page will appear tempe measure Wanspaze t 1 B s GD gupgem EE load Song EA hc BALLADS It C PhEDHGS FhSOHG MID bh tb LOAD OPEN CLOSE If you replaced the card press F1 SD to read the SD card again Move the midifile to load to the first line of the display Use the DIAL or the UP and DOWN buttons to scroll the list or use the E F Scroll Up or G H Scroll down VOLUME VALUE buttons When the midifile is on the first line of the display press F2 Load to load it The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm Note When loading a Standard MIDI File the first MIDI events are converted to the Song Performance events You will see them as the Programs Volume Pan Effect settings assigned to the tracks Q Listen to the Song After loading you are back to the main page of the Song mode Cmpa wp m eo Pusona maseure Lom Song Meteo OPP See Soe Meter deed Sel Teneo Tenece Aubo Press PLAY STOP SEQ1 to listen to the Song The LED on the button turns on Does it sound good If it is a G
424. level at the resonator Rate 1 100 Voice1 Pitch CO B8 Sets the rate of fade in 0s Fx 027 Sets the voice1 Pitch for resonance Fade In Dly Fade In Delay msec 00 2000msec Fine cent 50 50 Sets the fade in delay time Vs Fx 027 Fine adjusts the voice 1 pitch for resonance LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Voice1 Resonance 100 100 Selects LFO Waveform Sets the intensity of resonance when Control Mode Manual iS LFO Shape 100 100 High Damp 0 100 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed ts Fx 020 Sets the damping amount of resonant sound in the high range 1S LFO Phase degree 180 180 Voice1 Level 0 100 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 010 Sets the Voice1 output level LFO Frequency Mod D mod AUTOFADE Pan L6 R6 Switches between D mod and AUTOFADE for the LFO frequency modula Sets the Voice1 stereo image tion ts Fx 027 7 7 Voice2 Pitch CO B8 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the Voice2 Pitch for resonance Sets the LFO speed mode P Dz Fine cent 50 450 Src Off Tempo Fine adjusts the voice 2 pitch for resonance Selects the modulation source of LFO speed hind E E Voice2 Resonance 100 100 Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the intensity of resonance when Control Mode Manual Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed High Damp 0 100 L Delay Time msec 0 0 500 0msec Sets the damping amount of resonant sound in the high range s Sets the left channel
425. loading use the Global Protect function see Global Protect on page 141 5 Press WRITE select Global and press ENTER to save the Global The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort 6 Press one of the buttons in the MODE section to go to the desired operative mode CONNECTING THE PA5OSD TO A MIDI ACCORDION There are different types of MIDI accordion and each type requires a different configuration of the Pa50SD Select one of the MIDI Accordion Setups to configure the module prop erly see page 126 Connection and settings To connect the accordion to the Pa50SD follow this proce dure 1 Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the accordion to the MIDI IN connector of the Pa50SD 2 Press GLOBAL to enter the Global mode then go to Page 4 MIDI Setup see page 126 3 Select one of the Accordion Setups Note The settings can change when new data is loaded from a card To protect the settings from loading use the Global Protect function see Global Protect on page 141 4 Press WRITE select Global and press ENTER to save the Global The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort 5 Press one of the buttons in the MODE section to go to the desired operative mode CONNECTING THE PA50SD TO AN EXTERNAL SEQUENCER You can program a new Song on an external sequencer using Pa50SD as a multi timbral expander Connecti
426. locken 121 0 9 Music Box 121 0 10 Sistro 121 1 9 Orgel 121 1 10 Digi Bell 121 4 98 Vs Bell Boy 121 2 98 Steel Drum 121 0 114 Warm Steel 121 1 114 TubularBell 121 0 14 Church Bell 121 1 14 Carillon 121 2 14 KrystalBell 121 3 98 ChurchBell2 121 3 14 Tinkle Bell 121 0 112 Dulcimer 121 0 15 Santur 121 1 15 Kalimba 121 0 108 VeloKalimba 121 1 108 MalletClock 121 5 12 Gamelan 121 1 112 BaliGamelan 121 2 112 GarbageMall 121 3 112 Bank Accordion Sweet Harm 121 1 22 Harmonica 121 0 22 Harmonica 2 121 2 22 Cassotto 121 9 21 Fisa Master 121 8 21 Fisa 16 8 121 6 21 Fisa 16 4 121 7 21 MusetteClar 121 5 21 Musette 1 121 3 21 Musette 2 121 4 21 Accordion 121 0 21 TangoAccord 121 0 23 Fisa Tango 121 1 23 Akordeon 121 2 21 148 Factory Data Programs bank order Name ccoo CC32 PC Name ccoo CC32 PC Accordion 2 121 1 21 NylonKeyOff 121 2 24 Arab Accord 121 10 21 Steel Gtr 2 121 4 25 Bank Organ 1 AcGtrKeyOff 121 5 24 Jimmy Organ 121 10 18 Club J Gtr2 121 3 26 BX3 Velo Sw 121 1 18 vintage s T 4 27 ClassiClick 7i 4 18 ClsanMutatr i 5
427. lows you to edit each event in a single track See Event Edit procedure on page 104 for more information on the event editing procedure Compe measure manspose ile ian 888 ama lj occo eo Event Edit Trk 1 Position al alea It Eu Hote Gi 4 Yaa 116 um N Second value Event Type First value Trk Track Track in edit To select a different track press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to open the Go To Track window iso to Track d E it cmwel Erkek Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a track and press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort 1 16 One of the ordinary tracks of the Song These tracks contains musical data like notes and controllers Master This is a special track containing Tempo changes Meter changes Scale and Transpose data and the effect parameters Position Position of the event shown in the display expressed in the form aaa bb ccc aaa is the measure bb is the beat ccc is the tick each quarter beat 384 ticks You can edit this parameter to move the event to a different position Ev Event Type and values of the event shown in the display Depending on the selected event the value may change This parameter also shows the non editable End Of Track marking when the end of the track is reached Here are the events contained in ordinary tracks 1 16
428. ls with the Global option assigned see Page 6 MIDI IN Channels on page 127 can simulate the Pa50SD integrated keyboard When the Pa50SD is connected to a master keyboard transmission should take place over the Global channel of the Pa50SD The MIDI messages received over a Global channel and not over a standard channel are affected by the buttons of the KEYBOARD MODE section as well from the split point Therefore if the SPLIT button LED is lit up the notes that arrive to the Pa50SD over this channel will be divided by the 36 MIDI The Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels split point into the Upper above the split point and Lower below the split point parts The notes that arrive to a Global channel are used for the chord recognition of the automatic accompaniment If the KEYBOARD MODE is SPLIT only the notes below the split point will be used These notes will be combined with the ones of the special Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels THE CHORD 1 AND CHORD 2 CHANNELS You can set two special Chord channels see page 128 to send to the Pa50SD notes for the chord recognition The notes will be combined with the notes that go through the channel set as Global Global notes are recognized only under the split point if the SPLIT LED is lit up The Chord channels are not affected by the split point and the KEYBOARD MODE section of the control panel All the notes both above and below the split point will be sent to the cho
429. ltitasking Load While Play feature SSD Solid State Disk resident Upgradable from SD card Display Backlit custom LCD Data storage 8MB gt 20MB equivalent Internal Solid State Disk SSD SD MMC Card Drive Sound generation system KORG HI Hyper Integrated Polyphony 62 voices 62 oscillators Filters with resonance Multitimbricity 40 tracks 2 x 16 Sequencer 4 Realtime 4 Pads Sound memory 32 Mbyte of PCM ROM with Stereo Piano Programs gt 660 Single Oscillator Double Oscillator including a Stereo Piano and GM Level 2 compatible Pro grams 32 Drum Kits 128 User Programs 64 User Drum Kits Easy and Full Program Editing Effects 4 stereo digital multi effect systems with 89 effect types each Performances 160 Realtime Performance memories Up to 304 Styles Performances with 4 Single Touch Setting each Styles Up to 304 Styles Solid State Disk resident freely reconfigurable 8 Style tracks 4 Single Touch Set tings per Style 48 User Styles programmable Style Performances and Single Touch Settings Direct Card reading feature Compatible with old i Series Styles Style Record with Edit functions Step Edit Event Edit Single Touch Settings STS 4 x 304 memorize Realtime tracks Style controls 4 Variations 2 Fills 2 Intros 2 Endings Counter In Break Synchro Start Stop Tap Tempo Reset Fade In Out Bass Inversion Manual Bass Tempo Lock Memory
430. m 121 2 117 SynBass Res 121 8 38 Rev Snare 121 3 118 Clav Bass 121 3 38 i30Perc Kit 120 0 67 Hammer 121 4 38 Bank SFX AttackPulse 121 3 39 Goblins 121 0 101 Digi Bass 1 121 9 38 Echo Drops 121 0 102 BlindAsABat 121 12 38 Star Theme 121 0 103 PoinkerBass Tn 8 39 GtFretNoise 121 0 120 Digi Bass 3 121 M 38 BreathNoise 121 0 121 Jungle Bass 121 13 38 Seashore 121 0 122 Hybrid Bass 121 15 38 Bird Tweet 121 0 123 Digi Bass 2 121 10 38 AcBassStrng 121 2 120 Bank Drum amp Perc Telephone 121 0 124 Std Kit1 120 0 0 Helicopter 121 0 125 Std Kit2 120 0 1 Applause 121 0 126 Std Kit3 120 0 2 Gun Shot 121 0 127 Std Kit4 120 0 4 SynthMallet 121 1 98 AcousticKit 120 0 3 Echo Bell 121 1 102 Room Kit1 120 0 8 Echo Pan 121 2 102 Room Kit2 120 0 12 GtrCutNoise 121 1 120 Jungle Kit 120 0 10 Rain 121 1 122 HipHop Kit1 120 0 9 Thunder 121 2 122 HipHop Kit2 120 0 13 Wind 121 3 122 Techno Kit1 120 0 11 Stream 121 4 122 Techno Kit2 120 0 14 Bubble 121 5 122 Techno Kit3 120 0 15 Dog 121 1 123 Power Kit1 120 0 16 HorseGallop 121 2 123 Power Kit2 120 0 17 Bird Tweet2 121 3 123 Electro Kit 120 0 24 Telephone 2 121 1 124 Analog Kit 120 0 25 Door Creak 121 2 124 House Kit1 120 0 26 Door 121 3 124 House Kit2 120 0 27 Scratch 121 4 124 House Kit3 120 0 28 Wind Chime 121 5 124 House Kit4 120 0 29 Car Engine 121 1 125 Jazz Kit 120 0 32 Car Stop 121 2 125 Brush Kit1 120 0 40 Car Pass 121 3 125 Brush V S 2 120 0 41 Car Crash 121 4 125 OrchestraK 120 0 48 Siren 121 5 1
431. me Drum Kit Off 1 3 Kick replacing the original one Off corre sponds to the original Kick Snare D esignation gt PERF gt STYLE The Snare Designation replaces the original Snare Drum sound with a different Snare of the same Drum Kit Off 1 3 Snare replacing the original one Off corre sponds to the original Snare Fill1 2 gt PERF gt STYLE These parameters set a Variation to be automatically selected at the end of the Fill Off The same Variation playing before selecting a Fill will be selected again The specified Variations will be alternatively selected For example with the 1 amp 2 option Variation 1 and Variation 2 will be alternatively selected after the end of the Fill The next higher lower numbered Variation is selected in cycle After Variation 4 an Up command will select Variation 1 After Varia tion 1 a Down command will select Variation 4 The next higher lower numbered Variation is selected When Variation 4 is reached an Inc command will select Variation 4 again When Variation 1 is reached a Dec command will select Variation 1 again Fill to Variation gt 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 auto matically selects one of the four available Style Variations at the end of the fill 182 3 amp 4 Up Down Inc Dec gt 1 gt 4 PAGE 21 STYLE CONTROLS WRAP AROUND KEYBOARD RANGE In this page you can program the Wrap Around function and the Keyboard Range for the Style tr
432. ments have only up to 2 CVs When you play on the chord recognition area Lower Upper or Full depending on the Chord Scanning section on the control panel the arranger scans the keyboard and deter mines which chord you are playing Then depending on the selected Style Element it determines which Chord Variation CV should be played for the scanned chord Which Chord Variation corresponds to each scanned chord is a setting of the Style the Chord Variation Table Each Style Element contains a Chord Variation Table whose prototype is the fol lowing Chord Chord Variations CVs Variation 1 4 Intro 1 2 Fill 1 2 Ending 1 2 Maj 6 M7 M7b5 Sus4 Sus2 M7sus4 min m6 m7 m7b5 mM7 7 7b5 7sus4 dim dimM7 aug CV1 CV6 CV1 CV2 aug7 augM7 no 3rd no 3rd no 5th After deciding what CV to play the arranger triggers the right sequence for each track Since each sequence is written in a particular key for example CMajor GMajor or Emin the arranger transposes it according to the scanned chord Notes in the sequence are carefully transposed according to the Note Transposition Tables NTT to make them work fine with all recognized chords The NTT allows you to record just some Chord Variations and have all the notes play in the right place avoiding dissonances and transposing the pattern notes to the notes of the recog
433. meters See Effects on page 175 for a list of available parameters for each effect type PAGE 11 FX B EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the B effect usually a modulating effect For more details see Page 10 FX A editing above PAGE 12 FX C EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the C effect For more details see Page 10 FX A editing above PAGE 13 FX D EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the D effect For more details see Page 10 FX A editing above PAGE 14 TRACK EASY EDIT In this page you can edit the main parameters of the Pro grams assigned to each track Note All values are relative to the value of the original Pro gram You can also change the volume for each class of Drums and Percussions if the selected track is set in Drum mode see below Page 15 Track Mode Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again Compa mossurs jd ig 558 Cink ICU oooo Tracki Eass Edit a fitteckiG Aibtack a a fitteckiG Ribtackid a fitteckiG Fibtackid a a fitteckiG Abback a chord Cempe mossurs J 13m 888 0E CJ oooo Tracki Eass Edit 8 Httack 8 Bttacki fig id A Lack i Httacki amp m Ribback B Abtac
434. mode Style Play Corrupted Style Perform Save It Again The Style Performance was damaged Press WRITE and select the Current Style option to save it to memory again Style Select Fails Pa50SD was not able to complete the operation Style Record Arranger is Running Press Exit While in Style Record mode this message may appear when you try to select a different track or execute an edit opera tion while the Arranger is running Low memory The space in the SSD the space where User Styles are stored is going low Exit Record then load some banks of smaller Styles before entering Record again Style Copy Failed Press Exit Pa50SD was not able to complete the Copy operation Style Delete Failed Press Exit Pa50SD was not able to complete the Delete operation Style Save Failed Press Exit Pa50SD was not able to complete the Save operation Style Select Failed Press Exit Pa50SD was not able to complete the selection SMF Import Failed Press Exit There was an error while reading the Standard MIDI File with the Import SMF function The file may be corrupted Backing Sequence Mode Too Many Styles Press Exit You have recorded the maximum number of Styles allowed depending on the memory 10 to 15 Style changes Song Play Cannot Load JBX File to Seq 2 Press Exit You can t load a Jukebox JBX file to Sequencer 2 Jukebox files can only be loaded to Sequencer 1 Juke Box List Empty Press Exi
435. mode 3 Select a Demo Song by pressing the corresponding VOLUME VALUE button around the display The Demo will automatically start 4 Stop the Demo by pressing START STOP 5 Exit the Demo mode by pressing one of the MODE but tons THE MUSIC STAND A music stand comes standard with your Pa50SD Fit it into the two dedicated holes in the back panel 12 Front panel 3 FRONT PANEL Pa SC sp professional arranger MASTER ACC SEQ ASSIGN MODE VOLUME VOLUME SLIDER STYLE PLAY SONG PLAY B SEQ 10 10 z 5 MEMORY BASS INV MAN BASS y 9 TIE REST STYLE lt lt gt gt PAUSE PLAY STOP 8 16 8 16 BALLAD BALLROOM DANCE ROCK SOUL amp WORLD 1 WORLD2 WORLD3 BEAT 1 BEAT 2 FUNK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 LATIN 1 LATIN 2 LATIN DANCE JAZZ 1 JAZZ2 TRADITIONAL USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 POWER D DC 12V RECORD amp e MENU VOLUME VALUE DRUM PERC DRUM BASS PERC ACC BASS ACC GLOBAL SONG PROGRAM SD CARD SPLIT G QUANTIZE TEMPOM ENA POINT MUTE e SINGLE TOUCH SETTIN o BALANCE x FA TRK SELECT SEQUENCER 1 0 6 6 FADE IN OUT VARIATION FILL COUNT IN ENDING INTRO 1 2 3 4 BREAK 1 2 1 2 START STOP 3 e J J D nh TEMPO VALUE PAGE VOLUME VALUE e UPPERI ACC2 CHORD T SCANNING KEYBOARD MODE UPPER2 ACC3 OWN up ya VALUE HOLD LOWER UPPE
436. mpa measure mansposa m ig 888 Citi E LJ oooo Tunings Dekre 400 00 a fig HW Hd fai Ho Hui fia HW Hua Detune This is the fine tuning 64 Lowest pitch 0 Standard tuning 63 Highest pitch PAGE 6 TUNING SCALE This page lets you program the alternative scale for the Song tracks chord amp measure Wanepose J gg 888 E B IEU oooo Cm Tuning Scale Scaletlseer Kewl Peeves CH Dekreta Scale Alternative scale for the Song tracks See Scales on page 227 for a list of available scales To enable disable the alternative scale for each Song track see Page 7 Tuning PitchBend Scale on page 97 Key Parameter required for some Scales when you should set a preferred key Note Note in edit to be detuned This parameter can be accessed when a User Scale is selected Detune Note detune compared to the standard Equal tuning This parameter can be accessed when a User Scale is selected PAGE 7 TUNING PITCHBEND SCALE This page lets you program the Pitch Bend range for the Song tracks Furthermore it lets you activate deactivate the alter native scale for each track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again Compa measure transpose
437. n age 175 o IWI LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz peg Sets the LFO speed Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the W Resonance 0 100 effect balance on page 175 F Sets the resonance amount Low Pass Filter Off On Switches the wah low pass filter on and off 085 Decim Cmp A Amplifier Type SS EL84 6L6 Decim r mpr r e Selects the type of guitar amplifier ecimato Co presso Routing WAH AMP AMP gt WAH This effect combines a mono type decimator and a compres Switches the order of the wah and amp simulation connection sor You can change the order of the effect connection Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out mode D rete Routing Wet Dry Src Off Tempo __Decimator Y x Compressor 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 ti Resolution Output Level Amt 100 100 NIA P Decimator a Comp Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Pre LPF High Damp Toutput Level ance on page 175 i i Righto Envelope Contra ee D Pre LPF Off On Turn the harmonic noise caused by lowered sampling on and off a Vs Fx 014 High Damp 0 100 Sets the ratio of high range damping D Sampling Freq Hz Sampling Frequency 1 00k 48 00kHz Sets th
438. n asterisk Volume PERF STS Volume for each of the four Pad tracks Pan PERF STS Pan for each of the four Pad tracks 64 Fully Left 00 Centered 63 Fully Right C Send PERF gt STS Send level to the C Internal FX processor usually reverb for each of the four Pad tracks D Send PERF gt STS Send level to the D Internal FX processor usually modulat ing effect for each of the four Pad tracks PAGE 23 PREFERENCES LOCK You can lock various functions to avoid they can be changed when selecting a different Performance Style or Sin gle Touch Setting chord Campo measure f rA cn BEG ces B8 oe al a PreftLock Ebl H Tree Or Pads OFF Seale in PutonctiUn Hint When turning the instrument on Performance 1 is auto matically selected Therefore if you wish your parameters to stay unchanged save your preferred default settings into Perfor mance 1 see The Write window on page 42 and turn these locks on Note These settings are stored in the Global file After changing these settings press WRITE to save them into the Global The Write Global window will appear see The Write window on page 125 Pads gt GBL Sounds or functions assigned to the Pads 50 Style Play operating mode Page 24 Preferences controls Scale gt GBL When this lock function is On the S
439. n can be applied to the corresponding parameter The fol lowing table shows the available modulation sources Modulation source Note Gate1 Gate2 Note Nr Note Number ATouch After Touch JS Y CC 01 Joystick Forward MIDI CC 04 MIDI CC 13 MIDI CC 18 MIDI CC 19 Effects Diagrams 175 Modulation source Note MIDI CC 21 Prta SW 65 Portamento Switch MIDI CC 80 MIDI CC 82 Tempo Filter and dynamics control effects 000 No Effect Select this option when you do not use any effects When this option is selected the effect is muted 001 Amp Simulat Stereo Amp Simulation This effect simulates the frequency response characteristics of guitar amplifiers It is also effective for organ and drum sounds Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o f Wet Dry Amp Simulation Filter Amp Simulation Filter Right o 4 y Wet Dry a Amplifier Type SS EL84 6L6 Selects the type of guitar amplifier Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Dez b Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the effect balance Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance 176 Effects Filter Dynamic 002 Compressor Stereo Compressor This effect compresses the input signal to regulate the level and give a punchy effect It is useful for guitar piano and drum sounds This is
440. n page E Style Element and CV Chord Variation parameters on page 55 for information on select ing a different Style Element and Chord Variation Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected The velocity for all notes of the whole selected Chord Variation will be changed Drum Acc5 Selected track Value Velocity change value 127 S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to be modified If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key board range to be modified If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percus sive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track Note These parameters are available only when a Drum or Percussion track is selected PAGE 4 EVENT EDIT The Event Edit page allows you to edit each event in a single track See Event Edit procedure on page 64 for more infor mation on the event editing procedure Cempe messure eT ca Gece EBB BUB Coty ply Event Edit Trk DAM EzUT DJO Position 001 601 000 It Eus Hote FHS TE EEG EE FEED I Event Type First value Second value Style Record mode 63 Page
441. n page 175 Effects 187 Pitch Phase Mod 019 Ensemble 020 Flanger This Ensemble effect has three chorus blocks that use LFO to Stereo Flanger create subtle shimmering and gives three dimensional depth This effect gives a significant swell and movement of pitch to and spread to the sound because the signal is output from the sound It is more effective when applied to a sound with a the left right and center lot of harmonics This is a stereo flanger You can add spread to the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Wet Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left f Ensemble Wet Dry 7 i Flanger i s ON Righto o Wet High Damp LFO d3M een Y Righto e o Ef FO Phase Mat LFO Tri 7 Sine gt LFO Shape Speed 1 100 Sets the LFO speed Ds Src Off Tempo Delay Ti a elay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec Selects the modulation source of LFO speed a Sets the delay time from the original sound Amt 100 100 LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed Selects LEO Waveform b Depth f 0 100 LFO Shape 100 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Dz Determines how much the LF
442. n playing back the Song in Song Play mode Hint Since the Master Transpose is a global parameter loading a Song with a non standard transposition may result in unwanted transposing when loading other Songs that do not contain their own transposition data To transpose a Song it is advisable to use the Edit Transpose function you can access this function by pressing the MENU button and one of the E VOL UME VALUE buttons see Page 18 Edit Transpose on page 100 You may also lock the Master Transpose for various tracks to avoid unwanted transposition See Page 2 Master Transpose on page 126 of the Global chapter As a general rule you should use the Master Transpose TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel when you need to transpose the Realtime tracks together with the Song You should use the Edit Transpose function Song Edit mode when only the Song has to be transposed Note The Master Transpose value is always shown in the upper right corner of the display L 8 octave REALTIME RECORD PROCEDURE Here is the general procedure to follow for the Realtime Recording 1 Press SONG to enter the Song mode 2 Press RECORD to enter the Song Record mode You are now in t
443. nal is automatically routed to the speakers the Audio Outputs and the Phones PHONES Use this connector to connect a pair of headphones You can use headphones with an impedance of 16 200 50Q sug gested Use a headphone distributor to connect more than one pair of headphones BASIC GUIDE 24 Basic operations Playing on the keyboard 6 BASIC OPERATIONS PLAYING ON THE KEYBOARD Just play on the keyboard You will hear the Realtime tracks playing There are four Realtime tracks Upper 1 3 and Lower They may play all at the same time or just one or a few of them depending on their Mute status If you cannot hear a track check the mute status of that part Tracks can be set in different ways use the KEYBOARD MODE section to select the way they are configured on the keyboard Press FULL UPPER to play the Upper 1 3 tracks on the full range of the keyboard just as you would on a piano Upper 1 KEYBOARD MODE SPLIT FU ER Press SPLIT to let the Upper 1 3 tracks play on the right of the Split Point and the Lower track on the left aia ii C Split Point Keep the SPLIT POINT button pressed and play a note to change the point where the keyboard is divided in an Upper and a Lower part SPLIT POINT Lower V Upper To memorize the selected split point note press the GLOBAL button then press WRITE to save the Global in memory see The Write window on page 125 S
444. nd Page This area shows the current page number A H Each pair of VOLUME VALUE buttons select a different track parameter of command depending on the edit page Song operating mode 95 Menu Track status icons A series of icons near each track show the track s status Selected track or parameter When this symbol appears you can execute any available opera tion on the selected item no icon Track in play or already recorded The track is in mute or does not contain data PAGE 1 MIXER VOLUME Here you can adjust the volume for each of the 16 sequencer tracks Press both VOLUME VALUE button to mute unmute the corresponding track A muted track remains muted even when selecting a different Song Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again Campo J gg 888 amo oooo Pixeritlolume mememe Wanaposs m BED E DEE ge pp aso B HIL asa HII gx s Tit gea HIL G6 HIL Ge HU 112 ahord Campo J4 e 888 mD oooo ls Mixer Volume mememe Wanapoes C B TEE Hil ea IILI B92 MIIL E III EEG amp Wiese III 112 a PAGE 2 MIXER PAN Here you can adjust the pan for each Song track Use the TRACK SELECT button to
445. nd Passed Synth 2 121 3 90 Syn Sweeper Synth 1 121 4 102 Pan Reso Synth 2 121 4 90 Super Sweep Synth 1 121 5 102 Moon Cycles Synth 1 121 5 90 Wave Sweep Synth 1 121 0 103 Star Theme SFX v 121 6 90 Cross Sweep Synth 1 121 0 104 Sitar Guitar v 121 7 90 Dig PolySix Synth 1 121 1 104 Sitar 2 Guitar v 121 8 90 Noisy Stabb Synth 1 121 2 104 SitarTambou Guitar 121 9 90 Mega Synth Synth 1 121 3 104 IndianStars Guitar 121 10 90 TecnoPhonic Synth 1 121 4 104 IndianFrets Guitar 121 11 90 Farluce Synth 1 121 5 104 Bouzouki Guitar 121 0 91 Choir Pad Synth 1 v 121 6 104 Tambra Guitar 121 1 91 Itopia Pad Synth 1 v 121 0 105 Banjo Guitar v 121 2 91 Fresh Air Strings amp Vocals 121 1 105 BanjoKeyOff Guitar 121 3 91 Heaven Synth 1 121 2 105 Oud Guitar 121 4 91 Pop Syn Pad Synth 1 121 3 105 Jaw Harp SFX 121 5 91 Future Pad Synth 1 121 0 106 Shamisen Guitar v 121 6 91 TsunamiWave Synth 1 121 0 107 Koto Guitar v 121 7 91 FreshBreath Synth 1 121 1 107 Taisho Koto Guitar v 121 8 91 jRavelianPad Synth 1 121 2 107 Kanun Guitar 121 9 91 FullVox Pad Synth 1 121 3 107 Kanun Trem Guitar 121 10 91 Dance ReMix Synth 1 121 4 107 Kanun Mix Guitar Factory Data Programs Program Change order 159 ccoo CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2 ccoo CC32 PC
446. ng see below Song Select page C Save Song This command saves the edited Song as a Standard MIDI File After pressing this command the Save Song page appears see Save Song page on page 90 D Select Tempo Select this parameter to use the TEMPO VALUE section to select the Tempo When you select this parameter the VALUE LED turns off Note The tempo is always record in overwrite mode old data is replaced by the new data F Metro Use these buttons to turn the metronome on off during play back G Meter This non editable parameter shows the starting meter or time signature of the selected Song H Tempo mode This sets the Tempo change mode Man ual When the cursor is on the D Select Tempo parameter you can change the Tempo using the TEMPO VALUE section controls The Song will be played back using the manually selected tempo Auto The Tempo recorded to the Song will be used TRACKS 1 8 PAGE To see and edit tracks 1 8 press TRACK SELECT from the main page The TRACK SELECT LED turns on Press the TRACK SELECT button twice to go back to the main page Cmpa measure ranepose I ign 888 C HZ eu oooo Comms Heres o Fiol Pisrol 8 B CeStrings Guitact a Legato Strreceres 8 BrecesHorn UcuPadd A H Tracks 1 8 Programs Name of the Programs assigned to tracks 1 8 Use these
447. ng This lets you play a list of Songs without multiple selections Campo measure renepose Je prj em 888 C B IEU oooo S1 MEDLEY JES Slicurdeas Fianoal Simo son Guiteral Lerics Sirrigeres Ure ad Note The Jukebox file can be assigned to the Sequencer 1 only Note To create a Jukebox file go to the Jukebox page see page 79 Warning Should you delete a Song included into the Jukebox list currently in play the sequencer will stop and the No Song message will appear At this point press SHIFT gt gt Seq1 to go to the next Song and press PLAY STOP again Transport controls When you select a Jukebox file Sequencer 1 transport con trols are slightly different than with single Songs lt lt and gt gt Pressed alone these buttons are the Rewind and Fast Forward commands Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press these buttons to scroll to the previous or next Song in the Jukebox list Pauses the Song at the current position Press PAUSE or PLAY STOP to start the Song play ing again PLAY STOP Starts or stops the current Song When you stop the Song the sequencer goes back to mea sure 1 of the current Song If the Jukebox page is open you can start from the Song at the first line of the display See Page 9 Jukebox on page 79 PAUSE MENU From any page press MENU to open the Song Play edit m
448. ng speed 026 BiphaseMod Stereo Biphase Modulation This stereo chorus effect adds two different LFOs together You can set the Frequency and Depth parameters for each LFO individually Depending on the setting of these LFOs very complex waveforms will create an analog type unstable modulated sound Stereo In Stereo Out Left f o N Wet Dry Vibrato x Stereo In Stereo Out Left o EZ o Wet Dry Chorus Flanger H N x High Damp A i g High Damp Chorus Flanger H N p Feedback ji Vibrato 34 i Righte i Pus Dry LFO Tri Sine LFO Shape AutoFadef Fade In Delay LFO Frequency Righto o Wet Dry 1 2 180 degree Bem ft LFoz Tri Sine gf AUTOFADE Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that starts AutoFade ts pgz a Fade In Rate 1 100 LFO1 Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO1 waveform Sets the rate of fade in E F n Fade In Delay msec 00 2000msec LFO2 Waveform Triangle Sine A Selects LFO2 waveform Sets the fade in delay time iS LFO Phase Sw 0 degree 180 degree Se aan Triangle Sine Switches the LFO phase difference between left and right c LFO Shape 100 100 LFO1 Frequency Hz 0
449. nhancer Dly L Enhancer Delay L msec 0 0 50 0msec J Wet Dry Sets the delay time for the Enhancer left channel S The effect sound s phase will be reversed when you set q Enhancer Dy R Enhancer Delay R msec 0 0 50 0msec this parameter in the range of values from Wet to 1 99 Sets the delay time for the Enhancer right channel EJ Enhancer Depth 0 100 Sets the determines to what degree the Enhancer effect is applied Dze e Src Off tempo Selects the modulation source of the Enhancer width Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the Enhancer width f EQ Trim 0 100 Sets the 2 band EQ input level Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 415 0dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 s Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Da h Src Off tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a Exciter Blend This parameter sets the depth intensity of the Exciter effect Positive values give a frequency pattern to be emphasized different from negative values b Emphatic Point This parameter sets the frequency to be emphasized Higher values will emphasize lower frequencies c Enhancer Dly L msec d Enhancer Dly R mse
450. nificant Byte and are changed according to their MSB counterparts 64 Damper Damper pedal 65 Portamento 66 Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal 67 Soft pedal Soft pedal 68 Legato 69 Hold 2 70 Sustin level 71 F Res Hp Filter resonance 72 Release Release time CCH CC Name Pa50SD Function 73 Attack Attack time 74 F CutOff Filter cutoff Brilliance 75 Decay T Decay time 76 Lfo1 Sp Vibrato speed 77 Lfo1 Dpt Vibrato depth 78 Lfo1 Dly Vibrato initial delay 79 FilterEg 80 Gen pc 5 81 Gen pc 6 82 Gen pc 7 83 Gen pc 8 84 Port ctl 85 90 Undef ctl 91 Fx A C A C reverb send level 92 Fx 2 ctl 93 Fx B D B D modul send level 94 Fx 4 ctl 95 Fx 5 ctl 96 Data Inc 97 Data Dec 98 NRPN Lsb 99 NRPN Msb 100 RPN Lsb 101 RPN Msb 102 119 Undefined ctl 120 AIISOff 121 Res Ctl Reset All Controllers 122 LocalCt 123 NoteOff 124 OmniOff 125 Omni On 126 Mono On 127 Poly On MIDI Controllers 229 MIDI Implementation Chart KORG Pa50SD MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART OS Version 1 0 Jan 15 2009 Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks Default 1 16 1 16 Memorized Basic Channel Changed 1 16 1 16 Default 3 Mode Messages X Xx Altered kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Note 0 127 0 127 Number True Voice kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 0 127 Note On O 9n V 1 127 O 9n V 1 127 Velocity Note Off X V 64 X Poly Key 9 Sequencer data only A Aftertouch Mono Channel 0 0 Sequencer data only A Pitch Bend 9
451. nized chord Going deeper into the Style structure we can see that each Chord Variation is made up of Track Sequences and the Pa50SD supports 8 different tracks DRUM and PERC are used for drum and percussion sequences BASS for bass and ACCI 5 are for accompaniment sequences string guitar piano or other accompaniment instruments Just to summarize when you play a chord on the chord rec ognition area the arranger determines which Style Element is used then determines which Chord Variation should be used for the played chord then Style sequences for every track of that Chord Variation are transposed from the origi nal chord to the recognized chord using the NTT and so on every time you play a chord Note The Break and the Count In are not Style Elements and cannot be programmed by the user While in record edit the BREAK COUNT IN button does not work What to record Recording a Style is a matter of recording tracks inside a series of Chord Variations inside a series of Style Elements inside the Style itself You don t need to record all Chord Variations for all Style Elements It is often only necessary to record just a Chord Variation for each Style Element Exceptions are the Intro 1 and Ending 1 where we suggest to record both a Major and minor Chord Variations STYLE IMPORT EXPORT You can use Korg s Style To Midi application to exchange Styles between your computer and the Pa50SD through the Standard MIDI File
452. nnels are linked to control both signals simultaneously or whether each channel is controlled independently b Sensitivity f Output Level The Sensitivity parameter sets the sensitivity of the com pressor If this parameter is set to a higher value lower level sounds will be boosted With a higher Sensitivity the overall volume level is higher To adjust the final volume level use the Output Level parameter Compressor Sensitivity Level _Sensitivity 100 Sensitivityz40 Louder c Attack This parameter controls the attack level Compressor Attack Level Attack 80 Attack 20 gt Time 003 Limiter Stereo Limiter The Limiter regulates the input signal level It is similar to the Compressor except that the Limiter compresses only signals that exceed the specified level to lower unnecessary peak sig nals The Limiter applies a peaking type EQ to the trigger sig nal which controls the degree of the Limiter effect allowing you to set any band width to be covered This effect is a stereo limiter You can link left and right channels or use each chan nel individually A Wet Dry Gain Adjust gt Limiter 7 tL Envelope Control 2 N Envelope Select Limiter E M Gain Adjust Righto_t Stereo In Stereo Out Left
453. not need to set too much pitch shift amount set this parameter to Slow If you wish to change the pitch significantly use Fast b Pitch Shift 1 2tone b Src b Amt c Fine cent c Amt The amount of pitch shift will use the value of the Pitch Shift plus the Fine value The amount of modulation will use the c Amt value plus d Amt Modulation Source is used both for Pitch Shift and Fine e Feedback Position f Feedback When Feedback Position is set to Pre the pitch shifter output is again input to the pitch shifter Therefore if you specify a higher value for the Feedback parameter the pitch will be raised or lowered more and more each time feedback is repeated If Feedback Position is set to Post the feedback signal will not pass through the pitch shifter again Even if you specify a higher value for the Feedback parameter the pitch shifted sound will be repeated at the same pitch 199 200 Effects Mod P Shift 039 PitShiftMod Pitch Shift Modulation This effect modulates the detuned pitch shift amount using an LFO adding a clear spread and width to the sound by pan ning the effect sound and dry sound to the left and right This is especially effective when the effect sound and dry 040 RotarySpeak Rotary Speaker This effect simulates a rotary speaker and obtains a more realistic sound by simulating the
454. o tortion and a phaser You can change the order of the effect Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 connection Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Routi Wet Dry Overdrive Hi Gain VN Phaser 082 OD HG MTDIy 3BandPEQ l Overdrive Hi Gain Multitap Delay Driver AN nn Phaser i PO Output Level TB Nonna iaads This effect combines a mono type overdrive high gain dis g Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Resonance i e T tor tion an d a mul ti tap delay Righto d FO Tri Sine dri Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out ue Wet Dry Multitap Delay O Drive Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Lat FAT PEG Switches between overdrive and high gain distortion el gt an HOR Dang a I i Mt Dly Wet Di Drive 1 100 BF Mode Overdrive Hi Gain une Sets the degree of distortion t Fx 006 Drive Right JL o O Output Level 0 50 WEDI Sets the overdrive output level ts Fx 006 Desa b Src Off tempo Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level O Drive Mode Overdrive Hi G
455. o Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 88 E6 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 164 Factory Data Drum Kit instruments 120 0 14 Techno Kit2 120 0 15 Techno Kit3 120 0 16 Power Kit1 120 0 17 Power Kit2 Note Sample Excl Sample Sample Sample 9 A 1 13 BD Squash Off 13 BD Squash BD Dance 99 BD Dance 99 10 A 1 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 99 SD 11 B 1 123 88 BD Off 123 88 BD 88 BD 12 CO 124 88 S5D Off 124 88 S5D 88 SD 13 CH0 56 SD Hip 3 Off 56 SD Hip 3 SD Vintage4 14 DO 58 SD Hip 5 Off 58 SD Hip 5 SD Vintage3 15 D 0 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 25 BD Ambi Kick BD Amb Rocker 16 EO 11 BD Gated Off 11 BD Gated BD Hip 1 17 FO 40 SD Amb Piccolo Off 40 SD Amb Piccolo SD Off Center 18 F 0 90 HH1 Open 2 1 90 HH1 Open 2 HH2 Closed2 19 GO 6 BD Pillow Off 6 BD Pillow BD Squash 20 G 0 72 SideStickDry Off 42 SideStickDry 21 AO 47 SD Yowie Off 47 SD Yowie SD Vintage1 22 A 0 59 SD Hip 6 Off 59 SD Hip 6 SD Brasser 23 BO 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit DrumStickHit 24 C1 120 SD Orch 7 120 SD Orch SD Orch 25 CHT 119 SD Orch Roll 7 119 SD Orch RolT SD Orch Roll 26 D1 121
456. o pre serve Delete Destin Files Failed Press Exit The file you were trying to overwrite could not be deleted Destination File Exists Press Exit The file you are trying to copy already exists on target Directory Full Press Exit You reached the maximum folder number for the root of the selected card Delete some files or replace the card Directory Not Empty Press Exit You were trying to delete a directory still containing files Delete these files then delete the directory Directory not found Press Exit The directory is not in the current card The card has proba bly been replaced before finishing the card operation Insert the card again and try again Card Full Press Exit The selected medium card is full Delete files you are not interested to keep or replace the card with an empty one Then try again Card not empty Sh Enter to Format During a Backup you inserted a card containing some data Please replace it with an empty one or press SHIFT ENTER to start formatting the card Card write protected The card is write protected Move the protection tab to close the hole and try again Be sure there aren t data you don t want to overwrite Otherwise replace the card with an empty one Erase Failed Press Exit An error occurred during Erase Erase operation aborted Error while converting Press Exit While trying to load Korg i series data some errors occurred The original file is probably
457. o select one of the page commands appearing in the last line of the display Chora Cmpa msssurs irsmaposs exp gags BE 2488 CUT TAM Cards Load p BHES E See SINGLE TOUCH SETTING F1 F4 FUNCTION KEYS buttons on page 16 for more information PAGE The PAGE buttons select the previous or following edit page When selecting a Style or a Program they select a different page of Styles or Programs See PAGE on page 15 for more information MENU The MENU button opens the current operating mode or edit environment s Menu When in a Menu you can use the VOLUME VALUE buttons to select an edit section to jump to TRACK SELECT Each of the operating modes have a differ ent number of tracks Style Play 4 Realtime tracks 8 Style tracks 4 Pads Song Play 4 Realtime tracks 2 x 16 Song Tracks 4 Pads 20 Display and User Interface Interface structure Backing Sequence When opening an edit environment or a selecting page the 4 Realtime tracks 8 Style tracks 4 Pads current operating mode is still working in the background Song 16 Song tracks SALT nY SNOSONNSS You can only see up to 8 tracks in the display So use the TRACK SELECT button to switch to the other hidden tracks For example when in Style Play you can use this but ton to switch from the Realtime tracks and the
458. of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Realtime Recording mode The Realtime Recording page appears see Realtime Recording page on page 85 tempo meseurs tremsposs Ga Hi z E u T ege S ELS gt Rec Heusona Sibale MeuBneza SEES FerfiBli Bi Metro Ohl Resol HI RT Padi REC Sel Tempo CheAoot REC 4 The last selected Style is currently selected Should it not be the right one select a different Style to start recording with See Selecting a Style on page 26 5 The last selected Performance or STS is currently selected If you prefer select a different Performance or STS See Selecting a Performance on page 25 and Selecting a Single Touch Setting STS on page 27 6 Select the status of the Backing Sequence tracks using the G RT and H Ch Acc button pairs RT stays for Realtime Keyboard Ch Acc stays for Chord Accompa niment i e the Style tracks To record all you play on the keyboard plus the automatic accompaniment leave their status to REC see Realtime Recording page on page 85 Warning Tracks set to REC are automatically deleted when starting recording Set a track to the PLAY status when you don t want to delete it For example if you are recording a Realtime Keyboard part on and existing Style track set the Ch Acc parameter to PLAY and the RT track to REC 7 Start recor
459. of the Style Banks by pressing one of the but tons of the STYLE section 3 Select one of the pages using the PAGE buttons 4 Select a Style using the VOLUME VALUE A H but tons As you may guess the Style Bank and number appear after the Style parameter in the display O And what about changing the Performance or Single Touch Setting As above you should know the story see Selecting a Perfor mance on page 25 or Selecting a Single Touch Setting STS on page 27 But here is a short recap for the Perfor mances 1 Press the PERFORM button to set the PROGRAM PER FORMANCE section act as a Performance selector 2 Select one of the Performance Banks by pressing one of the buttons of the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE sec tion 3 Select a Performance using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons and for the Single Touch Settings STS Press one of the SINGLE TOUCH SETTING buttons Q Ok now we can go As you see both the RT track and the Ch Acc track are in RECord mode This means you can start recording all you play in a realtime performance with the Styles So PRESS START STOP WAIT FOR THE PRECOUNT TO REACH BAR 1 AND BEGIN PLAYING Play as if you were playing live You can do exactly what you do when playing with the Styles select a different Style Performance STS different Variation a Fill and Ending You can even start your recording with an Intro just press one of the INTRO buttons be
460. of the change applied to filters A and B For the range of notes between Key Low and Key High the cutoff frequency will change according to the keyboard location pitch 99 499 Parameter value 114 Program operating mode Page 9 Filter LFO1 Filter EG modulation Changes in cutoff frequency Note on Note on Note on T e Note off Softly played Strongly playedO Strongly played Setting to Setting to L1 Velocity to A This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that velocity will have on the time varying changes created by the filter EG as set on Page 11 Filter EG to control the filter A cutoff frequency With positive values playing more strongly will cause the filter EG to produce greater changes in cutoff frequency With negative values playing more strongly will also cause the filter EG to produce greater changes in cutoff frequency but with the polarity of the EG inverted 99 99 Value of the Velocity to A parameter Velocity to B This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that velocity will have on the time varying changes created by the filter EG to control the filter B cutoff frequency see Velocity to A 99 99 Value of the Velocity to B parameter EG Intensity to A Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that the time varying changes created by the filter 1 EG will have on the fil ter A cutoff frequency With pos
461. oint 1 100 9 Sets the frequency split point between the low and high range iS Feedback 100 100 Sets the feed back amount of the chorus block High Damp 0 100 Sets the high range damping amount of the chorus block Low Level 0 100 f Sets the low range output level l High Level 0 100 Sets the high range chorus output level Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 D i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 g High Low Split Point This parameter sets the frequency that splits the high and low range Only the high range will be sent to the chorus block h Feedback Sets the feedback amount of the chorus block Increasing the feedback will allow you to use the effect as a flanger 018 MTap Ch Dly Multitap Chorus Delay This effect has four chorus blocks with a different LFO phase You can create a complex stereo image by setting each block s delay time depth output level and pan individually You can also fix some of the chorus blocks to combine the chorus and delay effects Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Fette Wet Dry
462. oll the list up or down F1 SD Press this button after replacing a card in the card drive After pressing this button the new card will be scanned and the file list shown on the display will be updated F2 Data transfer command Executes the shown operation F3 Open Opens the selected folder or bank files whose name begins with the C icon F4 Close Closes the current folder returning to the parent upper folder MENU From any page press MENU to open the Card Edit menu This menu gives access to the various Card Edit pages When in this menu select a section using the VOLUME VALUE buttons press PAGE to select a page or press EXIT to exit the menu When in any page press EXIT to go back to the current oper ating mode Compe mensure transpose CED n ph s ToL PEREZ Bee 87 8 jets py Card Meru Load Format Eae Heu Dir Cor Rename Erase Uhilities PAGE 1 LOAD In this page you can load files from a card to the internal memory Press SD CARD and use the MENU button to reach this page mpe mensure iranspose BEB B 28 cmap HB cx oooo 7 Cardi Load H p HEHE SET P LILE zET ETHICA SET n tb LOAD OPEN CLOSE Loading all the User data You can load all the User data Performanc
463. on Sets the modulation amount of LFO step speed page 175 BPM MIDI Sync Off On 010 020 D Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the SrcOff Tempo tempo and notes r Fx 009 AJF 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on BPM MIDI 40 240 page 175 f Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo t Ex 009 010 Amt 100 100 Base Na eee ae Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 i Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed Fx 009 c Sweep Mode c Src Step Base Note A As A 23 0 da J d5 d 0 This parameter switches the flanger control mode With Selects the type of notes to specify the LFO step EU A Sweep Mode EG the flanger will sweep using the x 010 d B eos g S envelope generator This envelope generator is included Times x1 x32 Sets the number of notes to specify the LFO step speed 3 Fx 010 a the envelope a and not related to the Pitch EG amp Depth UT Filter EG or Amp EG Sets the depth of LFO modulation Effects 189 Pitch Phase Mod The Src parameter selects the source that starts the BPMIMIDI Sync Off On envelope generator If you select for example Gate the Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes s Ex 009 ye envelope generator will start when the note on message BPM MIDI 40 240 Is received d Selects MIDI Clock and assigns
464. on page 85 Cismpo measure fremsposs BB C G ce pity sasa Shee Chormd Acc ERES MEG G1 G88 Temeotiza Stulet Line Bossa Perf l i zE OPF pE Hai Er 4 Select the M easure parameter and go to a different position into the Song using the TEMPO VALUE con trols or the A VOLUME VALUE buttons Alternatively you can move the locator using the lt gt and lt lt gt gt but tons See Transport controls on page 87 5 Select the parameter type to insert edit or delete at the current position If an arrow appears next to a parameter the shown event has been inserted at the cur rent position 6 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to modify the selected event Delete it using the DELETE button When editing a parameter without the arrow next to it a new event is inserted 7 Exit the Chord Acc Step Mode by pressing the RECORD button 8 Press START STOP to listen to the results of your edit ing If they are fine save the Backing Sequence on a card MAIN PAGE BACKING SEQUENCE PLAY This is the main page of the Backing Sequence mode To access this page from another operating mode press the B SEQ button Note When in this page the keyboard doesn t play Backing Sequence icon Page header Cehend mpa j om cape IE ee Babe Song msesurs transpose BO BH 2B oooo REUS
465. on pressed to open the Split Point window While this window is open you can set the split point simply by playing the split point note on the keyboard Then release the SPLIT POINT button To memorize the selected split point note press the GLOBAL button then press WRITE to save the Global in memory see The Write window on page 125 This button doubles as a PREVIOUS EVENT function for the Backing Sequence and Song modes see chapters 12 and 13 _ G QUANTIZE gt Press this button to open the Groove Quantize window where you can select a realtime groove quantization to be applied to the Song only Sequencer 1 See Groove Quan tize window on page 71 This button doubles as a NEXT EVENT function for the Backing Sequence and Song modes see chapters 12 and 13 TEMPO LOCK This button turns the Tempo Lock function on or off ON When you select a different Style or Perfor mance the tempo doesn t change You can still change it using the DIAL or the TEMPO but tons OFF When you select a different Style or Perfor mance the memorized tempo value is auto matically selected SINGLE TOUCH This button turns the Single Touch function on or off ON When a different Style or the same again is selected a Single Touch Setting STS1 is auto matically selected meaning that the Realtime tracks and effects will change together with the Style tracks and effects OFF When you select a differen
466. on source ON until the fade in starts 192 Effects Pitch Phase Mod The following is an example of fade in where the LFO speed is increased from 1 0Hz to 4 0Hz when a note i on message is received AUTOFADE Src Gate1 LFO Frequency Hz 1 0 Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet i p Fs Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 LFO Frequency Mod AUTOFADE Amt 3 0 t Fx 010 020 prez Wet Dry Mod D mod AUTOFADE Switches between D mod and AUTOFADE for the effect balance modulation Vs Fx 027 The effect is off when a value for the dynamic modulation j Src Off Tempo D H E i 17 Mol source specified for the AUTOFADE Src parameter is smaller Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 than 64 and the effect is on when the value is 64 or higher The Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal AutoFade function is triggered when the value changes from 63 ance on page 175 or smaller to 64 or higher AUTOFADE Autoradeg n AUTOFADE Src Gatet 029 2Voice Res 7 1 LFO Freq ModcAUTOFADE Gate1 Signal A bs Lee This effect resonates the input signal at a specified pitch You E An Nos Of can set the pitch output level and pan settings for two reso M m cera nators individually You can control the resonance intensity AUTOFADE 1 0 3 0 4 0Hz j __ LFO Frequency
467. onding tracks STYLE TRACKS PAGE To see and edit the Style tracks press TRACK SELECT from the main page The TRACK SELECT LED turns on Cismgs Gmessurs Semepses engem S8 Coiyiepley ansa SortBeat ISTSI Hi Brush 2 Piani fe Pero Kit Guiteral Hiob Irre Ex Aafia UcuPadl Press the TRACK SELECT button once again to go back to the main page A H Style Track Programs Name of the Programs assigned to the Style tracks Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the volume of the corresponding tracks HOW TO SELECT PROGRAMS You can assign a different Program to each of the Realtime Keyboard and Style tracks See Selecting a Program on page 26 for more information After selecting a new Program save your changes into a Per formance Style or STS see below The Write window sec tion Note If you select a Program while grouped tracks Drum Per cussion or ACC are selected the Program will be assigned to the last selected track 42 Style Play operating mode The Write window THE WRITE WINDOW Open this window by pressing the WRITE button Here you can save all track settings into a Performance the Realtime Keyboard track settings into a Single Touch Setting or the Style track settings into the current Style Performance Cehord Cempe mossurs foo GEG cee ES feo Write
468. ons and settings In order to connect the Pa50SD to a computer you need to have a computer with the MIDI interface 1 Connect the Pa50SD and the computer as in the follow ing diagram MIDI OUT OO n 2 Press GLOBAL and go to Page 5 MIDI Controls Set the Local parameter to Off see page 127 MIDI 37 Connecting the Pa50SD to a MIDI accordion 3 Go to Page 4 MIDI Setup see page 126 Select the Ext Seq Setup Note The settings can change when new data is loaded from a card To protect the settings from loading use the Global Protect function see Global Protect on page 141 4 Press WRITE select Global and press ENTER to save the Global The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort 5 Set the Upper 1 track in play and press FULL UPPER in the KEYBOARD MODE section This way you can transmit to the external sequencer on the full keyboard range 6 At this point the notes played on the Upper 1 track go from the MIDI OUT of the Pa50SD to the MIDI IN of the computer MIDI interface The notes generated by the computer i e a Song played by its sequencer are sent thru the MIDI OUT of the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN connector of the Pa50SD The Local Off When the Pa50SD is connected to an external sequencer we recommend you to set the Pa50SD in Loc
469. or manice THE SONGS AND THE STANDARD MIDI FILE FORMAT The native Song file format of the Pa50SD is the Standard MIDI File SMF an universal standard set by all manufac turers You can read these files with any musical instrument or computer A difference could be in the sound played by each track If you recorded a Song with the Pa50SD Song mode using only General MIDI programs you can play the same Song on virtually any other musical instrument or computer If you used KORG native programs you cannot reproduce the same sounds on instruments from other brands When you read SMFs in Song Play mode there is no problem reading files made using only General MIDI sounds Sounds could be different when playing a Song made on a different instrument despite the wide compatibility of Pa50SD with other non standard formats differences may arise If so go to the Song operating mode and load the SME Then manually reassign the non matching Programs replacing them with similar Programs on the Pa50SD Then save the SMF again and you will be able to play it in Song Play mode with the correct Programs TRANSPORT CONTROLS You can use the separate transport controls for each of the two onboard sequencers Use the SEQI controls for Sequencer 1 and SEQ2 controls for Sequencer 2 See SEQUENCER TRANSPORT CONTROLS SEQI and SEQ2 on page 18 for more information MIDI CLOCK In Song Play mode the MIDI Clock is always generated b
470. or this function to work the SPLIT Key board Mode and LOWER Chord Scanning Mode must be selected Off The function is turned off Break Fill 1 Fill 2 When playing with a velocity higher than 95 on the Lower track the selected element is automatically triggered You can start or stop the Style by playing harder on the keyboard Start Stop 52 Style Record mode The Style s structure 10 STYLE RECORD MODE By entering the Style Record mode you can create your own Styles or edit an existing Style THE STYLE S STRUCTURE The term Style relates with music sequences automatically played by the arranger of the Pa50SD A Style consists of a predefined number of Style Elements E Pa50SD features ten different Style Elements Variation 1 4 Intro 1 2 Fill 1 2 Ending 1 2 When playing these Style Elements can be selected directly from the control panel using the corre sponding buttons To explain the Style structure we can use a tree structure as shown in the following diagram Pop Ballad Variation 1 CV1 I Drum 8 Perc amp Bass Acci Acc2 Acc3 Acc4 Acc5 CV2 CV3 CV4 CV5 CV6 Variation 2 Variation 3 Variation 4 Intro1 CV1 CV2 Intro 2 Fill 1 Fill 2 Ending 1 Ending 2 Each Style Element is made up of smaller units called Chord Variations CV but not all of them have the same number of CVs Variations 1 4 have up to 6 CVs each while the other Style Ele
471. ormance 40 Variation 14 Style Change 25 Style Play mode 40 51 Sync Key Sync LFO 120 MIDI Tempo LFO 121 Synchro Start Stop 15 T Tap Tempo 15 Tempo 40 Tempo Value section 16 Track Select 16 73 Tracks Drum mode 78 Drum Percussion 45 99 Keyboard Realtime tracks 24 40 70 Octave Transpose 18 Programs 17 Selecting 16 24 73 Volume 19 43 Transpose 18 241 242 Alphabetical Index Tune Velocity Intensity Amp Mod 118 Tune Program 108 Velocity Filter EG 114 Velocity Curve 125 U Volume Acc Seq 10 13 71 88 User Interface 20 Balance 10 Edit Environments 21 Individual tracks Song Play 75 Operating Modes 20 Individual tracks Song 95 Selecting Windows 21 Individual tracks Style Play 43 Master 10 13 71 88 V Volume Value section 16 19 VALUE slider AMS 123 W Variation 14 Write 15 Velocity Global 125 AMS 123 Style Play mode 42 Address KORG ITALY SpA Via Cagiata 85 l 60027 Osimo An Italy Web www korgpa com www korg co ijp www korg com www korg co uk O KORG Italy 2009 All rights reserved
472. ottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key board range to quantize If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percus sive instrument in a Drum track Note These parameters are available only when a Drum track is selected PAGE 18 EDIT TRANSPOSE Here you can transpose the Song a track or a part of a track Compe measure frenspose Je gt EBE C B IE oooo Edit Tranzraose Trked Uslue a galala ERCHA31 19 BothowiG 1 Toric After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected apart for Drum tracks 1 16 Selected track Value Value of the transpose in semitones S E Start End Use these parameters to set the starting S and ending E points of the range to transpose If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the key board range to transpose If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percus sive instrument in a Drum track PAGE 19 EDIT VELOCITY Here you can c
473. ou can assign the right Program to each Style track For more details see Style Tracks page on page 56 shore Camps measure transpose Je FE asm 288 i cooo D HewBossa W1 CU1 E r Bruch 2 Fiarc el Z fe Pero Kit Buaitactl 3 6 ocHouBess Strm ret god PFecuPiangz UcePudl ge Style Record mode 59 Style Record procedure Assign a Program to each track by using the PRO GRAM PERFORMANCE section Press START STOP to turn on its LED and enter the Step Record page See Step Record page on page 57 for more information on each parameter of this page Previous event Event to be inserted f tempo mossurs Ben crue 9 BE Steg Ul CUlNTIDE ES a p Erreta MEEH GI REE Peter dox kes 2 Led ME X V Step value Current position Waiting for a keystroke The first two lines a are the latest inserted event The last two lines b are the event currently in edit ready to be inserted The Empty event marks the beginning of the pattern when there are no events inserted It is automatically inserted when entering the Record mode It will be removed when an event is inserted The Maaa bb ccc parameter in b is the current posi tion This is the place where the note in edit will b
474. ou select a track the original key chord assigned to the selected track will be activated All recorded tracks will play back on that key chord For example if the original key chord for the Accl track is A7th when selecting the Accl tracks all the remaining tracks will play according to the A7th key chord In the above example you will record the Accl track in the AMajor key with notes that will comply with the A7th chord This is the pattern that will be recalled exactly as it was recorded when playing an A7th chord Copying the Key Chord value to all other tracks of the same Chord Variation While in this page you can keep the SHIFT button pressed while pressing one of the D VOLUME VALUE buttons to copy the Key of the currently selected track to all other tracks of the same Chord Variation This function is useful to speed up pattern programming and to avoid having different tracks in different keys within the same Chord Variation NTT The Note Transposition Table NTT determines how the arranger will transpose pattern notes when playing a chord that does not exactly match to the original chord of a Chord Variation For example if you only recorded a Chord Varia tion for the CMaj chord when a CMaj7 is recognized on the keyboard the arranger must transpose some notes to create the missing 7th Note To conform to Korg specifications it is advisable to set the NTT to No Transpose on the Intro 1 and Ending 1 Root The
475. ound Programs 4multieffect processor each with 89 effect types 160 Performances and 1 216 Single Touch Settings STS for fast setting of keyboard sounds and effects 304 Styles XDS Double Sequencer with Crossfader Style Record and Edit Full featured sequencer Song Record and Edit Integrated speakers for the most true sound reproduc tion Wide Custom Display LIVE PERFORMING Pa50SD has been carefully designed to be used live The real time word has its full meaning in this instrument Perfor mances allow the instant selection of all the tracks on the keyboard and a suitable Style STSs allow an instant selection of the keyboard tracks and Styles are the realtime backing companions for your realtime playing USEFUL LINKS Your preferred KORG dealer not only carries this keyboard but also a whole bunch of hardware and software accessories You should ask him for more Programs Styles and other useful music materials Each KORG distributor can supply you with useful informa tion Just give him a call for additional services In the English speaking world here are the relevant addresses USA KORG USA 316 South Service Road Melville New York 11747 USA el 1 516 333 9100 Fax 1 516 333 9108 Jam Industries 620 McCaffrey St Laurent QC Canada HAT INI Tel 514 738 3000 Fax 514 737 5069 KORG UK Ltd 9 Newmarket Court Kingston Milton Keynes Buckinghamshire MK10 0AU Canada U
476. ource is less than 64 off speed is selected and when the value is 64 or higher on is selected When Sw Toggle the wah effect is switched between on and off each time you press the pedal or operate the joystick m The switch will be turned on off each time the value of the modulation source exceeds 64 b Wah Sweep Range b Wah Sweep Src This parameter sets the sweep range of the wah center frequency A negative value will reverse the direction of sweep The wah center frequency can be controlled by the modulation source specified in the Wah Sweep Src parameter d Drive e Output Level The degree of distortion is determined by the level of input signal and the setting of Drive Raising the Drive setting will cause the entire volume level to increase Use the Output Level parameter to adjust the volume level The Output Level parameter uses the sig nal level input to the 3 Band EQ If clipping occurs at the 3 Band EQ adjust the Output Level parameter d Pre Low cut Cutting the signal in the low range before it is input to the Distortion will create a sharp distortion g Q h Q These parameters set the bandwidth of each equalizer The higher the value the narrower the band becomes Stereo In Stereo Out Feo Bandi Band2 Band3 Band4 Tem PEQ PEQ PEQ PEQ Trim on CH fra f HEQ DA 5 E del LEQ HEQ II AHAH PEQ PEQ PEQ PEQ Pigs PTUS Dp LE i a
477. ove the cursor using the DOWN and UP buttons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the DELETE button 4 Press F2 Rename to confirm The Are you sure mes sage appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort PAGE 8 UTILITIES 1 This page includes a set of card utilities Press SD CARD and use the MENU or PAGE buttons to reach this page Campo Goe wanaposs Buen EE Bass oooo A pSD CardInfo 550 Info Seve 0 5 Backur Data Reztorebata SD info Select this command to see the name of the inserted card and the free space on it If pressed without a card inserted the No card Unformat ted Press Exit warning appears Please insert a card and press ENTER or EXIT to abort SSD info Select this command to see the free space on the Solid State Disk SSD used as the system s internal memory Save OS This command starts an Operating System backup to save a copy of the instrument s Operating System on a card Note Should you not do a back up and your internal data is changed you can download the data from www korgpa com or ask your local KORG dealer 1 Select the Save OS command 2 Insert a card and press ENTER The following files are created on the card BPa50SD SYS NBPa50SD SYS OSPa50SD LZX
478. p amp Trbn 121 13 48 ArabStrings Strings amp Vocals 121 3 58 Dynabone Trp amp Trbn 121 0 49 StringsEns2 Strings amp Vocals v 121 0 59 Muted Trp Trp amp Trbn v 121 1 49 SweepersStr Strings amp Vocals 121 1 59 Muted Trp 2 Trp amp Trbn v 121 0 50 SynStrings1 Strings amp Vocals v 121 2 59 Wha Trumpet Trp amp Trbn 121 1 50 SynStrings3 Strings amp Vocals v 121 3 59 MutEnsemble Trp amp Trbn 121 2 50 Analog Str Strings amp Vocals 121 4 59 MutEnsembl2 Trp amp Trbn 121 3 50 AnalogVelve Strings amp Vocals 121 0 60 French Horn Brass v Programs Program Change order Factory Data 157 ccoo CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2 ccoo CC32 PC Name Pa50SD Bank GM2 121 1 60 FrenchHorn2 Brass v 121 0 69 EnglishHorn Woodwind v 121 2 60 French Sect Brass 121 1 69 EnglisHorn2 Woodwind 121 3 60 ClassicHorn Brass 121 0 70 Bassoon Woodwind v 121 4 60 Horns amp Ens Brass 121 0 71 Clarinet Woodwind v 121 0 61 BrassSect 1 Brass v 121 1 71 Jazz Clarin Woodwind 121 1 61 BrassSect 2 Brass v 121 2 71 Clarinet G Woodwind 121 2 61 Tight Brass Brass 121 3 71 Sect Winds Woodwind 121 3 61 Glen amp Friend Brass 121 4 71 Sect Winds2 Woodwind 121 4 61 BigBandBrs Brass 121 5 71 ClarinetEns Woodwind 121 5 61 Sax amp Brass B
479. p Simulation This effect combines a mono type wah and an amp simula This effect combines a mono type decimator and an amp tion You can change the order of the effect connection simulation You can change the order of the effect connec tion Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left Routing D Pre LPFOff On Turn the harmonic noise caused by lowered sampling on and off r a ve Fx 014 t gt Wah gt Amp Simulation Filter a i i High Damp 0 100 Sets the ratio of high range damping Righto o D Sampling Freq Hz Sampling Frequency 1 00k 48 00kH Wet Dry b Sets the sampling frequency z Resolution 4 24 Sets the data bit length vs Fx 014 E D Output Level 0 100 Sets the decimator output level os Fx 014 W Frequency Bottom 0 100 d A Amplifier Type SS EL84 6L6 Sets the lower limit of the wah center frequency t Fx 009 Selects the type of guitar amplifier a Frequency Top 0 100 7 RoutingDECI AMP AMP DECI Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency ts Fx 009 Switches the order of the wah and amp simulation connection W Sweep Mode Auto D mod LFO Wet DryDry 1 99 99 1 Wet Selects the control from auto wah modulation source and LFO Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on b tS Fx 009 Drez page 175 yes Src Off Tempo SrcOff Tempo Selects the modulation source for the wah when Sweep Mode D mod f Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance o
480. p for the selected oscillator See AMS Alternate Modulation Source list on page 123 Velocity cannot be selected Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have The actual volume will be determined by multiplying the value of the changes produced by the amp EG with the values of Alternate Modulation etc and if the levels of the amp EG are low the modulation applied by Alternate Modulation will also be less For example if AMS is set to Joystick Y positive values of this parameter will cause the volume to increase when you push the joystick However if the EG settings etc have already raised the volume to its maximum level the volume cannot be increased further With negative values of this parameter the volume will decrease when the joystick is pushed 99 99 Intensity value PAGE 14 AMP LFO1 These parameters let you use LFO1 see Page 17 LFO1 on page 120 and LFO 2 see Page 18 LFO2 on page 121 to control the volume of the selected oscillator Chord temps mossurs transpose fg Selected Decl Intensiti 4 ANE Jowstick v Intensiti 4 Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alter natively you can select oscillators using the F1 F4 buttons Intensity This parameter specifies the depth
481. p2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 143 Zap2 Off 28 E1 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off 281 Noise White Off 29 F1 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 30 FH 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 145 DJ Scratch2 7 31 G1 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 74 DrumStickHit Off 32 G 1 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 142 Zap1 Off 33 A1 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 249 Click Off 34 AR 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 213 Triangle Open Off 35 B1 15 BD Dance 2 Off 29 BD Deep 88 Off 21 BD Hip 3 Off 21 BD Hip 3 Off 36 c2 138 FM El Tom Off 29 BD Deep 88 Off 25 BD Ambi Kick Off 13 BD Squash Off 37 C 2 141 PR House06 Off 126 88 Rimshot Off 141 PR House06 Off 319 Rek Jingle Off 38 D2 139 Real El Tom Off 124 88 SD Off 61 SD Tiny Off 65 SD Vintage4 Off 39 D 2 127 88 Claps Off 127 88 Claps Off 127 88 Claps Off 127 88 Claps Off 40 E2 58 SD Hip 5 Off 124 88 SD Off 125 99 SD Off 51 SD Rap Off 4 F2 139 Real El Tom Off 133 88 Tom Off 257 Tribe Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 42 F 2 90 HH1 Open 2 1 128 88 HH Close 1 130 99 HH Close 1 99 HH Old TiteClos 1 43 G2 139 Real El Tom Off 133 88 Tom Off 82 Tom Processed Off 79 Tom 2 Floor Off 44 G 2 94 HH2 Foot 1 129 88 HH Open 1 96 HH2 Open Off 103 HH AlpoClose Off 45 A2 139 Real El Tom Off 133 88 Tom Off 1
482. pecify the LFO step speed f t Fx 010 eye Times x1 x32 Sets the number of notes to specify the LFO step speed Fx 010 Manual 0 100 9 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied h Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Resonance 100 100 Sets the resonance amount ts Fx 023 l High Damp 0 10096 Sets the resonance damping amount in the high range 1 Fx 023 Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 ts Fx 010 023 Drez Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 025 Envel Phser Stereo Envelope Phaser This stereo phaser uses an envelope generator for modula tion You will obtain the same pattern of phasing each time you play You can also control the Phaser directly using the modulation source Stereo In Stereo Out Left o r o 3 Wet Dry jB Phaser t i Resonance High Damp gt Phaser i E Y Right o o Daihen Drmod sro C EG RlackDecay p See ode L Manu Bottom L Manual Bottom 0 100 Sets the lower limit of the frequency range for the effect on the left channel vs Ex 009 a L Manu Top L Manual Top 0 100 Sets the upper limit of the
483. play with gt GBL within the 4 Once you have selected the type of data required press ds a 3 F2 Save to confirm the selection ong and Globa chapters are saved In 5 The content of the target card appears the Global Saving the whole memory content You can save the whole content of the memory with a single i operation F3 LILE SET 1 Insert the target card into the card drive C ETHNICA SET Es T WE EH CLOSE Cehord temps sasure Je LE em BES Clini Gaz oooo E tardi Saue O HELHET wanspoae B 28 ostave 2 The whole content All of the internal memory is already selected Press F2 Save to confirm the selec tion At this point you can 136 Card Edit environment Page 2 Save Create a new SET folder see Creating a new SET folder on page 137 Save onto an existing SET folder If you are saving into an existing folder move the desired SET folder to the first line of the display using the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE con trols Once the target folder is selected press F2 Save to save the files The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Warning After confirming all data in the target folder is deleted When the operation is completed the Wait indicator disappears the so
484. po measure ranepose li ig 888 C B eu oooo Coms oo Recileuwsorna Reciluerchb Tres SE S EP Metroid Resol Meters Sel Terro TemEorButo Use the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Rec Recording Mode parameter Use these buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select the Step Dub Step Overdub or the StepOwr Step Overwrite recording mode The Step Overdub mode lets you add events to the existing events The Step Overwrite mode will overwrite all existing events Press SEQ1 PLAY STOP to turn its LED on and enter the Step Record page See Step Record page on 92 Song operating mode Step Record procedure page 94 for more information on each parameter of this page Previous event Event to be inserted arp paun romeo 3m es C o opoo e Sher wr FS MA G1 Meier dox kes 2 Used DIES Current position Step value Waiting for a keystroke The first two lines a are the latest inserted event The second two lines b are the event currently in edit ready to be inserted The Empty event marks the beginning of the Song when there are no events inserted It is automatically inserted when entering the Record mode It will be removed when an event is inserted The Maaa bb ccc parameter
485. pression Keyboard Expression FX CC13 Ctl LIST OF SOUNDS ASSIGNABLE TO THE PADS You can assign the following sounds to the Pads SOUND NAME SOUND NAME SOUND NAME SOUND NAME 1 ChinaGong 36 DistSlid2 71 Darbuka1 106 HeartBeat 2 Crash 1 37 Sticks 72 Darbuka2 107 Footstep1 3 Crash 2 38 Cowbell 73 Darbuka3 108 Footstep2 4 88 Crash 39 Agogo 1 74 Darbuka4 109 Stadium 5 Ride 1 40 Agogo 2 75 Darbuka5 110 DoorCreak 6 Ride 2 41 Whistle 1 76 Darbuka6 111 DoorSlam 7 China 42 Whistle 2 77 Darbuka7 112 CarEngine 8 Ride Bell 43 Sh Guiro 78 Darbuka8 113 Car Stop 9 Splash 44 LongGuiro 79 DoufRimAk 114 Car Pass 10 RevCymbal 45 Cuica 1 80 Tef 1 115 Car Crash 11 DragonGng 46 Cuica 2 81 Tef 2 116 Crickets 12 OrchCymb1 47 Triangle1 82 Tef 3 117 Train 13 OrchCymb2 48 Triangle2 83 Tef 4 118 Helicopt 14 OrcSdRoll 49 88Cowbell 84 Tef 5 119 Gun Shot 15 OrchSnare 50 TimbLow 85 Tef 6 120 MachinGun 16 Timpani 1 51 TimbHi 86 Rik 1 121 Laser Gun 17 Timpani 2 52 TimbRim1 87 Rik 2 122 Explosion 18 Timpani 3 53 TimbRim2 88 Rik 3 123 Dog 19 Timpani 4 54 CongaLow 89 RekDomAk 124 H Gallop 20 Orch Hit 55 CongaHi 90 OpenBells 125 Birds 1 21 BrassFall 56 CongaSlap 91 Sagat 1 126 Birds 2 22 Ch Bell 57 CongaMute 92 Sagat 2 127 Thunder 23 JingleBel 58 Tamb Acc1 93 Davul 128 Sea Shore 24 WindChim1 59 Tamb Acc2 94 Ramazan 1 129 River 25 WindChim2 60 Tamb Push 95 Ramazan 2 130 Bubble 26 WindChim3 61 TambOpen 96 Ramazan 3 131 Cat 27 VibraSlap 62 Castanet1 97 Kup 1 132 Lion 28 RainStick
486. procedure Wait for the procedure to be completed then try again Files in Use Not Deleted Press Exit This message may appear during an Erase operation Files used by other procedures have not been erased Files in use have not been overwritten This message may appear during a Copy with Overwrite operation Files used by other procedures have not been cop ied File Is Protected Press Exit You were trying to overwrite a protected file File Not Found Press Exit The file is not in the current medium The card has probably been replaced before finishing the card operation Insert the card again and try again Format Completed Press Exit Formatting has been successfully completed Format aborted Press Exit Format operation aborted Format failed Press Exit An error occurred during Format Format operation aborted Illegal name Press Exit The name is not allowed on Pa series instruments Insert an SD card and press Enter While saving the operating system Save OS on page 140 or executing a Backup procedure see Backup Data on page 140 Pa50SD asks for a card Invalid Copy Parameter Press Exit The copy operation was not possible Maybe you were trying to copy a file over itself or copying nested folders Load Failed Press Exit The Load procedure has not been executed Try again or try with different files Make New Dir Failed Press Exit While trying to create a new directory an error occu
487. quivalent of a PRO GRAM PERFORMANCE button B CC00 This non editable parameter shows the value of the Control Change CC 00 message or Bank Select MSB for the selected Program C CC32 This non editable parameter shows the value of the Control Change CC 32 message a k a Bank Select LSB for the selected Program D PC This non editable parameter shows the value of the Program Change PC message for the selected Program Values are in the standard 0 127 MIDI numbering format Note Some manufacturers could use the 1 128 numbering sys tem when connecting your Pa50SD to an instrument of this kind increment the PC value by 1 unit Effects In Program mode the Program uses its own effects instead of relying on A D effects Two effect processors FX1 and FX2 are available The MIDI channel In Program mode Pa50SD receives and transmits on the same channel of the Upper 1 track If the Global channel is assigned notes can be received also on this channel See Page 6 MIDI IN Channels on page 127 and Page 10 MIDI OUT Channels on page 129 for more information SOUND PROGRAMS AND DRUM PROGRAMS Pa50SD features two different kinds of Programs Sound Programs These are normal instrument Pro grams like pianos strings basses Drum Programs These are drum and percussion kits where each note of the keyboard is a different percussive instrument You can find Drum Programs in the DRUM KIT and USER DK bank
488. r 2 Program G Upper 3 Pro gram H Lower Name of the Programs assigned to the Realtime Keyboard tracks Use these buttons to select mute unmute or change the volume of the corresponding tracks TRACKS 1 8 PAGE To see and edit tracks 1 8 press TRACK SELECT from the main page The TRACK SELECT LED turns on Press the TRACK SELECT button twice to go back to the main page chord tempo meaeurs transposes 888 E B j pgm E coco Com 5 8 ona a Pial Pianol B DeStrings uitati B Leako SirreErZ zai ErazzuHonn o Uca A H Tracks 1 8 Programs Name of the Programs assigned to tracks 1 8 Use these but tons to select mute unmute or change the volume of the cor responding tracks Song Play operating mode 73 Tracks 1 8 page TRACKS 9 16 PAGE To see and edit tracks 9 16 press TRACK SELECT once from the Tracks 1 8 page or twice from the main page The TRACK SELECT LED begins flashing Press the TRACK SELECT button again to go back to the main page Chord Campo monsurs J p B88 qu CL s H sj 0 0 0 i g amo Si bbesons 3 Strings UocsEne fus DkStrirds Bassi fi f Legato Strreires ia ErazzuHorn Strine A H Tracks 9 16 Programs Name of the Programs assigned to tracks 9 16 Use these but tons to sele
489. r Styles even into the Fac tory Styles banks from 8 BEAT 16 BEAT 1 to TRADI TIONAL This way you can personalize your Factory Style banks Please note that the Save All procedure always saves only the USER Style banks Note This parameter is automatically set to On when turning the instrument off Note Should your accidentally delete some Factory Data reload the Backup data contact your KORG dealer or service center or download the data from www korgpa com 142 Card Edit environment Page 9 Utilities 2 APPENDIX 144 Factory Data Styles 17 FACTORY DATA STYLES Note You can remotely select Styles on the Pa50SD by sending it Bank Select MSB CC 0 Bank Select LSB CC 32 and Program Change messages on the Control channel see page 127 CCHO CC 32 PC Bank 8 16 Beat 1 CC 0 CC 32 PC Bank 8 16 Beat 2 CC 0 CC 32 PC Ballad 1 0 0 O Soft Beat
490. r position by pressing the DELETE button 6 When you have finished writing a name for the new midifile press F2 Save to confirm The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort REALTIME RECORDING PAGE While you are in Backing Sequence mode press RECORD then one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons to access the Realtime Recording mode The RECORD LED turns on aa Clips Te D CHD oE gni Bag Dom am f coco Casa c Pte a Heutona Sibule MeuEnsza SEES Ferfisi Hi Meteoitnil Rezal HI FT Pac REC Sel Terro CheAect REC Style This non editable parameter shows the selected Style If no Style is selected the name will be empty You can select a dif ferent Style using the STYLE section see Selecting a Style on page 26 0 99 This non editable parameters shows the remaining recording space in memory as a percentage Perf or STS Performance or STS This non editable parameter shows the selected Performance or STS depending on the last item selected If no Perfor mance or STS is selected the name will be empty You can select a different Performance using the PROGRAM PER FORMANCE section see Selecting a Performance on page 25 To select one of the four STS for the current Style use the F1 F4 buttons Resol Resolution Use this parameter to set the quantization during recording Quantization is a w
491. rameter to a higher value to apply the effect to a lower range sound set this to a lower value h Resonance This parameter sets the intensity of resonance for the voice pattern A larger value will add more character to the sound 014 Decimator Stereo Decimator This effect creates a rough sound like a cheap sampler by low ering the sampling frequency and data bit length You can also simulate noise unique to a sampler aliasing Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Wet Dry Pre LPF Resolution High Damp Output Level N 2 Decimator ga X Sampling Frequency Y Y N Fi gt Decimator N g PreLPF Resolution High Damp Output zt Wet Dry E Pre LPF Off On Selects whether the harmonic noise caused by a decrease in sampling fre a quency is generated or not d High Damp 96 0 100 Sets the ratio of cut of the high range Sampling Freq Sampling Frequency Hz 1 00k 48 00kHz Sets the sampling frequency Dz b Src Off tempo Selects the modulation source of the sampling frequency Amt 48 00k 48 00kHz Sets the modulation amount of the sampling frequency LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed Drz Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed Depth 0 100 Sets the
492. rass 121 6 71 Woodwinds Woodwind 121 6 61 Glen amp Boys Brass 121 7 71 Folk Clarin Woodwind 121 7 61 Trp amp Brass Brass 121 0 72 Piccolo Woodwind v 121 8 61 AttackBrass Brass 121 1 72 Small Orch Woodwind 121 9 61 Trumpet Ens Brass 121 2 72 Nay Woodwind 121 10 61 TromboneEns Brass 121 0 73 Flute Woodwind v 121 11 61 Trombones Brass 121 1 73 Jazz Flute Woodwind 121 12 61 TightBrass2 Brass 121 2 73 FluteSwitch Woodwind 121 13 61 Fat Brass Brass 121 3 73 FluteDyn5th Woodwind 121 14 61 Dyna Brass Brass 121 4 73 Flute Frull Woodwind 121 15 61 Brass Expr Brass 121 5 73 Orch Flute Woodwind 121 16 61 Brass Band Brass 121 6 73 Flute Muted Woodwind 121 17 61 Film Brass Brass 121 7 73 WoodenFlute Woodwind 121 18 61 Brass Slow Brass 121 8 73 Bambu Flute Woodwind 121 19 61 Fanfare Brass 121 9 73 Flute 2 Woodwind 121 20 61 Movie Brass Brass 121 0 74 Recorder Woodwind v 121 21 61 Power Brass Brass 121 1 74 Recorder 2 Woodwind 121 22 61 Dyna Brass2 Brass 121 0 75 Pan Flute Woodwind v 121 23 61 Sfz Brass Brass 121 1 75 Kawala Woodwind 121 24 61 Dbl Brass Brass 121 0 76 BlownBottle Woodwind v 121 25 61 Brass Hit Brass 121 0 77 Shakuhachi Woodwind v 121 26 61 Brass Fall Brass 121 1 77 Old Shaku Woodwind 121 0 62 Syn Brass 1 Brass v 121 2 77 Shaku2 Woodwind 121 1 62 Syn Brass 3 Brass v 121 0 78 Whistle Woodwind v 121 2 62 AnalogBras1 Brass v 121 1 78 Whistle 2 Woodwind 121 3 62 Jump Brass Brass v
493. rc Off Gate2 Dmpr Depth 0 100 Selects the modulation source that controls the gate when Envelope Select e Sets the depth of LEO modulation is set to D mod ial Feedback 100 100 G Input Reverb Mix Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the feedback amount 1 Fx 020 E the balance between the dry and reverb sounds of the gate control sig g F EQ Trim 0 100 m fi Threshold 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 a Q iriput fouet n pag Sets the gate threshold level F Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB G Polarity R Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 i ER g n il in h Switches between non invert and invert of the gate on off state Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 415dB t Fx 005 Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 G Attack 1 100 F Cho Fing Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Sets the attack time ts Fx 005 Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger t Fx 010 020 Release CA0 Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Sets the release time os Fx 005 Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger ts Fx 060 Un mulla Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dze Dz Src Off Tempo i Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Table Selects the modulation source of th
494. rd recognition The buttons of the CHORD SCANNING section have a par ticular effect on the Chord channels if you have selected LOWER the chord recognition mode will be set by the Chord Recognition Mode parameter in the Style Play mode see page 50 if you have selected UPPER or FULL the chord recogni tion mode will always be Fingered 2 you need to play at least three notes in order for the chord to be detected These two channels are especially useful for accordion players to assign a different Chord channel to the chords and the bass played with the left hand In this way chords and bass will participate to the creation of chords for the chord recogni tion of the automatic accompaniment THE CONTROL CHANNEL You can set a MIDI IN channel as the Control channel see page 127 to select Styles and Performance from an external device See the Appendix for a list of messages corresponding to Pa50SD internal data MIDI SETUP You can play Pa50SD with an external controller and use it simply as a gorgeous sound generator To help you configure the MIDI channels we have provided a set of MIDI Setups Go to Global mode to select the one that fits your MIDI needs See Page 4 MIDI Setup on page 126 for more information We recommend you to consider each MIDI Setup as a start ing point you can freely tweak Once you have selected the most appropriate MIDI Setup for the connection to be made you can modify the p
495. read to the Fx 010 prez sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from n St Off Tempo each other Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 St r o In lereo Out Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Pe Zt P ance on page 175 Wet Dry Phaser x g Resonance h Wet Dry The peak shape of the positive and negative Feedback m High Damp value is different The harmonics will be emphasized aser H 7 A when the effect sound is mixed with the dry sound if you Righto Snares set a positive value for both Resonance and Wet Dry LFO Phase a n omae oe and if you set a negative value for both Resonance and Wet Dry g High Damp LFO Waveform Triangle Sine This parameter sets the amount of damping of the reso go SSe LFO Saleen nance in the high range Increasing the value will cut LFO Shape 100 100 high range harmonics Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed ts Fx 020 b LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 010 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed s Fx 009 prez Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed 190
496. recording is controlled via the modula tion source or the input signal level Dae c Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls recording when Envelope Select is set to D mod va Threshold 0 100 d Sets the recording start level when Envelope Select is set to Input va e Response 0 100 Sets the speed of the response to the end of recording S Fx 031 f Direct Mix Always On Always Off Cross Fade Selects how a dry sound is mixed ts Fx 031 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Der Src Off Tempo 9 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a Rec Mode b Reverse Time When Rec Mode is set to Single you can set up to 1320msec for Reverse Time If recording starts during the reverse playback the playback will be interrupted When Rec Mode is set to Multi you can make another recording during the reverse playback However the max imum Reverse Time is limited to 660msec If you wish to record a phrase or rhythm pattern set Rec Mode to Single If you record only one note set Rec Mode to Multi The Reverse Time parameter specifies the maximum duration of the reverse playback The part in excess of this limit will not be played in reverse If you wish to add shor
497. rial 3 Playing a Song Select other Variations There are four VARIATION buttons These are four different versions of the same Style Try them all You can go to a Variation after a Fill Just press a FILL button then immediately after a VARIATION button Stop it OK you could say O that s easy I know how to do it I can just press that big red START STOP button again Yes you are perfectly right But that s only the easy way Let us suggest a different way PRESS ENDING1 OR ENDING2 An ending is instantaneously called and will begin playing to led the Style to a colorful end As usual ENDING is pre programmed while ENDING2 asks for your chord progres sion In Sync A guy from the end of the classroom stands up asking Huh Sir and what if I want to avoid all that START STOP thing I mean I prefer to have my hands free for music Good point The SYNCHRO button is there right for this While the Style is stopped press the SYN CHRO button The SYNCHRO START LED begins flashing on The Syn chro Start function is enabled Play a chord on the keyboard You must play a chord for the chord recognition engine Usu ally it will be on the left of the split point but it depends on the CHORD SCANNING section The Style starts Stop the Style as you better prefer You know how to do isn t it Need more information Go to Style Play operating mode on page 40 The Reference
498. ritten accidentally and lost If you set the card s switch to the protected setting it will be impossible to write or erase data on the card or to format it If you need to save edited data on the card move the switch back to its orig inal unprotected setting Write protect switch Protected i Inserting exchanging cards Inserting a card Insert the card making sure that it is oriented correctly The gold contacts should be facing down and the angled corner to your right card I SDcard slot SD card Removing a card Press the card inward and release it and the card will pop out Note Before you can use an SD card you must format it on the Pa50SD The card may not work if it was formatted on another device Organizing your data into separate folders We suggest to organize your data into separate folders instead of saving many files into the root i e the main level of the card This allows for faster accesses to the card thus a quicker response of the Pa50SD to your CARD commands LOADING DATA CREATED WITH THE PA80 PA60 Pa50SD data is perfectly interchangeable with its Pa80 and Pa60 counterparts The only data Pa50SD can t load from Pa80 Pa60 is the following Digital Drawbar Programs Input 1 2 settings VHGI Vocal Guitar Processor Board settings ECS settings TO HOST port setting Audio Output routing At the same time Pa80 and Pa60 can read any data created
499. ro gram 000 127 Chain 2 gt 1 Use this parameter to send the output of effect 2 to the input of effect 1 000 127 Effect level Level of the signal exiting the effect 2 going back to the effect 1 Send to Master This parameters allows you to decide if the direct effected signal must go to the Master or just the effected signal Yes Only the effected signal will be sent to the Audio Outputs The direct non effected sig nal will not be sent 122 Program operating mode Page 20 2 editing No Both the effected signal and direct signals will be sent to the Audio Outputs PAGE 20 FX1 EDITING In this page you can edit the effected assigned to the FX1 A or C effect processor usually reverb See the Effects chap ter for more information PAGE 21 FX2 EDITING In this page you can edit the effected assigned to the FX2 B or D effect processor usually modulating effect See the Effects chapter for more information Program operating mode 123 AMS Alternate Modulation Source list AMS ALTERNATE MODULATION SOURCE LIST Amp KTrk Amp Keyboard Track Amp keyboard tracking within the same oscillator Poly AT Poly After Touch Polyphonic After Touch transmitted from the Pa50SD only as sequence data Joystick Y Joystick Y vertical upward direction CC 01 Joystick Y Joystick Y vertical downward direction CC 02 JS Y amp AT 2 Joy Stick Y amp Af
500. roll the list up G H Scroll Down Scroll the list down TEMPO VALUE section These controls scroll the list up or down F1 SD Press this button after replacing a card in the card drive The new card will be read and the file list shown on the display will be updated F2 Load Load the Song at the first line of the display F3 Open Opens the selected folder file whose name begins with the symbol F4 Close Closes the current folder returning to the parent upper 90 Song operating mode Save Song page SAVE SONG PAGE The new or edited Song is contained in RAM and is lost when turning the instrument off The Song is also lost when you overwrite it in Backing Sequence Record mode or when switching to the Song Play mode You must save to a card any Song you wish to preserve The Song is saved as a Standard MIDI File SMF Note When saving a Song as a SMF an empty measure in automatically inserted to the beginning of the Song This mea sure contains various Song initialization parameters 1 Ifyou are in an edit page press EXIT to go back to the Main page 2 Select the Save Song button The Save Song page appears Comps measure ramsposes J 888 ats pley p Save Sona COo D HER HRPE MID C penas PEASCHG MID 4 SD SAVE OPEH OIE 3 Move the folder where you wish to sa
501. root note in CMaj C is transposed to the missing notes 5th The 5th note in CMaj G is transposed to the missing notes i Series All original patterns must be programmed on the Maj7 or min7 chords When loading old Korg i Series instruments this option is automatically selected No Transp No transposition applied The pattern will always play as recorded This is the standard setting of Intro 1 and Ending 1 in Korg s origi nal Styles As recorded with NTT Root or 5th When you play a CM7 When you play a CM7 Key Chord 2 CMaj with NTT Root with NTT Sth TU LAI MEME As recorded with NTT i Series When you play a CMaj When you play a CM7 Key Chord CM7 with NTT i Series with NTT i Series JT MUI UT STYLE TRACKS PAGE While in the main Style Record page press TRACK SELECT to jump to this page Here you can see and select any Style track Style Element Chord Variation Style in record edit in record edit Cmpa measure Wranepose pE ies Piaroal Buiter dl Sitrrebne2 MosPadil Wicca BiccuPianoz amp 8 B Style tracks Program name Select a track using the VOLUME VALUE buttons Select a Program using the PROGRAM PERFORMANCE section While in this page you can set the track s volume using the VOLUME VALUE buttons Since the track s volume is mem orized in the Style Performance and not in the p
502. rotor in the low range and the horn in the high range separately The effect also simu lates the stereo microphone settings sound output from stereo speakers are mixed Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o o Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Wet Dry Left o Wet Dry Ne g Rotary Speaker Horn Rotor gt Mic Distance Balance gt Mic Spread Pitch Shifter L er 7 1 Speaker Simulation Righto o Wet Dry Righto D ZZ Mode Switch Rotate Stop d D ZZ Speed Switch SlowrFast CLEO Tr Sgt mnt D ze Manual Speed Control Pitch Shift cent 100 100cent M a i ode Switch Rotate Stop Sets the pitch difference from the input signal iS Switches between speaker rotation and stop Dz b eon EOM Triangle Square Src Off Tempo RECI SVETDEm a Selects the modulation source that toggles between rotation and stop LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sw To i ggle Moment Sets the LFO speed S Fx 009 Daz Selects switching mode of the modulation source that toggles between rota Src Off Tempo tion and stop ad Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Speed Switch Slow Fast Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Switches the speaker rotation speed between slow and fast xese Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed Src Off Tempo BPM MIDI Sync
503. rred Media Write Protected Press Exit The card is physically protected Remove the protection and try again Memory full This message appears in Backing Sequence mode when the memory for recording a Song is full No Card Unformatted Sh Enter to Format Either there is no card in the drive or the card is unformat ted Insert a card and try again or press SHIFT ENTER to start formatting the card Not a Pa series or Corrupted File The file you are trying to load is not compatible with Pa series instruments Not Enough Space on Media There is no more space to load save or copy data The card operation will be aborted Replace the card and use an empty card to save your data Should this message appear during loading the SSD Solid State Disk based internal memory is full Nothing to Rename Press Exit There are no items to rename Error messages amp Troubleshooting 237 Error messages Overwrite Existing File Yes No You are writing data on an existing SET folder or on a file of type MID or JBX Overwrite on Backup Enter Exit Press ENTER YES to overwrite files carrying the same name on the target device or EXIT NO to avoid overwriting any file Overwrite on Copy Enter Exit Press ENTER YES to overwrite files carrying the same name on the target device Press Exit NO to avoid overwriting any file File that are not yet on card are always copied Overwrite Protected Files Ent
504. rument off The Song is also lost when you overwrite it in Record mode or when switching to the Song Play mode You must save to a card any Song you wish to pre serve 1 If you are in Record mode RECORD LED on stop the sequencer and press RECORD to go back to the Backing Sequence Playback page 2 Select the Save Song button The Save Song page appears shard Camps sensus TES mg ME Cay Oey pm Boi Save Song aes A gt HELLHEE MID pt C MEHE PASOMG MID Lh TT HAE OPEN QE 3 Move the folder where you wish to save your Song to the first line of the display using the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Press F3 Open to open it Close the current folder by pressing F4 Close 4 When in the selected folder you can save the Song over an existing file or create a new file To overwrite an existing file move it to the first line of the display To create a new file move the NEW_NAME MID item to the first line of the display 5 When the NEW NAME MID item is selected press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons You are prompted to assign a name to the new folder IE HAE MID Move the cursor using the DOWN and UP buttons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button Delete a character at the curso
505. ry Styles you can have DIRECT SD Styles directly accessed from the card Just insert a card and press the DIRECT SD Style bank The card drive will read the first in alphabetical order SET folder in the card and will give you direct access to the Styles it contains no loading required Browse through the DIRECT SD Styles using the PAGE but tons You can have up to 6 pages and up to 48 DIRECT SD Styles in a card Folder DIRECT SD pages SET gt STYLE gt USERO1 1 2 SET gt STYLE gt USERO2 3 4 SET gt STYLE gt USERO3 5 6 How to make the DIRECT SD bank To configure the DIRECT SD bank save your Styles into the first folder in the card Folders are read in alphabetical order Note The following procedures requires you overwrite the User Style banks Save these banks before proceeding to avoid loosing important data 1 Insert the card into the card drive 2 Press SD CARD and go to the Load page chord Cempa sasure rer e Se ae m emn Card Load ERE f HEHHEPE SET lt C LILE SET ETHICA SET la SoD LOAD OPEN CLOSE 3 Use the F1 SD button to rescan the SD card Load three banks of Styles to be transformed into the DIRECT SD bank 5 Go to the Save page Cmpa measure s T I ES G2 BEE ee BS Card Save Bes Pe AL tp W
506. s Before pressing MENU to enter the edit environment you should select a Program of the type you wish to edit or create Notes pointing to special Drum Program features are marked by the Em icon MENU While in any other page of the Program operative mode press MENU to open the Program edit menu This menu gives access to the various Program edit sections When in the menu select an edit section using the VOLUME VALUE A G buttons select an edit page using PAGE or press EXIT to exit the menu When in an edit page press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Program operating mode Coho mpo Tramepces j 2D rud Edit EHI 0 Basic Aine Sane les LFU Fitch Effects Filter Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE Select an edit section from the Menu and or use the PAGE buttons to reach the desired page 106 Program operating mode The Compare function Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Program mode All edit pages share the same structure Oscillator in edit Program icon Page header Page number Cmpa s T pg Same lez ME Hi Banken L2BcousticPiano H Rewerset Parameters Parameters value Program icon When switched on
507. s MIDI Clock and assigns tempo ts Fx 009 d a P is Depth 0 100 Base Note 9 25 2 25 4 d3 d o Sets the depth of LFO modulation i Selects the t f notes that ify the LF os Fx cts the type of notes that specify the LFO speed x 009 e Envelope Amount 100 4100 Times x1 x16 Sets the changes of the modulation depth according to the input signal level Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 is Depth 0 100 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the depth of LFO modulation Dmz Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 mod e Src Off Tempo p Selects the modulation source of the depth of modulation n Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the depth of modulation Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet ance on page 175 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dz sre Off Tempo d LFO Frequency Hz d Envelope Amount Hz Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 e Depth e Envelope Amount Amt 100 100 These parameters set the modulation via an envelope input signal level The LFO speed is obtained by adding the LFO Fre quency value to the Envelope Amount value multi plied by the input signal The LFO modulation depth is
508. s global settings Among the global settings saved with this page are also the Preference parameters of the Style Play and Song Play mode plus the Global Protect parameter of the Card mode The Split Point is also saved here Ciempo measure CD Gr guge BS a8 Coy piy Weite Global Fress Eriter to store the Global While this page is on the display press ENTER twice The parameters are saved to the Flash ROM and will stay in memory even when turning the instrument off MENU From any page press MENU to open the Global edit menu This menu gives access to the various Global edit pages When in this menu select a section using the VOLUME VALUE buttons press PAGE to select a page or press EXIT to exit the menu When in a page press EXIT to go back to current operating mode Style Play Song Play Song Backing Sequence mpe mossurs transpose m T Gap B8H B H 28 Gm 388 Blobal Meru General Ctl Midi Out Pdl FieSld Hidiset tl Midi In PAGE 1 GENERAL CONTROLS This page contains various general parameters setting the status of the keyboard the speakers and the metronome Cismpo measure Ssmeposs DI t ir SE Sed oooo octave bl Ger Corbeols Le Queue 3 Hs Ture H
509. s lets you adjust the Sequencer s volume alone while the Realtime Keyboard tracks are not affected by this slider Use the BALANCE slider to mix between Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 Move it to the center for the maximum volume of both sequencers SEQUENCER VOLUME EFFECTS IN SONG PLAY MODE The Pa50SD is equipped with four effect processors or DSPs Digital Signal Processors In Song Play mode you can have two or four effects at the same time depending on the midi file you are reading Note When playing back a Song that makes use of all four effects A D you can t edit any parameter devoted to the effects These parameters appear greyed out in the display A Song created on the Pa50SD in Song or Backing Sequence mode can use up to 4 effects usually 2 reverbs 2 modulating effects each track may use the A B or C D pair A Standard MIDI File will only use 2 effects usually 1 reverb 1 modulating effect This lets you use the remaining 2 effects for the Realtime tracks When using both sequencers at the same time and the S2 FX Mode is set to A B Mode see page 80 they only use the A B pair while the C D pair is reserved to the Realtime keyboard tracks When using both sequencers at the same time and the 2 FX Mode is set to C D Mode see page 80 Sequencer 1 uses the A B pair while Sequencer 2 uses the C D pair sharing it with the Realtime keyboard tracks GROOVE QUANTIZE
510. s page lets you select the C and D effects Usually the C effect is the reverb and the D effect is the modulating effect for the Realtime Keyboard tracks Cismpo Guo SHE ero M pepp Select Cree Domprezzce Reale irsmspugs 888 BY 2B FMedTrkibEl DoCsengds 127 C D PERF STS Effects assigned to the C and D effect processors Usually C is the reverb while D is the modulating effect chorus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see Effects on page 175 ModTrk Modulating Track PERF gt STS Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modu late an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller D gt Csend D gt C Send PERF gt STS Amount of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect PAGE 9 FX A EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the A effect usually reverb for the Style tracks Campo missus er up T 3 E argue 9 8 Fer Edit Sba Mix mend source JS Y Mix mod sit 127 Reverb Time LOr sec HE Damira BOX E ehe piy Use the E and H VOLUME VALUE buttons to scroll the parameter list Parameters PERF gt STYLE See Effects on page 175 for a list of available parameters for each effect type PAGE 10 FX B EDITING
511. s parame ter and use the VOLUME VALUE controls to select the loca tion Note You can t save over a Factory Program location PAGE 1 BASIC Here you can make basic settings for the Program such as basic oscillator settings the oscillator count and the poly phonic mode Camps measure eu uo Basic zscillatorz z Facies Pols Single Trigger Ho Legatos Ho 4 Oscillators Use this parameter to specify the basic Program type whether it will use one or more oscillators up to four zm Drum Programs use only one oscillator 1 4 Number of oscillators the Program will use The total amount of polyphony varies depend ing on the number of oscillators used by the Program a maximum of 62 with only 1 oscil lator or a maximum of 15 with 4 oscillators Mode This is the polyphonic mode of the Program Poly The Program will play polyphonically allow ing you play chords Mono The Program will play monophonically pro ducing only one note at a time Single Trigger This parameter is available when the Mode parameter is set to Poly Yes When the same note is played repeatedly the previous note will be silenced before the next note is sounded so that the notes do not over lap No When the same note is played repeatedly the previous note will not be silenced before the next note is sounded Legato This parameter is avail
512. s parameter enables you to set the depth of the modu lation caused by a warped turntable e Click Level This parameter enables you to set the level of the click noise that occurs once every rotation of the turntable This simulation reproduces record noise and the noise generated after the music on a vinyl record finishes Effects Pitch Phase Mod 185 Pitch phase modulation effects 016 Chorus Stereo Chorus This effect adds thickness and warmth to the sound by mod ulating the delay time of the input signal You can add spread to the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other Stereo In Stereo Out Left o LEQ HEQ g I x gt Chorus EQ Trim LEQ HEQ ADH Chorus EQ Trim Y i Pesos LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform b LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 010 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed ts Fx 009 pes Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes ux Fx 009 egy BPM MIDI 40 240 d Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo ts Fx 009 Base Note 9 25 2 25 4 5 4 Selec
513. s stricken harder than this value will be played by the High multisample Single Trigger Use this parameter to set the sample as a single triggered one Yes When the same key note is played repeatedly the previous note will be stopped before the new note is triggered so that they will not overlap No When the same key note is played repeatedly the previous note will not be stopped before the new note is triggered Receive Note On Use this parameter to enable disable the reception of the Note On Key On message Yes The Note On message is normally received No The Note On message is not received There fore the corresponding key is muted Receive Note Off Use this parameter to enable disable the reception of the Note Off Key Off message Yes The sound will stop as soon as you release the key No The sound will continue playing up to the end of the sample The Note Off message is ignored Warning If the Single Trigger parameter is set to No and the sound is looped the sound will play endlessly In an emergency situation use the Panic command see START STOP on page 15 Exclusive Group Exclusive Groups are sets of mutually exclusive keys stopping each other For example if the Open Hi Hat and Closed Hi Hat are assigned the same Exclusive Group playing an Open Hi Hat will stop the Closed Hi Hat playing None No Exclusive Group assigned The selected key will not be stopped by any other key Exclus
514. s the EQ input level on page 176 X Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB d Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 P LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed e LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform f P Manual 0 100 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied P Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation g Resonance 100 100 Sets the resonance amount vs Fx 023 P Phaser Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Sets the phaser effect balance t Fx 010 023 Output Mode Normal Wet Invert Selects the phaser output mode ts Fx 060 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 D i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 078 Exc MTapDly Exciter Multitap Delay This effect combines a mono type exciter and a multitap delay Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Wet Dry Exelter eee Multitep Delay Ea Trim LEQ HEQ DH lt P Exciter Mt Dly Wet Dry Righto Wate a X Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect os Fx 011
515. s the damping amount in the high range ts Fx 043 f Amt L 100 100 Low Damp 0 100 Sets the modulation amount of the left channel feedback Sets the damping amount in the low range ts Fx 043 R Feedback 100 100 Input Level Dmod 100 100 Sets the feedback amount for the right channel Dm Sets the modulation amount of the input level tS Fx 037 Drie e g Amt R 100 100 Src Off Tempo Sets the modulation amount of the right channel feedback Selects the modulation source for the input level ts Fx 037 Spread s High Damp 0 100 h Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound 1S Fx 043 Sets the damping amount in the high range Resa Low Damp 0 100 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet 9 Sets the damping amount in the low range 1 Fx 043 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dz Input Level Dmod 100 100 ji i mod Sre Off Tempo h Sets the modulation amount of the input level Fx 037 Drez Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level ts Fx 037 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet ance on page 175 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 D2 Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175
516. s the delay time Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount c High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Input Level Dmod 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the input level S pzz Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the input level os Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 p Src Off tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 d Input Level Dmod d Src This parameter sets the dynamic modulation of the input level Input Level D mod Input Level xt Amt 50 Drez Higher Zero Max Zero Max 038 PitchShift Pitch Shifter This effect changes the pitch of the input signal You can select from three types Fast quick response Medium and Slow preserves tonal quality You can also create an effect in which the pitch is gradually raised or dropped using the delay with feedback Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Wet Dry Input Level High Damp Pitch Shifter Delay w peres Feedback Position Feedback Input Level Right o po aime A Mode Slow Medium Fast Switches Pitch Shifter mode
517. s the lower limit of the delay time on the right channet Fx 009 R Dly Top msec R Delay Top 0 0 50 0msec Sets the upper limit of the delay time on the right channels Fx 009 Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec Sweep ModeEG D mod a Sets the delay time from the original sound Determines whether the flanger is controlled by the envelope gen erator or by the modulation source paese b LFO Waveform Step Tri Random Selects LFO Waveform t Fx 010 SrcOff Tempo Selects the modulation source that triggers the EG when EG is LFO Phase degree 180 180 selected for Sweep Mode or modulation source that causes the Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 010 flanger to sweep when D mod is selected for Sweep Mode LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz EG Attack 1 100 Sets the LFO speed t Fx 010 Dese Sets the EG attack speed uu d d Src Off Tempo EG Decay 1 100 Selects the modulation source used for both LFO speed and step speed Sets the EG decay speed var Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Feedback 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed e Sets the feedback amount t Fx 020 LFO Step Freq Frequency Hz 0 05 50 00Hz t High Damp 0 100 Sets the LFO step speed speed that changes in steps E Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range Fx 020 t Ex 010 pymes e Dz Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Amt 50 00 50 00Hz Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds
518. s the modulation source the pitch an octave higher and lower can be controlled similar to when LFO is selected for Control Mode a LFO D mod Invert When Control Mode LFO or D mod the controlled phase of either Voice 1 or 2 will be reversed When the resonance pitch is set for Voice 1 Resonance has a positive value Voice 2 will resonate at a pitch an octave below Resonance has a negative value d Voice1 Pitch d Fine cent g Voice2 Pitch g Fine cent The Pitch parameter specifies the pitch of resonance by note name The Fine parameter allows for fine adjust ment in steps of cents e High Damp h High Damp This parameter sets the damping amount of resonant sound in the high range Lower values will make a metal lic sound with a higher range of harmonics 030 Doppler This effect simulates the Doppler effect of a moving sound with a changing pitch similar to the siren of an passing ambulance Mixing the effect sound with the dry sound will create a unique chorus effect LFO Frequency Hz Sets the LFO speed 0 02 20 00Hz ts Fx 009 Dz Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 009 een BPM MIDI 40 240 d Selects MIDI
519. s the modulation source of the LFO modulation depth Sets the delay time for the right channel ts Fx 016 Amt 100 100 Feedback 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth Sets the feedback amount VS Fx 017 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet High Damp 96 0 100 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Sets the damping amount in the high range Dz Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet n Sle Off Tempo Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 o pase Amt 100 100 Src Off tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 Bi Phase Modulation LFO o NV A Tu SB Depth2 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 d LFO Frequency Mod a AUTOFADE Src a Fade In Rate b Fade In Delay msec When LFO Frequency Mod is set to AUTOFADE you can use the modulation source selected in AUTO FADE Src as a trigger to automatically fade in the modulation amount When BPM MIDI Sync is set to On you cannot use this The Fade in Rate parameter specifies the rate of fade in The Fade in Delay parameter determines the time from AutoFade modulati
520. s too high and therefore unnatural If however it reaches the wrap around point it will be automatically transposed an octave lower The wrap around point can be set for each track in semitone steps up to a maximum of 12 semitones relative to the chord root This value will be the interval between the key specified by the Style Element and the wrap around point 1 12 Maximum transposition in semitones of the track referred to the original key of the pat tern KR Keyboard Range gt PERF gt STYLE This parameter is an on off switch for the Key Range param eter memorized into the Style Or iginal The Keyboard Range is used When a track goes over the lower or higher limit set by this hidden parameter it is transposed to play into the programmed range Off No Keyboard Range used 49 Style Play operating mode Page 21 Style controls Wrap Around Keyboard Range PAGE 22 PADS This page lets you select a different sound or function for each of the four PAD buttons oho Compe messurs fremeposs E em pupem 28 Coe play Pads Litrash Uslumet 127 Ride Part Hae China C Send 1648 qiestalede D Sendi ida 1 4 PERF gt STS Each of the four PAD buttons See List of sounds assignable to the Pads on page 226 and List of functions assignable to the Pads on page 227 Note Function names are preceded by a
521. se Note A D D d d d3 dro Display the error message if the right channel delay time exceeds the upper Selects the type of notes to specify the delay time for TapC limit oR L Delay Base Note d s H 13 4 43 4 c Times x1 x16 Selects the type of notes to specify the left channel delay time Sets the number of notes to specify the delay time for TapC Lg ts Fx 049 eer Level 0 50 b Times x1 x16 Sets the output level of TapC Sets the number of notes to specify the left channel delay time F Fy R Delay Base Note A 3 5 35 2 45 4 s nies Selects the type of notes to specify the delay time for TapR Adjust 2 50 4 2 50 S eye Fine adjust the left channel delay time d Times x1 x16 R Delay Base Note dibs 3 4 45 J 0 Sets the number of notes to specify the delay time for TapR LS Selects the type of notes to specify the right channel delay time 1S Fx 049 eye Level 0 50 Sets the output level of TapR e Times X1 x16 Feedback C Delay E Sets the number of notes to specify the right channel delay time Sets the feedback amount of TapC Drez Se Off Tempo Adjust 76 2 50 42 5096 Selects the modulation source for the TapC feedback Fing adjust the figit channeldel y time L Feedback 100 100 Amt g 100 100 Sets the feedback amount for the left channel Dz Sets the modulation amount of the TapC feedback d Src Off Tempo High Damp i 0 100 Selects the modulation source of feedback amount Set
522. see The DIRECT SD bank on page 40 1 Use the leftmost STYLE button to select a row of Style banks upper lower ee 3 1 Ses LAT ARNE IM s 2 Select the STYLE bank containing the Style you are looking for STYLE BALLAD BALLROOM DANCE ROCK 8 16 8 16 SOUL amp WORLD1 WORLD2 WORLD3 BEAT 1 BEAT 2 FUNK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o Ta LATIN 1 LATIN2 LATIN DANCE JAZZ1 JAZZ2 TRADITIONAL USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 The Style Select window appears ahora Campo measure Wanspoes TEE BE ose Jazz Waltz 1 Mod Swine Slow Blues Mod Swine Cas Blues Jazzialtzl St bouisB Jazzlaltzz Big Bandi 3 There are 2 pages for each bank each containing 8 Styles Select a page using the PAGE buttons 4 As you find the Style you are looking for select it using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons Note The new Style will enter at the next strong beat 5 Ifthe DISPLAY HOLD LED is on press EXIT to exit this window The SINGLE TOUCH button When you select a Style the Realtime Keyboard tracks can be changed or not If the SINGLE TOUCH LED is on the Single Touch Set ting STS 1 is automatically selected and the Realtime tracks are changed Programs and the Keyboard Mode may change If the SINGLE TOUCH LED is off Realtime tracks don t change SELECTING A SINGLE TOUCH SETTING STS A Single Touch Setting STS contains
523. set a fixed velocity dynamics value for all MIDI notes entering This is useful when playing the Pa50SD with an organ or a MIDI Accordion Normal Normal velocity values are received 40 127 All received velocity values are converted to the selected value PAGE 8 MIDI IN CONTROLS 2 This is another page containing various MIDI IN settings like note transposition for the Realtime tracks The transpose parameters are useful to many MIDI accordion players whose MIDI interface may transmit on an unexpected octave chord Cmpa mensura Grensposs Cani can bi t oppg BE 7 Bbl Midiln Ctl 2 Ej LUreOctit Otini F LoctiHa Mateni Ory UppOct Upper Octave gt GBL Octave transposition of data received on the MIDI IN for the Upper tracks For example if you select the 1 value a received C4 will play a C5 on the Pa50SD LowOct Lower Octave gt GBL Octave transposition of data received on the MIDI IN for the Lower track For example if you select the 1 value a received C4 will play a C5 on the Pa50SD Octin Octave In gt GBL Enables disables the octave transposition of data received via MIDI On Data received via MIDI can be transposed according to the selected Octave Transposition For example if the Octave Transposition is 1 a received C4 will actually play a C5 Off Data received via MIDI can t be transposed by the Octave
524. show the file list 3 Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select the SET folder containing the data you wish to load Move the folder to the first line of the display If the folder you are looking for is in another folder use the F3 Open button to open it Use the F4 Close button to go back to the parent folder Card Edit environment Page 1 Load 133 4 Press F3 Open to open the SET folder A list of User data appears Performance Program Style Global chord Cempa Gnsasurs wanepose D LE ED J DHR er BBE B iB Oink C000 Osta C tis any Cardi oad Co pe FERFORM It D PROGRERI Pj SME E B LOAD CFEH UCL EE 5 Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the data type you are looking for to the first line of the display 6 Press F2 Load to confirm your selection The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort When the operation is completed the Wait indicator disappears the source page comes back in the display and you may perform further loading operations Note Data loaded from card and data already in memory are merged For example if there is data in all three USER Style banks in memory USERO1 USERO2 USERO3 and there is only the USEROI Style bank on the card the USERO1 bank is overwritten whi
525. simulation and a Feedback tremolo Right m Dry CFO Tri Sine y Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Wet Dry Amp Simulation Tremolo a F Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec i Sets the delay time Amp Simulation Filtar nl tremol F LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz f Sets the LFO speed LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Right i o Selects LFO Waveform LFO Tri Sin Vintage Up Down gt LFO Shape Wet Dey F Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation c Feedback 100 100 A Amplifier Type SS EL84 6L6 Sets the feedback amount vs Fx 020 Selects the type of guitar amplifier F EQ Trim 0 100 T LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Vintage Up Down Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 b Selects LFO Waveform ts Fx 032 F Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB LFO Shape 100 100 Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed ts Fx 020 e Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB T LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 pels te EO speed F Cho Fing Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet d T Depth 0 100 Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger t Fx 010 020 Sets the depth of LFO modulation D Tap1 Time msec 0 680msec Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet J Sets the Tap1 delay time Tie Se the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Tap1 Level 0 100 D Sets the Tap1 output l
526. single Performance with a single oper ation 1 Insert the source card into the card drive 2 Press Fl to scan the card and show the file list 3 Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to select the SET folder containing the item you wish to load Move the folder to the first line of the display If the folder you are looking for is in another folder use the F3 Open button to open it Use the F4 Close button to go back to the parent folder 4 10 Press F3 Open to open the SET folder A list of User data appears Global Performance Program Style Chard Campo Gulf SS remains aranaposs BY sg Card Load Je PERFORM E Ey PROGRAM Pj SME ES SD LOAD OPEN COGE Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the data type you are looking for to the first line of the display Press F3 Open to open the selected folder A list of User banks appears tempo measure ibe T CIKI Ed ggg BS Coty play Card oad ae A p MERGL STY pt C3 ER ST C LEEREG ST l4 tp LOAD OPEN CLOSE Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the desired bank to the first line of the display Press F3 Open to open the selected bank A list of User items
527. sion 17 Joystick X Joystick Y 18 Dynamic Range 19 j Ensemble Track Ensemble Type Dynamic Tempo Feedback 20 V1 V4 Drum Map Kick Designation Snare Designation Fill 1 2 21 Program Original On v v x Separate tracks v v v uy Bl Ww nN General parameters lt lt lt lt lt 4 lt 4 95 lt lt lt 4 lt 4 lt lt lt lt lt s lt lt lt lt lt 4 lt Separate tracks m Only Realtime tracks lt lt lt lt lt lt 4 lt 4 lt lt lt lt lt l General parameters I Only Style tracks globally Wrap Around ly Style track Keyboard Range Original Off Only Style tracks lt ApADA AD pRADXAD XLD XADXA l EA ASJA l Parameters 231 Single Touch Style Seqi1 Seq2 Page Parameter Performance Setting STS Performance Global Setup Note 22 Pad 1 4 v v Volume v Y z Pan v v C Send Level v v D Send Level v v 23 Pad Lock v Scale Lock v General parameters Auto Octave Lock v Master Transpose Lock v B 24 Chord Recognition Mode v Scale Mode v Memory Mode v Velocity Control v Main Program Play Mute status E Volume E Pan m FX Send Level E FX Select A B C D Modulating Tra
528. splay and printing of the list on a personal computer use a fixed size i e non proportional character in your text editor 82 Backing Sequence operating mode Transport controls 12 BACKING SEQUENCE OPERATING MODE The Backing Sequence mode lets you record a live perfor mance with the Styles The front panel controls work mostly as in Style Play mode but here you are recording what you are playing After recording the result is a new Song made of the Realtime tracks and the Style tracks TRANSPORT CONTROLS When in Backing Sequence mode use SEQI transport con trols PLAY STOP PAUSE See SEQUENCER TRANS PORT CONTROLS SEQI and SEQ2 on page 18 for more information THE BACKING SEQUENCE SONG AND SONG PLAY MODES The Backing Sequence and Song modes are linked together go to Backing Sequence mode to record a Song and switch to Song mode to edit it Since they use the same sequencer and memory area record ing a new Song in Backing Sequence mode deletes the Song loaded in Song mode Note The Song is kept in RAM so save it before turning the instrument off or it will be lost Warning When switching to Song Play the Song is deleted since Backing Sequence Song and Song Play share the same sequencer Sequencer 1 The Erase Song message appears Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to stay in Backing Sequence mode and avoid deleting the Song HOW TO PLAYBACK A SONG You can load a Standard MIDI File
529. ss filter and a 12 dB octave high pass filter Campo messurs renspose J gt end Filter ifsc Selected Deci Trei LFF Resonant Trims ua Fresuenca Ai r Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alter natively you can select oscillators using the F1 F4 buttons Filter Type This parameter selects the type of filter Low Pass Resonant Low Pass amp High Pass for the selected oscillator When the Low Pass amp High Pass filter type is selected the filter B will be activated Low Pass Resonance 24 dB octave low AA pass filter with resonanceO Low Pass amp High Pass 12 dB octave a NPA l low pass filter and 12 dB octave high pass filter in series Trim Use this parameter to adjust the level at which the audio sig nal output from the selected oscillator is input to filter A Note If this value is raised the sound may distort if Resonance is set to a high value or when you play a chord 00 99 Trim level Frequency A Cutoff Frequency A This parameter specifies the cutoff frequency of filter A This is a filter that cuts the high frequency region above the cutoff i frequency T This is the most common type of filter 1 12dB oct and is used to cut part of the overtone I components making an originally bright 1 1 1 1 Low Pass Level 24dB oct timbre sound more mellow darker When the
530. st 123 Global edit environment 125 The Write window 0 eee e cence tirs Ky eens 125 Men isis cp dede be Se e eae ana e ecu 125 Page 1 General controls 0 c eee eee eee ee 125 Page 2 Master Transpose 0 0c cece eee eee 126 Page 3 Assignable Pedal Footswitch Assignable Slider 55e ge oe P ek tel tex ke erre des 126 Page 4 MIDI Setup mmt 126 Page 5 MIDI Controls 0 cece eee eee eee 127 Page 6 MIDI IN Channels 000 00000 127 Page 7 MIDI IN Controls 1 0 0 eee eee eee 128 Page 8 MIDI IN Controls 2 0 0 eee eee eee ee 128 Page 9 MIDI IN Filters eese 129 Page 10 MIDI OUT Channels lesse 129 Page 11 MIDI OUT Filters 00 00 ee ee 129 Card Edit environment lsse 130 The WRITE CARD IN USE LED esses 130 Supported cards cc cece eee ee eee eee ees 130 Loading data created with the Pa80 Pa60 131 Card structure sese roter he HERR 131 luli c EET 131 File and folder size display 0 000 ee eee eee ee 132 Page SUUCEULE aseo ooh e dare ren Ee 132 Navigation tools 1 0 2 2 cece eee cece eee eee ees 132 MON 5 tr E ebd E RR TAA desi erc aat 132 Pagel Lo d 4 2 C Pese x RR sns 133 Page 2 Save iis e dh vised teg ewes canes sag Re 135 Page 3 COPY eiie cet eere tex ee ed OPORPE RES 138 Paget Bras ccscdsuc excise eae
531. stop the 98 Song operating mode Page 10 FX A editing Song change the effects then start the Song again Edit the Song in Song mode to permanently change the effects c D Effects assigned to the C and D effect processors Usually C is the reverb while D is the modulating effect chorus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see Effects on page 175 ModTrk Modulating Track Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modu late an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller D gt Csend D gt C Send Amount of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect PAGE 10 FX A EDITING This page contains the editing parameters for the A effect usually a reverb chord Compe measure framspoes 4s ig 888 C B IEU coco Comm FESH Edit csalo Ea Ree Time sek hEr High Dane hie Fre Dis Cre Fre Dis Thru DEB dd Use the E F and G H VOLUME VALUE button pairs to scroll the parameter list Use the A D VOLUME VALUE button pairs to select and edit a parameter Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to edit the selected param eter Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again Edit the Song in Song mode to permanently change the effects Para
532. sure transpose a Hg Gr gugem BS B2 Cm mp aan m bl hM Tranzgoze Sbale Realtime zeunc Sesgmencenlz m in Midi In ORF Scales iPost kE Style Realtime gt GBL This is a flag to turn the Master Transpose on or off on the Style and Realtime Keyboard tracks Off No Master Transpose is applied to the Style and Realtime tracks Sync Sync mode When you press either the TRANSPOSE p or ul buttons the new trans pose setting will not take effect until the first beat of the next measure is reached The Real time tracks sounding at the time of the trans pose will be stopped Realtime mode When you press either the TRANSPOSE p or ul buttons the new trans pose setting will occur when the next note is played for both the Style and Realtime tracks individually Note that any notes sounding from the Realtime tracks will be stopped when you press the TRANSPOSE button The next key or chord you press will sound with the new transpose setting Note that if you play a Real time track prior to a new chord the Realtime track will play in the new key as the Style will continue to play in the old key until a new chord is entered Seq 1 2 gt GBL This is a flag to turn the Master Transpose on or off on the two onboard Sequencers tracks Midi In gt GBL This is a flag to turn the Master Transpose on or off on the received MIDI messages RTime Scales The Scal
533. switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again chord Camps J 1 gu 888 E oooo Mixer i Far CHAG measure trsmepoes e a m Bea alg ss Cue CHAG 888 GC 8 8 chord Compo measure g n 888 coco Hier Far Gs oo e Cue Cue Cue Cue Q6 Song operating mode Page 3 Mixer FX Block Pan 64 Hard Left 00 Center 63 Hard Right Off The direct uneffected signal does not go to the outputs only the FX signal is heard for this track PAGE 3 MIXER FX BLOCK This page lets you select a pair of effect processor AB or CD for each of the Song track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 Song tracks 9 16 and back again chord Campa measure transpose ig BBa C B jeu oooo Selva s PMixeriFbs Block AB FE AE FE E FE FE FE FB o here Compe measure transpose mp EL Hier Fa Block f gm ES ao mh oo oo Baas PAGE 4 MIXER FX SEND A B OR C D This page lets you set the level of the track s direct unef fected signal going to the A and B or C and D Internal FX pair Go to the previous page Page 3 Mix
534. t You are trying to start playing back a Jukebox list but the list is empty Please add some Songs to the list Juke Box List Full Press Exit A Jukebox list may contain up to 127 Songs You were trying to add one Song more Save Song List Insert Card and Press Enter You are saving a list of Songs Please insert a card and press ENTER Save JBX List Insert Card and Press Enter You are saving a list of Songs as a JBX file Please insert a card and press ENTER Wait Please You were trying to load a file while Pa50SD is still loading another one Song Too Many Events You have tried to copy too many events on the same tick Out of Memory The memory limit for a Song 300KB has been reached Incompatible Meter You were trying to copy a track on a track with a different meter Sequencer is Running Press Exit While in Song Record mode this message may appear when you try to select a different track or execute an edit opera tion while the Sequencer is running Song Play and Song mode Cannot load Jukebox file on Seq 2 You can load a Jukebox file only on Sequencer 1 Damaged Standard Midi File The Standard MIDI File you are trying to load is damaged and cannot be played back Jukebox list is empty You tried to delete a Song in an empty Jukebox list or to save an empty Jukebox list Jukebox list is full The Jukebox list already contains 127 Songs Not a Standard Midi File The selected file is not a St
535. t indicator E S disappears the source page comes back in the display Ippe B88 BH sg and you may perform further saving operations Cima J Ga oooo costae aaa me re Cr T Cardi Saue E Saving all data of a specific type O AL You can save all data of a specific type with a single operation E 1 Insert the target card into the card drive Ji s 2 The whole content All of the internal memory is already selected Press F3 Open to open the All Here are the various types of files contained in memory folder A list of User data types appear each type is a separate folder The file folder contains and will create on Ue wia ohare Camps Co Wanapaza type the card Bag BH sg ALL All the User data in A SET folder mri om beers memory Dardi Sse Style The USER 01 03 Styles A STYLE folder inside gt arn It a SET folder C PERFORM C PROGRAM IET Program The USER Programs A PROGRAM folder cho SHE OEN CLOSE and Drum Kits inside a SET folder Perform Per The Performances A PERFORM folder formances inside a SET folder 3 Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE GBL file The Global All A GLOBAL folder controls to move the data type you are looking for to parameters marked inside a SET folder the first line of the dis
536. t Bien Big Coneresscr Reale MedTretLel BoAserct 127 Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again Save the Song to permanently change the effects A B Effects assigned to the A and B effect processors Usually A is the reverb while B is the modulating effect chorus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see Effects on page 175 ModTrk Modulating Track Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modu late an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller B gt Asend B gt A Send Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect PAGE 9 FX C D SELECT This page lets you select the C and D effects Usually the C effect is a reverb while the D effect is a modulating effect Standard MIDI Files usually require two effects only You can however assign all four effects to a Song see Page 3 Mixer FX Block on page 96 Cingar aaa trema D en ag IC B EU coco Coms a FRICAD Select Cee pigs Domprezzc Reale FedTrkibEl Doser i27 Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however
537. t pieces of the reverse playback of single notes make the Reverse Time shorter Rec Mode Reverse Time Rec Reverse hec Reverse Envelope Select Input Input Rec Mode Single Rec Mode Multi te xi te Reverse Time Reverse Time c Envelope Select c Src d Threshold These parameters select the source to control the start and end of recording When Envelope Select is set to D mod the input signal will be recorded only when the value of the modulation source selected by the Src parameter is 64 or higher When Envelope Select is set to Input the input signal will be recorded only when its level exceeds the Threshold level When recording is completed reverse playback starts immediately 043 L C R Delay This multitap delay outputs three Tap signals to the left right and center respectively You can also adjust the left and right spread of the delay sound Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left T Wet Dry Input Level D mod L Delay C Delay High Damp Low Damp z A Input Level D mod gt R Delay Level mome Pus Dry L Delay Time msec 0 1360msec Sets the delay time of TapL a Level 0 50 Sets the output level of TapL C Delay Time msec 0 1360msec Sets the delay time of TapC
538. t Style or the same again the Style tracks and effects are changed while the Realtime tracks are not changed STYLE section NUMERIC KEYPAD Use these buttons to open the Style Select window and select a Style See Selecting a Style on page 26 The leftmost button lets you select the upper or lower row of Style banks Press it repeatedly to select one of the rows After both LEDs have turned on press the button again to turn them off UPPER LED ON Upper row Styles selected LOWER LED ON Lower row Styles selected A word about Style banks and names Styles from 8 16 BEAT to WORLD 3 and from LATIN1 to TRADI TIONAL are standard Styles the user can t normally over write with a Load operation unless you remove the protection see Factory Style Protect on page 141 DIRECT SD Styles are Styles directly accessed from card no need to load from card See The DIRECT SD bank on page 40 Styles from USER1 to USER3 are location where you can load new Styles from card Each button Style bank contains 2 pages each with up to 8 Styles Browse through the Styles using the PAGE buttons Shortcut to see the original bank for a Style You can see the original bank where a Style is contained Just keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the lefmost button of the STYLE section A message window will appear showing the name of the original bank Release the SHIFT button to exit the win dow
539. t in a proportion of 1 1 This parameter sets how the modulation source switches between rotation and stop When Sw Toggle the speaker rotates or stops alter nately each time you press the pedal or operate the joy stick Each time the value for the modulation source exceeds 64 the speaker rotates or stops alternately When Sw Moment the speaker is rotating It stops only when you press the pedal or operate the joystick Rotation will occur when the value of the modulation source is less than 64 and will stop when the value is 64 or greater b Sw This parameter sets how the rotation speed slow and fast is switched via the modulation source When Sw Toggle the speed is switched between slow and fast each time you press the pedal or operate the joy stick Slow fast will alternate each time the value of the modulation source exceeds 64 When Sw Moment the speed is usually slow It becomes fast only when you press the pedal or operate the joystick m When a value for the modulation source is less than 64 slow speed is selected and when the value is 64 or higher fast is selected Effects Mod P Shift 201 c Manual Speed Ctrl If you wish to control the speaker rotation speed manu ally not switching between Slow and Fast select the mod ulation source in the Manual Speed Ctrl field If manual control is not necessary set this field to Off d Horn Acceleration e Rotor Accel
540. t in the Y direction away from your self will have on the pitch modulation applied by the LFO1 As this value is increased moving the joystick in the Y direction will cause the LFO1 to produce deeper pitch modu lation With a setting of 12 00 a maximum of 1 octave of pitch modulation will be applied Negative values will invert the LFO waveform 12 00 12 00 Joystick action depth Pitch LFO1 Level modulation AMS Alternate Modulation Source This parameter selects the source that will control the depth of pitch modulation produced by the LFO1 See AMS Alter nate Modulation Source list on page 123 Intensity This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the effect that AMS will have With a setting of 0 modulation will not be applied With a setting of 12 00 the LFO1 will apply a maximum of 1 octave of pitch modulation Negative settings will invert the LFO waveform For example if AMS is set to Joystick Y and push the joy stick a positive setting of this parameter will cause the pitch modulation created by LFOI to be applied with the normal phase and a negative setting will cause the LFO to be applied with inverted phase The LFO1 Intensity JS Y and AMS settings will be added to determine the depth and direction of the pitch modulation applied by LFOI 12 00 4 12 00 Parameter value PAGE 5 PITCH LFO2 In this page you can set the LFO2 modul
541. t will not play at the selected position only the Realtime tracks will play Hint Insert a Style Element Off event exactly where the auto accompaniment must stop at the end of the Song Chord Use the D VOLUME VALUE buttons to select the Chord line Use the F1 F4 buttons to select the part of the chord you wish to edit EL Hai 4p Name Type Tension Extension Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to modify the selected parameter You can also play a chord and it will be automati Backing Sequence operating mode 87 How to delete a whole Song cally recognized While recognizing a chord the status of the BASS INVERSION button will be considered No chord means that the accompaniment will not play at the current position apart for the Drum and Percussion tracks To select the No chord option press F1 to select the Name part of the Chord then use the TEMPO VALUE sec tion to select the very last value C B Off Note If you replace a chord with a different one please remem ber that the Lower track will not be automatically changed Transport controls While in Step Mode you can use various control panel but tons to accomplish the editing procedure lt lt or gt gt Rewind or Fast Forward Use these buttons to move to the previous or following mea sure These commands are effective even if the M easure parameter is not selected lt or gt Previous or Next Step Use these button to
542. tSlap CongaHiMtSlap 63 D 4 161 CongaHi Open Off 161 CongaHi Open CongaHi Open 64 E4 158 CongaLo Open Off 158 CongaLo Open CongaLo Open 65 F4 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 TimbaleHi Rim2 66 F 4 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 202 TimbaleLo Open TimbaleLo Open 67 G4 224 Agogo Bell Off 224 Agogo Bell Agogo Bell 68 G 4 224 Agogo Be Off 224 Agogo Be Agogo Be 69 A4 219 Cabasa Up Off 219 Cabasa Up Cabasa Up 70 A 4 102 HH Hip Off 209 Tambourin Push MaracasPush MaracasPush 71 B4 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle SambaWhistle SambaWhistle 72 C5 234 SambaWhistle 2 234 SambaWhistle SambaWhistle 73 C 5 181 Guiro Short 3 181 Guiro Short Guiro Short 74 D5 180 Guiro Long 3 180 Guiro Long Guiro Long 75 D 5 199 Claves Off 199 Claves Claves 76 E5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Woodblock1 77 F5 200 Woodblock1 Off 200 Woodblock1 Woodblock1 78 F 5 215 Cuica Ht Off 215 Cuica Hi Cuica Hi 79 G5 215 Cuica Hi Off 215 Cuica Hi Cuica Lo 80 G 5 233 Flexatone 5 233 Flexatone 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 81 A5 233 Flexatone 5 233 Flexatone 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 82 A 5 101 HH Old Open2 Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 83 B5 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 85 C 6 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 1
543. tar v 121 1 20 Puff Organ Organ 2 v 121 2 28 MuteVeloGtr Guitar v 121 2 20 Small Pipe Organ 2 121 3 28 Jazz Man Guitar v 121 3 20 FlautoPipes Organ 2 121 4 28 R amp R Guitar Guitar 121 0 21 Accordion Accordion v 121 5 28 Stra Chime Guitar 121 1 21 Accordion 2 Accordion v 121 6 28 CleanMutGtr Guitar 121 2 21 Akordeon Accordion 121 7 28 RhythmkElGtr Guitar 121 3 21 Musette 1 Accordion 121 8 28 Clean Funk Guitar 121 4 21 Musette 2 Accordion 121 9 28 Disto Mute Guitar 121 5 21 MusetteClar Accordion 121 0 29 OverdriveGt Guitar v 121 6 21 Fisa 1648 Accordion 121 1 29 Guitar Pinch Guitar v 121 7 21 Fisa 1644 Accordion 121 0 30 DistortionG Guitar v 121 8 21 Fisa Master Accordion 121 1 30 FeedbackGtr Guitar v 121 9 21 Cassotto Accordion 121 2 30 DistRhytmGt Guitar v 121 10 21 Arab Accord Accordion 121 3 30 JoystGtr Y Guitar 121 0 22 Harmonica Accordion v 121 4 30 PowerChords Guitar 121 1 22 Sweet Harm Accordion 121 5 30 MuteMonster Guitar 121 2 22 Harmonica 2 Accordion 121 6 30 WetDistGtr Guitar 121 0 23 TangoAccord Accordion v 121 7 30 SoloDistGtr Guitar 121 1 23 Fisa Tango Accordion 121 8 30 Stereo Dist Guitar 121 0 24 NylonGuitar Guitar v 121 0 31 GtrHarmonic Guitar v 121 1 24 Ukulele Guitar v 121 1 31 GtrFeedback Guitar v 121 2 24 NylonKeyOff Guitar v 121 2 31 EGHarmonics Guitar 121 3 24 Nylon Gtr 2 Guitar v 121 0 32 Acous Bass Bass v 121 4 24 Nylon Bossa Guitar 121 1 32 AcBass Buzz Bass 121
544. te J selected for Base Note in rela tion to the tempo specified in BPM or the MIDI Clock tempo if BPM is set to MIDI by the number specified in the Times parameter Effects Filter Dynamic 181 010 Random Filt Stereo Random Filter This stereo band pass filter uses a step shape waveform and random LFO for modulation You can create a special effect from filter oscillation Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Bi o X Wet Dry Filter H Filter E Right 3 Dex Dry LFO Phase LFO Step Tri Random LFO Waveform Step Tri Random Selects LFO Waveform S b LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right iS LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed S Dames Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source used for both LFO speed and step speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed LFO Step Freq Frequency Hz 0 05 50 00Hz Sets the LFO step speed speed that changes in steps 5 prez Amt 50 00 50 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO step speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes s Fx 009 Gaz BPM MIDI 40 240 e Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo ts Fx 009 vs Base Note 4 43 2 4 1 ds d 0 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 T
545. tensity depth of the Exciter effect y Fx 011 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect ws Fx 011 X Emphatic Point 0 70 X Emphatic Point 0 70 Sets the frequency range to be emphasized os Fx 011 Sets the frequency range to be emphasized te Fx 011 X EQ Trim 0 100 X EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 X Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB X Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 L Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 F Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the signal compression ratio ts Fx 003 Sets the delay time L Threshold dB 40 0dB F LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the level above which the compressor is applied Vs Fx 003 Sets the LFO speed L Attack 1 100 LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Sets the attack time ts Fx 003 Selects LFO Waveform Release 1 100 F Depth 0 100 Sets the release time t Fx 003 Sets the depth of LFO modulation L Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB Feedback 100 100 Sets the limiter output gain tS Fx 003 Sets the feedback amount t Fx 020 Routin XCT LMT LMT XCT F Cho Fing Wet Dry Wet 2 98 Dry 2 98 Wet Switches the order of the exciter
546. tep Time Step Time Step Time uL f 1 na Off On Off Release G Press D Release D continue holding C continue holding C continue holding C Step Time Step Time Eee E T E and C continue holding C MENU From any page of the Style Record mode press MENU to open the Style Record edit menu This menu gives access to the various Style Record edit sections Note While the Style is in play you cannot access the Edit sec tion pages from the Main page and the Style Tracks page see page 55 and page 56 Stop the playback before pressing MENU When in the menu select an edit section using the VOL UME VALUE A H buttons select an edit page using PAGE or press EXIT to exit the menu When in an edit page press EXIT to go back to the main page or the Style Tracks page of the Style Record mode Cmpa measure manspoes Go guga Bas BUB 7 Record MEHL banitize Cory TearggAel S Elem Ctl Evert Edit Stale Ctl Delete Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages Note When switching from the Edit section pages Quantize Transpose Velocity Delete to the other pages or vice versa the Style if in play is automatically stopped EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE Select an edit section from the Menu and or use the PAGE buttons to reach the desired pa
547. ter Touch 2 9 Joystick Y vertical upward direction and After Touch JS Y amp AT 2 Joy Stick Y amp After Touch 2 Joystick Y vertical downward direction and After Touch Ass Pedal Assignable foot pedal CC 04 Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal CC 66 CC 82 CC 82 a After Touch data can only be received via MIDI or create as a MIDI event in Song Record Step Recording mode FIt KTrk Filter Keyboard Track The direction of the effect will be determined Fit KTrk Filter Keyboard Track by the sign of the Ramp Low setting and by Fit KTrk 0 Filter Keyboard Track 0 the opposite sign of the Ramp High setting Fit KTrk 0 Filter Keyboard Track 0 eed Ae OF sa and SaN fora sening Amp KI sia Amp keyboard Tade s t O Ramp Low will have no AMS effect The sign Amp KTrk Amp Keyboard Track of the Ramp High setting will determine the Amp KTrk 0 Amp Keyboard Track 0 direction of its effect Amp KTrk 0 Amp Keyboard Track 0 The direction of the effect will be determined by the sign positive or negative of the Ramp Low or Ramp High setting 124 Program operating mode AMS Alternate Modulation Source list 0 The sign of the Ramp Low setting will deter JS Y amp AT 2 Joy Stick Y amp After Touch 2 mine the direction of its effect Ramp High The effect will be controlled by the joystick Y vertically will have no AMS e
548. ter value Filter B Frequency B Cutoff Frequency B This parameter specifies the cutoff frequency of filter B This parameter will be displayed when Filter Type is set to Low Pass amp High Pass High Pass Level This filter cuts the low frequency range that lies below the cutoff frequency By cutting the lower overtones it lightens the tone O 12dB oct Frequency 00 99 Cutoff frequency value PAGE 8 FILTER MODULATION These settings let you apply modulation to the cutoff fre quency Frequency of the filter for the selected oscillator to modify the tone Chord Cimpa measure transposs ig Las Filter Mod l sci Selected Deci Tracking Lows B3 Tracking Hick FS Ramp Locus 45 4 When Filter Type is Low Pass Resonance parameters for filter B will not be editable greyed out Program operating mode 113 Page 8 Filter Modulation Selected Use this parameter to select an oscillator to put in edit Alter natively you can select oscillators using the F1 F4 buttons Filter keyboard tracking Tracking Low High These settings specify keyboard tracking for the cutoff fre quency of the filter for the selected oscillator The way in which the cutoff frequency is affected by the keyboard loca tion you play can be specified by the Tracking Low Track ing High Ramp Low and Ramp High p
549. termines how much the LFO waveform is changed ts Fx 020 Sets the envelope sensitivity of the input signal a b LFO Phase degree 180 180 Envelope Shape 100 100 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right 1S Sets the envelope curve shape of the input signal LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Vintage Sets the LFO speed s Fx 009 prez Selects LFO Waveform Src Off Tempo LFO Shape 100 100 Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed ts Fx 020 Amt 20 00 20 00Hz LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 032 BPM MIDI Sync Off On LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the i Sets the LFO speed v Envelope Amount Hz 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the changes of the LFO speed according to the input signal level Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 a LFO Waveform This parameter selects the LFO waveform Vintage wave simulates the characteristics of the tremolo created on a guitar amplifier Combining this effect with the Amp Sim ulation will make a realistic vintage tremolo amplifier sound Tremolo LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Vintage Up Down VAV VEU TIAN Select
550. ternal instrument To set each track s MIDI output channel see Page 10 MIDI OUT Channels on page 129 To hear only the expander s sounds you can lower the MAS TER VOLUME control on the Pa50SD or set the Song tracks to the External status see Page 8 Track Internal External on page 78 Select the Sequencer 1 or Sequencer 2 MIDI Setup depend ing on the Sequencer you are using on the Pa50SD to set the channels as follows Track Out Channel Song 1 16 1 16 The Arranger One of the most interesting aspect of MIDI is that you can use your Pa50SD to play an external instrument with its onboard arranger Yes it s hard to beat the audio quality of Pa50SD but you could wish to use that old faithful synth you are still accustomed to To assign some of Pa50SD Style tracks to an external instru ment set them to the External status see Page 15 Track Internal External on page 46 Select the Default MIDI Setup to set the channels as follows this is the default status of Pa50SD Track Out Channel Bass 9 Drums 10 Percussion 11 Acc1 5 12 16 REFERENCE GUIDE 40 Style Play operating mode What s a Style 9 STYLE PLAY OPERATING MODE The Style Play mode is the boot up operating mode When in this mode you can play Styles i e automatic accompani ments or just play with one to four Realtime tracks on the keyboard Upper 1 3 and Lower WHAT S A
551. that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 Formant Shift 100 100 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied iS Resonance 0 100 Sets the Level of resonance of the voice pattern Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Daz i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 c Voice Top d Voice Center e Voice Bottom These parameters assign vowels to the top center and bottom position of the controller E g When Voice Top A Voice Center I and Voice Bottom zU If Sweep Mode is set to D mod and Ribbon is selected as the modulation source moving your finger from the right to left of the ribbon controller will change the sound from a to i then u 184 Effects Filter Dynamic If Sweep Mode is set to LFO the sound will change cycli cally from man to mn yn i then a Talking Modulator Control Voice Center C Voice Top Voice Bottom Q mode ISX Ribbon Max Zero nex Isy Max JS Y zero etc h Formant Shift This parameter adjusts the frequency level to which the effect is applied If you wish to apply the effect to a higher range sound set this pa
552. the display a and the recording restarts from the M001 01 000 position Any note exceeding the pattern length inserted at its end will be reduced to fit the total length of the pattern 60 Style Record mode Style Record procedure At this point you may go on inserting new events in overdub mode the previously inserted events will not be deleted This is very useful when recording a drum or percussion track where you may want to record the bass drum on a first cycle the snare drum on the second cycle and the hi hat and cymbals during the following cycles 10 When finished recording press START STOP to turn off its LED The Main page of the Style Record mode appears chord f temps measure transpose Lu miUe m HewBozza Esl CUCU RESET Rb CU Len i amp Metro int Resol Metenide4 C mal HIT Sth When exiting the RT recording mode is automati cally selected You may press START STOP to listen to the Style Press START STOP again to stop the playback To enter the Step Record mode again select the Stp recording mode and press START STOP 11 From the Main page of the Style Record mode press RECORD to exit the Record mode You will be prompted to assign a new name to the Style and select a memory location where to save it See The Write win dow on page 54 for information on how to save a Style Chords
553. the Pa50SD as the master controller for your MIDI setup 1 Connect Pa50SD s MIDI OUT to the other instrument s MIDIIN 2 Set up the other instrument s tracks to the same chan nels you want to play from Pa50SD For example if you wish to play the Upper 1 and Upper 2 tracks with the other instrument s sound set the other instrument to receive on the same channels of the Upper 1 and Upper 2 tracks by default channels 1 and 2 3 Set the general volume of the other instrument with its own volume controls 4 Mute unmute any track right from the Pa50SD front panel Set each track s volume using Pa50SD own VOL UME VALUE controls 5 Play on Pa50SD s keyboard The Keyboard Pa50SD s physical keyboard can drive up to 4 tracks via the MIDI OUT Upper 1 3 and Lower MIDI output channels are set in Global mode see Page 10 MIDI OUT Channels on page 129 As a default situation Default Setup each of Pa50SD Real time Tracks transmit on these channels Track Out Channel Upper1 1 Upper2 2 Upper3 3 Lower 4 When a track is in mute it can t transmit any MIDI data to an external expander or sequencer connected Pa50SD s MIDI OUT To hear only the expander s sounds you can lower the MAS TER VOLUME control on the Pa50SD or set the Realtime Tracks to the External status see Page 15 Track Internal External on page 46 The Sequencer Any Sequencer s track can drive a channel on an ex
554. the Real each track time Keyboard tracks Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Realtime Keyboard tracks to the Style tracks and vice versa ae on BU can GEI carn oooo Coord Campo maseura transpose a Up emm Huge BB miea Tuning PE sens d eD oooo mg p Turina Detune gout E EM sen w bes H He Iu m ui w Hen m Parameters PERF gt STYLE STS These parameters show the Pitch Bend range for each track in semitones x auem E 01 12 Maximum up down pitchbend range in semi Im 2e tones 12 1 octave Tanina Detune Off No pitchbend allowed Ho 465 6 E 00 P au 5 PAGE 7 FX A B SELECT iu w This page enables you to select the A and B effects Usually the A effect is the reverb and the B effect is the modulating Detune PERF PSTYLE STS effect for the Style tracks This is the fine tuning value Cahord Campo mossurs sremaposs 64 Lowest pitch LIE HEB BU 28 J oooo Cema 00 Standard tuning Wine Select 63 Highest pitch StH nelect Bis Bias Compressor Reate PAGE 5 TUNING
555. the cursor position by pressing the DELETE button 3 Press ENTER to save the settings in memory The Are you sure message appears Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort MENU From any page press MENU to open the Style Play edit menu This menu gives access to the various Style Play edit sections When in the menu select an edit section using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons select an edit page using PAGE or press EXIT to exit the menu When in an edit page press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Style Play operating mode chord mpo maseurs tramsposs cun IHRE S88 BY eB ak 5000 Comms Shale Plas Meru Cathe phy Fixer ET Chrels Tanira Sty Curls Effects Irgut Padi Track Edit Freferences Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE Select an edit section from the Menu and or use the PAGE buttons to reach the desired page Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Style Play mode All edit pages share the same structure Style Play icon Page header Page number sssurs 888 oooo Ts phy Hh i ep A Lin 1 Lii Be IIL iz Ll gea All j E lbi tll eee w 69 Hill iz Hi g MI liz o Style P
556. the range below the specified note number Tracking High Keyboard tracking will apply to the range above the specified note number Ramp These parameters specify the angle of keyboard tracking 99 499 Angle value Here is an example of volume changes produced by keyboard location and Ramp settings Volume Ramp Low 99 Ramp High 990 Ramp Low 00 Ramp High 00 I Ramp Low 99 1 i Ramp High 99 I i i Key Key Low Key High Ramp Low With positive values of this parameter the volume will increase as you play notes below the Tracking Low note number With negative values the volume will decrease Ramp High With positive values of this parameter the volume will increase as you play notes above the Key High note number With negative values the volume will decrease 117 118 Program operating mode Page 14 Amp LFO1 Amplifier Modulation These parameters specify how the volume of the selected oscillator will be affected by velocity Velocity Intensity With positive values the volume will increase as you play more strongly With negative values the volume will decrease as you play more strongly Volume change with positive values of this parameter Note on Note on Note off Note off Softly played Strongly played 99 99 Intensity value EG AMS Alternate Modulation Source Selects the source that will control the volume of the am
557. them Press ENTER to save the Style to the internal memory or one of the D VOLUME VALUE buttons Abort to delete any changes made in Style Record mode When the Are you sure message appears press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to go back to the Write Style page 66 Style Record mode Page 6 Edit Delete PAGE 6 EDIT DELETE This page is where you can delete single elements or MIDI events out of the Style Celond Cmpa measure transpose Iz Ba gre Seen me HN Edita Delete Esl EDJ TrkiAll Eui Moke l G EBi ci iss BobbomiG 1 Toe Os After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort E CV Style Element Chord Variation Non editable These read only parameters show which Style Element and Chord Variation are currently selected for edit ing See the Main page E Style Element and CV Chord Variation parameters on page 55 for information on select ing a different Style Element and Chord Variation Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected After deletion the selected Chord Variation will remain empty Drum Acc5 Selected track Ev Event Type of MIDI event to delete All All events The measures are not removed from the Chord Variation Note All notes in the selected range Dup
558. thinner You can also use this chorus block with feedback as a flanger Stereo In Stereo Out Left n Low i KATIN 4 Chorus Flanger NP High Level T ii gt High Damp High Low Split Point A Feedback Hl High Damp 4 1 Chorus Flanger L 7 High Level LUN a Low Level Righto A ares LFO Phase 4 LFO Waveform Triangle Sine Selects LFO Waveform b LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Fx 010 LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed ts Fx 009 prer Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of LFO speed Amt 20 00 20 00Hz Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the tempo and notes Fx 009 yer BPM MIDI 40 240 d Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo ts Fx 009 Base Note 3 25 2 25 4 45 4 Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed Vs Fx 009 Times X1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 5 Pre Delay msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the delay time from the original sound Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Dyz f Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source of the LFO modulation depth Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth High Low Split P
559. tive volume of the Realtime Keyboard tracks o MODE section Each of these buttons recalls one of the operating modes of the instrument Each mode excludes the others STYLE PLAY Style Play mode where you can play Styles automatic accompaniments and or play up to four Realtime tracks on the keyboard In the main page Realtime Keyboard tracks are shown on the right half of the display You can reach the main page by pressing EXIT from any of the Style Play edit pages If you are in a different operating mode press STYLE PLAY to recall the Style Play mode If the TRACK SELECT LED is on press TRACK SELECT to turn it off and see the Realtime tracks This operating mode is automatically selected when turning the instrument on SONG PLAY Song Play mode where you can playback 16 track Songs in Standard Midi File SMF for mat directly from card You can play MID and KAR files directly from the card Since the Pa50SD is equipped with two sequencers you can even play two Songs at the same time and mix them with the BALANCE slider In addition to the Song tracks you can play one to four Realtime Keyboard tracks along with the Song s In the main page Realtime Keyboard tracks are shown on the right half of the display You can reach the main page by pressing EXIT from any of the Song Play edit pages If you are in a different operating mode press SONG PLAY to recall the Song Play mode If the TRACK SELECT LED
560. to Ferf Hames Ferta Mot STS Ha Current Stale 1 Select the kind of object you want to save your tracks into Select the Perf No line to save all tracks and the cur rent selected Style settings into a Performance Use the corresponding VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE section controls to select a Perfor mance location in memory The name of the Perfor mance already at the target destination will be shown Select the STS No line to save the Realtime Key board tracks into a Single Touch Setting STS Use the corresponding VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE section controls to select a Single Touch Setting number Select the Current Style line to save the Style tracks into the current Style Performance If you select yOU save to this location Performance All track settings Selected Performance selected Style number Master Transpose STS Realtime Key Selected Single Touch board track set Setting a part of the tings current Style Current Style Style track set Current Style Perfor tings Master mance Transpose 2 If you are saving a Performance you can change its name Select the Perf name line Move the cursor using the DOWN and UP buttons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button Delete a character at
561. to a different measure see SHIFT lt lt or gt gt on page 64 As described in step 4 you may press START STOP and play some chords to listen how the pattern sounds after your changes Press START STOP again to stop the pattern running Use the INSERT button to insert an event at the Position shown in the display a Note event with default values will be inserted Use the DELETE button to delete the event shown in the display When the editing is complete you may select a different track go to step 7 or a different Style Element and Chord Variation press EXIT to go back to the Main page of the Style Record mode then go to step 2 When finished editing the whole Style press WRITE to open the Write Style page Chord moasura ransposs B sg mgg E MRITE to Stale ramet Croce Eld Tot UBI 81 Festeot X FEcet Use the A or E VOLUME VALUE buttons to enter the Text Editing mode Use the UP and DOWN buttons to move the cursor and the dial to select a character Use the B VOLUME VALUE buttons to select a target location The name of the Style already existing at the selected location is shown after the Style Bank Location number Warning If you select an existing Style and confirm writ ing the older Style is deleted and replaced by the new one Save the Styles you don t want to loose on a card before overwriting
562. to the nearest 1 4 division Um Pid Acc Accuracy Accuracy percentage of quantize For example if Acc 50 and the note is 20 tics away from the coarse grid it is moved to the grid of only 10 tics 0 No accuracy The quantize is not executed 100 Maximum accuracy The note is moved exactly at the grid position Swing Asymmetry of quantization Grid axis are moved to the near est grid axis 0 Even numbered axis are totally moved over the previous odd numbered axis 50 Axis are perfectly equidistant 100 Even numbered axis are totally moved over the following odd numbered axis Swng 50 Swng 25 Swng 75 Window Area of quantize intervention bordering the grid axis 0 The quantize window corresponds to the axis No quantization happens 72 Song Play operating mode The Write window 100 The quantize window extends to the nearest window all events are quantized Win 0 Win 50 PO OOOOEOS VIE T DED 2D ED ED EP ED EP THE WRITE WINDOW You can save onto the internal memory a Seq1 Seq2 Setup There is a separate Setup for each of the two onboard sequencers This Setup memorizes the Internal FX settings the Internal External status of each track and the Play Mute status of each track When a new Song is selected the saved Setup is automatically recalled and all parameters are reset Globally setting the Internal FX parameters allows you for example
563. toe Note These settings are stored in the Global file After changing these settings press WRITE to save them into the Global The Write Global window will appear see The Write window on page 125 Chord Recognition Mode gt GBL This parameter sets how chords are recognized by the auto accompaniment engine Please note that when in Full or Upper Chord Scanning mode the Fingered 3 mode is always selected and you must always play at least three notes to let a chord be recognized Fingered 1 Play one or more notes according to the selected Chord Scanning Mode A full Major chord will be recognized even if only a single note is played You must always play three or more notes for a full chord to be recognized If you play just one note a unison will be played If you play a sus pended 5th a suspended chord will be played The full chord will be recognized when you play three or more notes You must always play three or more notes for a chord to be recognized You can also compose a chord using a simpli fied chord playing technique If you play only one note a Major chord is recognized Play the root note plus a white key on the left for a 7th Ex C3 B2 Play the root note plus a black key on the left for a Minor chord Ex C3 Bb2 Play the root note plus a white and a black key on the left for a Minor 7th Ex C3 B2 Bb
564. track Acc Mute Mute of all Acc tracks Mel Mute Mute of the Song s track 4 usually the Melody track Drum amp Bas Mute of all tracks apart for track 2 usually Bass and 10 usually Drum QuarterT Quarter Tone on off Fx CC12 ae Standard FX controllers Assignable parameters 227 List of functions assignable to the Pads SCALES The following is a list of scales or tunings you can select in Style Play Scale on page 44 and Global Scale on page 125 modes Equal Equal tuning the standard scale for modern Western music It is made of 12 identical semi tones Pure Major Major chords in the selected key are perfectly tuned Pure Minor Minor chords in the selected key are perfected tuned Arabic An arabic scale using quarters of tone Set the Key parameter as follow C for the rast C bayati D scale D for the rast D bayati E scale F for the rast F bayati G scale G for the rast G bayati A scale Ast for the rast Bb bayati C scale Pythagorean Pythagorean scale based on the music theories of the great Greek philosopher and matemati cian It is most suitable for melodies Werckmeister Late Baroque Classic Age scale Very suitable for XVIII Century music Kirnberger Harpsichord scale very common during the XVIII Century Slendro Scale of the Indonesian Gamelan The octave is divided in 5 notes C D F G A The remain ing notes are tuned as
565. trength of the note played on the keyboard will be ignored D Duration Relative duration of the inserted note The percentage is always referred to the step value 1 127 50 Staccato 85 Ordinary articulation 100 Legato Buttons used in Step Record mode TIE button Ties the note to be inserted to the previous note REST button Inserts a rest NOTE VALUE buttons Select the step value START STOP button Exits the Step Record mode lt Previous step Goes to the previous step deleting the inserted step gt gt Fast Forward Goes to the next measure and fill the remaining space with rests 58 Style Record mode Style Record procedure STYLE RECORD PROCEDURE There are two different methods for recording a Style Real time and Step Realtime Recording allows you to record Style patterns in realtime Step Recording allows you to create a new Style by enter ing the single notes or chords in each track This is very useful when transcribing an existing score or needing a higher grade of detail and is particularly suitable to cre ate drum and percussion tracks Preparing to record 1 2 If you like to edit an existing Style select that Style Press RECORD to enter the Style Record mode You are prompted to select either the Current Style or a New Style herd Camps mossurs rameposs mj ppm UU HAS Caii ring Record ES Uurrent St
566. ts the type of notes that specify the LFO speed t Fx 009 Times x1 x16 Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed t Fx 009 L Pre Delay msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the delay time for the left channel va t R Pre Delay msec 0 0 50 0msec Sets the delay time for the right channel LS Depth 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Dez Src Off Tempo 9 Selects the modulation source of the LFO modulation depth Amt 100 100 Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth h EQ Trim 0 100 Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 1 Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0dB Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 t Fx 010 Dic F Src Off Tempo J Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 e L Pre Delay msec f R Pre Delay msec Setting the left and right delay time individually allows you to control the stereo image 186 Effects Pitch Phase Mod 017 Harm Chorus Stereo Harmonic Chorus This effect applies chorus only to higher frequencies This can be used to apply a chorus effect to a bass sound without making the sound
567. ture S2 FX Mode gt GBL This parameter selects the effects mode for Sequencer 2 When a 4 effects Song is loaded all four effects are used independently from this setting AB The A and B effect pair is used Sequencer 2 shares its effects with Sequencer 1 CD The C and D effect pair is used Note When this parameter is set to CD Sequencer 2 shares its effects with the Realtime Keyboard tracks so these effects can be changed either selecting a Song for Sequencer 2 or select ing a Performance unless the Performance FX Mode parameter is set to Off see below Performance FX Mode gt GBL This parameter selects the effects mode for the Performance Off When selecting a Performance no effect is selected CD The Performance selects the C and D effect pair Note When both this parameter and the S2 FX Mode parameter are set to CD Sequencer 2 shares its effects with the Realtime Keyboard tracks so these effects can be changed either selecting a Song for Sequencer 2 or selecting a Performance SAVING A LIST OF SONGS How to save a list of Songs contained in a folder 1 Press SONG PLAY to select the Song Play operative mode 2 Press one of the A S1 VOLUME VALUE button to select the Load Song page 3 Use the F3 Open and F4 Close buttons to browse through the folders inside the card 4 Move the folder you are looking for to the first line of the display Use the TEMPO VALUE controls or the
568. u can t edit any effect parameter These param eters appear greyed out in the display Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again Edit the Song in Song mode to permanently change the effects Here is the edit procedure 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F1 F4 buttons to select a parameter for that track 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the parame ter s value Parameters 000 No effect Only the direct uneffected signal goes to the outputs 127 10096 effect The direct uneffected and effected signals go to the outputs with the same level PAGE 3 MIXER FX SEND C D This page lets you set the level of the track s direct unef fected signal going to the C and D Internal FX processors Note You can access this page only while editing the Sequencer 2 and the S2 FX Mode parameter is set to CD Mode see page 80 Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 chord Compe measure fremeposs CHD gn 888 CU ea oooo Hixer FESend g Ci lga MEDA Ciliga Dieta Chis DaJa Ciliga Dieta Cille MEDA Ciis Dieta Cilea MESA Ciliga Dieta HH e e N e G hord Compo msssars Wanspoee 888 E B j en CU Sa
569. ue No Tempo change will be recorded This is very useful to record the Song much slower than its actual Tempo Manual Q4 Song operating mode Step Record page STEP RECORD PAGE Access this page from the Main page of the Song Record mode by selecting the StepDub or StepOwr recording mode Rec parameter and pressing SEQ1 PLAY STOP Previous event Event to be inserted Cmpa m ssurs frsmspoes gl HBS B can IEU oboo ea Ster Hur E V Current position Step value Waiting for a keystroke a section Previously inserted event You may delete this event and set it in edit again by pressing the button b section Event to be inserted See the following parameters for infor mation on each element of this section M Measure This is the position of the event note rest or chord to be inserted Meter Meter of the current measure This parameter can t be edited You can set a Meter change by using the Insert function of the Edit menu and inserting a new series of measures with a dif ferent Meter see Page 22 Edit Insert Measures on page 101 key This is a prompt asking for a note or chord to be played on the keyboard to enter an event on the current step Step value Length of the event to be inserted Use the NOTE VALUE buttons on the lower left area of the control panel to c
570. uencer 2 each with its own set of transport con trols and Rewind and Fast Forward commands If you use them while the Song is in play they make it scroll back or forward When pressed once these buttons move the Song to the previous or following measure When kept pressed they make the Song scroll ing continuously until you release them In Jukebox mode Sequencer 1 keep the SHIFT button pressed and press these but tons to scroll to the previous or next Song in the Jukebox list see Page 9 Jukebox on page 79 Pauses the Song at the current position Press PAUSE or PLAY STOP to start the Song play ing again PLAY STOP Starts or stops the current Song When you stop the Song the Song Position goes back to measure 1 In Song Play mode pressed while keeping SHIFT pressed starts both sequencers at the same time PAUSE Display and User Interface 19 Display controls 4 DISPLAY AND USER INTERFACE The display shows the current status of the Pa50SD and its performance and editing parameters You can select each parameter by using the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons on the side of the display or each page command appearing Status icons area along the last line using the F1 F4 buttons You can vary many of the parameter s values by pressing the left or right button of any VOLUME VALUE pair
571. uica Hi 4 237 Yeah Off 216 Cuica Lo 4 80 G 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 230 Finger Cymba 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 214 Triangle Mute 5 81 A5 213 Triangle Open 5 230 Finger Cymbal 5 213 Triangle Open 5 213 Triangle Open 5 82 A 5 220 Cabasa Down Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 101 HH Old Open2 Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 83 B5 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 228 Sleigh Bell Off 84 C6 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 231 Marc Tree Off 85 C 6 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 178 CastSingle Off 86 D6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 203 TimbaleLo Mute 6 87 D 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 202 TimbaleLo Open 6 88 E6 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 243 Stadium Off 166 Factory Data Drum Kit instruments 120 0 28 House Kit3 120 0 29 House Kit4 120 0 32 Jazz Kit 120 0 40 Brush Kit1 Note Sample Excl Sample Sample Sample 9 A 1 23 BD Pop Kick Off 23 BD Pop Kick BD House 1 Tom 2 Floor 10 A 1 125 99 SD Off 125 99 SD 99 SD Tom 2 Floor 11 B 1 29 BD Deep 88 Off 29
572. uica Hi O 200 Woodblock1 O 72 C5 48 SD Processed Off 258 GunShot 1 Off 216 Cuica Lo Off 201 Woodblock2 Off 73 C 5 50 SD Dance Off 269 MachineGun Off 208 Timbale Paila Off 225 Cowbell Off 74 D5 52 SD Noise Off 270 Laser gun Off 207 TimbaleHi Rim2 Off 182 MaracasPush Off 75 D 5 62 SD Vintage1 Off 271 Explosion Off 206 TimbaleHi Rim1 Off 227 Mambo Bell Off 76 E5 47 SD Yowie Off 252 Dog Off 202 TimbaleLo Open Off 219 Cabasa Up Off 77 F5 70 SD Chili Off 253 Gallop Off 135 88 Clave Off 217 Shaker1 Off 78 F 5 139 Real El Tom Off 250 Bird 1 Off 136 88 Cowbell Off 225 Cowbell Off 79 G5 125 99 SD Off 259 Rainstick Off 121 FingerSnaps Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 80 G 5 124 88 SD Off 272 Thunder Off 196 Taiko Rim Off 220 Cabasa Down Off continues on the next page 170 Factory Data Drum Kit instruments continued 120 0 50 Bdrum amp Sdrum 120 0 56 SFX Kit 120 0 64 Percus Kit1 120 0 65 Latin P Kit Note Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl Sample Excl 81 A5 124 88 S5D Off 273 Wind Off 195 Taiko Open Off 220 Cabasa Down Off 82 A 5 125 99 5D Off 281 Noise White Off 143 Zap2 Off 334 Tambourin Mute2 Off 83 B5 55 SD Hip 2 Off 274 Stream Off 119 SD Orch Roll 5 333 Tambourin Open 5 84 C6 44 SD BrushTap2 Off 275 Bubble Off 120 SD Orch 5 332 Tambourin Mute 5 85 C
573. ulating FX processor for the Style tracks C Reverb processor for the Realtime Keyboard tracks D Modulating FX processor for the Realtime Keyboard tracks Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Realtime Keyboard tracks to the Style tracks and vice versa Campo usaeurs Cree Ss es B aise oooo Cosme HixeriFAX Send mie Ciba eee lt W Fis RAGA Cica uea M mm oem Ciia pie M Ciga pieta W Cameo measure Husos c E Es OOXOOG ieri FE rna ARE BIGGS Bie Bret Ais Esta Bie Bret I Z A LI Bee Aiga Bee Allee Biete Ab lee Brema E gt ey To select a parameter and edit its value 1 Use the VOLUME VALUE A H buttons to select a track 2 Use the F1 F4 buttons to select one of the effect proces sors 3 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the value Send level PERF gt STYLE STS 000 No effect Only the direct uneffected signal goes to the outputs 127 10096 effect The direct uneffected and effected signals go to the outputs with the same level 44 Style Play operating mode Page 4 Tuning Detune PAGE 4 TUNING DETUNE PAGE 6 TUNING PITCHBEND SENSITIVITY This page is the place where you can set the fine tuning for This page lets you program the Pitch Bend range for
574. ulation ighto A a R NN may Matching the oscillator frequency with a note number will ypec LFO CLFO Shape produce a ring modulation effect in specific key ranges LFO Phase Stereo In Stereo Out tette Wet Di Type Phs Trml Phs LR Trml LR PreiLeF Y Selects the type of the tremolo and phaser LFOs iS gt Ring Modulator x a LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the phase difference between the tremolo and phaser LFOs va Pre LPF i UN Ring Modulator LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz 1 Sets the LFO speed Fx 009 prer Right Wet Dry Src Off Tempo Fixed Frequency Fred Sine Os ilator J iis A gt Selects the modulation source of LFO speed pg a n Amt 20 00 20 00Hz ce aaa Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed BPM MIDI Sync Off On Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the Pre LPF 0 100 tempo and notes Fx 009 jase a Sets the damping amount of the high range input to the ring modulators BPM MIDI 40 240 OSC Mode Fixed Note Key Follow c Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo ts Ex 009 b Switching between specifying the oscillator frequency and using a note Base Note d s 2 Js 2 d d e number vay Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 Fixed Frequency Hz 0 12 00kHz Times X1 X16 Sets the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode is set to Fixed Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed ts Fx 009 Dz Src Off
575. urce page comes back in the display and you may perform further saving operations Saving a single bank You can save a single User bank with a single operation A bank corresponds to a button on the control panel of the instrument i e a button of the STYLE section 1 2 Insert the target card into the card drive The whole content All of the internal memory is already selected Press F3 Open to open the All folder A list of User data types appear each type is a separate folder Caberd Cmpa measure transpose T GD be Tm 88 B8 Cardi Saue CL Io aw It O FERF RHM FRUAN ly tb SAVE OEH CLOSE Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the data type you are looking for to the first line of the display Once the data type is selected press F3 Open to open the folder and gain access to the separate banks msssurs iransposs sempe ji Ga bi a cm SEB E EE Cone oooo 7 Cardi Save p C9 ERa ST pt UEEREG STY USERS STY 4 b SAVE OEH CLOSE Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the bank to save to the first line of the display Once you have selected the bank that you want to save press F2 Save to confirm the selection
576. urchOrg 1 121 0 19 Guitarish 121 8 27 ChurchOcMix 121 1 19 Country Nu 121 1 27 DetunChurch 121 2 19 Stra Chime 121 5 28 ChurchPipes 12 d 19 MuteMonster 121 5 30 Full Pipes 12 7 13 Disto Mute T27 9 28 Reed Organ 2 0 20 FunkyCutGtr 121 1 28 Puff Organ L 20 MuteVeloGtr 121 2 28 Small Pipe E 2 20 FeedbackGtr 121 1 30 Bank Guitar Guitar Pinc 121 1 29 NylonGuitar 121 0 24 Ped Steel 2 121 4 26 Spanish Gtr 121 6 24 PedSteelGtr 121 1 26 SteelGuitar 121 0 25 GtrFeedback 121 1 31 12StringGtr 121 1 25 PowerChords 121 4 30 Club J Gtr1 121 2 26 FunkyWhaSw 121 12 27 CleanGuitar 121 0 27 VoxWahChick 121 3 120 MutedGuitar 121 0 28 EGHarmonics 121 2 31 DistortionG 121 0 30 GtrHarmonic 121 0 31 Nylon Bossa 121 4 24 Sitar 121 0 104 Factory Data 149 Programs bank order Name ccoo CC32 PC Name ccoo CC32 PC Sitar 2 121 1 104 Slow Choir 121 10 52 SitarTambou 121 2 104 Symph Bows 121 10 48 IndianStars 121 3 104 Cyber Choir 121 2 85 Oud 121 2 105 Choir Light 121 12 52 Kanun 121 2 107 Vocalesque 121 2 54 Kanun Trem 121 3 107 Synth Voice 121 0 54 Kanun Mix 121 4 107 Voice Lead 121 0 85 Shamisen 121 0 106 Choir Pad 121 0 91 Koto 121 0 107 Halo Pad 121 0 94 Taisho Koto 121 1 107 FullVox Pad 121 9 91
577. use the G VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Length Length of the selected Note event The value format is the same as the Position value Note If you change a length of 000 00 000 to a different value you can t go back to the original value This rather uncommon zero length value may be found in some drum or percussion tracks Transport navigation and editing controls E F and H VOLUME VALUE buttons These buttons are the Scroll to previous event E F and Scroll to next event H controls They corresponds to the scrolling arrows shown on the screen G VOLUME VALUE buttons Use these buttons to select the corresponding parameter value area 64 Style Record mode Page 5 Event Filter F3 and F4 buttons After selecting the parameter value area with the G VOL UME VALUE buttons use these buttons to select respec tively the first and second value of the event in edit START STOP button Press START STOP and play some chords on the keyboard to test the pattern in edit Press START STOP again to stop the pattern running SHIFT lt lt or gt gt Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the lt lt or gt gt but ton to open the Go to Measure window io to Pene d Ertek Exit Tercel Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a measure then press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort INSERT Press the INSERT button to insert a new event at the current shown Position The default values
578. utomatically begin at the S position and stop at the E position see the following line Note The Auto Punch function will not work on an empty Song At least one track must already be recorded PedalPunch Recording will begin when pressing a pedal set to the Punch In Out function and will finish when pressing the same pedal again Note The Pedal Punch function will not work on an empty Song At least one track must already be recorded StepDub Step Overdub This recording mode lets you enter events one at a time adding events to the existing events StepOwr Step Overwrite This recording mode lets you enter events one at a time overwriting all exist ing events Trk Track Track in record 1 16 One of the 16 tracks selected To select a track go to the Track pages see Tracks 1 8 page on page 89 and Tracks 9 16 page on page 89 S E Start End These parameters appear only when the Auto Punch recording mode is selected They set the starting and ending points of the Punch recording Metro Metronome This is the metronome heard during recording Off No metronome click will be heard during recording A one bar precount will be played before starting recording Song operating mode 93 Song Record page Onl Metronome on with a one bar precount before starting recording On2 Metronome on with a two bar precount before starting recording Resol Resolution Use this parameter to set
579. ve your Song to the first line of the display using the E F Scroll Up and G H Scroll Down VOLUME VALUE buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls Press F3 Open to open it Close the current folder by pressing F4 Close 4 When in the selected folder you can save the Song over an existing midifile a file with a MID extension or create a new midifile To overwrite an existing midifile move it to the first line of the display eTo create a new midifile move the NEW NAME MID item to the first line of the display 5 When the NEW NAME MID item is selected press one of the A VOLUME VALUE buttons You are prompted to assign a name to the new file IE HAE MID Move the cursor using the DOWN and UP buttons Select a character using the DIAL Insert a character at the cursor position by pressing the INSERT button Delete a character at the cursor position by pressing the DELETE button 6 When you have finished writing a name for the new midifile press F2 Save to confirm The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Play Mute status saved with the Song When saving a Song the Play Mute status is saved with the Song This status is preserved when playing back the same Song in Song Play mode Master Transpose saved with the Song When saving a Song the Master Transpose value is saved with the Song Since this value is saved as System Exclusive data it is preserved whe
580. via an LFO 1 0Hz Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Wet Dry 028 AutoFadeMod High Damp z Tum Resonator Hw hala dan Stereo Auto Fade Modulation uror us Resonance 4 This stereo chorus flanger effect enables you to control the Resonator H w LFO speed and effect balance using auto fade and you can Trim m igh Danp le PN spread the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right ight nno LFOs from each other Dz Pitch Fine cent Stereo In Stereo Out Letts D Temi gt Delay T g SK Control Mode Manual LFO D mod gt Feedback Switches the controls of resonance intensity S pgz J Delay Hian Dampi a a LFO D mod Invert Off On Tf i Reverses the Voice 1 and 2 control when LFO D mod is selected Right o Wet Dry ni M LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Cro Tr rSine LFO Shape Sets the LFO speed z gt LFO Fi b i COD D mod Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source that controls resonance intensity Mod Depth 100 100 Sets the amount of resonance intensity control via LFO D mod AUTOFADE Src Off Tempo c Selects the modulation source that starts AutoFade Trim 0 100 tS Fx 027 Dmic Sets the input
581. w Offset dB 40 0dB Gain of the low range trigger signal ve t Mid Offset dB 40 0dB Gain of the mid range trigger signal 1S High Offset dB 40 0dB 9 Gain of the high range trigger signal v Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB Sets the output gain t Fx 003 Desa h Src Off Tempo Selects the modulation source for the output gain Amt 63 463 Sets the modulation amount of the output gain Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Dz i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 e Low Offset dB f Mid Offset dB g High Offset dB These parameters set the gain of the trigger signal For example if you do not want to apply compression to the high range reduce the High Offset value down below the Threshold level In this way the high range limiter will not respond and compression will not be applied 177 178 Effects Filter Dynamic 005 Gate Stereo Gate This effect mutes the input signal if its level is lower than the specified level It also reverses the on and off operation of the gate and uses Note On and Off messages to turn the gate on and off Stereo In Stereo Out Left o 3 Delay gt Gate 7 Envelope Control f 7Dry
582. w to playback a Song Realtime Recording mode ee eeee ee eens Chord Acc Step recording 0 00 e essen eee eee Main Page Backing Sequence Play suus Load Song Pages eee ess ircn he Orbe wed ee eed 84 Save SONG page iigs cents erbwek PG aet enp PER 84 Realtime Recording page eee e eee eee eee ee 85 Chord Acc Step Recording page esses eens 85 How to delete a whole Song 0 eee ee eee eee 87 Song operating mode 88 Transport controls cece eee eee eee eee 88 Master Volume and Sequencer Volume 88 The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format 88 Fast track deletion sssrin nnonser reee eens 88 How to delete a whole Song cece eee eee eee 88 Main page vecci lt fiece timed e deine EP bRMp eres Fa 88 Tracks 1 8 page icon eR chide RI Ev RO 89 Tracks 9 16 page cesses epe eS e res eer en 89 Song Select page 42 cese ec Re rer pEeeE ODE ERR 89 DAVE SONS Pave sees EFFERRI KO E RUE 90 Realtime Record procedure 0 cece eee eee ee es 91 Step Record procedure 0 eee e sestra eens 91 Song Record page ec cece cece eee eee kiistat 93 Step Record page oid dct iin der be ee E E ens 94 MH Lediseki kie kem e CORRER E EET dea ae belie 95 Edit page structure ccc cece eee eect eeeenenees 95 Page 1 Mixer Volume 00 c eee eee eee ees 95 Page 2 Mixer Pans cec decease Rent
583. with the Pa50SD CARD STRUCTURE Each card and the internal memory can contain files and folders The data structure in Pa50SD is slightly more rigor ously determined than in a computer due to the pre config ured data structure inside the instrument s memory The diagram on the right shows the global structure of a Pa50SD card Note Style banks from 1 to 16 Factory Styles can be seen in Card mode only when the Factory Style Protect parameter is set to Off see page 141 and only when loading or saving a sin gle Style bank FILE TYPES The following tables describe all the file and folder types the Pa50SD can manage Here are the files you can read or write on the Pa50SD Extension File folder type SET All the User data This is a folder containing other folders GBL Global Seq1 Seq2 Setup PRF Performance PCG User Program STY User Style The Pa50SD can also read the following common types of data Extension File type MID Midi file Standard MIDI File SMF KAR Karaoke file JBX Jukebox Card Edit environment Loading data created with the Pa80 Pa 0 MYDIR SET GLOBAL Z BANKO1 GBL PERFORM BANKO1 PRF 1 1 Grand Piano 1 8 Full Strings BANKO2 PRF 2 1 Jazz Brass 2 8 Jazz Strings BANK PRF BANK10 PRF 2 1 Rock Brass 2 8 Rock Strings PROGRAM USERO
584. x 067 Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet r ghts 7 Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Envelope Contro etin Dz i Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 a X Exciter Blend 100 100 Amt 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect ts Fx 011 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 b X Emphatic Point 0 70 Sets the frequency range to be emphasized VE Fx 011 c IX EQ Trim 0 100 073 Lim M TapDly Table Sets the EQ input level on page 176 Limiter Multitap Delay X Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Table Sets the gain of Low EQ on page 176 This effect combines a mono type limiter and a multitap Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB delay You can change the order of the effect connection Table Sets the gain of High EQ on page 176 C Sensitivity 1 100 Wet Mono In Mono Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Sets the sensitivity ts Fx 002 Left o A Routing Wet Dry C Attack 1 100 miter E M iitepbelay Table Sets the attack level on page 176 6S Fx 002 Output Level 0 100 Limiter ITN Sets the compressor output level tS Fx 002 ain Adjust High Damp 1 Mt Dly Wet Dry Routing XCT CMP CMP XCT 9 Switches the order of the exciter and compressor connection ERE Wet Dry Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Table Sets the balance
585. x 067 Overdrive Hi Gain Chorus Flanger Routing OD FLNG FLNG OD R Switches the order of the overdrive and chorus flanger connection This effect combines a mono type overdrive high gain dis 6 Fx 067 tortion and a chorus flanger You can change the order of the Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet effect connection Wet Mono In Stereo Out Dry Stereo In Stereo Out Left o Fus 7Dry Routine g __ Overdrive Hi Gain YY Chorus Flanger 3 Band PEQ Driver AANA N Chorus Flanger H Output Level mal 9 9 Output Mode g Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Feedback Wet Invert Drive Cho Fing Wet Dry Nori Table Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 Daz Src Off Tempo Table Selects the modulation source of the effect balance on page 175 Amt 100 100 Table Sets the modulation amount of the effect bal ance on page 175 Right NSUDS CLEGLT TSine i O Drive Mode Overdrive Hi Gain Switches between overdrive and high gain distortion a Drive 1 100 Sets the degree of distortion ts Fx 006 Effects 221 Mono Mono Chain 081 OD HG Phser Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Overdrive Hi Gain Ph aser oe the balance between the effect and dry sounds on page 175 L This effect combines a mono type overdrive high gain dis j se Off Temp
586. y 7 scm Card Saue 1 p HEMLHPHPE SET C LILE SET C ETHICA SET Lk tb SAVE OEH CLOSE aaura Wansposs At this point you can Create a new SET folder see Creating a new SET folder on page 137 e Save onto an existing SET folder saved data is merged with the existing data on the card If you are saving into an existing folder move the desired SET folder to the first line of the display using the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE con trols 10 11 12 Card Edit environment Page 2 Save 137 Press F2 Save to confirm A list of files on the target device appears Only files of the selected type are shown Campa messurs Wanapoae n Hs EH ES stile piy a Cardi Tae C tolli 1 i BestMeu to Ui 2 geat Locations marked with a row of underscores are empty locations Use the E H Scroll buttons or the TEMPO VALUE controls to move the target location to the first line of the display Once the target location is selected press F2 Save to save the file The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm or EXIT to abort Warning If you confirm any data at the target location will be deleted When the operation is completed the
587. y board range to quantize If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percus sive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track Note These parameters are available only when a Drum or Percussion track is selected PAGE 2 EDIT TRANSPOSE In this page you can transpose the selected track s Note After transposing please don t forget to readjust the Original Key Chord parameter in the Style Record page see page 56 Compa measure Semeposs B u xi EE coco Comms Edit Tranzraose E LH CLEC Trek DRUM Us Luge cer ZEBH Gi ceEB ERBn 10 192 EcttomiG 1 Topit After setting the various parameters press ENTER to execute The Are you sure message will appear Press ENTER to confirm EXIT to abort E CV Style Element Chord Variation Non editable These read only parameters show which Style Element and Chord Variation are currently selected for edit ing See the Main page E Style Element and CV Chord Variation parameters on page 55 for information on select ing a different Style Element and Chord Variation Trk Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected apart for tracks set in Drum mode like the Drum and Percussion tracks The whole selected Chord Variation will be transposed Drum Acc5 Single selected track Value Transpose
588. y the internal sequencer even if the Clock parameter is set to External see Clock on page 127 Pa50SD transmits only the MIDI Clock message generated by Sequencer 1 SWITCHING BETWEEN SEQUENCERS DURING EDITING When you enter Edit mode you can edit the selected sequencer s parameters Go to the main page of Song Play mode and select the S1 A buttons or S2 B buttons to select the sequencer you wish to edit see Main page on page 72 SELECTING A SONG COMPOSING ITS PROGRESSIVE NUMBER Each Song on a card up to 9 999 has a progressive number assigned You can see this number before the Song s name in the Song Select page My SOHG MID While in the Main Song Select or Lyrics page the STYLE section doubles as a numeric keypad You can use it for com posing the 4 digit number corresponding to the Song you wish to select the folder selected in the Song Select page will become the current folder This way you can speed up the Song retrieval Selecting a Song in the Song Select page 1 Open the Song Select page 2 Select the card and open the folder containing the Song to be selected This folder will be used also in the Main and Lyrics page 3 Compose the 4 digit number corresponding to the Song you wish to select for example if the Song is number 1043 dial 1 0 4 3 ore Pier AEE After the fourth digit has been inserted the window automatically disappears and the Song is selected
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
Tecumseh VSC5536BNA Performance Data Sheet Caissons libre-service et appareils-chambres Trust Football edition - Nederland BlackBerry Q10 16GB 4G Black Pantalla LED Full HD de 24" (23,6" visibles) Sony FA-EB1AM User's Manual Samsung YP-S2QB Instrukcja obsługi 誤った使用方法によるガステーブル等の火災にご注意を! GBC 4400015 binding cover Small-Transmitter (hol603) User Manual Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file